8 Math - LM U4M11 PDF

8
Mathematics
Learners Module 1
This instructional material was collaboratively developed and

reviewed by educators from public and private schools,
colleges, and/or universities. We encourage teachers and
other education stakeholders to email their feedback,
comments, and recommendations to the Department of
Education at action@deped.gov.ph.
We value your feedback and recommendations.
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
Mathematics Grade 8
Learners Module
First Edition, 2013
ISBN: 978-971-9990-70-3
Republic Act 8293, section 176 indicates that: No copyright shall subsist in
any work of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the
government agency or office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for
exploitation of such work for profit. Such agency or office may among other things,
impose as a condition the payment of royalties.
The borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand
names, trademarks, etc.) included in this book are owned by their respective
copyright holders. The publisher and authors do not represent nor claim ownership
over them.
Published by the Department of Education

Secretary: Br. Armin Luistro FSC
Undersecretary: Dr. Yolanda S. Quijano
Development Team of the Learners Module
Consultant: Maxima J. Acelajado, Ph.D.

Authors: Emmanuel P. Abuzo, Merden L. Bryant, Jem Boy B. Cabrella, Belen P.
Caldez, Melvin M. Callanta, Anastacia Proserfina l. Castro, Alicia R. Halabaso,
Sonia P. Javier, Roger T. Nocom, and Concepcion S. Ternida
Editor: Maxima J. Acelajado, Ph.D.
Reviewers: Leonides Bulalayao, Dave Anthony Galicha, Joel C. Garcia, Roselle
Lazaro, Melita M. Navarro, Maria Theresa O. Redondo, Dianne R. Requiza, and
Mary Jean L. Siapno
Illustrator: Aleneil George T. Aranas
Layout Artist: Darwin M. Concha
Management and Specialists: Lolita M. Andrada, Jose D. Tuguinayo, Jr.,
Elizabeth G. Catao, Maribel S. Perez, and Nicanor M. San Gabriel, Jr.
Department of Education-Instructional Materials Council Secretariat (DepEd-

IMCS)
Office Address: 2nd Floor Dorm G, PSC Complex, Meralco Avenue.
Pasig City, Philippines 1600
Telefax: (02) 634-1054, 634-1072
E-mail Address: imcsetd@yahoo.com
Table of Contents
Unit 1
Module 1: Special Products and Factors .....................................................1

Module Map ........................................................................................................... 2
Pre-Assessment .................................................................................................... 3
Learning Goals ...................................................................................................... 7
Lesson 1: Special Products ................................................................................ 8

Activity 1 ............................................................................................................ 9
Activity 2 ............................................................................................................ 9
Activity 3 .......................................................................................................... 10
Activity 4 .......................................................................................................... 11
Activity 5 .......................................................................................................... 13
Activity 6 .......................................................................................................... 15
Activity 7 .......................................................................................................... 16
Activity 8 .......................................................................................................... 17
Activity 9 .......................................................................................................... 18
Activity 10 ........................................................................................................ 19
Activity 11 ........................................................................................................ 21
Activity 12 ........................................................................................................ 22
Activity 13 ........................................................................................................ 22
Activity 14 ........................................................................................................ 23
Activity 15 ........................................................................................................ 24
Activity 16 ........................................................................................................ 24
Activity 17 ........................................................................................................ 25
Lesson 2: Factoring ........................................................................................... 27

Activity 1 .......................................................................................................... 27
Activity 2 .......................................................................................................... 28
Activity 3 .......................................................................................................... 29
Activity 4 .......................................................................................................... 30
Activity 5 .......................................................................................................... 32
Activity 6 .......................................................................................................... 32
Activity 7 .......................................................................................................... 34
Activity 8 .......................................................................................................... 35
Activity 9 .......................................................................................................... 36
Activity 10 ........................................................................................................ 37
Activity 11 ........................................................................................................ 39
Activity 12 ........................................................................................................ 41
Activity 13 ........................................................................................................ 44
Activity 14 ........................................................................................................ 45
iii
Activity 15 ........................................................................................................ 45
Activity 16 ........................................................................................................ 46
Activity 17 ........................................................................................................ 46
Activity 18 ........................................................................................................ 47
Activity 19 ........................................................................................................ 49
Activity 20 ........................................................................................................ 50
Activity 21 ........................................................................................................ 50
Activity 22 ........................................................................................................ 51
Activity 23 ........................................................................................................ 51
Activity 24 ........................................................................................................ 52
Activity 25 ........................................................................................................ 53
Activity 26 ........................................................................................................ 53
Summary/Synthesis/Generalization ................................................................. 56
Glossary of Terms ............................................................................................. 56
References and Website Links Used in this Module ....................................... 57
Table of Contents
Unit 1
Module 2: Rational Algebraic Expressions and

Algebraic Expressions with Integral Exponents .....................59
Module Map ......................................................................................................... 60
Pre-Assessment .................................................................................................. 61
Learning Goals .................................................................................................... 65
Lesson 1: Rational Algebraic Expressions ...................................................... 66

Activity 1 .......................................................................................................... 66
Activity 2 .......................................................................................................... 67
Activity 3 .......................................................................................................... 68
Activity 4 .......................................................................................................... 68
Activity 5 .......................................................................................................... 69
Activity 6 .......................................................................................................... 70
Activity 7 .......................................................................................................... 70
Activity 8 .......................................................................................................... 71
Activity 9 .......................................................................................................... 72
Activity 10 ........................................................................................................ 73
Activity 11 ........................................................................................................ 74
Activity 12 ........................................................................................................ 74
Activity 13 ........................................................................................................ 75
Activity 14 ........................................................................................................ 76
Activity 15 ........................................................................................................ 76
Activity 16 ........................................................................................................ 77
Activity 17 ........................................................................................................ 79
Activity 18 ........................................................................................................ 79
Activity 19 ........................................................................................................ 82
Activity 20 ........................................................................................................ 84
Lesson 2: Operations on Rational Algebraic Expressions ............................. 86

Activity 1 .......................................................................................................... 86
Activity 2 .......................................................................................................... 87
Activity 3 .......................................................................................................... 87
Activity 4 .......................................................................................................... 88
Activity 5 .......................................................................................................... 90
Activity 6 .......................................................................................................... 90
Activity 7 .......................................................................................................... 91
Activity 8 .......................................................................................................... 92
Activity 9 .......................................................................................................... 93
Activity 10 ........................................................................................................ 93
iii
Activity 11 ........................................................................................................ 95
Activity 12 ........................................................................................................ 97
Activity 13 ........................................................................................................ 98
Activity 14 ........................................................................................................ 99
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 102
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 103
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 103
Activity 18 ...................................................................................................... 106
Activity 19 ...................................................................................................... 106
Activity 20 ...................................................................................................... 107
Activity 21 ...................................................................................................... 108
Summary/Synthesis/Generalization ............................................................... 111
Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................... 111
References and Website Links Used in this Module ..................................... 112
Table of Contents
Unit 2
Module 3: Relations and Functions..........................................................113

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 114
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 115
Lesson 1: Rectangular Coordinate System ................................................... 119

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 119
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 119
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 120
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 124
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 125
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 125
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 126
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 128
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 131
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 133
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 134
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 134
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 135
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 136
Lesson 2: Representations of Relations and Functions ............................... 138

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 138
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 139
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 140
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 141
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 150
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 153
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 155
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 156
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 157
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 160
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 162
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 164
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 165
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 166
Lesson 3: Linear Function and Its Applications ............................................ 168

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 168
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 169
iii
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 170
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 171
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 172
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 175
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 177
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 177
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 186
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 190
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 191
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 191
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 192
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 193
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 193
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 194
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 195
Activity 18 ...................................................................................................... 197
Activity 19 ...................................................................................................... 198
Activity 20 ...................................................................................................... 199
Activity 21 ...................................................................................................... 199
Activity 22 ...................................................................................................... 200
Activity 23 ...................................................................................................... 201
Activity 24 ...................................................................................................... 202
Table of Contents
Unit 2
Module 4: Linear Inequalities in Two Variables.......................................209

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 210
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 211
Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 216
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 217
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 218
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 219
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 220
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 221
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 225
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 226
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 226
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 228
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 230
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 231
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 232
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 233
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 236
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 237
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 238
iii
Table of Contents
Unit 2
Module 5: Systems of Linear Equations and

Inequalities in Two Variables ..................................................243
Module Map ....................................................................................................... 244
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 245
Learning Goals .................................................................................................. 252
Lesson 1: Rational Algebraic Expressions .................................................... 253

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 253
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 254
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 258
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 259
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 260
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 263
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 264
Lesson 2: Solving Systems of Linear Equations in Two Variables .............. 268

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 268
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 270
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 271
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 272
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 278
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 279
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 280
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 280
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 281
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 283
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 284
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 284
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 285
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 286
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 286
Lesson 3: Graphical Solutions of Systems of Linear Inequalities

in Two Variables .............................................................................................. 290
Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 290
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 292
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 295
iii
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 296
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 297
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 299
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 300
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 302
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 302
Table of Contents
Unit 3
Module 6: Reasoning .................................................................................315

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 316
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 317
Lesson 1: If then Statements ....................................................................... 321

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 321
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 322
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 325
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 327
Lesson 2: Inductive and Deductive Reasoning ............................................. 329

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 329
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 330
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 331
Lesson 3: Writing Proofs ................................................................................ 333

Activity ........................................................................................................... 339
iii
Table of Contents
Unit 3
Module 7: How Stable Am I? Triangle Congruence ................................343

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 344
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 345
Lesson 1: Definition of Congruent Triangles ................................................. 349

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 350
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 351
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 354
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 355
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 356
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 358
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 361
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 363
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 364
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 368
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 369
iii
Table of Contents
Unit 3
Module 8: Inequalities in Triangles ..........................................................373

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 374
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 375
Lesson 1: Inequalities in Triangles................................................................. 381

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 381
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 382
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 382
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 390
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 393
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 395
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 400
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 402
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 403
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 405
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 409
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 411
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 412
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 413
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 415
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 416
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 419
Activity 18 ...................................................................................................... 420
Activity 19 ...................................................................................................... 421
Activity 20 ...................................................................................................... 423
Activity 21 ...................................................................................................... 424
Activity 22 ...................................................................................................... 425
Activity 23 ...................................................................................................... 427
Activity 24 ...................................................................................................... 431
Activity 25 ...................................................................................................... 432
iii
Table of Contents
Unit 3
Module 9: Parallelism and Perpendicularity ............................................441

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 442
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 443
Learning Goals .................................................................................................. 448
Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 448
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 449
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 449
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 450
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 451
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 453
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 454
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 455
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 457
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 458
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 460
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 461
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 464
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 468
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 469
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 470
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 471
Activity 18 ...................................................................................................... 472
Activity 19 ...................................................................................................... 472
Activity 20 ...................................................................................................... 473
Activity 21 ...................................................................................................... 474
Activity 22 ...................................................................................................... 474
Activity 23 ...................................................................................................... 476
iii
Table of Contents
Unit 4
Module 10: Measures of Central Tendency and

Measures of Variability ..........................................................485
Module Map ....................................................................................................... 487
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 488
Lesson 1: Measures of Central Tendency of Ungrouped Data ..................... 491

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 491
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 492
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 494
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 496
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 497
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 497
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 499
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 501
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 501
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 502
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 505
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 506
Lesson 2: Measures of Variability .................................................................. 507

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 507
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 509
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 510
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 512
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 513
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 517
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 517
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 519
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 521
Lesson 3: Measures of Central Tendency of Grouped Data ......................... 522

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 522
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 524
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 525
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 534
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 535
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 537
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 538
iii
Lesson 4: Measures of Variability of Grouped Data ...................................... 542
Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 542
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 543
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 547
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 548
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 550
Table of Contents
Unit 4
Module 11: Introduction to Probability ....................................................555

Module Map ....................................................................................................... 556
Pre-Assessment ................................................................................................ 557
Learning Goals .................................................................................................. 561
Lesson 1: Basic Concepts of Probability ....................................................... 562

Activity 1 ........................................................................................................ 562
Activity 2 ........................................................................................................ 563
Activity 3 ........................................................................................................ 654
Activity 4 ........................................................................................................ 566
Activity 5 ........................................................................................................ 567
Activity 6 ........................................................................................................ 570
Activity 7 ........................................................................................................ 570
Activity 8 ........................................................................................................ 572
Activity 9 ........................................................................................................ 573
Activity 10 ...................................................................................................... 576
Activity 11 ...................................................................................................... 577
Activity 12 ...................................................................................................... 577
Activity 13 ...................................................................................................... 578
Activity 14 ...................................................................................................... 579
Activity 15 ...................................................................................................... 580
Activity 16 ...................................................................................................... 581
Activity 17 ...................................................................................................... 583
iii
SPECIAL PRODUCTS
AND FACTORS
I. INTRODUCTION AND FOCUS QUESTIONS
http://frontiernerds.com/metal-box
http://dmciresidences.com/home/2011/01/ http://mazharalticonstruction.blogspot.
cedar-crest-condominiums/ com/2010/04/architectural-drawing.html
Have you at a certain time asked yourself how a basketball court was painted
using the least number of paint? Or how the architect was able to maximize the space
of a building and was able to place all amenities the owners want? Or how a carpenter
was able to create a utility box using minimal materials? Or how some students were
able to multiply polynomial expressions in a least number of time?
This module will help you recognize patterns and techniques in finding products,
and factors, and mathematical as well as real-life problems.
After finishing the module, you should be able to answer the following questions:
a. How can polynomials be used to solve geometric problems?
b. How are products obtained through patterns?
c. How are factors related to products?
II. LESSONS AND COVERAGE

In this module, you will examine the aforementioned questions when you study
the following lessons:
Lesson 1 Special Products

Lesson 2 Factoring
1
In these lessons, you will learn to:
Lesson 1 identify polynomials which are special products through pattern
Special recognition
Products find special products of certain polynomials
apply special products in solving geometric problems
solve problems involving polynomials and their products
Lesson 2 factor completely different types of polynomials
Factoring find factors of products of polynomials
solve problems involving polynomials and their factors.
Module Map
Module Map
Here is a simple map of the lessons that will be covered in this module:
Special Products Factoring
Square of a Binomial Common Monomial Factor
Difference of Two Squares

Square of a Trinomial
Sum and Difference of Two Perfect Square Trinomial

Terms
General Trinomial
Cube of a Binomial
Sum and Difference of Two
Cubes
Grouping
Applications
Find out how much you already know about this module. Write the letter that
corresponds to the best answer on your answer sheet.
2
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
1. Which mathematical statement is correct?
a. (2x y) (3x y) = 6x2 5xy + y2

b. (4x 5) (4x 5) =16x2 40x + 25
c. (3x 4) (2x + 7) = 6x2 13x 28
d. (2x + 5)2 = 4x2 + 20x + 25
2. Which of the following DOES NOT belong to the group?
a. 1 4
x 1
4
b. x2 0.0001y4
c. 8(x 1)3 27
d. (x + 1)4 4x6
3. Which of the following gives a product of x2 + 5x + 4?
a. (x + 1)(x + 4)
b. (x + 2)(x + 2)
c. (x + 5)(x 1)
d. (x + 2)2
4. A polynomial expression is evaluated for the x- and y-values shown in the table
below. Which expression gives the values shown in the third column?
X Y Value of the
Expression
0 0 0
-1 -1 0
1 1 0
1 -1 4

a. x2 y2
b. x2 + 2xy + y2
c. x2 2xy + y2
d. x3 y3
5. Find the missing terms: (x + ___)(3x + ___) = 3x2 + 27x + 24
a. 6, 4
b. 4, 6
c. 8, 3
d. 12, 2
3
6. The length of a box is five meters less than twice the width. The height is 4 meters
more than three times the width. The box has a volume of 520 cubic meters.
Which of the following equations can be used to find the height of the box?
a. W(2L 5) (3H + 4) = 520

b. W(2W + 5) (3W 4) = 520
c. W(2W 5) (3W 4) = 520
d. W(2W 5) (3W + 4) = 520
7. One of the factors of 2a2 + 5a 12 is a + 4. What is the other factor?
a. 2a 3 c. 2a 8
b. 2a + 3 d. 2a + 8
8. The area of a square is 4x2 +12x + 9 square units. Which expression represents
the length of the side?
a. (3x + 2) units c. (4x + 9) units

b. (2x + 3) units d. (4x + 3) units
9. The side of a square is x cm long. The length of a rectangle is 5 cm longer than

the side of the square and the width is 5 cm shorter. Which statement is true?
a. The area of the square is greater than the area of the rectangle.
b. The area of the square is less than the area of the rectangle.
c. The area of the square is equal to the area of the rectangle.
d. Any relationship cannot be determined from the given information.
10. A square piece of land was rewarded by a landlord to his tenant. They agreed that
a portion of it represented by the rectangle inside should be used to construct a
grotto. How large is the area of the land that is available for the other purposes?
2 a. 4x2 9
5 2x
2x 1 b. 4x2 + x + 9
c. 4x2 8x 9
d. 4x2 + 9
2x 1
11. Which value for x will make the largest area of the square with a side of 3x + 2?
3 1
a. 4 c. 3

b. 0.4 d. 0.15
4
12. Which procedure could not be used to solve for the area of the figure below?
2x + 6 x + 8

2x
1
a. A = 2x (2x + 6) + (2x)(x + 8)
2
A = 4x2 + 12x + x2 + 8x
A = 5x2 + 20x
1
b. A = 2x(3x + 14) 2( )(x)(x + 8)
2
A = 6x2 + 28x x2 8x
A = 5x2 + 20x
1
c. A = [2x(2x + 6) + (x + 8)(2x)] 2( )(x)(x + 8)
2
A = [4x2 + 12x) + (2x2 + 16x) (x2 + 8x)
A = 6x2 + 28x x2 8x
A = 5x2 + 20x
1
d. A = 2x(2x + 6) + ( )(2 + x)(x + 8)
2
A = 4x2 + 12x + x2 + 8x
A = 5x2 + 20x
13. Your classmate was asked to square (2x 3), he answered 4x2 9. Is his answer
correct?
a. Yes, because squaring a binomial always produces a binomial product.

b. Yes, because the product rule is correctly applied.
c. No, because squaring a binomial always produces a trinomial product.
d. No, because the answer must be 4x2 + 9
.
14. Let A: 4x2 81, and let B: (2x 9)(2x + 9). If x = 2, which statement is true about
A and B?
a. A > B b. A < B c. A = B d. AB
5
15. Your sister plans to remodel her closet. She hired a carpenter to do the task. What
should your sister do so that the carpenter can accomplish the task according to
what she wants?
a. Show a replica of a closet.

b. Download a picture from the internet.
c. Leave everything to the carpenter.
d. Provide the layout drawn to scale.
16. Which of the following standards would best apply in checking the carpenters
work in item number 15?
a. accuracy of measurements and wise utilization of materials

b. accuracy of measurements and workmanship
c. workmanship and artistic design
d. workmanship and wise utilization of materials
17. The city mayor asked you to prepare a floor plan of the proposed day care center
in your barangay. The center must have a small recreational corner. As head of
the city engineering office, what will you consider in preparing the plan?
a. Feasibility and budget

b. Design and budget
c. Design and Feasibility
d. Budget and lot area
18. Suppose there is a harvest shortage in your farm because of malnourished soil.
What will you do to ensure a bountiful harvest in your farmland?
a. Hire number of workers to spread fertilizers in the farmland.

b. Buy several sacks of fertilizers and use them in your farmland.
c. Find the area of the farmland and buy proportionate number of sacks of
fertilizers.
d. Solve for the number of sacks of fertilizers proportionate to the number of
workers.
19. The Punong Barangay in your place noticed that garbage is not properly disposed
because the garbage bins available are too small. As the chairman of the health
committee, you were tasked to prepare garbage bins which can hold 24 ft3 of
garbage. However, the location where the garbage bins will be placed is limited.
H ow will you maximize the area?
a. Find the dimensions of the planned bin according to the capacity given.
b. Make trial and error bins until the desired volume is achieved.
c. Solve for the volume and use it in creating bins.
d. Find the area of the location of the bins.
6
20. As head of the marketing department of a certain construction firm, you are
tasked to create a new packaging box for the soap products. What criteria will you
consider in creating the box?
a. Appropriateness and the resources used

b. Resources used and uniqueness
c. Appropriateness and uniqueness
d. Appropriateness and capacity
How was your performance in the pretest? Were you able to answer all the
problems? Did you find difficulties in answering them? Are there questions familiar to you?
IV. LEARNING GOALS AND TARGETS

In this module, you will have the following targets:
Demonstrate understanding of the key concepts of special products and factors of

polynomials.
Formulate real-life problems involving special products and factors and solve
these with utmost accuracy using a variety of strategies.
7
Lesson 1 Special
Products
What to
What to Know
Know
Let us start our study of this module by reviewing first the concepts on multiplying
polynomials, which is one of the skills needed in the study of this module. Discuss the
questions below with a partner.
PATTERNS WHERE ARE YOU?
Have you ever looked around and recognized different patterns? Have you asked
yourself what the worlds environment would look like if there were no patterns? Why do you
think there are patterns around us?
Identify the different patterns in each picture. Discuss your observations with a partner.
http://meganvanderpoel.blogspot. http://gointothestory.blcklst.com/2012/02/
com/2012/09/pattern-precedents.html doodling-in-math-spirals-fibonacci-and-being-a-
plant-1-of-3.html
Have you ever used patterns in simplifying mathematical expressions? What advantages
have you gained in doing such? Let us see how patterns are used to simplify mathematical
expressions by doing the activity below. Try to multiply the following numerical expressions.
Can you solve the following numerical expressions mentally?
97 103 =
25 25 =
99 99 99 =
Now, answer the following questions:
1. What do you notice about the given expressions?

2. Did you solve them easily? Did you notice some patterns in finding their answers?
3. What technique/s did you use? What difficulties did you encounter?
The indicated products can be solved easily using different patterns.
8
Are your solutions different from your classmates? What did you use in order to find the
products easily?
The problems you have answered are examples of the many situations where we can
apply knowledge of special products. In this lesson, you will do varied activities which will
help you answer the question, How can unknown quantities in geometric problems
be solved?
Lets begin by answering the I portion of the IRF Worksheet shown below. Fill it up by
writing your initial answer to the topical focus question:
A ctivity 1 IRF WORKSHEET
Description: Below is the IRF worksheet which will determine your prior knowledge about
the topical question.
Direction: Answer the topical questions: (1) What makes a product special? and (2)
What patterns are involved in multiplying algebraic expressions? Write
your answer in the initial part of the IRF worksheet.
IRF Worksheet
Initial Answer
Revised Answer
Final Answer
A ctivity 2
COMPLETE ME!
Description: This activity will help you review multiplication of polynomials, the pre-requisite
skill to complete this module.
Directions: Complete the crossword polynomial by finding the indicated products below.
After completing the puzzle, discuss with a partner the questions that follow.
1 2 3
Across Down
1. (a + 3)(a + 3) 1. (a + 9)(a 9) 4
4. (b + 4a)2 2. (3 + a + b)2
5
5. 2a(-8a + 3a) 3. (3b 4a)(3b 4a)
6. (b 2)(b 4) 5. (-4a + b)(4a + b) 6 7
9. -2a(b + 3 2a) 7. (2 a)(4 a)

11. (5b2 + 7a2)(-5b2 + 7a2) 8. (4a3 5b2)(4a3 + 5b2) 8 9 10
12. (a 6b)(a + 6b) 10. (2a + 6b)(2a 6b) 11 12
9
ES TIO
1. How did you find each indicated product?
?
QU
NS
2. Did you encounter any difficulty in finding the products? Why?
3. What concept did you apply in finding the product?
A ctivity 3
GALLERY WALK
Description: This activity will enable you to review multiplication of polynomials.

Direction: Find the indicated product of the expressions that will be handed to your
group. Post your answers on your group station. Your teacher will give you
time to walk around the classroom and observe the answers of the other
groups. Answer the questions that follow.
CASE 1: CASE 2:
(x + 5)(x 5) = (x + 5)(x + 5) =
(a b)(a + b) = (a b)2 =
Remember: (x + y)(x y) = (x + y)(x + y) =
(x 8)(x + 8) = (x 8)2 =
To multiply polynomials:
a(b + c)
(2x + 5)(2x 5) = (2x + 5)(2x + 5) =
= ab + ac
CASE 3: CASE 4:
(a + b)(c + d)
= ac + ad + bc + bd
(x + 5)3 = (a + b + c)(a + b + c) =
(a b)(a b)(a b) = (x + y + z)(x + y + z) =
(x + y)3 = (m + 2n 3f)2 =
(x + 4)(x + 4)(x + 4) =
(x + 2y)3 =
ES TIO
1. How many terms do the products contain?
?
QU
NS
2. Compare the product with its factors. What is the relationship

between the factors and the terms of their product?
3. Do you see any pattern in the product?
4. How did this pattern help you in finding the product?
10
You just tried finding the indicated products through the use of patterns. Are the
techniques applicable to all multiplication problems? When is it applicable and when is it not?
Let us now find the answers by going over the following section. What you will learn in
the next sections will enable you to do the final project. This involves making a packaging box
using the concepts of special products and factoring.
Let us start by doing the next activity.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand key concepts related to finding
special products. There are special forms of algebraic expressions whose products are
readily seen. These are called special products. There are certain conditions which
would make a polynomial special. Discovering these conditions will help you find the
product of algebraic expressions easily. Let us start in squaring a binomial
The square of a binomial is expressed as (x + y)2 or (x + y)(x + y) and (x y)2 or

(x y)(x y). In your previous grade, you did this by applying the FOIL method, which is
sometimes tedious to do. There is an easier way in finding the desired product and that is what
we will consider here.
A ctivity 4 FOLD TO SQUARE
Description: In this activity, you will model the square of a binomial through paper folding.
Investigate the pattern that can be produced in this activity. This pattern will
help you find the square of a binomial easily. You can do this individually or
with a partner.
Directions: Get a square paper measuring 8 8.
1. Fold the square paper 1 with from an edge and make a crease.
2. Fold the upper right corner by 1 and make a crease.
3. Unfold the paper.
4. Continue the activity by creating another model for squaring a binomial
by changing the measures of the folds to 2 in. and 3 in. Then answer
the questions below.
7 1 x y
Remember:
7
x Area of square = s2
Area of rectangle = lw
1 y
11
ES TIO 1. How many different regions are formed? What geometric figures are
?
QU
NS
formed? Give the dimensions of each region?
2. What is the area of each region?
3. What will be the area if the longer part is replaced by x? by x and 1?
4. What is the sum of the areas? Write the sum of areas in the box
below.
5. If 1 is replaced by y, what will be the area?
FIRST TERM SECOND TERM LAST TERM

(x + 1) 2
(x + 2)2
(x + 3)2
(x + y)2
Did you find any pattern? What pattern is it?
1. How is the first term of the product related to the first term of the given binomial?
2. How is the last term of the product related to the last term of the given binomial?
3. What observation do you have about the middle term of the product and the
product of the first and last terms of the binomial?
Observe the following examples:
a. (x 3)2 = (x)2 3x 3x + (3)2 c. (3x + 4y)2 = (3x)2 + 12xy + 12xy + (4y)2

= x2 2(3x) + 9 = 9x2 + 2(12xy) + 16y2
= x 6x + 9 =
2
9x2 + 24xy + 16y2
b. (x + 5)2 = (x)2 + 5x + 5x + (5)2

= x2 + 2(5x) + 25
= x2 + 10x + 25
Remember:
Product rule Raising a power to a power

(am)(an) = am+n (am)n = amn
12
The square of a binomial consists of:
a. the square of the first term;
b. twice the product of the first and last terms; and
c. the square of the last term.
Remember that the square of a binomial is called a perfect square trinomial.

LETS PRACTICE!
Square the following binomials using the pattern you have just learned.
4
1. (s + 4)2 5. (3z + 2k)2 9. ( kj 6)2
5
2. (w 5)2 6. (5d 7d2t)2 10. [(x + 3) 5]2
3. (e 7)2 (7q2w2 4w2)2

7.
2
4. (2q 4)2 8. ( e 6)2
2

The square of a binomial is just one example of special products. Do the next activity to
discover another type of special product, that is squaring a trinomial.
DISCOVER ME AFTER!
A ctivity 5
(PAPER FOLDING AND CUTTING)
Description: In this activity you will model and discover the pattern on how a trinomial is
squared, that is (a + b + c)2. Investigate and observe the figure that will be
formed.
Directions: Get a 10 10 square paper. Fold the sides 7, 3 and 1 vertically and make
creases. Using the same measures, fold horizontally and make creases.
The resulting figure should be the same as the figure below.
a b c
13
ES TIO 1. How many regions are formed? What are the dimensions of each
?
QU
NS
region in the figure?
2. What are the areas of each region?
3. If the side of the biggest square is replaced by a, how will you
represent its area?
4. If one of the dimensions of the biggest rectangle is replaced by b,
how will you represent its area?
5. If the side of the smaller square is replaced by c, how will you
represent its area?
6. What is the sum of the areas of all regions? Do you observe any
pattern in the sum of their areas?
Observe the following examples and take note of your observation.
a. (x + y + z)2 = x2 + y2 + z2 + 2xy + 2yz + 2xz

b. (m + n d)2 = m2 + n2 + d2 + 2mn 2md 2nd
c. (3d + 2e + f)2 = 9d2 + 4e2 + f2 + 12de + 6df + 4ef
The square of a trinomial consists of:

a. the sum of the squares of the first, second and last terms;
b. twice the product of the first and the second terms;
c. twice the product of the first and the last terms; and
d. twice the product of the second and the last terms.
LETS PRACTICE!
Square the following trinomials using the pattern you have learned.
1. (r t + n)2 6. (15a 4n 6)2

2. (e + 2a + q)2 7. (4a + 4b + 4c)2
3. (m + a y) (m + a y) 8. (9a2 + 4b2 3c2)2
4. (2s + o 4n)2 9. (1.5a2 2.3b + 1)2

3x 4y
5. (2i2 + 3a 5n)2 10. ( + - 6)2
4 3
14
A ctivity 6
TRANSFORMERS
Description: This activity will help us model the product of the sum and difference of two
terms (x y) (x + y) and observe patterns to solve it easily.
Directions: Prepare a square of any measure; label its side as x. Cut a small square of
side y from any of its corner (as shown below). Answer the questions that
follow.
A B
G F
D
E y C
In terms of x and y, answer the following:
1. What is the area of the original big square (ABCD)?
2. What is the area of the small square (GFCE)?
3. How are you going to represent the area of the new figure?
Cut along the broken line as shown and rearrange the pieces to form a
rectangle.
1. What are the dimensions of the rectangle formed?
2. How will you get the area of the rectangle?
3. Represent the area of the rectangle that was formed. Do you see any
pattern in the product of the sum and difference of two terms?
Study the relationship that exists between the product of the sum and
difference of two terms and the factors. Take note of the pattern formed.
a. (x + y)(x y) = x2 y2
d. (w 5)(w + 5) = w2 25
b. (a b)(a + b) = a2 b2
e. (2x 5)(2x +5) = 4x2 25
c. (m + 3)(m 3) = m2 9
The product of the sum and difference of two terms is the difference of the squares
of the terms. In symbols, (x + y)(x y) = x2 y2. Notice that the product is always a
binomial.
LETS PRACTICE!
Multiply the following binomials using the patterns you have learned.
1. (w 6)(w + 6) 3. (4y 5d)(4y + 5d)

2. (a + 4c)(a 4c) 4. (3sd + 4f)(4f 3sd)
15
5 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 2 2
5. (12x 3)(12x + 3) 8. ( ga d )( ga + d)
6 3 6 3
6. (3s2r2 + 7q)(3s2r2 7q) 9. (2snqm + 3d3k) (2snqm 3d3k)
7. (l3o4v5 6e3)(l3o4v5 + 6e3) 10. [(s + 2) 4][(s + 2) + 4]
The previous activity taught you how to find the product of the sum and difference of
two terms using patterns. Perform the next activity to discover another pattern in simplifying
expressions of polynomials.
A ctivity 7
CUBRA CUBE
Description: A cubra cube is a set of cubes and prisms connected by nylon. The task is
to form a bigger cube using all the figures provided. Your teacher will help
you how to form a cubra cube. After performing the activity, answer the
questions that follow.
a
a
a
b
Remember:
a
Volume of a cube = s3 b
Volume of a rectangular b
prism = lwh
ES TIO 1. How many big cubes did you use? Small cubes?
?
QU
NS
2. How many different prisms do you have?

3. How many prisms are contained in the new cube?
4. What is the total volume of the new cube formed?
5. If the side of the big cube is marked as a and the smaller cube is
marked as b, what is the volume of each figure?
6. What will be the total volume of the new cube?
7. What are the dimensions of the new cube?
16
This time let us go back to the Gallery Walk activity and focus on case 3, which is an
example of a cube of binomial (x + y)3 or (x + y)(x + y)(x + y) and (x y)3 or (x y)(x y)
(x y).
To find the cube of a binomial of the form (x + y)3:
a. Find the cube of each term to get the first and the last terms.
(x)3, (y)3
b. The second term is three times the product of the square of the first term and
the second term. 3(x)2(y)
c. The third term is three times the product of the first term and the square of the
second term. 3(x)(y)2
Hence, (x + y)3 = x3 + 3x2y + 3xy2 + y3
To find the cube of a binomial of the form (x y)3:
a. Find the cube of each term to get the first and the last terms.
(x)3, (-y)3
b. The second term is three times the product of the square of the first term and
the second term. 3(x)2(-y)
c. The third term is three times the product of the first term and the square of the
second term. 3(x)(-y)2
Hence, (x y)3 = x3 3x2y + 3xy2 y3
A ctivity 8
IRF WORKSHEET
Description: Using the R portion of the IRF Worksheet, answer the following topical
focus questions: What makes a product special? What patterns are
involved in multiplying algebraic expression?
IRF Worksheet
Initial Answer
Revised Answer
Final Answer
17
WEB BASED ACTIVITY: DRAG AND DROP
Description: Now that you have learned the various special

products, you will now do an interactive activity
which will allow you to drag sets of factors and
drop them beside special products. The activity
is available in this website:
You can visit these websites http://www.media.pearson.com.au/schools/cw/
for more games. au_sch_bull_gm12_1/dnd/2_spec.html.
http://math123xyz.com/
Nav/Algebra/Polynomials_ QUESTIONS:
Products_Practice.php 1. What special products did you use in the activity?
http://worksheets.tutorvista.
com/special-products-of- 2. Name some techniques which you used to make the work
polynomials-worksheet.html# easier.
3. What generalizations can you draw from the examples
shown?
4. Given the time constraint, how could you do the task quickly
and accurately?
A ctivity 9
3-2-1 CHART
Description: In this activity, you will be asked to complete the 3-2-1 Chart regarding the
special products that you have discovered.

3-2-1 Chart
Three things I found out:
1. ________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________________
Two interesting things:
1. ________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________
One question I still have:
1. ________________________________________________________
18
A ctivity 10
WHATS THE WAY? THATS THE WAY!
Description: This activity will test if you have understood the lesson by giving the steps in
simplifying expressions containing special products in your own words.
Directions: Give the different types of special products and write the steps/process of
simplifying them. You may add boxes if necessary.
Video Watching:
You can visit the following
websites to watch different SPECIAL SPECIAL
discussions and activities on PRODUCTS PRODUCTS
special products.
1. http://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=bFtjG45-Udk
(Square of binomial)
______________ ______________
watch?v=
OWu0tH5RC2M
(Sum and difference of ______________ ______________
binomials)
watch?v=PcwXR
HHnV8Y (Cube of a
binomial)
Now that you know the important ideas about how patterns on special products
were used to find the product of a algebraic expressions, lets go deeper by moving on to
the next section.
19
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
20
What to
What to Understand
Understand
You have already learned and identified the different polynomials and their spe-
cial products. You will now take a closer look at some aspects of the topic and check if
you still have misconceptions about special products.
A ctivity 11
DECISION, DECISION, DECISION!
Directions: Help each person decide what to do by applying your knowledge on special
products on each situation.
1. Jem Boy wants to make his 8-meter square pool into a rectangular one
by increasing its length by 2 m and decreasing its width by 2 m. Jem
Boy asked your expertise to help him decide on certain matters.
a. What will be the new dimensions of Jem Boys pool?

b. What will be the new area of Jem Boys pool? What special
product will be used?
c. If the sides of the square pool is unknown, how will you represent
its area?
d. If Jem Boy does not want the area of his pool to decrease, will
he pursue his plan? Explain your answer.
2. Emmanuel wants to tile his rectangular floor. He has two kinds of tiles
to choose from, one of which is larger than the other. Emmanuel hired
your services to help him decide which tile to use.
a. What area will be covered by the 8 x 8 tile? 16 x 16 tile?

b. If the rectangular floor has dimensions of 74 x 128, how many
small square tiles are needed to cover it?
c. How many big square tiles are needed to cover the rectangular
floor?
d. If each small tile costs Php 15.00 and each big tile costs Php 60.00,
which tile should Emmanuel use to economize in tiling his floor?
Explain why.
21
A ctivity 12
AM I STILL IN DISTRESS?
Description: This activity will help you reflect about things that may still confuse you in
this lesson.
Directions: Complete the phrase below and write it on your journal.
The part of the lesson that I still find confusing is __________________

because _________________________________________________.
Let us see if your problem will be solved doing the next activity.
A ctivity 13
BEAUTY IN MY TILE!
Description: See different tile patterns on the flooring of a building and calculate the area
of the region bounded by the broken lines, then answer the questions below.
1.
http://www.apartmenttherapy.com/tile-vault-midcentury-rec-
room-39808
a. What is the area represented by the big square? small square?

rectangles?
b. What is the total area bounded by the region?
c. What special product is present in this tile design?
d. Why do you think the designer of this room designed it as such?
22
2.
a. What is the area represented by the big square? Small square?

b. What is the sum of all areas of small squares?
c. If the small squares were to be removed, how are you going to
represent the area that will be left?
ES TIO 1. What difficulties did you experience in doing the activity?

?
QU
NS
2. How did you use special products in this activity?

3. What new insights did you gain?
4. How can unknown quantities in geometric problems be solved?
A ctivity 14
WHERE IS THE PATTERN?
Descriptions: Take a picture/sketch of a figure that makes use of special products. Paste
it on a piece of paper.
ES TIO
1. Did you find difficulty in looking for patterns where the concept of
?
QU
NS
special products was applied?

2. What special products were applied in your illustration?
3. What realization do you have in this activity?
23
A ctivity 15
LETS DEBATE!
Description: Form a team of four members and debate on the two questions below. The
team that can convince the other teams wins the game.
Which is better to use in finding products, patterns or long
multiplication?
Which will give us more benefit in life, taking the shortcuts or going
the long way?
A ctivity 16
IRF WORKSHEET
Description: Now that you have learned the different special products, using the F
portion of the IRF Worksheet, answer the topical focus question: What
makes a product special? What patterns are involved in multiplying
algebraic expressions?

Initial Answer
Revised Answer
Final Answer
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are ready to do the
tasks in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Let us now apply your learning to reallife situations. You will be given a practical
task which will demonstrate your understanding.
24
A ctivity 17
MAKE A WISH
Description: The concept of squaring binomials is used in the field of Genetics through
PUNNETT squares. PUNNETT SQUARES are used in genetics to model
the possible combinations of parents genes in offspring. In this activity you
will discover how it will be used.
Direction: Investigate how squaring trinomials are applied in PUNNETT squares and
answer the following questions.
S s

One cat carries heterozygous, long-haired
S SS Ss
traits (Ss), and its mate carries heterozygous,
long-haired traits (Ss). To determine the chances
of one of their offsprings having short hair, we
can use PUNNETT squares.
s Ss ss
ES TIO 1. What are the chances that the offspring is a longhaired cat?
?
QU
NS
A shorthaired cat?
2. What are the different possible offsprings of the mates?
3. How many homozygous offsprings will they have? Heterozygous?
4. How is the concept of squaring binomials used in this process?
5. Do you think it is possible to use the process of squaring trinomials
in the field of genetics?
6. Create another model of PUNNET square using a human genetic
component. Explain the possible distribution of offsprings and how
squaring trinomials help you in looking for its solution.
7. Create your own PUNNET square using the concept of squaring
trinomials, using your dream genes.
Punnett square is named after

Reginald C. Punnett, who
Now that you have seen the different devised the approach. It is used
patterns that can be used in simplifying polynomial by biologists to determine the
expressions, you are now ready to move to the next chances of an offspring having a
lesson which is factoring. Observe the different particular genotype. The Punnett
patterns in factoring that are related to special square is a tabular summary of
products so that you can do your final project, the every possible combination of one
maternal allele with one paternal
making of a packaging box.
allele for each gene being studied
in the cross.
25
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
26
Lesson 2
2 Factoring
What to
What toKnow
Know
Your goal in this section is to see the association of products to factors by doing the
activities that follow.

Before you start doing the activities in this lesson, do this challenge first.
The figure below is a square made up of 36 tiles. Rearrange the tiles to create a rectangle,
having the same area as the original square. How many such rectangles can you create? What
do you consider in looking for the other dimensions? What mathematical concepts would you
consider in forming different dimensions? Why? Suppose the length of one side is increased
by unknown quantities (e.g. x) how could you possibly represent the dimensions?
This module will help you break an expression into different factors and answer the
topical questions, What algebraic expressions can be factored? How are patterns
used in finding the factors of algebraic expressions? How can unknown quantities in
geometric problems be solved?

To start with this lesson, perform the activities that follow:
A ctivity 1
LIKE! UNLIKE!
Description: This activity will help gauge how ready you are for this lesson through your
responses.
Directions: Answer all the questions below honestly by pasting the like or unlike thumb
that your teacher will provide you. Like means that you are the one being
referred to and unlike thumb means that you have no or little idea about
what is being asked.
27
SKILLS ACQUIRED RESPONSES
1. Can factor numerical expressions easily
2. Can divide polynomials
3. Can apply the quotient rule of exponents
4. Can add and subtract polynomials
5. Can work with special products
6. Can multiply polynomials
Before you proceed to the next topic, answer first the IRF form to
determine how much you know in this topic and see your progress.
A ctivity 2
IRF WORKSHEETS
Description: Complete the table by filling up first the initial column of the chart with your
answer to each item. This activity will determine how much you know about
this topic and your progress.
Initial Revise Final

Express the following as
product of factors.
1. 4x2 12x =
_________________
2. 9m2 16n2 =
_________________
3. 4a2 + 12a + 9 =
_________________
4. 2x2 + 9x 5 =
_________________
5. 27x3 8y3 =
_________________
6. a3 + 125b3 =
_________________
7. xm + hm xn hn =
_________________
28
MESSAGE FROM THE KING
A ctivity 3
(Product Factor Association)
Description: This activity will give you an idea on how factors are associated with
products. You will match the factors in column A with the products in column
B to decode the secret message.
COLUMN A COLUMN B
1. 4x (3x 5) A. 6x2y2 + 3xy3 3xy2

2. 3xy2(2x + y 1) F. x3 27
3. (x + y)(x y) G. 4x2 9
4. (2x + 3)(2x 3) R. 4x2 + 12x + 9
5. (x 5y)(x + 5y) U. 12x2 20x
6. (x + y)2 E. 6x2 + x 2
7. (2x + 3)
2
T. ac ad + bc bd
8. (x 5y)2 S. mr nr + ms ns
9. (x + 4)(x 3) C. x2 y2
10. (2x 1)(3x +2) I. 2x2 x 10
11. (x + 2)(2x 5) O. x2 10xy + 25y2
12. (x 3)(x2 + 3x + 9) N. x2 + x 12
13. (x + 3)(x2 3x + 9) H. x3 27
14. (a + b)(c d) M. x2 + 2xy + y2
15. (m n)(r + s) L. x2 25y2
16. (3x + 4)(3x 4) P. 9x2 16
17. (3x 4)2 V. 9x2 24x + 16
12 2 3 14 8 7 11 9 4 11 15 14 13 10
7 10 17 10 7 15 10 8 12
6 1 5 14 11 16 5 11 3 2 14 11 8 9
ES TIO 1. What are your observations on the expressions in column A?
?
QU
NS
Compare them with those in column B.

2. Do you see any pattern?
3. Are the two expressions related?
4. Why is it important to know the reverse process of multiplication?
29
What did you discover between the relationship of products and its factors? You
have just tried finding out the relationship between factors and their product. You can use
this idea to do the next activities.
What you will learn in the next session will also enable you to do the final
project which involves model and layout making of a packaging box.
What to
What to Process
Process
The activity that you did in the previous section will help you understand the differ-
ent lessons and activities you will encounter here.
The process of finding the factors of an expression is called factoring, which is

the reverse process of multiplication. A prime number is a number greater than 1 which
has only two positive factors: 1 and itself. Can you give examples of prime numbers? Is
it possible to have a prime that is a polynomial? If so, give examples.
The first type of factoring that you will encounter is Factoring the Greatest Com-
mon Monomial Factor. To understand this let us do some picture analysis.
A ctivity 4
FINDING COMMON
Description: Your task in this activity is to identify common things that are present in the
three pictures.
http://blog.ningin.com/2011/09/04/10-idols-and-groups-pigging-out/ http://k-pop-love.tumblr.com/post/31067024715/
eating-sushi
ES TIO 1. What are the things common to these pictures?

2. Are there things that make them different?
?
QU
NS
3. Can you spot things that are found on one picture but not on the
other two?
4. What are the things common to two pictures but are not found on the
other?
30
The previous activity gave us the idea about the Greatest Common Monomial Factor
that appears in every term of the polynomial. Study the illustrative examples on how factoring
the Greatest Common Monomial Factor is being done.
Factor 12x3y5 20x5y2z
a. Find the greatest common factor of the numerical coefficients.

The GCF of 12 and 20 is 4.
b. Find the variable with the least exponent that appears in each term of the
polynomial.
x and y are both common to all terms and 3 is the smallest exponent for x
and 2 is the smallest exponent of y, thus, x3y2 is the GCF of the variables.
The product of the greatest common factor in (a) and (b) is the GCF of the
c.
polynomial.
Hence, 4x3y2 is the GCF of 12x3y5 20x5y2z.
d. To completely factor the given polynomial, divide the polynomial by its GCF, the
resulting quotient is the other factor.
Thus, the factored form of 12x3y5 20x5y2z is 4x3y2(3y3 5x2z)
Below are other examples of Factoring the Greatest Monomial Factor.
8x2 + 16x 8x is the greatest monomial factor. Divide the polynomial by 8x to

a.
get the other factor.
8x(x + 2) is the factored form of 8x2 + 16x.
b. 12x5y4 16x3y4 + 28x6 4x3 is the greatest monomial factor. Divide the given
expression by the greatest monomial factor to get the other factor.
Thus, 4x3 (3x2y4 4y4 + 7x3) is the factored form of the given expression.
Complete the table to practice this type of factoring.
Polynomial Greatest Common Quotient of Factored

Monomial Factor Polynomial and Form
(CMF) CMF
6m + 8 2 3m + 4 2 (3m + 4)
4mo 2
4mo2 (3m + o)
27d4o5t3a6 18d2o3t6 15d6o4 9d2o2t3a6 6t6 5d4
4(12) + 4(8) 4
12WI N 16WIN + 20WINNER
3 5
31
Now that you have learned how to factor polynomials using their greatest common
factor we can move to the next type of factoring, which is the difference of two squares.
Why do you think it was given such name? To model it, lets try doing the activity that
follows.
A ctivity 5
INVESTIGATION IN THE CLASSROOM
Description: This activity will help you understand the concepts of difference of two
squares and how this pattern is used to solve numerical expressions.
Investigate the number pattern by comparing the products, then write your
generalizations afterwards.
NUMBER PATTERN:
a. (11)(9) = (10 + 1)(10 1) = 100 1 =
b. (5)(3) = (4 + 1)(4 1) = 16 1 =
c. (101)(99) = (100 + 1)(100 1) = 10000 1 =
d. (95)(85) = (90 + 5)(90 5) = 8100 25 =
e. (n 5)(n + 5) =
How do you think the products are obtained? What are the different techniques used to
solve for the products?
What is the relationship of the product to its factor? Have you seen any pattern in this
activity?
For you to have a clearer view of this type of factoring, let us have a paper folding
activity again.
A ctivity 6
INVESTIGATION IN PAPER FOLDING
Description: This activity will help you visualize the pattern of difference of two
squares.
Directions: A B
1. Get a square paper and label the sides as a.
2. Cut out a small square in any of its corner
and label the side of the small square as b. G
3. Cut the remaining figure in half. F
4. Form a rectangle
C
E D
32
ES TIO 1. What is the area of square ABDC?
?
QU
NS 2. What is the area of the cutout square GFDE?

3. What is the area of the new figure formed?
4. What is the dimension of the new figure formed?
5. What pattern can you create in the given activity?
For you to have a better understanding about this lesson, observe how the expressions
below are factored. Observe how each term relates with each other.
a. x2 y2 = (x + y)(x y) d. 16a6 25b2 = (4a3 5b)(4a3 + 5b)

9 1 2 6 3 1 3 3 2 1 3
b. 4x2 36 = (2x + 6)(2x 6) e. ( r4 t n ) = ( r2 + tn )( r tn )
16 25 4 5 4 5
c. a2b4 81 = (ab2 9)(ab2 + 9)
ES TIO 1. What is the first term of each polynomial?
?
QU
NS
2. What is the last term of each polynomial?

3. What is the middle sign of the polynomial?
4. How was the polynomial factored?
5. What pattern is seen in the factors of the difference of two terms?
6. Can all expressions be factored using difference of two squares?
Why or why not?
7. When can you factor expressions using difference of two squares?
Remember the factored form of a polynomial that is a difference of two squares

is the sum and difference of the square roots of the first and last terms.
4x2 36y2 the square root of 4x2 is 2x and the square root of 36y2 is 6y. To
write their factors, write the product of the sum and difference of the square roots
of 4x2 36y2, that is (2x + 6y)(2x 6y).
33
A ctivity 7
PAIR MO KO NYAN!
Description: This game will help you develop your factoring skills by formulating your
problem based on the given expressions. You can integrate other factoring
techniques in creating expressions. Create as many factors as you can.
Directions: Form difference of two squares problems by pairing two squared quantities,
then find their factors. (Hint: You can create expressions that may require
the use of the greatest common monomial factor.)
You have learned from the previous activity how factoring the difference of two
squares is done and what expression is considered as the difference of two squares. You
are now ready to find the factors of the sum or difference of two cubes. To answer this
question, find the indicated product and observe what pattern is evident.
a. (a + b)(a2 ab + b2)
b. (a b)(a2 + ab + b2)
What are the resulting products? How are the terms of the products related to the terms
of the factors? What if the process was reversed and you were asked to find the factors of the
products? How are you going to get the factor? Do you see any common pattern?
34
A ctivity 8
ROAD MAP TO FACTOR
Answer the following problems by using the map as your guide.
Is the given
expression a sum If No
Use other factoring technique/method
or a difference of
two cubes?
1. What are the cube roots of the first and
If last terms?
Yes 2. Write their difference as the first factor.
(x y).
Are the binomials sums or If Difference 3. For the second factor, get the trinomial
differences of two cubes? factor by:
a. Squaring the first term of the first
factor;
If
b. Adding the product of the first and
Sum
second terms of the first factor;
c. Squaring the last term of the first
factor.
1. What are the cube roots of the first and last
4. Write them in factored form.
terms?
(x y)(x2 + xy + y2)
2. Write their sum as the first factor. (x + y).
3. For the second factor, get the trinomial
factor by:
a. Squaring the first term of the first
factor;
b. Subtracting the product of the first
and second terms of the first factor;
c. Squaring the last term of the first
factor.
4. Write them in factored form.
(x + y)(x2 xy + y2)
1. Represent the volume of this figure. What is x

the factored form of the volume of a given
figure?
y
2. What are the volumes of the cubes? If the

cubes are to be joined to create a platform
for a statue, what will be the volume of the
platform? What are the factors of the volume
of the platform?
35
A ctivity 9
Lets tile it up!
Directions: Prepare the following:
1. 4 big squares measuring 4 4 represent each square...

2. 8 rectangular tiles measuring 4 1 represent each square...
3. 16 small squares measuring is 1 1 represent each square...

Form squares using:
1 big square tile, 2 rectangular tiles, and 1 small square.

1 big square tile, 4 rectangular tiles, and 4 small squares.
1 big square tile, 6 rectangular tiles, and 9 small squares.
4 big square tiles, 4 rectangular tiles, and 1 small square.
4 big square tiles, 8 rectangular tiles, and 4 small squares.
ES TIO 1. How will you represent the total area of each figure?
?
QU
NS
2. Using the sides of the tiles, write all the dimensions of the squares.
3. What did you notice about the dimensions of the squares?
4. Did you find any pattern in their dimensions? If yes, what are those?
5. How can unknown quantities in geometric problems be solved?
The polynomials formed are called perfect square trinomials.
A perfect square trinomial is the result of squaring a binomial. A perfect

square trinomial has first and last terms which are perfect squares and a middle
term which is twice the product of the square root of the first and last terms.
36
A ctivity 10
PERFECT HUNT
Directions: Look for the different perfect square trinomials found in the box. Answers
might be written diagonally, horizontally, or vertically.
25x2 10x 81 18x x2 4

15x 16x2 -24x 9 10x 28x
4x2 -16x 16 15x 25 49x2
16x2 49 8x 16 24x2 9
25 14x 8x 40x 30x 10x
7x x2 12x 25x2 40 12x2
To factor perfect square trinomials:
1. Get the square root of the first and last terms.

2. List down the square root as sum/difference of two terms as the case
may be.
You can use the following relationships to factor perfect square trinomials:
(First term)2 + 2(First term)(Last term) + (Last term)2 = (First term + Last term)2
(First term)2 2(First term)(Last term) + (Last term)2 = (First term Last term)2
Remember to factor out first the greatest common monomial factor before
factoring the perfect square trinomial.
Ex. 1. Factor n2 + 16n + 64

Solution:
a. Since n2 = (n)2 and 64 = (8)2, then both the first and last terms are
perfect squares. And 2(n)(8) = 16n, then the given expression is a
perfect square polynomial.
b. The square root of the first term is n and the square root of the last
term is 8. The polynomial is factored as (n + 8)2.
37
Ex. 2. Factor 4r2 12r + 9
Solution:
a. Since 4r2 = (2r)2 and 9 = (3)2, and since (12r) = (-2)(2r)(3) then it
follows the given expression is a perfect square trinomial.
b. The square root of the first term is 2r and the square root of the last
term is 3 so that its factored form is (2r 3)2.
Factor 75t3 + 30t2 + 3t

Ex. 3.
Solution:
a. Notice that 3t is common to all terms, thus, factoring it out first we
have:
3t (25t2 + 10t + 1)
b. Notice that 25t2 = (5t)2 and 1 = (1)2, and 10t = 2(5t)(1), then 25t2 + 10t + 1
is a perfect square trinomial.
c. Factoring 25t2 + 10t + 1 is (5t + 1)2, thus, the factors of the given
expression are 3t (5t + 1)2.
Explain why in Example 3, (5t + 1)2 is not the only factor. What is the effect
of removing 3t?
Exercises
Supply the missing term to make a true statement.
a. m2 + 12m + 36 = (m + ___ )2
b. 16d2 24d + 9 = ( 4d ___)2
c. a4b2 6abc + 9c2 = (a2b ___ ___)2
d. 9n2 + 30nd + 25d2 = (___ __ 5d)2
e. 49g2 84g + 36 = (___ __ ___)2

f. 121c4 + 66c2 + 9 = (___ __ ___)2
g. 25r2 + 40rn + 16n2 = (___ __ ___)2

1 2 1 4
h. x + x+ = (__ __ __)2
16 3 9
i. 18h2 + 12h + 2 = 2 (___ __ ___)2
j. 20f 4 60f 3 + 45f 2 = ___ (2f __ ___)2
Is q2 + q 12 a perfect square trinomial? Why?

Are all trinomials perfect squares? How do we factor trinomials that are not perfect
squares?
In the next activity, you will see how trinomials that are not perfect squares are factored.
38
A ctivity 11
TILE ONCE MORE!!
Description: You will arrange the tiles according to the instructions given to form a polygon
and find its dimensions afterwards.
Directions: 1. Cutout 4 pieces of 3 in by 3 in card board and label each as x2
representing its area.
2. Cutout 8 pieces of rectangular cardboard with dimensions of 3 in by 1
in and label each as x representing its area.
3. Cutout another square measuring 1 in by 1 in and label each as 1 to
represent its area.
Form rectangles using the algebra tiles that you prepared. Use only
tiles that are required in each item below.
a. 1 big square tile, 5 rectangular tiles, and 6 small square tiles

b. 1 big square tile, 6 rectangular tiles, and 8 small square tiles
c. 2 big square tiles, 7 rectangular tiles, and 5 small square tiles
d. 3 big square tiles, 7 rectangular tiles, and 4 small square tiles
e. 4 big square tiles, 7 rectangular tiles, and 3 small square tiles
ES TIO
1. What is the total area of each figure?
?
QU
NS
2. Using the sides of the tiles, write all the dimensions of the rectangles.
3. How did you get the dimensions of the rectangles?
4. Did you find difficulty in getting the dimensions?
Based on the previous activity, how can the unknown quantities in geometric
problems be solved?
If you have noticed, there were two trinomials formed in the preceding activity. The
term with the highest degree has a numerical coefficient greater than 1 or equal to 1 in these
trinomials.
Let us study first how trinomials whose leading coefficient is 1 are being factored.
Ex. Factor p2 + 5p + 6
Solution: a. List all the possible factors of 6.
Factors of 6
2 3
6 1
-2 -3
-6 -1
39
b. Find factors of 6 whose sum is 5.
2+3=5
6+1=7
(-2) + (-3) = -5
(-6) + (-1) = -7
c. Thus, the factor of p2 + 5p + 6 = (p + 2)(p + 3).

Ex. Factor v2 + 4v 21
Solution: a. List all the factors of 21
Factors of - 21
-3 7
-7 3
-21 1
-1 21

b. Find factors of -21 whose sum is 4.
-3 + 7 = 4
-7 + 3 = -4
-21 + 1 = -20
-1 + 20 = 19
c. Hence, the factors of v2 + 4v 21 = (v 3)( v + 7).
Factor 2q3 6q2 36q. Since there is a common monomial factor, begin by factoring out 2q first.
Rewriting it, you have 2q (q2 3q 18).
a. Listing all the factors of 18.

Factors of -18
-1 18
-2 9
-3 6
-18 1
-9 2
-6 3
b. Since 6 and 3 are the factors of 18 whose sum is 3, then the binomial factors
of q2 3q 18 are (q 6)(q + 3).
c. Therefore, the factors of 2q3 6q 36q are 2q(q 6)(q + 3).
40
Remember:
To factor trinomials with 1 as the numerical coefficient of the leading term:

a. factor the leading term of the trinomial and write these factors as the leading
terms of the factors;
b. list down all the factors of the last term;
c. identify which factor pair sums up to the middle term; then
d. write each factor in the pairs as the last term of the binomial factors.
NOTE: Always perform factoring using greatest common monomial factor first
before applying any type of factoring.
A ctivity 12
FACTOR BINGO GAME!
Description: Bingo game is an activity to practice your factoring skills with speed and
accuracy.
Instruction: On a clean sheet of paper, draw a 3 by 3 square grid and mark the center as
FACTOR. Pick 8 different factors from the table below and write them in the
grid. As your teacher reads the trinomial, you will locate its factors and mark
them x. The first one who makes the x pattern wins.
(n + 4)(n 5) (n + 2)(n + 9) (n 8)(n 9) (n + 2)(n + 3)

(n + 4)(n 5) (n + 2)(n + 9) (n 8)(n 9)
(n + 9)(n + 8) (n + 1)(n + 8) (n 8)(n + 4) (n 7)(n 5)

(n + 2)(n + 3) (n + 9)(n + 8) (n + 1)(n + 8)
(n + 6)(n + 4) (n 7)(n + 6) (n 12)(n + 4) (n 8)(n + 6)
(n 8)(n + 4) (n 7)(n 5) (n + 6)(n + 4)
(n + 3)(n + 6) (n 2)(n + 16) (n + 3)(n + 8)
(n + 3)(n + 6) (n 2)(n + 16) (n + 3)(n + 8)
ES TIO
1. How did you factor the trinomials?
?
QU
NS
2. What did you do to factor the trinomials easily?

3. Did you find any difficulty in factoring the trinomials? Why?
4. What are your difficulties? How will you address those difficulties?
41
What if the numerical coefficient of the leading term of the trinomial is not 1, can you still
factor it? Are trinomials of that form factorable? Why?
Trinomials of this form are written on the form ax2 + bx + c, where a and b are the nu-
merical coefficients of the variables and c is the constant term. There are many ways of factor-
ing these types of polynomials, one of which is by inspection.
Trial and error being utilized in factoring this type of trinomials. Here is an example:
Factors of:
6z2
-6
Factor 6z2 5z 6 through trial and error: (3z)(2z) (3)(-2)
Give all the factors of 6z2 and 6
(6z)(z) (-3)(2)

(1)(-6)
( -1)(6)
Write all possible factors using the values above and determine the middle term by
multiplying the factors.
Possible Factors Sum of the product of the outer

terms and the product of the inner
terms
(3z 2)(2z + 3) 9z 4z = 5z
(3z + 3)(2z 2) -6z + 6z = 0
(3z 3)(2z + 2) 6z 6z = 0
(3z + 2)(2z 3) -9z + 4z = -5z
(3z + 1)(2z 6) -18z + 2z = -16z
(3z 6)(2z + 1) 3z 12z = -9z
(6z + 3)(z 2) -12z + 3z = -9z
(6z 2)(z +3) 18z 2z = 16z
(6z 3)(z + 2) 12z 3z = 9z
(6z + 2)(z 3) -18z + 2z = -16z
(6z + 1)(z 6) -36z + z = -35z
(6z 6)(z + 1) 6z 6z = 0
In the given factors, (3z + 2)(2z 3) gives the sum of -5z, thus, making it as the factors
of the trinomial 6z2 5z 36.
How was inspection used in factoring? What do you think is the disadvantage of using
it?
42
Factoring through inspection is a tedious and long process; thus, knowing another way
of factoring trinomials would be very beneficial in studying this module.
Another way of factoring is through grouping or AC method. Closely look at the given
steps and compare them with trial and error.
Factor 6z2 5z 6
1. Find the product of the leading term and the last term.
6z2 5z 6
(6z2)(-6) = -36z2
2. Find the factors of 36z2 whose sum is 5z.

-9z + 4z = -5z
3. Rewrite the trinomial as a four-term expression by replacing the middle term
with the sum of the factors.
6z2 9z + 4z 6
4. Group terms with common factors.
(6z2 9z) + (4z 6)
5. Factor the groups using greatest common monomial factor.
3z (2z 3) + 2(2z 3)
6. Factor out the common binomial factor and write the remaining factor as a
sum or difference of the common monomial factors.
(2z 3)(3z + 2)
Factor 2k2 11k + 12
1. Multiply the first and last terms.

(2k2)(12) = 24k2
2. Find the factors of 24k2 whose sum is -11k.
(-3k) + ( -8k) = -11k
3. Rewrite the trinomial as fourterm expressions by replacing the middle term
by the sum factor.
2k2 3k 8k + 12
4. Group the terms with a common factor.
(2k2 8k) + (-3k + 12)
2k(k 4) 3(k 4)
6. Factor out the common binomial and write the remaining factor as sum or
difference of binomial.
(k 4)(2k 3)
43
Factor 6h2 h 2
1.
Multiply the first and last terms.
(6h2)(-2) = -12h2

Find the factors of 12h2 whose sum is h.
2.
(-4h) + ( 3h) = -h

3.
Rewrite the trinomial as a fourterm expression by replacing the middle
term with the sum of the factors.
6h2 4h 3h 2
4. Group the terms with a common factor.
(6h2 3h) + (-4h 2)
3h(2h 1) 2(2h 1)
6. Factor out the common binomial factor and write the remaining factor as a
sum or difference of the common monomial factors.
(3h 2)(2h 1)
A ctivity 13
WE HAVE!
Description: This game will help you practice your factoring skills through a game.
Instruction: Form a group with 5 members. Your task as a group is to factor the trinomial
that the other group will give. Raise a flaglet and shout We have it! If you
have already factored the trinomial. The first group to get 10 correct answers
wins the game.
ES TIO 1. Do you find difficulty in playing the game? Why?

?
QU
NS
2. What hindered you from finding the factors of the trinomial?

3. What plan do you have to address these difficulties?
Lets extend!!
We can use factoring by grouping technique in finding the factors of a polynomial with
more than three terms.
Lets try factoring 8mt 12at 10mh 15ah
Solution: 1. Group the terms with a common factor.

(8mt 12at) + ( -10mh 15ah)
2. Factor out the greatest common monomial factor in each group.
4t(2m 3a) 5h(2m 3a) Why?
3. Factor out the common binomial factor and write the remaining factor
as a sum or difference of the common monomial factors.
(2m 3a)(4t 5h)
44
Factor 18lv + 6le + 24ov + 8oe
Solution: 1. Group the terms with a common factor.

(18lv + 6le) + (24ov + 8oe) Why?

2. Factor out the greatest common monomial factor in each group.
6l(3v + e) + 8o(3v + 3) Why?
3.
Factor out the common binomial factor and write the remaining factor
as a sum or difference of the common monomial factors.
(3v + e)(6l + 8o)
A ctivity 14
FAMOUS FOUR WORDS
Description: This activity will reveal the most frequently used four-letter word (no letter is
repeated) according to world-English.org through the use of factoring.
Instruction: With your groupmates, factor the following expressions by grouping and
writing a four-letter word using the variable of the factors to reveal the 10
most frequently used four-letter words.
1. 4wt + 2wh + 6it + 3ih

2. 15te 12he + 10ty 8hy
3. hv + av + he + ae
4. 10ti 8ts 15hi + 12hs
5. 88fo + 16ro 99fm 18rm
6. 7s + 35om + 9se + 45oe
7. 42wa + 54wt + 56ha + 72ht
8. 36yu 24ro + 12ou 72yr
9. 72he + 16we + 27hn + 6wh
10. 26wr 91or + 35od 10wd
TEACH ME HOW TO FACTOR

A ctivity 15 (GROUP DISCUSSION /PEER MENTORING)
Description: This activity is intended to clear your queries about factoring with the help of
your groupmates.
Direction: Together with your groupmates, discuss your thoughts and queries regarding
factoring. Figure out the solution to each others questions. You may ask
other groups or your teacher for help.
45
ES TIO 1. What different types of factoring have you encountered?
?
QU
NS
2. What are your difficulties in each factoring technique?
3. Why did you face such difficulties?
4. How are you going to address these difficulties?
A ctivity 16
WITH A BLINK!
Description: This is a flash card drill activity to help you practice your factoring technique
with speed and accuracy.
Instruction: As a group, you will factor the expressions that your teacher will show you.
Each correct answer is given a point. The group with the most number of
points wins the game.
ES TIO
?
1. What techniques did you use to answer the questions?
QU
NS
2. What things did you consider in factoring?

3. Did you find difficulty in the factoring the polynomials? Why?
Now that we have already discussed the different

types of factoring, let us summarize our learning by Web based learning (Video Watching)
completing the graphic organizer below. Instruction: The following video clips contain the
complete discussion of different types of factoring
polynomials.
A. http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/algebra-
A ctivity 17 factoring-2.html
B. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3RJlPvX-
GRAPHIC ORGANIZER 3vg
C. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8c7B-
UaKl0U
D. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-
Description: To summarize the things you have hiGJwMNNsM
learned, as a group, complete the chart

below. You may add boxes if necessary.
FACTORING WEB BASED LEARNING: LETS PLAY!

TECHNIQUES Description: The links are interactive activities which
will enhance your mastery on factoring polynomials.
Perform all the exercises on the different types of
factoring provided in these web sites.
Click the link below.

A. http://www.khanacademy.org/math/algebra/
polynomials/e/factoring_polynomials_1
B. http://www.xpmath.com/forums/arcade.
______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ php?do=play&gameid=93
C. http://www.quia.com/rr/36611.html
D. http://www.coolmath.com/algebra/algebra-
practice-polynomials.html (click only games
for factoring)
example example example example example example example
46
A ctivity 18
IRF REVISIT
Revisit your IRF sheet and revise your answer by filling in column 2.
Initial Revised Final
Express the following as products
of factors.
1. 4x2 12x = ______

2. 9m2 16n2 = ______
3. 4a2 + 12a + 9 = ______
4. 2x2 + 9x 5 = ______
5. 27x3 8y3 = ______
6. a3 + 125b3 = ______
7. xm + hm xn hn = ______
Now that you know the important ideas about this topic, lets go deeper by moving on to
the next section.
A ctivity 19
SPOTTING ERRORS
Description: This activity will check how well you can associate between product and its
factors.
Instructions: Do as directed.

1. Your classmate asserted that x2 4x 12 and 12 4x x2 has the same
factors. Is your classmate correct? Prove by showing your solution.
2. Can the difference of two squares be applicable to 3x3 12x? If yes, how?
If no, why?
3. Your classmate factored x2 + 36 using the difference of two squares. How
will you make him realize that his answer is not correct?
4. Make a generalization for the errors found in the following polynomials.
a. x2 + 4 = (x + 2)(x + 2)
b. 1.6x2 9 = (0.4x 3)(0.4x + 3)
47
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
d s o f ar... __ __________ ________
h a ve learne __________ __________ ______
What
I
_ _ _ _ _ ____ _ _ ______ __________ ____
__ _ _ __ _ _ _ ___ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
48
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at some aspects of the topic and
to correct some misconceptions that might have developed.
The following activities will check your mastery in factoring polynomials.
A ctivity 19
SPOTTING ERRORS
Description: This activity will check how well you can associate the product and with its
factors.
Instructions: Do as directed.

1. Your classmate asserted that x2 4x 12 and 12 4x x2 has the same
factors. Is your classmate correct? Prove by showing your solution.
2. Can the difference of two squares be applicable to 3x3 12x? If yes, how?
If no, why?
3. Your classmate factored x2 + 36 using the difference of two squares. How

will you make him realize that his answer is not correct?
4. Make a generalization for the errors found in the following polynomials.
a. x2 + 4 = (x + 2)(x + 2)
b. 1.6x2 9 = (0.4x 3)(0.4x + 3)
c. 4x2y5 12x3y6 + 2y2 = 2y2 (2x2y3 6x3y4)
d. 3x2 27 is not factorable or prime
5. Are all polynomial expressions factorable? Cite examples to defend your

answer.
49
A ctivity 20
IRF REVISIT
Revisit your IRF sheet and revise your answer by filling in column 3 under FINAL column.
Express the following as
products of factors.
1. 4x2 12x = ___
2. 9m2 16n2 = ___
3. 4a2 + 12a + 9 = ___
4. 2x2 + 9x 5 = ___
5. 27x3 8y3 = ___
6. a3 + 125b3 = ___
7. xm + hm xn hn = ___
ES TIO 1. What have you observed from your answers in the first column? Is
?
QU
NS
there a big difference?

2. What realization have you made with regard to the relationship
between special products and factors?
A ctivity 21
MATHEMAGIC! 2 = 1 POSSIBLE TO ME
Description: This activity will enable you to apply factoring to prove whether 2 = 1.
Instruction: Prove that 2 = 1 by applying your knowledge of factoring. You will need the
guidance of your teacher in doing such.
If a = b, is 2 = 1?

a. Were you able to prove that 2 = 1?
b. What different factoring techniques did you use to arrive at the

solution?
c. What error can you pinpoint to disprove that 2 = 1?
d. What was your realization in this activity?
50
A ctivity 22
JOURNAL WRITING
Description: This activity will enable you to reflect about the topic and activities you
underwent.
Instruction: Reflect on the activities you have done in this lesson by completing the
following statements. Write your answers on your journal notebook.
Reflect on your participation in doing all the activities in this lesson and
complete the following statements:
I learned that I...
I was surprised that I...
I noticed that I...
I discovered that I...
I was pleased that I...
A ctivity 23
LETS SCALE TO DRAW!
Description: In this activity you will draw plane figures to help you do the final project after
this module.
Directions: Using the skills you have acquired in the previous activity, follow your
teachers instruction.
1. Draw the following plane figures:

a. a square with a side which measures 10 cm.
b. a rectangle with a length 3 cm more than its width.
c. any geometric figure whose dimensions are labelled algebraically.
2. A discussion on scale drawing will follow. After the discussion, the

teacher will demonstrate the steps on how to do the following:
a. A tree is five meters tall. Using a scale of 1m:2cm, draw the tree
on paper.
b. The schools flag pole is 10 m high. Using a scale of 2.5m:1dm,
draw a smaller version of the flag pole. Give its height.

3. The teacher will demonstrate how a cube can be made using a square
paper. Follow what your teacher did.
51
A ctivity 24 Model Making
Description: This activity involves the creation of a solid figure out of a given plane figure
and expressing it in terms of factors of a polynomial.
Directions: Create a solid figure from the rectangular figure that was provided by
following the steps given.
1. Cutout 2-in by 2-in squares in all edges of a 12 in by 6 in rectangle.

2. Fold all the sides upward.
3. Paste/tape the edges of the new figure.
ES TIO a. What is the area of the original rectangle if its side is x units?
?
QU
NS
b. If the sides of the small squares is y, what expression represents its

area?
c. How will you express the area of the new figure in terms of the
variables stated in letters a and b?
d. What is the dimension of the new figure formed? How about the
volume of the solid?
e. If the value of x = 4 cm and the value of y = 1 cm, what will be the
dimension of the new figure? Its area? Its volume?
f. How did factoring help you find the dimensions of the new figure
formed? The area? The volume?
g. What did you learn from this activity?
How can unknown quantities in geometric problems be solved?
What new realizations do you have about the topic? What new connections have you
made for yourself?
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are ready to do the tasks in
the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning to real-life situations. You will be
given a practical task which will demonstrate your understanding in special products and
factoring.
52
A ctivity 25 I BRING MY TRASH HOME
Directions: Perform the activity in preparation for your final output in this module.

In response to the schools environmental advocacy, you are required
to make cylindrical containers for your trash. This is in support of the I
BRING MY TRASH HOME! project of your school. You will present your
output to your teacher and it will be graded according to the following
criteria: explanation of the proposal, accuracy of computations, utilization of
the resources, and appropriateness of the models.
A ctivity 26 PACKAGING ACTIVITY
Directions: This activity will showcase your learning in this module. You will assume the
role of a member of a designing team that will present your proposal to a
packaging company.
The RER packaging company is in search for the

best packaging for a new dairy product that they will
introduce to the market. You are a member of the design The first
department of RER Packaging Company. Your company is commercial
tapped to create the best packaging box that will contain paperboard
two identical cylindrical containers with the boxs volume (not
set at 100 in3. The box has an open top. The cover will just corrugated)
be designed in reference to the boxs dimensions. You are box was
to present the design proposal for the box and cylinder to
produced in
the Chief Executive Officer of the dairy company and head
England in
of the RER Packaging department. The design proposal
is evaluated according to the following: explanation of 1817
the proposal, accuracy of computations, utilization of the
resources, and appropriateness of the models.
53
How did you find the performance task? How did the task help you see the real
world application of the topic?
CRITERIA Outstanding Satisfactory Developing Beginning RATING

4 3 2 1
Explanation of Explanations Explanations Explanations Explanations

the Proposal and presentation and and and presentation
(20%) of the layout is presentation presentation of the layout
detailed and clear. of the layout is of the layout is is difficult to
clear. a little difficult understand and
to understand is missing several
but includes components.
critical
components.
Accuracy of The computations The The The
Computations done are accurate computations computations computations
(30%) and show done are done are done are
understanding of accurate erroneous erroneous and
the concepts of and show a and show do not show
special products wise use of some use of wise use of the
and factoring. the concepts the concepts concepts of
There is an of special of special special products
explanation for products and products and and factoring.
every computation factoring. factoring.
made.
Utilization of Resources are Resources are Resources are Resources
Resources efficiently utilized fully utilized utilized but are not utilized
(20%) with less than with less than with a lot of properly.
10% excess. 10%-25% excess.
excess.
The models The models The diagrams The diagrams
Appropriateness are well-crafted are well- and models and models are
of the Model and useful for crafted and are less not useful in
(30%) understanding the useful for useful in understanding
design proposal. understanding understanding the design
They showcase the design the design proposal.
the desired proposal. They proposal
product and are showcase
artistically done. the desired
product.
OVERALL
RATING
54
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
55
SUMMARY/SYNTHESIS/GENERALIZATION:
Now you have already completed this module, lets summarize what you have just
learned. You have learned that product of some polynomials can be obtained using the
different patterns, and these products are called special products. You also learned the
different examples of special products, such as, perfect square trinomials, the difference of
two squares, and the product when you raise a binomial to the third power.
This module also taught you to factor different products through the use of different
patterns and rules. Factoring that you have learned are: (1) Factoring by greatest common
monomial factor, (2) Factoring difference of two squares, (3) Factoring perfect square
trinomials, (4) Factoring general trinomials, (5) Factoring the sum or difference of two cubes,
and (6) Factoring by grouping.
You have learned that the special products and factoring can be applied to solve some
real life problems, as in the case of Punnet squares, packaging box-making, and even on
tiles that can be found around us.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS:
AREA the amount of surface contained in a figure expressed in square units
COMPOSITE FIGURE a figure that is made from two or more geometric figures
FACTOR an exact divisor of a number
GENETICS the area of biological study concerned with heredity and with the variations
between organisms that result from it
GEOMETRY the branch of mathematics that deals with the nature of space and the size,
shape, and other properties of figures as well as the transformations that preserve these
properties
GREATEST COMMON MONOMIAL FACTOR the greatest factor contained in every term
of an algebraic expression
HETEROZYGOUS refers to having two different alleles (group of genes) for a single trait
HOMOZYGOUS refers to having identical alleles (group of genes) for a single trait
PATTERN constitutes a set of numbers or objects in which all the members are related with
each other by a specific rule
PERFECT SQUARE TRINOMIAL result of squaring a binomial
56
PERIMETER the distance around a polygon
POLYNOMIAL a finite sum of terms each of which is a real number or the product of a
numerical factor and one or more variable factors raised to a whole number power.
PRODUCT the answer of multiplication
PUNNETT SQUARE - a diagram that is used to predict an outcome of a particular cross or

breeding experiment used by biologists to determine the chance of an offsprings having a
particular genotype.
SCALE DRAWING a reduced or enlarged drawing whose shape is the same as the actual
object that it represents
VOLUME the measure of space occupied by a solid body
REFERENCES AND WEBSITE LINKS USED IN THIS MODULE:

Oronce, O. & Mendoza, M. (2003). Exploring Mathematics. Rex Book Store. Manila,
Philippines.
Oronce, O. & Mendoza, M. (2007). E Math: Worktext in Mathematics First Year High
School. Rex Book Store. Manila, Philippines.
Gamboa, Job D. (2010). Elementary Algebra. United Eferza Academic Publications. Bagong
Lipa, Batangas City.
Ho, Ju Se T., et al. 21st Century Mathematics: First Year (1996). Quezon City: Phoenix
Publishing House, Inc.,
2010 Secondary Education Curriculum: Teaching Guide for Mathematics II. Bureau of
Secondary Education. Deped Central Office
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Punnett_square
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=u5LaVILWzx8
http://www.khanacademy.org/math/algebra/polynomials/e/factoring_polynomials_1
http://www.xpmath.com/forums/arcade.php?do=play&gameid=93
http://www.quia.com/rr/36611.html
http://www.coolmath.com/algebra/algebra-practice-polynomials.html
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/algebra-factoring-2.html
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3RJlPvX-3vg
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8c7B-UaKl0U
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-hiGJwMNNsM
www.worldenglish.org
http://www.smashingmagazine.com/2009/12/10/how-to-explain-to-clients-that-they-are-
wrong/
57
http://www.mathman.biz/html/sheripyrtocb.html
http://blog.ningin.com/2011/09/04/10-idols-and-groups-pigging-out/
http://k-pop-love.tumblr.com/post/31067024715/eating-sushi
http://www.apartmenttherapy.com/tile-vault-midcentury-rec-room-39808
http://onehouseonecouple.blogzam.com/2012/03/ master-shower-tile-progress/
http://www.oyster.com/las-vegas/hotels/luxor-hotel-and-casino/photos/square-pool-north-
luxor-hotel-casino-v169561/#
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PcwXRHHnV8Y
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bFtjG45-Udk
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OWu0tH5RC2M
http://math123xyz.com/Nav/Algebra/Polynomials_Products_Practice.php
http://worksheets.tutorvista.com/special-products-of-polynomials-worksheet.html#
http://www.media.pearson.com.au/schools/cw/au_sch_bull_gm12_1/dnd/2_spec.html.
http://www.wikisori.org/index.php/Binomial_cube
http://www.kickgasclub.org/?attachment_id949
http://dmciresidences.com/home/2011/01/cedar-crest-condominiums/
http://frontiernerds.com/metal-box
http://mazharalticonstruction.blogspot.com/2010/04/architectural-drawing.html
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cardboard_box
58
RATIONAL ALGEBRAIC
EXPRESSIONS AND
ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
WITH INTEGRAL
EXPONENTS

You have learned special products and factoring polynomials in Module 1. Your
knowledge on these will help you better understand the lessons in this module.
http://www.newroadcontractors.co.uk/wp-content/gal- http://planetforward.ca/blog/top-10-green-building- http://www.waagner-biro.com/images_dynam/

lery/road-construction/dscf1702.jpg trends-part-one/ image_zoomed/korea_small103_01.jpg
Have your ever asked yourself how many people are needed to complete a job?
What are the bases for their wages? And how long can they finish the job? These
questions may be answered using rational algebraic expressions which you will learn in
this module.
After you finished the module, you should be able to answer the following questions:
a. What is a rational algebraic expression?
b. How will you simplify rational algebraic expressions?
c. How will you perform operations on rational algebraic expressions?
d. How will you model raterelated problems?

In this module, you will examine the above mentioned questions when you take the
following lessons:
Lesson 1 Rational Algebraic Expressions
Lesson 2 Operations on Rational Algebraic Expressions
59
Lesson 1 describe and illustrate rational algebraic expressions;
interpret zero and negative exponents;
evaluate algebraic expressions involving integral exponents; and
simplify rational algebraic expressions.
Lesson 2 multiply, divide, add, and subtract rational algebraic expressions;
simplify complex fractions; and
solve problems involving rational algebraic expressions.
Module Map
Module Map
Here is a simple map of the lessons that will be covered in this module.
Rational Algebraic Expressions
Zero and Negative

Exponents
Evaluation Simplification Operations

Complex
of Algebraic of Algebraic on Algebraic
Fractions
Expressions Expressions Expressions
Problem Solving
60
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this module. Write the letter that you think is
the best answer to each question on a sheet of paper. Answer all items. After taking and
checking this short test, take note of the items that you were not able to answer correctly
and look for the right answer as you go through in this module.
1.
Which of the following expressions is a rational algebraic expression?
x
a. c. 4y-2 + z-3
3y
ab
b. 3c
-3
d. b+a
(a + 1)
2. What is the value of a nonzero polynomial raised to 0?
a. constant c. undefined
b. zero d. cannot be determined
3. What will be the result when a and b are replaced by 2 and -1, respectively, in the
expression (-5a-2b)(-2a-3b2)?
27 3
a. c.
16 7
2
b. - 5 d. -
16 7
x-2 1
4. What rational algebraic expression is the same as ?
x1
a. x + 1 c. 1
b. x 1 d. -1
3
5. When x 5 is subtracted from a rational algebraic expression, the result is
-x 10
. What is the other rational algebraic expression?
x2 5x
x 2
a.
c.
4 x
x -2
b. d.
x5 x5
61
a2 9 a2 8a + 16
6. Find the product of a2 + a 20 and 3a 9 .
a a2 a 12
a. a1 c. 3a + 15
a 1
2
a2 1
b. d.
1a a2 a + 1
2
b3
7. What is the simplest form of 2
?
b3
1
2 1
a. c.
5b b1
b + 5 d. 1b
b.
4 3
x2 x+2
8. Perform the indicated operation: .
3 2
x+5 x-6
a. c.
6 6

x+1 -x-10
b. 6 d. 6
9.
The volume of a certain gas will increase as the pressure applied to it decreases.
This relationship can be modelled using the formula:
V1P1
V2 =
P2
where V1 is the initial volume of the gas, P1 is the initial pressure, P2 is the final
pressure, and the V2 is the final volume of the gas. If the initial volume of the gas
1
is 500 ml and the initial pressure is atm, what is the final volume of the gas if
2
the final pressure is 5 atm?

a. 10ml b. 50ml c. 90ml d. 130ml
10. Angelo can complete his school project in x hours. What part of the job can be
completed by Angelo after 3 hours?
x 3
a. x + 3 b. x 3 c. d.
3 x

11. If Maribel (Angelo's groupmate in number 10), can do the project in three hours,
which expression below represents the rate of Angelo and Maribel working
together?
62
a2 1
12. Aaron was asked by his teacher to simplify 2 on the board. He wrote his
a a
solution on the board this way:
a2 1 (a + 1) (a 1)
= =1
a2 a a(a 1)
Did he arrive at the correct answer?
a. Yes. The expressions that he crossed out are all common factors.
b. Yes. The LCD must be eliminated to simplify the expression.

1
c. No. a2 must be cancelled out so that the answer is .
a
d. No. a is not a common factor of the numerator.
x1 1+x
13. Your friend multiplied and . His solution is presented below:
2x 1x
x 1 x + 1 (x 1) (x + 1) x + 1
= =
2 x 1 x (2 x) (1 x) 2 x
Is his solution correct?
a. No. There is no common factor to both numerator and denominator.

b. No. The multiplier must be reciprocated first before multiplying the expres-
sions .
c. No. Common variables must be eliminated.
d. No. Dividing an expression by its multiplicative inverse is not equal to one.
14. Laiza added two rational algebraic expressions and her solution is presented
below.
4x + 3 3x 4 4x + 3 + 3x 4 7x + 1
+ = =
2 3 2+3 5
Is there something wrong in her solution?
a. Yes. Solve first the GCF before adding the rational algebraic expressions.
b. Yes. Cross multiply the numerator of the first expression to the denominator
of the second expression.
c. Yes. She may express first the expressions as similar fractions.
d. Yes. 4x 4 is equal to x
63
15. Your father, a tricycle driver, asked you regarding the best motorcycle to buy. What
will you do to help your father?
a. Look for the fastest motorcycle.

b. Canvass for the cheapest motorcycle.
c. Find an imitated brand of motorcycle.
d. Search for fuel efficient type of motorcycle.
16. The manager of So In Clothesline Corp. asked you, as the Human Resource
Officer, to hire more tailors to meet the production target of the year. What will you
consider in hiring a tailor?
a. Speed and efficiency

b. Speed and accuracy
c. Time consciousness and personality
d. Experience and personality
17. You own 3 hectares of land and you want to mow it for farming. What will you do
to finish it at the very least time?
a. Rent a small mower. c. Do kaingin.

b. Hire 3 efficient laborers. d. Use germicide.
18. Your friend asked you to make a floor plan. As an engineer, what aspects should
you consider in doing the plan?
a. Precision
b. Layout and cost
c. Appropriateness
d. Feasibility
19. Your SK Chairman planned to construct a basketball court. As a contractor, what

will you do to realize the project?
a. Show a budget proposal.

b. Make a budget plan.
c. Present a feasibility study.
d. Give a financial statement.
20. As a contractor in number 19, what is the best action to do in order to complete the
project on or before the deadline but still on the budget plan?
a. All laborers must be trained workers.

b. Rent more equipment and machines.
c. Add more equipment and machines that are cheap.
d. There must be equal number of trained and amateur workers.
64
As you finish this module, you will be able to demonstrate understanding of the
key concepts of rational algebraic expressions and algebraic expressions with integral
exponents. You must be able to present evidences of understanding and mastery of the
competencies of this module. Activities must be accomplished before moving to the next
topic and you must answer the questions and exercises correctly. Review the topic and
ensure that answers are correct before moving to a new topic.
Your target in this module is to formulate real-life problems involving rational

algebraic expressions with integral exponents and solve these problems with
utmost accuracy using variety of strategies. You must present how you perform,
apply, and transfer these concepts to real-life situations.
65
Lesson 1 Rational Algebraic
Expressions
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets begin the lesson by reviewing some of the previous lessons and focusing your
thoughts on the lesson.
A ctivity 1
MATCH IT TO ME
There are verbal phrases below. Look for the mathematical expression in the figures
that corresponds to each verbal phrase.
1. The ratio of a number x and four added to two
2. The product of the square root of three and the number y
3. The square of a added to twice the a
4. The sum of b and two less than the square of b
5. The product of p and q divided by three
6. Onethird of the square of c
7. Ten times a number y increased by six
8. The cube of the number z decreased by nine
9. The cube root of nine less than a number w
10. A number h raised to the fourth power

x 2 2 b2 1
+2 2 pq 9
4 x x (b + 2) w2
3 3y 3y
y
x2 1
3 x2 2x + 1 b2 (b + 2) a2 + 2a w 9
c2
c2
3 2 1
10x + 6 10 z3 9 n3
+4 h4 z3
y
66
ES TIO 1. What did you feel while translating verbal phrases to mathematical
?
QU
NS
expressions?
2. What must be considered in translating verbal phrases to
mathematical phrases?
3. Will you consider these mathematical phrases as polynomial? Why
or why not?
4. How will you describe a polynomial?
The previous activity deals with translating verbal phrases to polynomials. You also
encountered some examples of non-polynomials. Such activity in translating verbal phrases
to polynomials is one of the key concepts in answering word problems.
All polynomials are expressions but not all expressions are polynomials. In this lesson
you will encounter some of these expressions that are not polynomials.
A ctivity 2 HOW FAST
Suppose you are to print a 40-page research paper. You observed that printer A in the
internet shop finished printing it in two minutes.
a. How long do you think can printer A finish 100 pages?
b. How long will it take printer A to finish printing p pages?
c. If printer B can print x pages per minute, how long will printer B take to print p
pages?
ES TIO 1. Can you answer the first question? If yes, how will you answer it? If
?
QU
NS
no, what must you do to answer the question?

2. How will you describe the second and third questions?
3. How will you model the above problem?
Before moving to the lesson, you have to fill in the table on the next page regarding your
ideas on rational algebraic expressions and algebraic expressions with integral exponents.
67
A ctivity 3 KWLH
Write your ideas on the rational algebraic expressions and algebraic expressions with
integral exponents. Answer the unshaded portion of the table and submit it to your teacher.
What I Know What I Want to Find What I Learned How I Can Learn
Out More
You were engaged in some of the concepts in the lesson but there are questions in
your mind. The next section will answer your queries and clarify your thoughts regarding
the lesson.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand the key concepts on rational
algebraic expressions and algebraic expressions with integral exponents.
As the concepts on rational algebraic expressions and algebraic expressions with
integral exponents become clear to you through the succeeding activities, do not forget
to apply these concepts in real-life problems especially to rate-related problems.
MATCH IT TO ME REVISITED
A ctivity 4 (REFER TO ACTIVITY 1)
1. What are the polynomials in the activity Match It to Me? List these polynomials under
set P.
2. Describe these polynomials.
3. In the activity, which are not polynomials? List these non-polynomials under set R.
4. How do these non-polynomials differ from the polynomials?
5. Describe these non-polynomials.
68
A ctivity 5 COMPARE AND CONTRAST
Use your answers in the activity Match It to Me Revisited to complete the graphic
organizer. Compare and contrast. Write the similarities and differences between polynomials
and non-polynomials in the first activity.
POLYNOMIALS NON - POLYNOMIALS
How Alike?
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
How Different?
__________________ In terms of ... __________________

__________________ __________________ __________________
__________________ __________________
__________________
__________________
__________________ __________________
__________________
__________________
__________________ __________________ __________________
__________________
__________________ __________________
__________________ __________________
In the activity Match It to Me, the nonpolynomials are called rational algebraic
expressions. Your observations regarding the difference between polynomials and non
polynomials in activities 4 and 5 are the descriptions of rational expressions. Now, can you
define rational algebraic expressions? Write your own definition about rational algebraic
expressions in the chart on the next page.
69
A ctivity 6
MY DEFINITION CHART
Write your initial definition of rational algebraic expressions in the appropriate box. Your
final definition will be written after some activities.
___________________________ ___________________________
______________________________
My Initial ______________________________
My Final
_______________________________
Definition ______________________________
Definition
______________________________ ______________________________
Try to firm up your own definition regarding the rational algebraic expressions by doing
the next activity.
A ctivity 7
CLASSIFY ME
k Rational Algebraic Not Rational

m+2
3k 6k
2
Expressions Algebraic
0 Expressions
1
a6 1m
y+2 m3
y2
c
a a2 c4
y2 x9 m m
ES TIO 1. How many expressions did you place in the column of rational
?
QU
algebraic expressions?
NS
2. How many expressions did you place under the column of not rational
algebraic expression column?
3. How did you differentiate a rational algebraic expression from a not
rational algebraic expression?
4. Were you able to place each expression in its appropriate column?
5. What difficulty did you encounter in classifying the expressions?
70
In the first few activities, you might have some confusions regarding rational algebraic
expressions. However, this section firmed up your idea regarding rational algebraic
expressions. Now, put into words your final definition of a rational algebraic expression.
A ctivity 8
MY DEFINITION CHART
Write your final definition of rational algebraic expressions in the appropriate box.
_____________________________ _____________________________
______________________________ ______________________________
My Initial My Final
_______________________________ ______________________________
Definition Definition
_______________________________ ______________________________
Compare your initial definition with your final definition of rational algebraic
expressions. Are you clarified with your conclusion by the final definition. How? Give at
least three rational algebraic expressions different from those given by your classmate.
MATH DETECTIVE
Remember: Rational algebraic ex-
pression is a ratio of two
polynomials where the
A rational algebraic expression is a ratio of two polynomials denominator is not equal
to zero. What will happen

P
provided that the denominator is not equal to zero. In symbols: , when the denominator of
Q a fraction becomes zero?
where P and Q are polynomials and Q 0. Clue: Start investigating in
4 4
= 2 4 = (2)(2) = 4
2 1
4 = (1)(4)
In the activities above, you had encountered rational algebraic expressions. You might
encounter some algebraic expressions with negative or zero exponents. In the next activities,
you will define the meaning of algebraic expressions with integral exponents including negative
and zero exponents .
71
RECALL
LAWS OF
EXPONENTS
I Product of Powers
For any real number x, and

any positive integers a and b:
xaxb = xa+b A ctivity 9
II Power of a Power LET THE PATTERN ANSWER IT
For any real number x, and
any positive integers a and b:
(xa)b = xab
III Power of a Product

Complete the table below and observe the pattern.
For any real numbers x and
y, and any positive integer a: A B C A B C A B C A B
(xy)a = xaya
22222 2 5
32 33333 3 5
243 44444 4 5
1,024 xxxxx x5
IV Power of a Quotient
2222 3333 4444 xxxx
For all integers a and b, and
any nonzero number x. 222 333 444 xxx
xa
Case I. = xa-b , where a > b
xba 22 33 44 xx
x 1
Case II. = , where a < b
xb xb-a 2 3 4 x
ES TIO
1. What do you observe as you answer column B?
?
QU
NS
2. What do you observe as you answer column C?

3. What happens to its value when the exponent decreases?
4. In the column B, how is the value in the each cell/box related to its
upper or lower cell/box?
Use your observations in the activity above to complete the table below.
A B A B A B A B
25 32 35 243 45 1,024 x5 xxxxx
24 34 44 x4
23 33 43 x3
22 32 42 x2
2 3 4 x
20 30 40 x0
2-1 3-1 4-1 x-1
2-2 3-2 4-2 x-2
2-3 3-3 4-3 x-3
72
ES TIO 1. What did you observe as you answered column A? column B?
?
QU
NS 2. What happens to the value of the numerical expression when the

exponent decreases?
3. In column A, how is the value in the each cell/box related to its upper
or lower cell/box?
4. What do you observe when the number has zero exponent?
5. When a number is raised to a zero exponent, does it have the same
value as another number raised to zero? Justify your answer.
6. What do you observe about the value of the number raised to a
negative integral exponent?
7. What can you say about an expression with negative integral
exponent?
8. Do you think it is true to all numbers? Cite some examples?
Exercises
Rewrite each item to expressions with positive exponents.
l0
1. b-4 5. de-5f 9. 0
p
c-3 x+y 2
2. -8 6. (x y)0 10. (a b+c)0
d
( (
0
3. w-3z-2 7. a6b8c10
a5b2e8
4. n m o 8.
2 -2
14t0
A ctivity 10
3 2 1 CHART
Complete the chart below.
____________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
3 things
_________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
you found
_____________________________________________________
out
______________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
_______________________________________________
___________________________________________
_______________________________________
2 interesting ____________________________________
_________________________
things
________________________
____________________
________________
_____________
1 question
_________
_____
you still
__
have
73
A ctivity 11
WHO IS RIGHT?
n3
Allan and Gina were asked to simplify -4 . Their solutions are shown below together with
n
their explanation.
Allans Solution Ginas Solution
n3 n3 n3 n4
= n3(-4) = n3+4 = n7 -4 = = n 3
= n7
n-4 n 1 1
n-4
Quotient law was used in I expressed the exponent of the
my solution. denominator as positive integer,
then followed the rules in dividing
polynomials.
Who do you think is right? Write your explanation on a sheet of paper.
You have learned some concepts of rational algebraic expressions as you performed
the previous activities. Now, let us try to use these concepts in a different context.
A ctivity 12
SPEEDY MARS
Mars finished the 15-meter dash within three seconds. Answer the questions below.
RECALL
1. How fast did Mars run?
Speed is the rate of
2. At this rate, how far can Mars run after four seconds? five
moving object as it
transfers from one point to
seconds? six seconds?
another. The speed is the
ratio between the distance
3. How many minutes can Mars run for 50 meters? 55 meters? 60
and time travelled by the
object.
meters?
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
How did you come up with your answer? Justify your answer.
What you just did was evaluating the speed that Mars run. Substituting the value of
the time to your speed, you come up with distance. When you substitute your distance to the
formula of the speed, you get the time. This concept of evaluation is the same with evaluating
algebraic expressions. Try to evaluate the following algebraic expressions in the next activity.
74
A ctivity 13
MY VALUE
Find the value of each expression below by evaluation.
My Value of a Value of b My solution My

Expression Value
Example:
2 a2 + b3 = 22 + 33
3 = 4 + 27 31
= 31
a +b
2 3
3 4
2 4
Example:
a-2 (-2)-2
a-2 = -3
b-3 3
b-3 -2 3 33 27
= 4
(-2)2
27
=
4
a-2
3 2
b-3
a-1b0 3
2
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. What have you observed in the solution of the examples?

2. How did these examples help you find the value of the expression?
3. How did you find the value of the expression?
75
Exercises
Evaluate the following algebraic expressions.
1. 40y-1, y = 5
1
2. m-2(m + 4) , m = -8
(p2 3)-2, p = 1
3.
(x 1)-2
4. (x + 1)-2 , x = 2
5. y-3 y-2, y =2
A ctivity 14 BIN - GO
Make a 3 by 3 bingo card. Choose numbers to be placed in your bingo card from the
numbers below. Your teacher will give an algebraic expression with integral exponents and
the value of its variable. The first student who forms a frame wins the game.

17
1 2 31 1 The frame card must be like
4 -
8 15 this:
2
1 3 37 25
9
4 4
1
1 3 32 2
11
3 2
1
5 0 23 4
5
4 3
1
9 0 126 6
4
5
A ctivity 15 QUIZ CONSTRUCTOR
Be like a quiz constructor. Write on a one-half crosswise piece of paper three algebraic
expressions with integral exponents in at least two variables and decide what values to be
assigned to the variables. Show how to evaluate your algebraic expressions. Your algebraic
expressions must be different from your classmates'.
76
A ctivity 16
CONNECT TO MY EQUIVALENT
Match column A to its equivalent simplest fraction in column B.
A B
5 1
20 3
8 1
12 4
4 3
8 4
5 1
15 2
6 2
8 3
ES TIO 1. How did you find the equivalent fractions in column A?

?
QU
NS
2. Do you think you can apply the same concept in simplifying a rational
algebraic expression?

You might wonder how to answer the last question but the key concept of simplifying
rational algebraic expressions is the concept of reducing a fraction to its simplest form.
Examine and analyze the following examples.
Illustrative example: Simplify the following rational algebraic expressions.

4a + 8b
1. 12
Solution
4a + 8b 4(a + 2b)
? What factoring method is used
12 = in this step?
43
a + 2b
= 3
77
15c3d4e
2. 12c2d5w ? What factoring method is used
in this step?
Solution
15c3d4e 35c2cd4e
12c2d5w = 34c2d4dw
5ce
= 4dw
3. x2 + 3x + 2
x2 1
? What factoring method is used
Solution in this step?
x +23x + 2 = (x + 1)(x + 2)
2
x 1 (x + 1)(x 1)
= x+2
x1
ES TIO Based on the above examples:
?
QU
NS
1. What is the first step in simplifying rational algebraic expressions?

2. What happens to the common factors in the numerator and the
denominator?
Exercises
Web Simplify the following rational algebraic expressions.
Based Booster
click on this web site
below to watch videos
1. y2 + 5x + 4 4. m 2+ 6m + 5
2
in simplifying rational
algebraic expressions
y 3x 4
2
m m2
http://mathvids.com/ 2. -21a b 5.
2 2
x2 5x 14
lesson/mathhelp/845-
rational-expressions-2---
28a b
3 3
x2 + 4x + 4

simplifying
3. x2 9
x 7x + 12
2
78
A ctivity 17 MATCH IT DOWN
Match each rational algebraic expression to its equivalent simplified expression from
choices A to E. Write the rational expression in the appropriate column. If the equivalent is
not among the choices, write it in column F.
a
A. -1 B. 1 C. a + 5 D. 3a D.
3
a2 + 6a + 5 a3 + 2a2 + a 3a2 6a a1
a+1 3a2 + 6a + 3 a2 1a
(3a + 2)(a + 1) 3a3 27a a3 + 125 a8

3a2 + 5a + 2 (a + 3)(a 3) a2 25 -a + 8
18a2 3a 3a 1 3a + 1 a2 + 10a + 25
-1+ 6a 1 3a 1 + 3a a+5
A B C D E F
A ctivity 18
CIRCLE PROCESS
In each circle write the steps in simplifying rational algebraic expressions. You can add
or delete circles if necessary.
In this section, the discussions are introduction to rational algebraic expressions.

How much of your initial ideas are found in the discussion? Which ideas are different and
need revision? Try to move a little further in this topic through the next activities.
79
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
80
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to relate the operations of rational expressions to
real-life problems, especially rate problems.
Work problems are one of the rate-related problems and usually deal with persons or
machines working at different rates or speed. The first step in solving these problems involves
determining how much of the work an individual or machine can do in a given unit of time
called the rate.
Illustrative example:
A. Nimfa can paint the wall in five hours. What part of the wall is painted in three hours?
Solution:
1
Since Nimfa can paint in five hours, then in one hour, she can paint of the wall.
5
1
Her rate of work is of the wall each hour. The rate of work is the part of a task that is
5
completed in 1 unit of time.
1 3
Therefore, in three hours, she will be able to paint 3 = of the wall.
5 5
You can also solve the problem by using a table. Examine the table below.
Rate of work Work done

Time worked
(wall painted per hour) (Wall painted)
1 1
1 hour
5 5
1 2
next 1 hour
5 5
1 3
another next 1 hour
5 5
81
You can also illustrate the problem.
1st hour 2nd hour 3rd hour 4th hour 5th hour
So after three hours, Nimfa

1 1 1 1 1
5 5 5 5 5 only finished painting 3 of
the wall. 5

B. Pipe A can fill a tank in 40 minutes. Pipe B can fill the tank in x minutes. What part of the
tank is filled if either of the pipes is opened in ten minutes?
Solution:
1 1
Pipe A fills
of the tank in 1 minute. Therefore, the rate is of the tank per
40 40
minute. So after 10 minutes,
1 1
10 = of the tank is full.
40 4
1 1
Pipe B fills of the tank in x minutes. Therefore, the rate is of the tank per
x x
minute. So after x minutes,
1 10
10 = of the tank is full.
x x
In summary, the basic equation that is used to solve work problem is:
Rate of work time worked = work done. [r t = w]
A ctivity 19
HOWS FAST 2
Complete the table on the next page and answer questions that follow.

You printed your 40page reaction paper. You observed that printer A in the
internet shop finished printing in two minutes. How long will it take printer A to print 150
pages? How long will it take printer A to print p pages? If printer B can print x pages per
minute, how long will it take to print p pages? The rate of each printer is constant.
82
Printer Pages Time Rate
40 pages 2 minutes
45 pages
Printer A
150 pages
p pages
p pages x ppm
30 pages
Printer B
35 pages
40 pages
ES TIO 1. How did you solve the rate of each printer?

?
QU
NS
2. How did you compute the time of each printer?

3. What will happen if the rate of the printer increases?
4. How do time and number of pages affect the rate of the printer?
The concepts on rational algebraic expressions were used to answer the situation
above. The situation above gives you a picture how these were used in solving rate-related
problems.
What new realizations do you have about the topic? What new connections have
you made for yourself? What questions do you still have? Fill-in the Learned, Affirmed,
and Challenged cards given below.
Learned Affirmed Challenged
What new realizations and What new connections What questions do you
learnings do you have have you made? still have? Which areas
about the topic? Which of your old ideas seem difficult for you?
have been confirmed or Which do you want to
affirmed? explore?
83
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning in real-life situations. You will be
given a practical task which will demonstrate your understanding.
A ctivity 20
HOURS AND PRINTS
The JOB Printing Press has two photocopying machines. P1 can print a box of
bookpaper in three hours while P2 can print a box of bookpaper in 3x + 20 hours.
a. How many boxes of bookpaper are printed by P1 in 10 hours? In 25 hours? in 65
hours?
b. How many boxes of bookpaper can P2 print in 10 hours? in 120x + 160 hours?
in 30x2 + 40x hours?
You will show your output to your teacher. Your work will be graded according to
mathematical reasoning and accuracy.
Rubrics for your output
Outstanding Satisfactory Developing Beginning

CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation Explanation Explanation Explanation
reasoning shows shows shows gaps shows
thorough substantial in reasoning. illogical
reasoning reasoning. reasoning.
and insightful
justifications.
Accuracy All All Most of the Some the
computations computations computations computations
are correct are correct. are correct. are correct.
and shown in
detail.
OVERALL
RATING
84
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
85
Operations on
Lesson 2
2 Rational Algebraic
Expressions
What to
What toKnow
Know
In the first lesson, you learned that a rational algebraic expression is a ratio of two
polynomials where the denominator is not equal to zero. In this lesson, you will be able to
perform operations on rational algebraic expressions. Before moving to the new lesson,
lets review the concepts that you have learned that are essential to this lesson.
In the previous mathematics lesson, your teacher taught you how to add and subtract
fractions. What mathematical concept plays a vital role in adding and subtracting fractions?
You may think of LCD or least common denominator. Now, let us take another perspective in
adding or subtracting fractions. Ancient Egyptians had special rules on fractions. If they have
five loaves for eight persons, they would not divide them immediately by eight instead, they
would use the concept of unit fraction. A unit fraction is a fraction with one as numerator.
2
Egyptian fractions used unit fractions without repetition except . To be able to divide five
3
loaves among eight persons, they had to cut the four loaves into two and the last one would
be cut into eight parts. In short:
5 1 1
= +
8 2 8
A ctivity 1
EGYPTIAN FRACTION
Now, be like an Ancient Egyptian. Give the unit fractions in Ancient Egyptian way.
7 13
1. using two unit fractions. 6. using three unit fractions.
10 12
8 11
15 12
3 31
4 30
11 19
30 20
7 25
12 28
86
ES TIO
1. What did you do in getting the unit fraction?
?
QU
NS 2. How did you feel while getting the unit fractions?

3. What difficulties did you encounter in giving the unit fraction?
4. What would you do to overcome these difficulties?
A ctivity 2
ANTICIPATION GUIDE
There are sets of rational algebraic expressions in the table below. Check the column
Agree if the entry in column I is equivalent to the entry in column II and check the column
Disagree if the entries in the two columns are not equivalent.
I II Agree Disagree
x2 xy x+y
2 x-1 y -1
x y
2
x2 xy
6y 30 3y 15 2y
2
y2 + 2y + 1 y +y y+1
5 7 15 + 14x
+
4x2 6x 12x2
a b a+b

ba ab ba
a+b b

b a+b
a2
1 2 a+b
+
b a
A ctivity 3
PICTURE ANALYSIS
Take a closer look at this picture. Describe what you see.
http://www.portlandground.com/archives/2004/05/volun-
teers_buil_1.php
87
ES TIO 1. What would happen if one of the men in the picture would not do his
?
QU
NS
job?
2. What will happen when there are more people working together?
3. How does the rate of each worker affect the entire work?
4. How will you model the rate-related problem?
The picture shows how the operations on rational algebraic expressions can be
applied to real-life scenario. Youll get to learn more rate-related problems and how
operations on rational algebraic expressions relate to them.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand key concepts on the operations
on rational algebraic expressions.
As these become clear to you through the succeeding activities, do not forget to
think about how to apply these concepts in solving real-life problems especially rate-
related problems.
REVIEW
Perform the operation on the A ctivity 4 MULTIPLYING RATIONAL
following fractions.
ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
1 4 1 3
1. 4.
2 3 4 2
3 2 1 2
Examine and analyze the illustrative examples below. Pause once
2. 5.
4 3 6 9 in a while to answer the checkup questions.
8 33
3.
11 40
The product of two rational expressions is the product of the numerators divided by
the product of the denominators. In symbols,
a c ac
= , bd 0
b d bd
5t 4
Illustrative example 1: Find the product of and 2 .
8 3t
5t 4 5t 22
2 = 3 2
8 3t 2 3t Express the numerators and
(5)(t)(22) denominators into prime
= 2
(2 )(2)(3t)t factors if possible.

88
5
=
(2)(3t) Simplify rational expressions
5 using laws of exponents.
=
6t
4x 3x2y2
Illustrative example 2: Multiply and .
3y 10
4x 3x2y2 (22)x 3x2y2
=
3y 10 3y (2)(5)
(2)(2)(x)(3)(x2)(y)(y)
=
(3)(y)(2)(5)
(2)(x3)(y)
=
(5) ? What laws of exponents were
used in these steps?
2x3y
=
5
x5 4x2 + 12x + 9
Illustrative example 3: What is the product of and ?
4x 9
2
2x2 11x + 5
x5 4x2 + 12x + 9 x5 (2x + 3)2
=
4x 9 2x2 11x + 5
2
(2x 3)(2x + 3) (2x 1)(x 5)
(x 5)(2x + 3)(2x + 3) ? What factoring
methods were
=
(2x 3)(2x + 3) (2x 1)(x 5) used in this
2x + 3 step?
=
(2x 3)(2x 1)
2x + 3
=
4x2 8x + 4
? What are the rational algebraic
expressions equivalent to 1 in
this step?
ES TIO 1. What are the steps in multiplying rational algebraic expressions?

?
QU
NS
2. What do you observe from each step in multiplying rational algebraic

expressions?
Exercises
Find the product of the following rational algebraic expressions.
10uv2 6x2y2 x2 + 2x + 1 y2 1
1. 3xy2 5u v
2 2 4. y2 2y + 1 x2 1
a2 b2 a2 a2 2ab + b2 a 1
2. 2ab ab 5. a2 1 a b
x2 3x x2 4
3. x2 + 3x 10 x2 x 6

89
A ctivity 5
WHATS MY AREA?
Find the area of the plane figures below.
a. b. c.
ES TIO
?
1. How did you find the area of the figures?
QU
NS
2. What are your steps in finding the area of the figures?
A ctivity 6
THE CIRCLE ARROW PROCESS
Based on the steps that you made in the previous activity, make a conceptual map on the
steps in multiplying rational algebraic expressions. Write the procedure and other important
concepts in every step inside the circle. If necessary, add a new circle.
Step 1
Web based
Booster: Step 2
Watch the videos in this
websites for more ex-
amples. http://www.on- Step 3
linemathlearning.com/
multiplying-rational-ex- Step 4
pressions-help.html
Final Step
ES TIO 1. Does every step have a mathematical concept involved?
?
QU
NS
2. What makes that mathematical concept important to every step?

3. Can the mathematical concepts used in every step be interchanged?
How?
4. Can you give another method in multiplying rational algebraic
expressions?
90
REVIEW
A ctivity 7
DIVIDING RATIONAL ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS Perform the operation of
the following fractions.
1 3 10 5
1. 4.
2 4 16 4
5 9 1 1
2. 5.
2 4 2 4
Examine and analyze the illustrative examples below. Pause once in 3.
9

3
2 4
a while to answer the checkup questions.
The quotient of two rational algebraic expressions is the product of the dividend and
the reciprocal of the divisor. In symbols,
a c a d ad
= = , b, c, d 0
b d b c bc
6ab 9a b
2 2 2
Illustrative example 4: Find the quotient of 4cd and 8dc2 .
6ab2 9a2b2 6ab2 8dc2

2 = 2 2 Multiply the dividend by the
4cd 8dc 4cd 9a b
reciprocal of the divisor.
(2)(3)ab2 (23)dc2
=
(2)2cd (32)a2b2
(22)(22)(3)ab2dcc
= Perform the steps in multiplying
(22)(3)(3)cdaab2
rational algebraic expressions.
(2)2c
=
(3)a
4c
=
3a
2x2 + x 6 x2 2x 8
Illustrative example 5: Divide by 2 .
2x + 7x + 5
2
2x 3x 20
2x2 + x 6 x2 2x 8

2x2 + 7x + 5 2x2 3x 20
? Why do we need to factor
out the numerators and
2x2 + x 6 2x2 3x 20 denominators?
= 2
2x2 + 7x + 5 x 2x 8
(2x 3)(x + 2) (x 4)(2x + 5)
=
(2x + 5)(x + 1) (x + 2)(x 4)
=
(2x 3)(x + 2)(x 4)(2x + 5) ? What happens to the common
(2x + 5)(x + 1)(x + 2) (x 4) factors between numerator
and denominator?
(2x 3)
=
(x + 1)
2x 3
=
x+1
91
Exercises
Find the quotient of the following rational algebraic expressions.
81xz3 27x2z2 x2 + 2x + 1 x2 1
1. 36y 12xy 4.
x + 4x + 3 x + 2x + 1
2 2
2a + 2b 4 x1 1x
2. a2 + ab a 5. x + 1 x2 + 2x + 1
16x2 9 16x2 + 24x + 9
3. 6 5x 4x2
4x2 + 11x + 6
A ctivity 8
MISSING DIMENSION
Find the missing length of the figures.
2x + 20
The area of the rectangle is x 100 while the length is
2
1. . Find the height
8 20
of the rectangle.
21 x2
2. The base of the triangle is and the area is . Find the height of the
3x 21 35
triangle.
ES TIO 1. How did you find the missing dimension of the figures?
?
QU
NS
2. Enumerate the steps in solving the problems.
92
Web
A ctivity 9 Based Booster
CHAIN REACTION Click on this website
below to watch videos
in dividing rational
Use the Chain Reaction Chart to sequence your steps in dividing algebraic expressions
rational algebraic expressions. Write the process or mathematical concepts h t t p : / / w w w .
used in each step in the chamber. Add another chamber, if necessary. onlinemathlearning.
com/dividing-rational-
expressions-help.html
Chamber Chamber Chamber Chamber

1 2 3 4
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________

_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
ES TIO 1. Does every step have a mathematical concept involved?

?
QU
NS
2. What makes that mathematical concept important to every step?

3. Can mathematical concept in every step be interchanged? How?
4. Can you make another method in dividing rational algebraic
expressions? How?
A ctivity 10 ADDING AND SUBTRACTING SIMILAR

RATIONAL ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
REVIEW
Examine and analyze the following illustrative examples on the Perform the operation on the
next page. Answer the check-up questions. following fractions.
1 3 10 5
1. + 4.
In adding or subtracting similar rational expressions, add or 2 2 13 13
5 9 5 1
subtract the numerators and write the answer in the numerator of the 2.
4
+
4
5.
4 4
result over the common denominator. In symbols, 3.
9
+
3
5 5
a c a+c
+ = ,b0
b b b
93
x2 2x 7 3x + 1
Illustrative example 6: Add and .
x2 9 x2 9
x2 2x 7 3x + 1 x2 2x + 3x 7 + 1

+ = x2 9
x2 9 x2 9
x2 + x 6
= Combine like terms in the
x2 9
numerator.
(x + 3)(x 2)
= (x 3)(x + 3)

(x 2) Factor out the numerator
= (x + 3) and denominator.
x2
= x + 3 ? Do we always factor out the
numerator and denominator?
Explain your answer.
-10 6x 5x2 x2 + 5x 20
Illustrative example 7: Subtract 3x2 + x 2 from 3x2 + x 2 .
x2 + 5x2 20 -10 6x 5x2 x2 + 5x2 20 (-10 6x 5x2)

3x + x 2
2 3x + x 3
2 = 3x2 + x 2
x2 + 5x 20 + 10 + 6x + 5x2
= 3x2 + x 2
? Why do we need to
multiply the subtrahend
x + 5x + 5x + 6x 20 + 10
2 2
= 3x2 + x 2 by 1 in the numerator?
6x2 + 11x 10
= 3x2 + x 2
(3x 2)(2x + 5)
= (3x 2)(x + 1)
Factor out the numerator
2x + 5 and denominator.
= x + 1
Exercises
Perform the indicated operation. Express your answer in simplest form.
6 4 x2 + 3x + 2 3x + 3
1. + 4. 2 2
a5 a 5 x 2x + 1 x 2x + 1

x + 3x 2
2
x 2x + 4
2
x2 x2
2. + 5. +
x2 4 x2 4 x1 x1
7 5
3.
4x 1 4x 1
94
A ctivity 11 ADDING AND SUBTRACTING DISSIMILAR
RATIONAL ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
REVIEW
Examine and analyze the following illustrative examples below.
Answer the checkup questions. Perform the operation on the
1 4 1 3
1. + 4.
In adding or subtracting dissimilar rational expressions, change 2 3 4 2
3 2 1 2
the rational algebraic expressions into similar rational algebraic 2.
4
+
3
5.
6

9
expressions using the least common denominator or LCD and 3.
3
+
1
4 8
proceed as in adding similar fractions.

5 2
Illustrative example 8: Find the sum of and .
18a4b 27a3b2c
5 2 5 2
+ = +
18a4b 27a3b2c (32)(2)a4b (33)a3b2c

Express the denominators
as prime factors.
5 2
LCD of and
(32)(2)a4b (33)a3b2c
(32)(2)a4b and (33)a3b2c Denominators of the rational
algebraic expressions
The LCD is (33)(2)(a4)(b2)(c)
Take the factors of the denominators. When

the same factor is present in more than one
denominator, take the factor with the highest
exponent. The product of these factors is the
LCD.
5 3bc 2 2a
= +
(32)(2)a4b 3bc (33)a3b2c 2a
(5)(3)bc (22)a
= +
(33)(2)a4b2c (33)(2)a4b2c
15bc 4a Find a number equivalent to 1 that should
= +
54a4b2c 54a4b2c be multiplied to the rational algebraic
15bc + 4a expressions so that the denominators
=
54a4b2c are the same with the LCD.
95
t+3 8t 24
Illustrative example 9: Subtract and 2 .
t2 6t + 9 t 9
t+3 8t 24 t+3 8t 24
2 =
t2 6t + 9 t 9 (t 3)2 (t 3)(t + 3)
t+3 8t 24
LCD of 2 and Express the denominators
(t 3t) (t 3)(t + 3)
as prime factors.
(t 3)2 and (t 3)(t + 3)
The LCD is (t 3)2(t + 3)
t+3 t+3 (8t 24) t3 What property of

=
(t 3)2 t + 3

(t 3)2(t + 3)

t3 ? equality is illustrated
(t + 3)(t + 3) (8t 24) in this step?
=
(t 3)2(t + 3) (t 3)(t + 3)
t2 + 6t + 9 8t 48t + 72
= 3
t3 9t2 + 27t 27 t 9t2 + 27t 27 ? What special products
t + 6t + 9 (8t 48t + 72)
2 2 are illustrated in this
= step?
t3 9t2 + 27t 27
t2 + 6t + 9 8t2 + 48t 72
=
t3 9t2 + 27t 27
7t2 + 54t 63
=
t 9t2 + 27t 27
3
2x 3x 6
Illustrative example 10: Find the sum of and 2 .
x + 4x + 3
2
x + 5x + 6
2x 3x 6 2x 3x 6
+ = +
x2 + 4x + 3 x2 + 5x + 6 (x + 3)(x + 1) (x + 3)(x + 2)
? What special products
2x 3x 6 are illustrated in this
LCD of and
(x + 3)(x + 1) (x + 3)(x + 2) step?
(x + 3)(x + 1) and (x + 3)(x + 2)
The LCD is (x + 3) (x + 1) (x + 2). ? What property of equality

was used in this step?
2x (x + 2) (3x 6) (x + 1)
= +
(x + 3)(x + 1) (x + 2) (x + 3)(x + 2) (x + 1)
(2x)(x + 2) (3x 6)(x + 1)
= +
(x + 3)(x + 1)(x + 2) (x + 3)(x + 2)(x + 1)
2x2 + 4x 3x2 3x 6
= +
x3 + 6x2 + 11x + 6 x3 + 6x2 + 11x + 6
96
2x2 + 3x2 + 4x 3x 6
=
x3 + 6x2 + 11x + 6
5x2 + x 6
= 3
x + 6x2 + 11x + 6
Exercises:
Perform the indicated operation. Express your answers in simplest form.
3 4 3 2
1. + 4. 2 2
x+1 x x x2 x 5x + 6

x+8 3x 2 x+2 x+2
2. + 2 5.
x2 4x + 4 x 4 x 2
2x 3
3.
x2 9 x 3
A ctivity 12
FLOW CHART
Now that you have learned adding and subtracting rational algebraic expressions, you
are now able to fill in the graphic organizer below. Write each step in adding or subtracting
rational algebraic expressions in each box below.
Adding or
Subtracting Rational
If similar rational Algebraic If dissimilar rational
algebraic expressions Expressions algebraic expressions
STEPS T STEPS
ES IO
?
NS
QU
1. Does every step have a

mathematical concept involved?
2. What makes that mathematical
concept important to every step?
3. Can mathematical concept in
every step be interchanged?
How?
4. Can you make another method
in adding or subtracting rational
algebraic expressions? How?
97
Web based
Booster: A ctivity 13 WHAT IS WRONG WITH ME?
Watch the videos in these
websites for more exam-
ples.
http://www.onlinemathle-
arning.com/adding-ration-
al-expressions-help.html
Rewrite the solution in the first box. Write your solution in the second
http://www.onlinemathle-
arning.com/subtracting-
box. In the third box, write your explanation on how your solution corrects
rational-expressions-help. the original one .
html
My
Original My Solution
Explanation
2 1 2 1
2 =
36 x2 x 6x (6 x) (6 x) x(x + 6)
2 1
=
(x 6) (x + 6) x(x + 6)
= 2
x 1
x6
(x 6) (x + 6) x x(x + 6) x6
2x 1(x 6)
=
x(x 6) (x + 6) x(x + 6)(x 6)
= 2x (x 6)
x(x 6) (x + 6)
2x x + 6
=
x(x 6) (x + 6)
x+6
=
x(x 6) (x + 6)
1
=
x(x 6)
1
=
x2 6x
2

3
= 2
a 3 a5
a5 a a5 a a a5
2a 3(a 5)
=
a 5(a) a(a 5)
2a 3a 15
=
a 5(a) a(a 5)
= 2a 3a 15
a(a 5)
= -a2 15
a 5a
98
3x 9 3x 9
+ = +
2x 3 3 2x 2x 3 (-1)(2x 3)
3x 9
=
2x 3 2x 3
= 3x 9
2x 3
= 3(x 3)
2x 3
= x3
2x
b2 4b
4
= b 4b + 4
2
+
b2 b2 b2
= (b 2)(b + 2)
b2
=b+2
ES TIO 1. What did you feel while answering the activity?

?
QU
NS
2. Did you encounter difficulties in answering the activity?

3. How did you overcome these difficulties?
The previous activities deal with the fundamental operations on rational expressions.
Let us try these concepts in a different context.
A ctivity 14
COMPLEX RATIONAL ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
Examine and analyze the following illustrative examples on the next page. Answer the
checkup questions.
A rational algebraic expression is said to be in its simplest REVIEW
form when the numerator and denominator are polynomials with no Perform the operation
on the
common factors other than 1. If the numerator or denominator, or 1.

1 4
+ 4.
1
+
5
2 3 2 4
both numerator and denominator of a rational algebraic expression 1 2 4 2
3 3 3
is also a rational algebraic expression, it is called a complex
1 4 5 4
rational algebraic expression. Simplifying complex rational 2.
2

3
5.
9
+
3
3 2
expressions is transforming it into a simple rational expression. You 4 3
1+ 2
3
need all the concepts learned previously to simplify complex rational 3.
5

4
2 3
expressions. 2 +2
3
99
2 3

a b
Illustrative example 11: Simplify 6 .
5
+ a2
2 3 b

a b
6 Main fraction bar ( ) is a line
5
+ a2 that separates the main numerator
b
and the main denominator.
2 3

a b
=
5 6
? Where did b and a in the main numerator
+ a2 b a
b a2 b
and the 2 and in the main denominator
a b
come from?
? What happens to the main numerator and

the main denominator?
2b 3a 5a2 + 6b
? What principle is used in this step?
=
ab a2b
= 2b 3a 2a b
2
ab 5a + 6b
(2b 3a)aab
=
(5a2 + 6b)ab Simplify the rational algebraic
(2b 3a)a expression.
=
5a2 + 6b
2ab 3a2 ? What laws of exponents are used
= in this step?
5a2 + 6b
c c

c2 4 c 2
Illustrative example 12: Simplify 1 .
1+ c+2
c c c c

c 4 c2
2
(c 2)(c + 2) c2
1 = 1
1+ c+2 1+ c+2

c c (c + 2)

(c 2)(c + 2) c2 (c + 2)
= c+2 1
1 c+2 +
c+2
100
c c(c + 2)

(c 2)(c + 2) (c 2) (c + 2)
=
c+2 1
c + 2 + (c + 2)
c c2 + 2c

(c 2)(c + 2) (c 2) (c + 2)
=
c+2 1
c+2 +
(c + 2)
c (c2 + 2c)
(c 2)(c + 2)
=
c+2+1
c+2
-c2 2c + c
(c 2)(c + 2)
=
c+2+1
c+2
-c2 c
(c 2)(c + 2)
=
c+3
c+2
= -c2 c c+3
(c 2)(c + 2) c+2
= -c c
2
c+2
(c 2)(c + 2) c+3
(-c2 c)(c + 2)
=
(c 2)(c + 2) (c + 3)
-c2 c
=
(c 2)(c + 3)
-c2 c
=
c +c6
2
Exercises
Simplify the following complex rational expressions.
1 1 b 2b 4
4 y2
x y b1 b2
1. 3. 5.
1 1 2b 3b 2
2 + y2
2+
x b2 b3 y
xy y 1 3

x+y x a2 a1
2. 4.
x xy 5 2
+ +
y x+y a2 a1
101
A ctivity 15 TREASURE HUNTING
Directions: Find the box that contains the treasure by simplifying the rational
expressions below. Find the answer of each expression in the hub.
Each answer contains a direction. The correct direction will lead you
to the treasure. Go hunting now.
START HERE
4 x x 3
x2 x2 2 + 3 x2 + 3x +2
1. 2. 3.
2 1 x
x+
x 2 x+2
THE HUB
5x x2 2 1 x2 + 2 3
3 x x1 x +x6
2
x2 + x
2 steps to the 3 steps to the 4 steps to the
Down 4 steps Up 3 steps
right left right
ES TIO
Based on the above activity, what are your steps in simplifying complex
?
QU
NS
rational algebraic expressions?
102
A ctivity 16 Web based
Booster:
VERTICAL CHEVRON LIST Watch the videos in these
websites for more exam-
ples
http://www.wtamu.edu/
Directions: Make a conceptual map in simplifying complex academic/anns/mps/math/
mathlab/col_algebra/col_
rational expressions using a vertical chevron list. alg_tut11_complexrat.htm
http://www.youtube.com/
Write the procedure or important concepts in every watch?v=-jli9PP_4HA
http://spot.pcc.
step inside the box. If necessary, add another chevron edu/~kkling/Mth_95/
SectionIII_Rational_Ex-
to complete your conceptual map. pressions_Equations_
and_Functions/Module4/
Module4_Complex_Ra-
tional_Expressions.pdf
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
A ctivity 17
REACTION GUIDE
Directions: Revisit the second activity. There are sets of rational algebraic
expressions in the following table. Check agree if column I is the same
as column II and check disagree if the two columns are not the same.
I II Agree Disagree
x xy
2
x+y
2 x-1 y-1
x y
2
x2 xy
6y 30 3y 15 2y
2 y+ 1
y + 2y + 1
2
y +y
103
5 7 15 + 14x
+
4x2 6x 12x2
a b a+b

ba ab ba
a+b b
a2
b a+b
1 2 a+b
b + a
ES TIO
Compare your answer in the anticipation guide to your answer in the reaction
?
QU
NS
guide. Do they differ from each other? Why?
In this section, the discussion is all about operations on rational algebraic expressions.
How much of your initial ideas were discussed? Which ideas are different and need
revision? The skills in performing the operations on rational algebraic expressions is one
of the key concepts in solving rate-related problems.
104
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
105
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to relate the operations on rational expressions to
real-life problems, especially the rate problems.
A ctivity 18
WORD PROBLEM
Read the problems below and answer the questions that follow.
1. Two vehicles travelled (x + 4) kilometers. The first vehicle travelled for (x2 16) hours
2
while the second travelled for hours.
x4
a. Complete the table below.
Vehicles Distance Time Speed
Vehicle A
Vehicle B
b. How did you compute the speed of the two vehicles?
2. Pancho and Bruce were asked to fill the tank with water. Pancho can fill the tank
in x minutes alone, while Bruce is slower by two minutes compared to Pancho.
a. What part of the job can Pancho finish in one minute?
b. What part of the job can Bruce finish in one minute?
c. Pancho and Bruce can finish filling the tank together within y minutes. How
will you represent algebraically, in simplest form, the job done by the two if
they worked together?
A ctivity 19
ACCENT PROCESS
List down the concepts and principles in solving problems involving operations on
rational algebraic expressions in every step. You can add a box if necessary.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
__________________ __________________ __________________

_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
__________________ __________________ __________________
_ _
106
A ctivity 20
PRESENTATION
Present and discuss to the class the process of answering the questions below. Your output
will be graded according to reasoning, accuracy, and presentation.
Alex can pour concrete on a walkway in x hours alone while Andy can pour concrete on the
same walkway in two more hours than Alex.
a. How fast can they pour concrete on the walkway if they work together?
b. If Emman can pour concrete on the same walkway in one more hour than Alex,
and Roger can pour the same walkway in one hour less than Andy, who must
work together to finish the job with the least time?

CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
Explanation shows Explanation
Explanation Explanation
Mathematical thorough reasoning shows
shows gaps in shows illogical
reasoning and insightful substantial
reasoning. reasoning.
justifications. reasoning
All computations are Most of the Some of the
All computations
Accuracy correct and shown computations computations
are correct.
in detail. are correct. are correct.
The presentation The The The pres-
is delivered in a presentation is presentation is entation is
very convincing delivered in a delivered in a delivered in a
Presentation manner. Appropriate clear manner. disorganized clear manner.
and creative visual Appropriate manner. Some It does not
materials used. visual materials visual materials use any visual
used. used. materials.
In this section, the discussion is about application of operations on rational algebraic
expressions. It gives you a general picture of relation between operations on rational
algebraic expressions and raterelated problems.
made for yourself? What questions do you still have? Copy the Learned, Affirmed, and
Challenged cards in your journal notebook and complete each.
Challenge
Learned Affirmed
What questions do you
What new realizations What new connections
still have? Which areas
and learning do you have have you made? Which of
seem difficult for you?
about the topic? your old ideas have been
Which do you want to
confirmed/affirmed
explore
107
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning in real-life situations. You will be
A ctivity 21
PRESENTATION
A newly-wed couple plans to construct a house. The couple has al-

ready a house plan made by their engineer friend. The plan of the house is
illustrated below:
Laboratory 1m
Dining Room
2m Bedroom
2m
Comfort
1.5 m Room
Living Room
3m
Master
2.5 m Bedroom
3m

3m
As a foreman of the project, you are tasked to prepare a manpower plan to be presented
to the couple. The plan includes the number of workers needed to complete the project, their
daily wage, the duration of the project, and the budget. The manpower plan will be evaluated
based on reasoning, accuracy, presentation, practicality, and efficiency.
108

CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
Explanation Explanation
Explanation
shows thorough shows gaps in Explanation
shows
Reasoning reasoning reasoning. shows illogical
substantial
and insightful reasoning.
reasoning.
justifications.
All computations Most of the Some of the
All computations
Accuracy are correct and computations computations
are correct.
shown in detail. are correct. are correct.
The The The The presenta-
presentation is presentation is presentation is tion is delivered
delivered in a delivered in a delivered in a in a clear man-
very convincing clear manner. disorganized ner. It does not
Presentation manner. Appropriate manner. Some use any visual
Appropriate and visual materials visual materials materials.
creative visual are used. are used.
materials are
used.
The proposed The proposed
The proposed The proposed
project will be plan will be
plan will be plan will be
Practicality completed with completed
completed at the completed in
greater number with the most
least time. lesser time.
of days. number of days.
The cost of The cost of The cost of the
The cost of the
Efficiency the plan is the plan is plan is very
plan is minimal.
reasonable. expensive. expensive.
109
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
110
Now that you have completed this module, let us summarize what have you learned:
1. Raterelated problems can be modelled using rational algebraic expressions.

2. A rational algebraic expression is a ratio of two polynomials where the denominator
is not equal to one.
3. Any expression not equal to zero raised to a zero exponent is always equal to one.
4. When an expression is raised to a negative integeral exponent, it is the same as
the multiplicative inverse of the expression.
5. A rational algebraic expression is in its simplest form if there is no common prime
factor in the numerator and the denominator except 1.
6. To multiply rational algebraic expressions, multiply the numerator and the
denominator, then simplify.
7. To divide rational algebraic expressions, multiply the dividend by the reciprocal of
the divisor, then multiply.
8. To add/subtract similar rational algebraic expressions, add/subtract the numerators,
and copy the common denominator.
9. To add/subtract dissimilar rational algebraic expressions, express each with
similar denominator, then add/subtract the numerators and copy the common
denominator.
10. A complex rational algebraic expression is an expression where the numerator or
denominator, or both the numerator and the denominator, are rational algebraic
expressions.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS:
Complex rational algebraic expression an expression where the numerator or denomina-
tor or both the numerator and the denominator are rational algebraic expressions.
LCD also known as least common denominator is the least common multiple of the denomi-
nators.
Manpower plan a plan where the number of workers needed to complete the project,
wages of each worker in a day, how many days can workers finish the job and how much can
be spend on the workers for the entire project.
Rate-related problems problems involving rates (e.g., speed, percentage, ratio, work)
Rational algebraic expression a ratio of two polynomials where the denominator is not
equal to one.
111
Learning Package no. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13. Mathematics Teachers Guide, Funds for
Assistance to Private Education, 2007
Malaborbor, P., Sabangan, L., Carreon, E., Lorenzo, J., Intermediate Algebra. Educational
Resources Corporation, Cubao, Quezon City, Philippines, 2005
Orines, F., Diaz, Z., Mojica, M., Next Century Mathematics Intermediate Algebra, Phoenix
Publishing House, Quezon Ave., Quezon City 2007
Oronce, O., and Mendoza, M., eMath Intermediate Algebra, Rex Book Store, Manila,
Philippines, 2010
Padua, A. L, Crisostomo, R. M., Painless Math, Intermediate Algebra. Anvil Publishing Inc.
Pasig City Philippines, 2008
Worktext in Intermediate Algebra. United Eferza Academic Publication Co. Lipa City,
Batangas, Philippines. 2011
http://www.wtamu.edu/academic/anns/mps/math/mathlab/col_algebra/col_alg_tut11_com-
plexrat.htm
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-jli9PP_4HA
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/adding-rational-expressions-help.html
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/subtracting-rational-expressions-help.html
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/dividing-rational-expressions-help.html
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/multiplying-rational-expressions-help.html
http://spot.pcc.edu/~kkling/Mth_95/SectionIII_Rational_Expressions_Equations_and_Func-
tions/Module4/Module4_Complex_Rational_Expressions.pdf
Images credit:
http://www.portlandground.com/archives/2004/05/volunteers_buil_1.php
112
RELATIONS
AND FUNCTIONS

Have you ever asked yourself how the steepness of the mountain affects the
speed of a mountaineer? How does the familys power consumption affect the amount
of the electric bill? How is a dogs weight affected by its food consumption? How is the
revenue of the company related to the number of items produced and sold? How is the
grade of a student affected by the number of hours spent in studying?
A lot of questions may arise as you go along but in due course, you will focus
on the question: How can the value of a quantity given the rate of change be
predicted?

In this module, you will examine this question when you take the following lessons:
Lesson 1 Rectangular Coordinate System

Lesson 2 Representations of Relations and Functions
Lesson 3 Linear Function and Its Applications

Lesson 1 describe and illustrate the Rectangular Coordinate System and its
uses; and
describe and plot positions on the coordinate plane using the
coordinate axes.
113
Lesson 2 define relation and function;
illustrate a relation and a function;
determine if a given relation is a function using ordered pairs, graphs,
and equations;
differentiate dependent and independent variables; and
describe the domain and range of a function.
Lesson 3 define linear function;
describe a linear function using its points, equation, and graph;
identify the domain and range of a linear function;
illustrate the meaning of the slope of a line;
find the slope of a line given two points, its equation, and its graph;
determine whether a function is linear given a table of values;
write the linear equation Ax + By = C into the form y = mx + b and
vice-versa;
graph a linear equation given (a) any two points; (b) the x-intercept
and y-intercept; (c) the slope and a point on the line; and (d) the slope
and y-intercept;
describe the graph of a linear equation in terms of its intercepts and
slope;
find the equation of a line given (a) two points; (b) the slope and a
point; (c) the slope and its intercept; and
solve real-life problems involving linear functions and patterns.
Module Map
Module Map
Rectangular
Relations and
Coordinate
Functions
System
Representations
of Relations and Domain and Range Linear Functions
Functions
Mapping Ordered Dependent and

Diagram Pairs Independent Variables
Table Equations/
Formulas Slope and Intercepts
Graphs Applications
114
EXPECTED SKILLS:
To do well in this module, you need to remember and do the following:
1. Follow the instructions provided for each activity.

2. Draw accurately each graph then label.
3. Read and analyze problems carefully.
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Read the questions carefully. Write the letter that corresponds to your answer on a
separate sheet of paper.
1. What is a Rectangular Coordinate System?

a. It is used for naming points in a plane.
b. It is a plane used for graphing linear functions.
c. It is used to determine the location of a point by using a single number.
d. It is a two-dimensional plane which is divided by the axes into four regions
called quadrants.
2. Which of the following is true about the points y

in Figure 1?
a. J is located in Quadrant III. C
b. C is located in Quadant II. H
J
c. B is located in Quadrant IV.
d. G is located in Quadrant III.
D F
3. Which of the following sets of ordered pairs x
defines a function?
a. {(3, 2), (-3, 6), (3, -2), (-3, -6)} G
b. {(1, 2), (2, 6), (3, -2), (4, -6)}
c. {(2, 2), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, -9)} B
d. {(4, 4), (-3, 4), (4, -4), (-3, -4)}
Figure 1
4. What is the domain of the relation shown in Figure 2?
a. {x|x } c. {x|x > -2}
b. {x|x 0} d. {x|x -2}
5. Determine the slope of the line 3x + y = 7.

1
a. 3 c.
3
1
b. -3 d.
-
3
6. Rewrite 2x + 5y = 10 in the slope-intercept form.
2 2
a. y= x + 2 c. y = x + 10
5 5 Figure 2
2 2
b. y = x + 2 d. y = x + 10
5 5
115
7. Find the equation of the line with slope -2 and passing through (5, 4).
a. y = 2x + 1 c. y = 2x + 14
b. y = -2x + 1 d. y = -2x + 14
8. Which line passes through the points (3, 4) and (8, -1)?
a. y = -x + 7 c. y = x + 7
b. y = -x 1 d. y = x 1
9. Jonathan has a job mowing lawns in his neighborhood, and gets paid Php 25 per
hour. Identify the independent variable in computing his total pay.
a. the job c. the lawn mowing
b. the total pay d. the number of hours worked
10. Some ordered pairs for a linear function of x are given in the table below.
x 1 3 5 7 9
y -1 5 11 17 23
Which of the following equations was used to generate the table above?
a. y = 3x 4 c. y = -3x 4
b. y = 3x + 4 d. y = -3x + 4

11. As x increases in the equation 5x + y = 7, the value of y
a. increases.
b. decreases.
c. does not change. Figure 3
d. cannot be determined.
12. What is the slope of the hill illustrated in Figure 3? (Hint: Convert 5 km to m.)
y
1
a. 4 c.
4 l
1
b. 125 d.
250
x
13. Which line in Figure 4 is the steepest?
m
a. line l c. line n
b. line m d. line p p n
Figure 4
14. Joshua resides in a certain city, but he starts a new job in the neighboring city.
Every Monday, he drives his new car 90 kilometers from his residence to the
office and spends the week in a company apartment. He drives back home every
Friday. After 4 weeks of this routinary activity, his cars odometer shows that he
has travelled 870 kilometers since he bought the car. Write a linear model which
gives the distance y covered by the car as a function of x number of weeks since
he used the car.
a. y = 180x + 150 c. y = 180x + 510
b. y = 90x + 510 d. y = 90x + 150
116
For item numbers 15 to 17, refer to the situation below.
A survey of out-of-school youth in your barangay was conducted. From year 2008 to
2012, the number of out-of-school youths was tallied and was observed to increase at
a constant rate as shown in the table below.
Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

Number of
out-of-school 30 37 44 51 58
youth, y
If the number of years after 2008 is represented by x, what mathematical model

15.
can you make to represent the data above?
a. y = -7x + 30 c. y = 7x + 30
b. y = -7x + 23 d. y = 7x + 23
16. If the pattern continues, can you predict the number of out-of-school youths by
year 2020?
a. Yes, the number of out-of-school youths by year 2020 is 107.
b. Yes, the number of out-of-school youths by year 2020 is 114.
c. No, because it is not stipulated in the problem.
d. No, because the data is insufficient.
17. The number of out-of-school youths has continued to increase. If you are the SK
Chairman, what would be the best action to minimize the growing number of out-
of-school youths?
a. Conduct a job fair.
b. Create a sports project.
c. Let them work in your barangay.
d. Encourage them to enrol in Alternative Learning System.
18. You are a Math teacher. You gave a task to each group of students to make a
mathematical model, a table of values, and a graph about the situation below.
A boy rents a bicycle in the park. He has to pay a fixed amount of Php 10 and
an additional cost of Php 15 per hour or a fraction of an hour, thereafter.

What criteria will you consider so that your students can attain a good output?
I. Accuracy
II. Intervals in the Axes
III. Completeness of the Label
IV. Appropriateness of the Mathematical Model
a. I and II only c. II, III, and IV only

b. I, II, and III only d. I, II, III, and IV
117
If y refers to the cost and x refers to the number of hours, what is the correct
19.
mathematical model of the situation given in item 18?
a. y = 15x + 10 c. y = 15x 10
b. y = 10x + 15 d. y = 10x 15
20. You are one of the trainers of a certain TV program on weight loss. You notice that
when the trainees run, the number of calories c burned is a function of time t in
minutes as indicated below:
t 1 2 3 4 5
c(t) 13 26 39 52 65
As a trainer, what best piece of advice could you give to the trainees to maximize
weight loss?
a. Spend more time for running and eat as much as you can.
b. Spend more time for running and eat nutritious foods.
c. Spend less time for running.
d. Sleep very late at night.
118
Lesson 1 Rectangular
Coordinate System
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets start this module by reviewing the important lessons on Sets. As you go
through this part, think about this question: How can the Rectangular Coordinate
System be used in real life?
A ctivity 1
RECALLING SETS
Description:
This activity will help you recall the concept of sets and the basic operations
on sets.
Directions: Let A = {red, blue, orange}, B = {red, violet, white}, and C = {black, blue}.
Find the following.
1. A B 4. n(A B) 7. AB C
2. A B 5. n(A B) 8. A (B C)
3. A B C 6. A C 9. n(A (B C))
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
Have you encountered difficulty in this lesson? If yes, what is it?
A ctivity 2
BOWOWOW!
Description: This activity is in the form of a game which will help you recall the concept
of number line.
Directions: Do as directed.
1. Group yourselves into 9 or 11 members.
2. Form a line facing your classmates.
3. Assign integers which are arranged from least to greatest to each
group member from left to right.
4. Assign zero to the group member at the middle.
119
5. Recite the number assigned to you.
6. Bow as you recite and when the last member is done reciting, all of
you bow together and say Bowowow!
ES TIO 1. What is the number line composed of?
? 2. Where is zero found on the number line?

QU
NS
3. What integers can be seen on the left side of zero? What about on the
right side of zero?
4. Can you draw a number line?
A ctivity 3
IRF WORKSHEET
Description: Below is the IRF Worksheet in which you will give your present knowledge
about the concept.
Directions: Write in the second column your initial answers to the questions provided in
the first column.
Questions
Answer Answer Answer
1.
What is a rectangular
coordinate system?
2. What are the different
parts of the rectangular
coordinate system?
3. How are points plotted on
the Cartesian plane?
4. How can the Rectangular
Coordinate System be used
in real life?
You just tried answering the initial column of the IRF Sheet. The next section will
enable you to understand what a Rectangular Coordinate System is all about and do a
CoordinArt to demonstrate your understanding.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand the key concepts of Rectangular
Coordinate System.
120
Rectangular Coordinate System is introduced using the concept of sets. You have
learned the binary operations of sets: union and intersection. Recall that A B and A B
are defined as follows:
A B = {xx A or x B} A B = {xx A and x B}
The product set or Cartesian product of nonempty sets A and B, written as A B and
read A cross B, is the set of all ordered pairs (a, b) such that a A and b B. In symbols,
.
Illustrative Examples:
Let A = {2, 3, 5} and B = {0, 5}. Find (a) A B and (b) B A.
Solution:
A B = {(2, 0), (2, 5), (3, 0), (3, 5), (5, 0), (5, 5)}
B A = {(0, 2), (5, 2), (0, 3), (5, 3), (0, 5), (5, 5)}
The cardinality of set A is 3, symbolized as n(A) = 3. The cardinality of a set is the

number of elements in the set. The cardinality of A B, written as n(A B), can be determined
by multiplying the cardinality of A and the cardinality of B. That is,
n(A B) = n(A) n(B)
Illustrative Examples:
Let A = {2, 3, 5} and B = {0, 5}. Find (a) n(A B), and (b) n(B A).
Questions: Solution:
Is n(A B) = n(B A)?

Why? n(A B) = 3 2 = 6
n(B A) = 2 3 = 6
Answers to the Questions:
Yes, n(A B) = n(B A).

E S TI
ON
QU
It is because n(A B) = n(B A)implies

n(A) n(B) = n(B) n(A) and it holds by ? What can you conclude?
Multiplication Property of Equality.
121
State your conclusions by competing the statements below using the correct relation
symbol = or .
For any nonempty sets A and B,
1. n(A B) ___ n(B A).
2. A B ___ B A.
Exercise 1
Given that A = {4, 7, 8} and B = {5, 6}, find the following:
1. A B 3. n(A B)
2. B A 4. n(B A)
Exercise 2
Find (a) X Y, (b) Y X, (c) n(X Y), and (d) n(Y X) given the following sets X and Y:
1. X = {2, 3} and Y = {8, 3}
2. X = {1, 3, 6} and Y = {1, 5}
3. X = {2, 5, 8, 9} and Y = {0, 8}
4. X = {a, e, i, o, u} and Y = {yy is a letter of the word paper}.
5. X = {x1 < x < 10, x is a prime number} and Y = {yy N,1 < y < 3}
Let be the set of real numbers. The notation 2 is the set of ordered pairs (x, y),
where x and y ; that is,
2 = = {(x, y)x , y }.
2 is also called the xy-plane or Cartesian plane in honor of the French mathematician
Ren Descartes (1596 1650), who is known as the Father of Modern Mathematics.
The Cartesian plane is composed of two perpendicular number

lines that meet at the point of origin (0, 0) and divide the plane into four
regions called quadrants. It is composed of infinitely many points. Each
point in the coordinate system is defined by an ordered pair of the
form (x, y), where x and y . The first coordinate of a point is called
the x-coordinate or abscissa and the second coordinate is called the
y-coordinate or ordinate. We call (x, y) an ordered pair because it is
different from (y, x). The horizontal and vertical lines, typically called the
x-axis and the y-axis, respectively, intersect at the point of origin whose
coordinates are (0, 0). The signs of the first and second coordinates of
a point vary in the four quadrants as indicated below.
Quadrant I x > 0, or x is positive y > 0, or y is positive or (+, +);

Quadrant II x < 0, or x is negative y > 0, or y is positive or (, +);
Quadrant III x < 0, or x is negative y < 0, or y is negative or (, );
Quadrant IV x > 0, or x is positive y < 0, or y is negative or (+, ).
There are also points which lie in the x- and y-axes. The points which lie in the x-axis
have coordinates (x, 0) and the points which lie in the y-axis have coordinates (0, y), where x
and y are real numbers.
122
Illustrated below is a Cartesian plane.
y axis
7
Quadrant II Quadrant I
(, +) 6 (+, +)
5
Positive direction is upward
4 and to the right
3
2
1
x axis
-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-1
-2
-3
origin
-4
-5
(, ) (+, )
Quadrant III -6 Quadrant IV
-7
How do you think can we apply this in real life? Lets try the next activity.
Example
Suppose Mara and Clara belong to a class with the following seating arrangement.
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
R5
R4
R3 Mara
R2 Clara
R1
Teacher's Table
123
Questions:
1. Using ordered pairs, how do we describe Maras seat? How about Claras seat?
2. Using ordered pairs, how do we locate the seat of any classmate of Mara and
Clara?
3. Can we make a set of ordered pairs? If yes, state so.
Solutions:
1. Maras seat is at the intersection of Column 2 and Row 3. Claras seat is at the
intersection of Column 4 and Row 2. In symbols, we can write (2, 3) and (4, 2),
respectively, if we take the column as the x-axis and the row as y-axis.
2. We locate the seat of Maras and Claras classmates by using column and row.
We can use an ordered pair (Column #, Row #) to locate it.
3. Here is the set of ordered pairs:
{(C1, R1), (C2, R1), (C3, R1), (C4, R1), (C5, R1), (C6, R1),
(C1, R2), (C2, R2), (C3, R2), (C4, R2), (C5, R2), (C6, R2),
(C1, R3), (C2, R3), (C3, R3), (C4, R3), (C5, R3), (C6, R3),
(C1, R4), (C2, R4), (C3, R4), (C4, R4), (C5, R4), (C6, R4),
(C1, R5), (C2, R5), (C3, R5), (C4, R5), (C5, R5), (C6, R5)}
A ctivity 4
LOCATE YOUR CLASSMATE!
Description: This activity will enable you to locate the seat of your classmate in your
classroom using ordered pairs. This can be done by groups of five members
each.
Directions: Locate your seat and the seats of groupmates in the classroom. Complete
the table below:
Name Location
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
How do you locate the seat of your classmate in the classroom?
124
A ctivity 5
MEET ME AT THIRDYS RESIDENCE
y
Description: Finding a particular point such (1, 4) in Aurora 5th St.
the coordinate plane is similar to finding a Aurora 4th St.
particular place on the map. In this activity, Aurora 3rd St.
you will learn how to plot points on the Aurora 2nd St.
Cartesian plane. Aurora 1st St.
Directions: With the figure at the right above, find the
x
Mabini 2nd St.

Mabini 1st St.
Mabini 3rd St.

Mabini 4th St.
Mabini 5th St.
following locations and label each with
letters as indicated.
a. Mabini 4th corner Aurora 1st Streets A

b. Mabini 2nd corner Aurora 2nd Streets B
c. Mabini 3rd corner Aurora 5th Streets C
d. Mabini 5th corner Aurora 4th Streets D
e. Mabini 1st corner Aurora 1st Streets E
ES TIO 1. How do you find each location?
? 2. Which axis do you consider first? Next?

QU
NS
3. If (1, 4) represents Mabini 1st Street corner Aurora 4th Street, then how
could these points be represented?
a. (3, 1) d. (4, 2)
b. (4, 5) e. (5, 3)
c. (1, 2)
4. If you were asked to plot the points mentioned in item number 3 in the
Cartesian plane, can you do it? If yes, plot them.
5. How can Rectangular Coordinate System be used in real life?
A ctivity 6
HUMAN RECTANGULAR COORDINATE SYSTEM
Description: This activity is a game which will enable you to learn the Rectangular
Coordinate System.
Directions: Form two lines. 15 of you will a form horizontal line (x-axis) and 14 for the
vertical line (y-axis). These lines should intersect at the middle. Others may
stay at any quadrant separated by the lines. You may sit down and will only
stand when the coordinates of the point, the axis or the quadrant you belong
to is called.
125
ES TIO 1. What is the Rectangular Coordinate System composed of?
? 2. Where do you see the origin?

QU
NS 3. What are the signs of coordinates of the points in each quadrant?

a. Quadrant I
b. Quadrant II
c. Quadrant III
d. Quadrant IV
A ctivity 7
PARTS OF THE BUILDING
Description: This activity will enable you to give the coordinates of the part of the building.
Directions: Describe the location of each point below by completing the following table.
An example is done for you . Note that the point indicates the center of
the given part of the building.
Parts of the Parts of the

Coordinates Quadrant Coordinates Quadrant
Building Building
Example:
(-11, 8) II
Morning Room
1. Gilt 8. Marble
Room Hall
2. Terrace 9. Reception
Hall Office
3. Old 10. Drawing
Kitchen Room
4. Billiard
11. Entrance
Room
5. Salon 12. Library
6. Reception
13. Spa
Hall
7. Grand 14. Harborough
Staircase Room
126
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. What is the Rectangular Coordinate System composed of?

2. How can the Rectangular Coordinate System be used in real life?
127
A ctivity 8
OBJECTS POSITION
Description: This activity will enable you to give the coordinates of the point where the
object is located.
Directions: Describe the location of each point below by the completing the following
table. An example is done for you.
Object Coordinates Quadrant/Axis
Example: ball (4, 2) I
1. spoon
2. television set
3. laptop
4. bag
5. pillow
6. camera
7. table
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
How can the Rectangular Coordinate System be used in real life?
128
Exercise 3
Indicate the name of each point in the Cartesian plane. Name each point by writing the
letter beside it. The coordinates are provided in the box below. An example is done for you.
y
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
-13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
A
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
1. A(-2, -6) 6. F(-4, 0)

2. B(3, -3) 7. G(0, -5)
3. C(-1, 3) 8. H(6, -5)
4. D(0, 0) 9. I(6, 5)
5. E(-9, 11) 10. J(13, -8)
129
Exercise 4
Write the coordinates of each point. Identify the quadrant/axis where each point lies.
Complete the table below.
Coordinates Quadrant / Axis

1. B( __ , __ )
2. C( __ , __ )
3. F( __ , __ )
4. G( __ , __ )
5. H( __ , __ )
6. L( __ , __ )
7. K( __ , __ )
y
5
4
F
3
G
2
H
1
C
x
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
-1
B K
-2
-3
-4
L
-5
ES TIO 1. In what quadrant/axis does a point lie?
? 2. How do you locate points on the Cartesian plane?

QU
NS
3. Have you had an experience iwhere a Rectangular Coordinate

System is applied? If yes, cite it.
130
Now, make a Cartesian plane and plot points on it. Can you do it? Try the next exercise.
Exercise 5
Draw a Cartesian plane. Plot and label the following points.
1
1. C(0, 4) 6. S( , 6)
2
Web Links 5
2. A(3, -2) 7. I( , 4)
Kindly click this link 2
http://www.onlinemath- 1
learning.com/rectangu- 3. R(-5, 3) 8. N(-7, )
lar-coordinate-system. 4
html and watch the video 1 1
provided for your refer- 4. T(0, 7) 9. P(- , - )
ence. 2 2
1
5. E(-3, 6) 10. L(-8, )
2
A ctivity 9
IRF WORKSHEET REVISITED
about the concept.
Directions: Give your revised answers of the questions in the first column and write
them in the third column. Compare your revised answers from your initial
answers.

Questions
1. What is a rectangular
coordinate system?
2. What are the different
parts of the rectangular
coordinate system?
3. How do you locate points
on the Cartesian plane?
4. How can the Rectangular
Coordinate System be
used in real life?
In this section, the discussion is all about the Rectangular Coordinate System. You
have learned the important concepts of Rectangular Coordinate System. As you go through,
keep on thinking of the answer to the question: How can the Rectangular Coordinate
System be used in real life?
131
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
132
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at some aspects of the topic.
A ctivity 10
SPOTTING ERRONEOUS COORDINATES
Description: This activity will enable you to correct erroneous coordinates of the point.
A. Susan indicated that A has

coordinates (2, 4). 7
y
1. Do you agree with Susan? 6
2. What makes Susan wrong? 5

4
B
3. How will you explain to her C 3
that she is wrong in a subtle 2 A

way? D 1
x
-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-1
B. Angelo insisted that B has -2
coordinates (4, 0) while D has -3

F
E -4
coordinates (0, -4). If yes, why? If -5
no, state the correct coordinates of -6
points B and D. -7
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. How did you find the activity?

Challenge Questions:
Use graphing paper to answer the following questions:
1. What value of k will make the points (-4, -1), (-2, 1), and (0, k) lie on a line?
2. What are the coordinates of the fourth vertex of the square if three of its vertices are at
(4, 1), (-1, 1), and (-1, -4)?
3. What are the coordinates of the fourth vertex of the rectangle if three vertices are located
at (-2, -7), (3, -7), and (3, 5)?
133
A ctivity 11
COORDINART
Description: This activity will give you some ideas on how Cartesian plane is used in
drawing objects. Perform this activity in groups of 5 to 10 students.
Directions: Select only one among the three coordinArts. Identify the ordered pairs of
the significant points so that the figure below would be drawn.
http://store.payloadz.com/details/800711-Other-Files-
Documents-and-Forms-sports-car-.html http://www.plottingcoordinates.com/coordinart_
http://www.go2album.com/showAlbum/323639/
coordinartiguana_macaw patriotic.html
The websites below are the sources of the images above. You may use these for more
accurate answers.
1. bird - http://www.go2album.com/showAlbum/323639/coordinartiguana_macaw.
2. car - http://store.payloadz.com/details/800711-Other-Files-Documents-and-
Forms-sports-car-.html.
3. statue - http://www.plottingcoordinates.com/coordinart_patriotic.html.
A ctivity 12
about the concept.
Directions: Write in the fourth column your final answer to the questions provided in
the first column. Compare your final answers with your initial and revised
answers.
Questions
1. What is a rectangular coordinate
system?
2. What are the different parts of the

rectangular coordinate system?
3. What are the uses of the
rectangular coordinate system?
4. How do you locate points on the
Cartesian plane?
134
ES TIO
? 1. What have you learned about the first lesson in this module?
QU
NS 2. How meaningful is that learning to you?
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are now ready to do the
task in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
A ctivity 13
COORDINART MAKING
Description: This activity will enable you to apply your knowledge in

Rectangular Coordinate System to another context.
Materials: graphing paper

ruler
pencil and ballpen
coloring material
Directions: Group yourselves into 5 to 10 members. Make you own CoordinArt using
graphing paper, ruler, pencil or ballpen, and any coloring material. Your
output will be assessed using the rubric below:
RUBRIC: COORDINART MAKING

Exemplary Satisfactory Developing Beginning
CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
All points are All points are All points are Points are not
plotted correctly plotted correctly plotted correctly. plotted correctly.
Accuracy of and are easy and are easy to
Plot to see. The see.
points are neatly
connected.
135
Product shows Product shows Uses other Uses other
a large amount some original peoples ideas people's ideas,
of original thought. Work and giving them but does not
Originality thought. Ideas shows new credit but there give them credit.
are creative and ideas and is little evidence
inventive. insights. of original
thinking.
Exceptionally Neat and Lines and Appears messy
well designed, relatively curves are and "thrown
neat, and attractive. A ruler neatly drawn together" in a
attractive. and graphing but the graph hurry. Lines
Colors that go paper are used appears quite and curves are
Neatness and
well together are to make the plain. visibly crooked.
Attractiveness
used to make graph more
the graph more readable.
readable. A ruler
and graphing
paper are used.
A ctivity 14
CONSTELLATION ART
Description: This activity will enable you to apply your knowledge in

Rectangular Coordinate System to another context.

pencil and ballpen
coloring material
Directions: Group yourselves into 5 to 10 members. Research constellations and their

names. Choose the one that you like most. Make your own constellation
using graphing paper, ruler, pencil or ballpen, and any coloring material.
How did you find the performance task? How did the task help you see the real-world
use of the topic?
You have completed this lesson. Before you go to the next lesson, answer the
question: How can the Rectangular Coordinate System be used in real life? Aside
from what is specified, can you cite another area or context where this topic is applicable?
136
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
137
Representations
Lesson 2 of Relations
and Functions
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets start this lesson by looking at the relationship between two things or quantities.
As you go through this lesson, think about this question: How are the quantities related
to each other?
A ctivity 1
CLASSIFY!
Description: This activity will enable you to write ordered pairs. Out of this activity, you
can describe the relation of an object to its common name.
Directions: Group the following objects in such a way that they have common property/
characteristics.
fork liquid eraser grater

pencil knife iPod
laptop ballpen pot
digital camera tablet cellphone
ladle notebook paper
Kitchen Utensils School Supplies Gadgets
________________ ________________ ________________

________________ ________________ ________________
________________ ________________ ________________
________________ ________________ ________________
________________ ________________ ________________
138
Form some ordered pairs using the format:
(object, common name).
a. Column 1: _________________________________________
b. Column 2: _________________________________________
c. Column 3: _________________________________________
ES TIO 1. How many objects can be found in each column?
? 2. How did you classify the objects?

QU
NS
3. Based on the coordinates you have formulated, is there a repetition of

the first coordinates? What about the second coordinates?
A ctivity 2
REPRESENTING A RELATION
Description: Given a diagram, you will be able to learn how to make a set of ordered
pairs.
Direction: Describe the mapping diagram below by writing the set of ordered pairs. The
first two coordinates are done for you.
narra
tulip flower
Set of ordered pairs:
orchid
{(narra, tree), (tulip, flower),
mahogany
(____, ____), (____, ____),
(____, ____), (____, ____)} rose tree
apricot
ES TIO 1. How did you make a set of ordered pairs?

?
QU
NS
2. How many elements are there in the set of ordered pairs you have
made?
3. What elements belong to the first set? Second set?
4. Is there a repetition of the first coordinates? How about the second
coordinates?
5. Does the set of ordered pairs represent a relation?
6. How is a relation represented?
139
A ctivity 3
IRF WORKSHEET
Description: Below is the IRF Worksheet that you will accomplish to record your present
knowledge about the concept.
Direction: Write in the second column your initial answers to the questions provided in
the first column.
Revised Final
Questions Initial Answer
Answer Answer
1. What is a relation?
2. What is a function?
3. What do you mean by
domain of a relation/
function?
4.
What do you mean
by range of a relation/
function?
5. How are relations and
functions represented?
6. How are the quantities
related to each other?
You gave your initial ideas on representations of relations and functions. The next
section will enable you to understand how a relation and a function are represented and
do a leaflet design to demonstrate your understanding.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand the key concepts of
Representations of Relations and Functions.
A relation is any set of ordered pairs. The set of all first coordinates is called the domain
of the relation. The set of all second coordinates is called the range of the relation.
140
Illustrative Example
Suppose you are working in a fast food company. You earn Php 40 per hour. Your
earnings are related to the number of hours of work.
Questions:
1. How much will you earn if you work 4 hours a day? How about 5 hours? 6 hours?
7 hours? Or 8 hours?
2. Express each as an ordered pair.
3. Based on your answer in item 2, what is the domain? What is the range?
Solutions:
1. The earning depends on the number of hours worked. An amount of Php 160
is earned for working 4 hours a day, Php 200 for 5 hours, Php 240 for 6 hours,
Php 280 for 7 hours and Php 320 in 8 hours.
2. (4, 160), (5, 200), (6, 240), (7, 280), and (8, 320)
3. The domain of the relation is {4, 5, 6, 7, 8}. The range of the relation is {160, 200,
240, 280, 320}.
A ctivity 4
MAKE YOUR OWN RELATION!
Description: This activity will enable you to make a relation, a correspondence of your
height and weight.
Materials: tape measure or other measuring device
weighing device
ballpen
paper
Directions: Form groups of 5 to 10 members. Find your height and weight and of the
other members of the group. Express your height in centimeters and weight
in kilograms. Write the relation of height and weight as an ordered pair in the
form (height, weight).
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
How are height and weight related to each other?
141
Exercise 1
Suppose the bicycle rental at the Rizal Park is worth Php 20 per hour. Your sister would
like to rent a bicycle for amusement.
1. How much will your sister pay if she would like to rent a bicycle for 1 hour? 2
hours? 3 hours?
2. Based on your answers in item 1, write ordered pairs in the form (time, amount).
3. Based on your answers in item 2, what is the domain? What is the range?
4. How are rental time and cost of rental related to each other?
Exercise 2
Suppose you want to call your mother by phone. The charge of a pay phone call is Php 5 for
the first 3 minutes and an additional charge of Php 2 for every additional minute or a fraction of it.
1. How much will you pay if you have called your mother for 1 minute? 2 minutes?
3 minutes? 4 minutes? 5 minutes?
2. Based on your answers in item 1, write ordered pairs in the form (time, charge).
4. How are time and charge related to each other?
Exercise 3
John pays an amount Php 12 per hour for using the internet. During Saturdays and
Sundays, he enjoys and spends most of his time playing a game especially if he is with his
friends online. He plays the game for almost 4 hours.
1. How much will John pay for using the internet for 1 hour? 2 hours? 3 hours? 4 hours?
3. Is it a relation? Explain.
5. How are time and amount related to each other?
6. If John has decided not to play the game in the internet cafe this weekend, what
is the maximum amount that he would have saved?
Exercise 4
The perimeter of a square depends on the length of its side. The formula of perimeter of
a square is P = 4s, where P stands for perimeter and s stands for the side.
1. What is the perimeter of the square whose side is 1 cm long? How about 2 cm
long? 3 cm long? 4 cm long? 5 cm long? 20 cm long?
3. Is it a relation? Why?
5. How are the perimeter and the side related to each other?
Exercise 5
The weight of a person on earth and on the moon is given in the table as approximates.
Weight on earth (N) 120 126 132 138 144 150
Weight on the moon (N) 20 21 22 23 24 25
Source: You Min, Gladys Ng. (2008). GCE O Level Pure Physics Study Guide. Fairfield Book Publishers: Singapore.
142
1. What is the weight of a person on earth if he weighs 26 N on the moon? 27 N?
28 N?
2. What is the weight of a person on the moon if he weighs 174 N on earth? 180 N?
186 N?
3. Write the set of ordered pairs using the given table.
4. Is it a relation? Why?
5. Based on your answer in item 3, what is the domain? What is the range? Explain.
6. How are the weight on the moon and the weight on earth related to each other?
Representations of Relations
Aside from ordered pairs, a relation may be represented in four other ways: (1) table, (2)
mapping diagram, (3) graph, and (4) rule.
Table x y
The table describes clearly the behavior of the value of y as the value of x -2 -4
changes. Tables can be generated based on the graph. Below is an example of a
table of values presented horizontally. At the right is also a table of values that is -1 -2
presented vertically.
0 0
x -2 -1 0 1 2
y -4 -2 0 2 4 1 2
2 4
Mapping Diagram
Subsequently, a relation can be described by using a

diagram as shown at the right. In this example, -2 is mapped to
-4, -1 to -2, 0 to 0, 1 to 2, and 2 to 4.
Graph
y
At the right is an example of a graphical representation of
a relation. It illustrates the relationship of the values of x and y.
Rule
x
Notice that the value of y is twice the value of x. In other
words, this can be described by the equation y = 2x, where x is
an integer from -2 to 2.
143
Given the graph, complete the set of ordered pairs and the table of values; draw the
mapping diagram; and generate the rule.

{(0, 6), (1, 5), (__, __), (__, __), (__, __), (__, __), (__, __)}
Table Mapping Diagram

x y A B 10
9
0 8
1 7
6
2 5
3 4
4 3
2
5 1
6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rule: ________________________
Questions:
1. How did you complete the set of ordered pairs?

2. How did you make the table?
3. How did you make the mapping diagram?
4. What is the rule? How did you come up with the rule?
Answers:
The set of ordered pairs is {(0, 6), (1, 5), (2, 4), (3, 3), (4, 2), (5, 1), (6, 0)}. We use the
set of ordered pairs in completing the table. The set of ordered pairs shows that 0 is
mapped to 6, 1 to 5, 2 to 4, ..., and 6 to 0. Notice that the sum of x and y, which is 6,
is constant. Thus, the rule can be written as x + y = 6. This can also be written in set
notation as indicated below:
{(x,y)x + y = 6}
Note that the graph does not start with (0, 6) nor end with (6, 0). Arrow heads indicate
that we can extend the graph in both directions. Thus, it has no starting and ending points.
144
Exercise 6
Given the mapping diagram below, make a table; write a set of ordered pairs; and draw
its graph. A B
-2
{(__, __), (__, __), (__, __), (__, __), (__, __)}
0 -1
Graph: Table:
y
1 0
6
5
4
x y 4 1
3
2 2
1
x
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 6
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Questions:
1. How did you write the set of ordered pairs?
2. How did you make the table?
3. How did you graph?
4. Did you encounter any difficulty in making the table, set of ordered pairs, and the
graph? Why?
5. Can you generate a rule? Explain your answer.
Note that:
{1, 2, 3, 4, 5} is not a relation because it is not a set of ordered pairs.
{(1, 5), (2, 4), (-1, 8), (0, 10)} is a relation because it is a set of ordered pairs.
The rule x + y = 7 represents a relation because this can be written as a set of
ordered pairs {..., (0, 7), (1, 6), (2, 5), (3, 4), (4, 3), ...}
If the ordered pairs are plotted in the Cartesian plane, then a graph can be drawn
to describe the relation. The graph also illustrates a relation.
Domain and Range
It is noted that the domain of a relation is

the set of first coordinates while the range is the
set of second coordinates. Going back to the
graph, the domain of the relation is {-2, -1, 0,
1, 2} and range is {-4, -2, 0, 2, 4}. Note that we
write the same element in the domain or range
once.
145
Illustrative Example Visit the websites below
Determine the domain and range of the mapping diagram given in for enrichment.
Exercise 6. 1. http://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=7Hg9JJceywA;
and
Solution: 2. http://www.youtube.com/
The domain of the relation is {0, 1, 4} while its range is {-2, -1, 0, 1, 2}. watch?v=I0f9O7Y2xI4.
Exercise 7
Determine the domain and the range of the relation given the set of ordered pairs.
1. {(0, 2), (1, 3), (2, 4), (3, 5), (4, 6)}
2. {(0, 2), (0, 4), (0, 6), (0, 8), (0, 10)}
3. {(-5, -2), (-2, -2), (1, 0), (4, 2), (7, 2)}
4. {(0, 2), (-1, 3), (-2, 4), (-3, 5), (-4, 6)}
5. {(0, -2), (1, -3), (2, -4), (3, -5), (4, -6)}
Exercise 8
Determine the domain and the range of each mapping diagram.
1. 3.
-5
-2 -2 -5
-1
0 -1
0 8
1 0
9
2 2 6
10
2. 4. 0 1
1 1
2 2 2
0
3 3
4 4 3
Exercise 9
Determine the domain and the range of the table of values.
x -1 0 1 2 3 x -2 -1 0 1 2
1. 3.
y 3 6 9 12 15 y 2 1 0 1 2
x -2 -2 -1 -1 0
2. 4. x 5 5 5 5 5
y 5 -5 3 -3 -1 y -5 0 5 10 15
146
Exercise 10
Determine the domain and the range of the relation illustrated by each graph below.
y y
1. 3.
3 3
2 2
1 1
x x
-3 -2 -1 1 2 3 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
y y
2. 4.
3 3
2 2
1 1
x x
-3 -2 -1 1 2 3 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
Note: The points in the

graph are those points on
the curve.
A correspondence may be classified as one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many. It

is one-to-one if every element in the domain is mapped to a unique element in the range,
many-to-one if any two or more elements of the domain are mapped to the same element in
the range; or one-to-many if each element in the domain is mapped to any two or more ele-
ments in the range.
147
One-to-One Correspondence Many-to-One Correspondence
Student I.D. No. Student Class Rank
Mary
Mary 001 1
Susan
John 025
Kenneth 3
Kim 154 Roger
One-to-Many Correspondence
Teacher Student
Mars
Kim
Mrs. Peas
John
Sonia
Illustrative Example 1
Consider the table and mapping diagram below.
Mapping Diagram Table
Student Section Government

Official Websites
Agency
Faith DepEd www.deped.gov.ph
Gomez
Camille DSWD www.dswd.gov.ph
Jayson
9 Zamora SSS www.sss.gov.ph
Ivan
PhilHealth www.philhealth.gov.ph
148
Questions to Ponder
1. What type of correspondence is the mapping? Explain.
2. What type of correspondence is the table? Explain.
Solutions:
1. The mapping diagram is many-to-one because three students, namely: Faith,
Camille, and Ivan are classmates or belong to the same section Gomez.
2. The table is one-to-one correspondence because one element in the domain
(government agency) is mapped to one and only one element in the range (official
website).
Consider the sets of ordered pairs below.
Set A: {(3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 6), (6, 7), (7, 8)}
Set B: {(2, 2), (2, -2), (3, 3), (3, -3), (4, 4), (4, -4)}
Set C: {(0, 1), (1, 1), (2, 1), (3, 1), (4, 1), (5, 1)}
Questions to Ponder
1. What is the domain of each set of ordered pairs?
2. What is the range of each set of ordered pairs?
3. What type of correspondence is each set of ordered pairs? Explain.
4. Which set/sets of ordered pairs is/are functions? Explain.
Solutions:
1. The domain of set A is {3, 4, 5, 6, 7}; set B is {2, 3, 4}; and set C is {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}.
2. The range of set A is {4, 5, 6, 7, 8}; set B is {-4, -3, -2, 2, 3, 4}; and set C is {1}.
3. Correspondence in Set A is one-to-one; set B is one-to-many; and set C is many-
to-one.
4. Sets A is a function because there exists a one-to-one correspondence between
elements. For example, 3 corresponds to 4, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, 6 to 7, and 7 to 8.
Similarly, set C is a function because every element in the domain corresponds
to one element in the range. However, set B is not a function because there are
elements in the domain which corresponds to more than one element in the range.
For example, 2 corresponds to both 2 and -2.
A function is a special type of relation. It is a relation in which every element in the

domain is mapped to exactly one element in the range. Thus, a set of ordered pairs is a
function if no two distinct ordered pairs have equal abscissas.
Questions to Ponder
1. Among the types of correspondence, which ones are functions? Why?
2. Does one-to-one correspondence between elements always guarantee a function?
How about many-to-one? Justify your answer.
3. Does one-to-many correspondence between elements always guarantee a
function? Justify your answer.
149
Exercise 11
Go back to Exercises 7 to 10, identify which ones are functions. Explain.
Note that all functions are relations but some relations are not functions.
A ctivity 5
PLOT IT!
Description: In the previous activities, you have learned that a set of ordered pairs is a
function if no two ordered pairs have the same abscissas. Through plotting
points, you will be able to generalize that a graph is that of a function if every
vertical line intersects it in at most one point.
Directions: Determine whether each set of ordered pairs is a function or not. Plot each
set of points on the Cartesian plane. Make some vertical lines in the graph.
(Hint: 3 1.73)
1. {(4, 0), (4, 1), (4, 2)}

2. {(0, -2), (1, 1), (3, 7), (2, 4)}
3. {(-2, 2), (-1, 1), (0, 0), (1, 1)}
4. {(-2, 8), (-1, 2), (0, 0), (1, 2), (2, 8)}
5. {(3, 3), (0, 0), (-3, 3)}
6. {(-2, 0), (-1, 3), (-1, -3 ), (0, 2), (0, -2), (1, 3), (1, -3), (2, 0)}
Determine whether each set of ordered pairs represents a function or not. Put a tick
mark on the appropriate column. Determine also the number of points that intersect any verti-
cal line.
Number of Points
Not
Set of Ordered Pairs Function that Intersect a
Function
Vertical Line
1. {(4, 0), (4, 1), (4, 2)}
2. {(0, -2), (1, 1), (3, 7), (2, 4)}
3. {(-2, 2), (-1, 1), (0, 0), (1, 1)}
4. {(-2, 8), (-1, 2), (0, 0), (1, 2), (2, 8)}
5. {(3, 3), (0, 0), (-3, 3)}
6. {(-2, 0), (-1, 3), (-1, -3), (0, 2),
(0, -2), (1, 3), (1, -3 ), (2, 0)}
150
ES TIO 1. Which set of ordered pairs define a function?
?
2. In each set of ordered pairs which defines a function, what is the
QU
NS maximum number of point/s that intersect every vertical line?

3. Which set of ordered pairs does not define a function?
4. In each set of ordered pairs which does not define a function, what is
the maximum number of points that intersect every vertical line?
5. What have you observed?
The Vertical Line Test
If every vertical line intersects the graph no more than once, the graph represents a
function.
Exercise 12
Identify which graph represents a function. Describe each graph.
1. 3.
4, 5,
Questions:
1. Which are functions? Why?
Web Links 2. Can you give graphs which are that of functions? If yes,
Watch the video by clicking the
give three graphs.
websites below. 3. Can you give graphs which are not that of functions? If
1. http://www.youtube.com/watch?NR=1
&v=uJyx8eAHazo&feature=endscreen yes, give another three graphs which do not represent
2. h t t p : / / w w w . y o u t u b e .
c o m / w a t c h ? v = - x v D -
functions.
n4FOJQ&feature=endscreen&NR=1 4. How do you know that a graph represents a function?
5. How is function represented using graphs?
151
Consider the following graphs:
y-axis y-axis
3 3
2 2
1 1
x-axis x-axis
-3 -2 -1 1 2 3 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
Questions:
Which graph is a function? Which line fails the Vertical Line Test? Explain.
Horizontal and Vertical Lines
The horizontal line represents a function. It can be described by the equation y = c,

where c is any constant. It is called a constant function. However, a vertical line which can be
described by the equation x = c does not represent a function.
A relation may also be represented by an equation in two variables or the so-called rule.
Consider the next example.
The rule 3x + y = 4 represents a relation. If we substitute the value of x = -2 in the
equation, then the value of y would be:
3x + y = 4
3(-2) + y = 4 Subsituting x by -2.
-6 + y = 4 Simplification
-6 + y + 6 = 4 + 6 Addition Property of Equality
y = 10 Simplification
Similarly, if x = -1, then y = 7, and so on. Thus, we can have a set of ordered pairs
{, (-2, 10), (-1, 7), (0, 4), (1, 1), (2, -2),...}. Besides, a rule is a function if y can be
expressed in terms of x, and there is only one value of y in one value of x.
152
Tell whether the rule 3x + y = 4 is a function or not.
Solutions
3x + y = 4
3x + y + (-3x) = 4 + (-3x) Why?
y = -3x + 4 Why?
The rule above is a function since it can be written in, y = -3x + 4.
Tell whether the rule x2 + y2 = 4 a function or not.
x2 + y2 = 4
x2 + y2 + (-x2) = 4 + (-x2) Why?
y2 = 4 x2 Why?
y = 4 x2 Getting the square root of both sides.
Notice that for every value of x, there are two values of y. Lets find the values of y if x = 0.
y = 4 x2
y = 4 02
y = 4
y = 2
As shown above, if x = 0, then the values of y are 2 and -2. Thus, it is not a function.
A ctivity 6 IDENTIFY ME!
Description: An equation in two variables can also represent a relation. With this activity,
you are able to determine whether a rule is a function or not.
Directions: Given the rule, determine whether the rule represents a function or not.
Answer the questions that follow. Examples are done for you.
Equation Solutions Coordinates

x = -2
(-2, -3)
y = 2x + 1 = 2(-2) + 1 = -4 + 1 = -3
x = -1
(-1, -1)
y = 2x + 1 = 2(-1) + 1 = -2 + 1 = -1
x=0
a. y = 2x + 1 (0, 1)
y = 2x + 1 = 2(0) + 1 = 0 + 1 = 1
x=1
(1, 3)
y = 2x + 1 = 2(1) + 1 = 2 + 1 = 3
x=2
(2, 5)
y = 2x + 1 = 2(2) + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5
153
x=0
(0, 0)
x = y2 = 0; hence, y = 0. Why?
x=1
b. x = y2 (1, 1), (1, -1)
x = y2 = 1; hence, y = 1 or -1. Why?
x=4
(4, 2), (4, -2)
x = y2 = 4; hence, y = 2 or -2. Why?
Write the set of ordered pairs of each rule.

a. y = 2x + 1 : _____________________________________
b. x = y2 : _____________________________________
ES TIO 1. Are there any two ordered pairs whose abscissas are equal? If yes,
?
which ones? Which rule does this set of ordered pairs belong?
QU
NS
2. Does the equation y = 2x + 1 define a function? Why or why not?

3. Does the equation x = y2 define a function? Why or why not?
4. What is the exponent of y in the equation y = 2x + 1? What about the
exponent of y in the equation x = y2?
5. What can you deduce? How do we know that an equation illustrates
a function? How do we know that an equation illustrates a mere
relation?
6. Which among the equations below define functions? Explain.
a. y = 5x 4
b. 3x 2y = 2
c. y = x2
d. x2 + y2 = 9
e. y3 = x
7. Can you give some equations which represent a function? How about
those which do not represent a function? Give three examples each.
Exercise 13
Determine whether each rule below represents a function or not.
1. y = 3x + 9 6. x + y2 = 10 Web Links
2. y = -2x 7 7. x = y4 For your reference, you can visit
the websites:
3. x + y = 10 8. y = x2 1. http://www.webgraphing.com/
4. x + y = 2
2
9. y = 4 + 1 2. http://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=hdwH24ToqZI
5. 2x2 + y2 = 8 10. x2 y2 = 16
154
Note that a rule represents a function if and only if it can be written in the form y = f(x).
A ctivity 7
MINDS-ON
Description: Variables may be dependent and independent. Dependent variable depends

on the independent variable while the independent variable controls the
dependent variable.
Direction: Classify the variables as independent or dependent.
1. time and salary

Independent variable: ______________
Dependent variable: _______________
2. the number of hours boiling and the number of ounces of water in the
pot
3. the distance covered and the volume of the gasoline

4. the number of hours studied to grade on test

5. height of a plant to the number of months grown

ES TIO 1. Fill in the blanks.
? a. I consider time as a/an ________________ variable because it

QU
NS
___________________ the salary.

b. I consider salary as a/an ______________ variable because it
__________________ on the number of hours worked.
c. I consider the number of hours boiling as a/an ________________
variable because it ___________ the number of ounces of
water in the pot.
d. I consider the number of ounces of water in pot as a/an
______________ variable because it ___________________
on the number of hours boiling.
155
e. I consider the distance covered as a/an ________________
variable because it ___________________ on the volume of
the gasoline.
f. I consider the volume of the gasoline as a/an ______________
variable because it ___________________ the distance
covered.
g. I consider the number of hours studied as a/an _____________
variable because it ___________________ grade on test.
h. I consider grade on test as a/an ________________ variable
because it ___________________ on the number of hours
studied.
i. I consider height of the plant as a/an ________________
variable because it ___________________ on the number of
months grown.
j. I consider the number of months grown as a/an ____________
variable because it ___________________ the number of
months grown.
2. How do you differentiate the dependent from the independent

variable?
Dependent and Independent Variables
In an equation where y is expressed in terms of x, the variable x is considered the

independent variable because any value could be assigned to it. However, the variable y
is the dependent variable because its value depends on the value of x.
A ctivity 8 AM I RELATED (PART I)?
Description: This task provides counter examples to the previous activity. This can be
done by groups of 5 members.
Directions: Think of two quantities related to each other. Identify the independent and
dependent variables. Give as many as three examples.
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. What three pairs of quantities did you choose? Why?

2. Can we see/experience them in real life?
156
A ctivity 9 AM I RELATED (PART II)?
Description: Among the variables mentioned in the previous activity, make a table of
values and set of ordered pairs and identify whether or not each illustrates a
function.
Directions: Among the three pairs you have identified in Activity 9, choose only one for
your group. You may conduct an interview with experts. Then, make a table
of values and a set of ordered pairs. Identify whether it illustrates a function
or not.

ES TIO 1. What difficulty did you encounter in collecting the data?
?
QU
NS
2. How were you able to prepare the table of values?

3. Is the relation a function? Why?
In the previous section, you have learned how a function is defined. This time, you
will enrich your knowledge about functions starting with function notation.
Function Notation
The f(x) notation can also be used to define a function. If f is a function, the symbol f(x),
read as f of x, is used to denote the value of the function f at a given value of x. In simpler
way, f(x) denotes the y-value (element of the range) that the function f associates with x-value
(element of the domain). Thus, f(1) denotes the value of y at x = 1. Note that f(1) does not
mean f times 1. The letters such as g, h and the like can also denote functions.
Input
Furthermore, every element x in the domain of the function is
called the pre-image. However, every element y or f(x) in the range
is called the image. The figure at the right illustrates concretely the
input (the value of x) and the output (the value of y or f(x)) in the rule Function f
or function. It shows that for every value of x there corresponds one
and only one value of y.
Example: Output
Consider the rule or the function f defined by f(x) = 3x 1. f(x) or y
If x = 2, then the value of the function would be 5.
Solution:
f(x) = 3x 1 Rule/Function
f(2) = 3(2) 1 Substituting x by 2
f(2) = 6 1 Simplification
f(2) = 5 Simplification
157
The input is 2 (the value of x) and the output is 5 (the value of y or f(x)).
How about if x = 3?
Solution:
f(x) = 3x 1 Rule/Function
f(3) = 3(3) 1 Substituting x = 3
f(3) = 9 1 Simplification
f(3) = 8 Simplification
The input is 3 (the value of x) while the output is 8 (the value of function).
Domain and Range of a Function
In the previous section, you have learned how the domain and the range of a relation
are defined. The domain of the function is the set of all permissible values of x that give real
values for y. Similarly, the range of the function is the set of permissible values for y or f(x) that
give the values of x real numbers.
You have taken the domain and the range of the relation given in the table of values
in the previous lesson, the set of ordered pairs and the graph. Can you give the domain
and the range if the graph of the function is known? Try this one!
Find the domain and the range of each graph below.
a. b.
y y
x x
Solutions:
In (a), arrow heads indicate that the graph of the function extends in both directions.
It extends to the left and right without bound; thus, the domain D of the function is the set of
real numbers. Similarly, it extends upward and downward without bound; thus, the range R of
function is the set of all real numbers. In symbols,
D = {x|x }, R = {y|y }
158
In (b), arrow heads indicate that the graph of the function is extended to the left and
right without bound, and downward, but not upward, without bound. Thus, the domain of the
function is the set of real numbers, while the range is any real number less than or equal to 0.
That is,
D = {x|x }, R = {y|y 0}
Exercise 14
Determine the domain and the range of the functions below.
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
(0, -2)
Note: The broken line in item number 4 is an asymptote. This is a line that the graph of
a function approaches, but never intersects. (Hint: The value of x = 0 is not part of the domain
of the function.)
159
A ctivity 10
GRAPH ANALYSIS
Description: This activity will enable you to determine the domain of the function.
Directions: Consider the graphs below. Answer the questions that follow.
1
The graph of f(x) = The graph of f(x) = x The graph of f(x) = x2
y x
y y
8
4 4
7
3 3
6
2 2
5
1 1 4
x x 3
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
-1 2
-1
-2 1
-2
-3 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
x
-3 -1
-4 -4 -2
ES TIO 1. Does each graph represent a function? Why?
?
2. What is the domain of the first graph? Second graph? Third graph?
QU
NS
Explain each.
3. Does the first graph touch the y-axis? Why or why not?
1
4. In f(x) = , what happens to the value of the function if x = 0? Does this
x
value affect the domain of the function?
5. In f(x) = x, what happens to the value of the function if x < 0, or
negative? Does this value help in determining the domain of the
function?
6. In f(x) = x2, is there a value of x that will make the function undefined?
If yes, specify: _____________________.
7. Make a reflection about the activity.
You have tried identifying the domain and the range of the graph of the function.
What about if you are asked to find the domain of the function itself without its graph. Try
this one!
Determine the domain of each function below. Check the solution using calculator.
1. f(x) = 3x
2. f(x) = x2
3. f(x) = x 2
x+1
4. f(x) =
x
160
Solutions:
1. In f(x) = 3x, there is no value of x that makes the function f undefined. Thus, the
domain of f(x) = 3x is the set of real numbers or {x|x }.
2. In f(x) = x2, there is no value of x that makes the function f undefined. Thus, the
domain of f(x) = x2 is the set of real numbers or {x|x }.
3. In f(x) = x 2 , the domain of the function is the set of values of x that will not
make x 2 an imaginary number. Examples of these values of x are 2, 2.1, 3,
3.74, 4, 5, and so on. However, x = 1 cannot be because it can give the value of
the function
1 2 = -1
which is an imaginary number where the calculator yields an Error or a Math Error.
The numbers between 1 and 2 neither work. Thus, the domain of the function is x
is greater than or equal to 2, or {x|x 2}. To get a real number, the radicand must
be greater than or equal to 0. That is, x 2 0 which gives x 2 if simplified.
x+1
4. In f(x) = , the domain of the function is the set of values of x that will not make
x
x+1 x+1
undefined. The value x = 0 will make the expression undefined. When
x x
the answer is undefined, the calculator yields an Error or a Math Error. Thus,
x = 0 is not part of the domain. The domain, therefore, of the function is the
set of real numbers except 0, or {x|x , x 0}. To find easily the domain of
the function, the denominator must not be equal to zero, or x 0.
Note that the value of the function will not be a real number if it is an imaginary
number or undefined.
Exercise 15
Find the domain of each function.
3x + 4
1. g(x) = 5x + 1 6. g(x) =

x1
2. g(x) = x 7 7. g(x) = x 8
3x
3. g(x) = x 8. g(x) =
x+6
4. g(x) = x + 1 9. g(x) = 2x 4
x+4 x+4
5. g(x) = 10. g(x) =
x2 3x 5
161
A ctivity 11
Description: Below is the IRF Worksheet in which you will write your present knowledge
about the concept.
Directions: Give your revised answers to the questions provided in the first column and
write them in the third column. Compare your revised answers with your
initial answers.
Revised Final
Answer Answer
Go back to the previous section and find out if your initial ideas are correct or not.
How much of your initial ideas are discussed. Which ideas are different and need revision?
Now that you know the important ideas about this topic, lets go deeper by moving
on to the next section.
162
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
163
What to
What to Understand
Understand
A ctivity 12
QUIZ
Description: This activity will evaluate your knowledge about the domain of the given
relation.
A. State the domain of the relation.

1. h(x) = 1 x 4. t(x) = 2x 4
2x2 + 3x 2
2. x + y = 4 5. r(x) =
x+2
3. x2 + y2 = 16

B.
Answer the following questions.
(x + 4)(x 4)
1. Is the domain of f(x) = x4 equal to the domain of
g(x) = x + 4? Justify your answer.
2. (Biology) The weight of the muscles of a man is a function of his
body weight x and can be expressed as W(x) = 0.4x. Determine
the domain of this function. Explain your answer.
3. Give a function whose domain is described below:
a. {x|x } c. {x|x 4}
b. {x|x , x 1} d. {x|x -1}
4. Accept or reject the following statement and justify your
x+5
response: The domain of the function f(x) = is {x|x > 1}.
x 1
C. Study the graph given and use it to answer the questions that follow.
y
3
-3 -2 -1 1 2 3
x
-1
-2
-3
164
1. Does the graph represent a relation? Explain.
2. Does the graph represent a function? Explain.
3. Determine the domain of the graph.
4. Determine the range of the graph.
5. How are the quantities related to each other? Does the value of
y increase as x increases?
A ctivity 13
about the concept.
Directions: Write in the fourth column your final answer to the questions provided in
the first column. Compare your final answers with your initial and revised
answers.
Questions
you made for yourself?
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
165
A ctivity 14
GALLERY WALK
Description: Your output of this activity is one of your projects for the second quarter. It
summarizes the representations of relations and functions. This could be
done by groups of 5 to 8 members each. Before doing this project, you are
required to have a research on making a leaflet.
Directions: You make an informative leaflet providing the information about the
representations of relations and functions. Each member in the group will
give a relation and write its representations. Arrange these in a creative
manner. Your group output will be assessed using the rubric below.
RUBRIC: INFORMATIVE LEAFLET

CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
The leaflet All required All but 1 or 2 Several required
includes all elements are of the required elements are
Required
required included in the elements are not missing.
Elements
elements as well leaflet. included in the
as additional leaflet.
information.
All graphics All graphics are All graphics Graphics do
are related to related to the relate to the not relate to the
Graphics - the topic and topic. All topic. One or topic or several
Relevance / make it easier to borrowed two borrowed borrowed
Color understand. graphics have a graphics are not graphics are not
All borrowed source citation. cited. cited.
graphics have a
source citation.
The leaflet is The leaflet is The leaflet is The leaflet is
exceptionally attractive in acceptably distractingly
Attractiveness/
attractive terms of design, attractive though messy or very
Formatting
in terms of layout, and it may be a bit poorly designed.
design, layout, neatness. messy. It is not
and neatness. attractive.
In this section, your task was to make an informative leaflet. How did you find the
performance task?
Continue studying the next lesson for further understanding about functions.
166
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
167
Linear Function
Lesson 3 and Its Applications
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets start this lesson by recalling translation of English phrases to mathematical

expressions and vice versa. As you go through this module, keep in mind this question:
How can you predict the value of a quantity given the rate of change?
A ctivity 1
FIND MY PAIR!
Description: This activity will enable you to recall translations of verbal phrases to
mathematical phrases.
Directions: Match the verbal phrase in Column A to the mathematical phrase in Column B.
Write the letter that corresponds to your answer in your notebook.
Column A Column B
___ 1. The sum of the numbers x and y A. 7xy
___ 2. The square of the sum of x and y B. x + y
___ 3. The sum of the squares of x and y C. 2(x + y)
___ 4. Nine less than the sum of x and y D. 9 x + y
___ 5. Nine less the sum of x and y E. 9 (x + y)
___ 6. Twice the sum of x and y F. (x + y) - 9
___ 7. Thrice the product of x and y G. x2 + y2
___ 8. Thrice the quotient of x and y H. (x + y)2
___ 9. The difference between x and y divided by four I. 4x3 + y3
___10. Eight more than the product of x and y J. 4(x3 + y3)
___11. The product of 7, x, and y K. 4(x + y)
___12. The product of four and the sum of x and y L. x + y2 10
___13. The sum of x and the square of y diminished by ten M. 8 + xy
___14. Four times the sum of the cubes of x and y N. 2 x y
2
___15.]Two multiplied by the absolute value of the O. x y
difference of x and y 4
4
P. 3xy
Q. x
33
y
168
ES TIO 1. What is the difference between:
a. x less than y and x less y?
?
QU
NS b. the sum of the squares of x and y and the square of the sum
of x and y?
2. Have you encountered any difficulty in translating English phrases to
mathematical expressions? Explain your answer.
In Activity 1, you translated verbal phrases to mathematical phrases. However, in

the next activity, you will write the verbal phrases for a given set of mathematical phrases.
A ctivity 2
WRITE YOUR OWN VERBAL PHRASE!
Description: This activity will enable you to translate mathematical phrases to verbal
phrases.
Directions: Write the verbal phrase for each mathematical phrase below.
1. a + b 6. a2 + b2
2. 2(a b) 7. a + 2b
3. 3a + 4b ab
8.
4. b 5 2
5. 5 b 9. 2a 2
3b
a
10. +7
b
It is also necessary to recall translating verbal sentences to equations. Try the next
activity.
Represent the sentences below algebraically:
1. Four times a number increased by 5 is 21.
Four times a number increased by 5 is 21.
4 x + 5 = 21

The mathematical equation for the verbal sentence is 4x + 5 = 21.
169
2. The difference of two numbers is 8.
The term difference means the answer of subtraction. The two numbers
can be represented by two variables, say x and y. Thus, the correct mathematical
equation is x y = 8.
3. The perimeter of the triangle whose sides are x, x + 4, and 2x + 5 is 57.
The perimeter of any triangle is the sum of the lengths of its three sides. The
perimeter P of the triangle is x + (x + 4) + (2x + 5) and is equal to 57. Thus, the
correct mathematical equation is x + (x + 4) + (2x + 5) = 57.
A ctivity 3
WRITE THE CORRECT EQUATION
Description: This activity will enable you to translate each verbal sentence into a
mathematical equation and vice versa.
Direction: Represent each of the following algebraically.
1. Twice a number is 6.
2. Four added to a number gives ten.
3. Twenty-five decreased by twice a number is twelve.
4. If thrice a number is added to seven, the sum is ninety-eight.
5. The sum of the squares of a number x and 3 yields 25.
6. The difference between thrice a number and nine is 100.
7. The sum of two consecutive integers is equal to 25.
8. The product of two consecutive integers is 182.
9. The area of the rectangle whose length is (x + 4) and width is (x 3)
is 30.
10. The sum of the ages of Mark and Sheila equals 47.
ES TIO 1. What are the common terms used to represent the = sign?
?
2. Use the phrase is equal to in your own sentence.
QU
NS
3. Translate the formulae below to verbal phrases.

a. P = a + b + c (Perimeter of a triangle)
b. A = lw (Area of a rectangle)
c. A = s2 (Area of a square)
d. C = (Circumference of a circle)
e. SA = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh (Surface area of a rectangular prism)
4. Write five pairs of mathematical phrases and their verbal translations.
Recalling evaluation of algebraic expressions is also important. Try the next activity.
170
A ctivity 4
EVALUATE ME!
Description: This activity will enable you to evaluate algebraic expressions.

Direction: Evaluate the following algebraic expressions.
1. 2xy when x = 2 and y = 1
2. x 4y when x =-1 and y = 0
3. x2 + y when x = -5 and y = 7
4. 3x + 2y when x = 3 and y = -4
x+4 1
5. (8y) when x = 2 and y =
x2 30 2
6. 3(x + y) 2(x 8y) when x = 8 and y = -2
y8
7. (3x)( ) when x = 4 and y = 0
y2
x2 + 4x 5
8. when x = 5 and y = 3
y2 y 2
2
9. 2x 5 + 7y when x = 4 and y = 7
10. (x + 3) 4 15 2xy when x = 5 and y = -1
ES TIO 1. How do you evaluate an algebraic expression?

?
QU
NS
2. What rule did you use to evaluate algebraic expressions?

3. If an exponent and parenthesis appear simultaneously, which one will
you perform first?
4. If an expression allows you to multiply and divide in any order, is it
correct to always perform multiplication first before division?
5. In the expression 6 (3)(4), which operation will you perform first,
multiplication or division?
6. If an expression allows you to add and subtract, is it correct to always
perform addition first before subtraction? Why?
7. In the expression 2 1 + 8, which operation will you perform first,
addition or subtraction?
8. State the GEMDAS Rule.
171
A ctivity 5
IRF WORKSHEET
about the concept.
Directions: Give your initial answers of the questions provided in the first column and
write them in the second column.
Revised Final
Answer Answer
1. What is a linear function?
2. How do you describe a
linear function?
3. How do you graph a linear
function?
4. How do you find the
equation of the line?
5. How can the value of a
quantity given the rate of
change be predicted?
You have just reviewed translations of English phrases and sentences to mathematical
expressions and equations and vice versa. The next section will enable you to understand
linear functions and their applications, to formulate and solve real-life problems, and to
make a leaflet about electric bill and power consumption to be presented to the different
members of the community.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand the key concepts of Linear
Function and Its Application.
Linear Function
A linear function is defined by f(x) = mx + b, where m and b are real numbers. Its graph is
a line with slope m and y-intercept b. If m 0, then the degree of the function is 1. If m = 0 and
b 0, then the degree of the function is 0. If m = 0 and b = 0, then the degree of the function
is not defined.
172
Is the function f defined by f(x) = 2x + 3 a linear function? If yes, determine the slope m
and the y-intercept b.
Solution:
Yes, the function f defined by f(x) = 2x + 3 is a linear function since the highest exponent
(degree) of x is one and it is written in the form f(x) = mx + b. The slope m is 2 while the
y-intercept b is 3.
Is the function g defined by g(x) = -x a linear function? If yes, determine its slope and
y-intercept.
Solution:
Yes, the function g is a linear function because it has a degree one. Since g(x) = -x
can be written as g(x) = -1x + 0, its slope is -1 and y-intercept is 0.
Is the function h defined by h(x) = x2 + 5x + 4 a linear function?
Solution:
The function h is not a linear function because its degree (the highest exponent of x) is 2.
Exercise 1
Determine whether each is a linear function or not. Check Yes if it is a linear function
and No if it is not. Write the degree of the function. For linear functions, identify its slope m and
y-intercept b.
Function Degree Yes No m b

1. f(x) = 5x + 1
2. f(x) = -6x 7
3. f(x) = 3x
4. f(x) = -4
5. f(x) = 5x 3
6. f(x) = 2(x 3)
7. f(x) = -(x + 5)
8. f(x) = -4x2
9. f(x) = 10x2 + 7x
10. f(x) = 3x2 5x + 1
173
A linear function can be described using its graph.
Determine the values of the function f if f(x) = 2x 1 at x = -3, 0, and 2. Give their
meanings and ordered pairs.
Solution:
If x = -3, then f(x) = 2x 1 becomes
f(-3) = 2(-3) 1
f(-3) = -6 1
f(-3) = -7, which means the value of f at x = -3 is -7.
Or, if x = -3, then y = -7. This gives the ordered pair (-3, -7). Recall that an ordered pair
can be written (x, y).
If x = 0, then f(x) = 2x 1 becomes

f(0) = 2(0) 1
f(0) = 0 1
f(0) = -1, which means the value of f at x = 0 is -1.
Or, if x = 0, then y = -1. This gives another ordered pair (0, -1).

If x = 2, then f(x) = 2x 1 becomes
f(2) = 2(2) 1
f(2) = 4 1
f(2) = 3, which means the value of f at x = 2 is 3.
Or, if x = 2, then y = 3. This gives the ordered pair (2, 3).
This implies that the graph of the function f will pass through the points (-3, -7), (0, -1), and
(2, 3). Out of the values, we can have the table below:
3
(2, 3)
x -3 0 2 2
f(x) -7 -1 3 1
0
With the use of table of values of x and y, the -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
function can be graphed as shown at the right. -1

(0, -1)
-2
Web Links -3
For your enrichment,
visit this link: http://www. -4
youtube.com/watch?v=U
gtMbCI4G_I&feature=re -6
lated
-5
(-3, -7)
-7
174
Note that an ordered pair (x, y) can be written as (x, f(x)) for any function in f(x)
notation.
A ctivity 6 DESCRIBE ME (PART I)!
Description: This activity will enable you to describe a linear function using the set of
ordered pairs and table by finding the value of the function at x.
Direction: Do the given tasks as directed.
A. Determine the values (a) f(-3), (b) f(1), and (c) f(4) in each of the
following functions.
1. f(x) = 2x 4. f(x) = -3x 4

2. f(x) = 2x + 1 5. f(x) = 2 3x
3. f(x) = -3x
B. Complete the table below.
The values of Ordered

Function Table
f(-3) f(1) f(4) Pairs
x
1. f(x) = 2x
f(x)
x
2. f(x) = 2x + 1
f(x)
x
3. f(x) = -3x
f(x)
x
4. f(x) = -3x 4
f(x)
x
5. f(x) = 2 3x
f(x)
175
C. Complete the table below. An example is done for you.

Function The values of... Meaning
f(-3) = -6 The value of f at x = -3 is -6.
1. f(x) = 2x f(1) = 2 The value of f at x = 1 is 2.
f(4) = 8 The value of f at x = 4 is 8.
f(-3) = ___
2. f(x) = 2x + 1 f(1) = ___
f(4) = ___
f(-3) = ___
3. f(x) = -3x f(1) = ___
f(4) = ___
f(-3) = ___
4. f(x) = -3x 4 f(1) = ___
f(4) = ___
f(-3) = ___
5. f(x) = 2 3x f(1) = ___
f(4) = ___
ES TIO 1. How did you determine the values of f(-3), f(1), and f(4) of each
?
QU
NS
function?
2. In each of the functions below, what have you observed about the
values of f as x increases?
a. f(x) = 2x
b. f(x) = 2x + 1
c. f(x) = -3x
d. f(x) = -3x 4
e. f(x) = 2 3x
3. Does the value of the function increase as x increases?
4. What affects the change of values of the function?
5. Have you observed a pattern? If yes, state so.
6. How can the value of a quantity given the rate of change be predicted?
176
A ctivity 7 DESCRIBE ME (PART II)!
Description: This activity will enable you to describe a linear function using mapping
diagram and graph.
Directions: Given the functions below, evaluate the following: f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(1), and
f(2). Complete the table of values of each function below. Illustrate with a
mapping diagram and draw the graph on a graphing paper.
a. f(x) = x + 5 c. f(x) = -x + 5
x x
f(x) f(x)
b. f(x) = 3x d. f(x) = -3x

x x
f(x) f(x)
ES TIO 1. How did you determine the values of f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(1), and f(2) of
?
each function?
QU
NS
2. What type of correspondence are the mapping diagrams? Does each

element in the domain correspond to one and only one element in the
range?
3. Have you observed any pattern from the domain and range of each
function? Based from the values obtained, is the function increasing
or decreasing?
4. Which function has an increasing value of y as x increases?
5. Which function has a decreasing value of y as x increases?
6. How can you predict the value of a quantity given the rate of change?
A ctivity 8 WHAT ARE THE FIRST DIFFERENCES

ON Y-VALUES?
Description: This activity will enable you to determine whether a function is linear given
the table.
Directions: Do the task as directed.
A. Consider the function f defined by f(x) = 3x 1.

1. Find the values of the functions and complete the table below:
x 0 1 2 3 4
f(x) or y
177
2. Find the first differences on x-coordinates. Write your answers in
the boxes above the table:

x 0 1 2 3 4
f(x) or y
3. Find the first differences on y-coordinates and write your answers

in the boxes below the table:
x 0 1 2 3 4
f(x) or y
ES TIO 1. How did you find the values of the function?

What are the first differences on x-coordinates? How did you find
?
2.
QU
NS
them? Are they equal?

3. What are the first differences on y-coordinates? How did you find
4. Is the given function linear? Explain.
5. How is the slope m of the function related to the first differences on
y-coordinates?
B. Consider the function g defined by g(x) = 2x + 4.

1. Find the values of the function and complete the following table:
x 1 3 5 7 9
g(x) or y
2. Find the first differences on x-coordinates and write your answers

on the boxes above the table:

x 1 3 5 7 9
g(x) or y
178
x 1 3 5 7 9
g(x) or y

?
2.
QU
NS

5. How is the slope m of the function related to the first differences on
y-coordinates?
C. Consider the function h defined by h(x) = x2 + 1.

1. Find the values of the function and complete the following table:
x -2 -1 0 1 2
h(x) or y
2. Find the first differences on x-coordinates and write your answers

in the boxes above the table:

x -2 -1 0 1 2
h(x) or y

x -2 -1 0 1 2
h(x) or y
179
?
2.
QU
NS them? Are they equal?

5. What have you realized? State your realization by completing the
statement below.
The function is linear if first differences on x-coordinates are _______
and the first differences on y-coordinates are _______. However, the
function is not linear if the first differences on x-coordinates are equal
and the first differences on y-coordinates are ___________.
Exercise 2
Determine whether the function below is linear given the table.
1. x -2 -1 0 1 2 6. x -2 -1 0 1 2
f(x) or y 1 2 3 4 5 f(x) or y -1 2 5 8 11
2. x -2 -1 0 1 2 7. x 5 4 3 2 1
f(x) or y -3 -1 1 3 5 f(x) or y -1 2 5 8 11
3. x -2 -1 0 1 2 8. x -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
f(x) or y 5 2 -1 -4 -7 f(x) or y 15 11 7 3 -1
4. x 1 2 3 4 5 9. x -2 -1 0 1 2
f(x) or y 4 1 0 1 4 f(x) or y 1 0 1 4 9
5. x -2 0 2 4 6 10. x -4 -2 1 3 4
f(x) or y 4 -2 -4 -2 4 f(x) or y -21 -11 4 14 19
y
3
(2, 3)
2
1
Domain and Range of a Linear Function
-4 -3 -2 -1
0
0 1 2 3
x
Again, consider the function f defined by -1
(0, -1)
f(x) = 2x 1. Study the graph carefully. What -2
have you noticed about the arrow heads of the
-3
graph? What can you say about it?
-4
-5
-6
(-3, -7)
-7
180
ES TIO 1. What do the arrow heads indicate?
?
QU
NS
2. Does the graph extend to the left and right without bound?
3. What is its domain?
4. Does the graph extend upward and downward without bound?
5. What is its range?
6. What is the domain of the linear function? Justify your answer.
7. What is the range of the linear function? Justify your answer.
If function f is defined by f(x) = mx + b, where m 0, then the domain of the function Df

is and the range of the function Rf is . In symbols,
Df = {x|x }, read as: the domain of the function f is the set of all x such that x
is an element of the set of real numbers, and
Rf = {y|y }, read as: the range of the function f is the set of all y such that y is
an element of the set of real numbers.
Exercise 3
Complete the following table.
Function Domain Range
1. f(x) = 2x
2. f(x) = 4x + 1
3. f(x) = -7x 4
4. f(x) = 8x 5
5. f(x) = x 9
Linear Equations
Aside from the sets of ordered pairs and the graph, a linear function f defined by
f(x) = mx + b can also be represented by its equation.
Question:
Does the equation 3x + 2y = 6 describe a linear function? If yes, determine the slope and
the y-intercept.
Solution:
The equation 3x + 2y = 6 can be solved for y:
3x + 2y = 6 Given
3x + 2y + (-3x) = 6 + (-3x) Addition Property of Equality
181
2y = -3x + 6 Simplification
1 1
(2y) = (-3x + 6) Multiplication Property of Equality
2 2
3
y = - x + 3 Simplification
2

3 3
The function f(x) = - x + 3 or y = - x + 3 can be expressed in the form 3x + 2y = 6 with
2 2
3
slope m = - while the y-intercept b = 3.
2

A linear equation is an equation in two variables which can be written in two forms:

Standard Form: Ax + By = C, where A, B, and C, A and B not both 0;
and
Slope-Intercept Form: y = mx + b, where m is the slope and b is the y-intercept,
m and b.
How do we rewrite the equation 3x 5y = 10 in the form y = mx + b? Determine its slope

and y-intercept.
Solution:
3x 5y = 10 Given
3x 5y + (-3x) = 10 + (-3x) Addition Property of Equality
-5y = -3x + 10 Simplification
1 1
- (-5y) = - (-3x + 10) Multiplication Property of Equality
5 5
3
y = x 2 Simplification
5
3
The slope is and the y-intercept is -2.
5
1
How do we rewrite the equation y = x + 3 in the form Ax + By = C?
2
Solution:
1
y= x + 3 Given
2
1
2(y) = 2( x + 3) Multiplication Property of Equality
2
2y = x + 6 Simplification
2y + (-x) = x + 6 + (-x) Addition Property of Equality
-x + 2y = 6 Simplification
(-1)(-x + 2y) = (-1)(6) Multiplication Property of Equality
x 2y = -6 Simplification
182
Exercise 4
Rewrite the following equations in the form Ax + By = C.
1
1. y = -x + 4 6. y= x+3
2
2
2. y = -2x + 6 7. y = x 3
3
1
3. y = 5x + 7 8. y = 2x +
4
5 3
4. y = 3x 8 9. y = x +
2 2
1 5 3
5. y= x 10. y = x +
2 4 8
Exercise 5
Rewrite the following equations in the form y = mx + b and identify the values of m and b.
1. 2x + y = 9 6. 5x 7y = 2
1
2. x + 2y = 4 7. 3x + y=4
2
2 1
3. 3x y = 2 8. x y=1
3 3
5 2
4. 5x + 2y = 7 9. x+ y5=0
2 3
2 1 3
5. -3x + 3y 1 = 0 10. x y =
3 5 5
Slope of a Line
Shown at the right is the picture of Mount Mayon. It is one of the fascinating volcanoes in
the Philippines because of its almost symmetrical conical shape. The approximate steepness
of the volcano is labelled by the line.
The slope of the line can be used to describe how steep Mount
Mayon is.
A line can be described by its steepness or slope. The slope m of a

line can be computed by finding the quotient of the rise and the run. That
is, http://wonderfulworldreview.blogspot.
com/2011/05/mayon-volcano-albay-
slope philippines.html
rise y
m =
run
R
The rise refers to the vertical change or change in y-coordinate change in
while the run is the horizontal change or change in x-coordinate. P y-coordinate
That is, Q
change in x-coordinate
rise vertical change change in y-coordinate 0 x
m= = =
run horizontal change change in x-coordinate
183
How do you solve the change in y-coordinate? What about the change in x-coordinate?
Suppose two points A and B have coordinates (1, 1) and (2, 3), respectively.
y
How is rise = 2 arrived at? Explain.
B
How is run = 1 arrived at? Explain. 3
What is the slope? How did you find the slope? 2 rise = 2
How did you find the change in y-coordinate? A
1
How did you find the change in x-coordinate?
run = 1
What have you realized? 0
0 x
-2 -1 1 2 3
-1
Express your realization by completing the box below:
-2
If P1(x1, y1) and P2(x2, y2), where x1 x2, then the

slope m of the line can be computed by the formula:
m = --------------
The slope m of the line passing through two points P1(x1, y1) and P2(x2, y2) is given by
y2 y1 y y2
m= or m = 1 , where x1 x2.
x2 x1 x1 x2
Exercise 6
Find the slope of each line below.
y y y
1. 2. 3.
3 (0, 3) 3
(0, 3)
2 3 2
1 2 1
(2, 1) (1, 1) (2, 1)
0 0
-2 -1 0 1 2
x 1
-2 -1 0 1 2
x
0
-1
-2 -1 0 1 2
x -1
-2 -1 -2
-2
(-2, -4)
184
y
4. 5. y
4 (2, 4)
3
3
2
2 (2, 2)
1
(4, 0) 1
0
0
x
-2 -1 1 2 3 4
0
0
x
-1 -2 -1 1 2 3
-1
-2
(0, -2)
-2
-3
-3
-4
ES TIO 1. How did you find the slope of the line?

2. What is the trend of the graph? Is it increasing? Or decreasing?
?
QU
NS
3. What is the slope of each increasing graph? What are the signs of the
slopes?
4. What is the slope of the decreasing graph? What is the sign of the
slope?
5. Do the graphs represent linear functions? Why or why not?
6. What is the slope of the horizontal line? How about the vertical line?
Note that:
A basic property of a line, other than vertical line, is that its slope is constant.
The slope of the horizontal line is zero while that of the vertical line is undefined. A
vertical line does not represent a linear function.
The value of the slope m tells the trend of the graph.
If m is positive, then the graph is increasing from left to right.
If m is negative, then the graph is decreasing from left to right.
If m is zero, then the graph is a horizontal line.
If m is undefined, then the graph is a vertical line.
y y y y
x x x x
m>0 m<0 m=0 m undefined

Challenge Questions
1. Determine the value of a that will make the slope of the line through the two given points
equal to the given value of m.
1
a. (4, -3) and (2, a); m =
4
b. (a + 3, 5) and (1, a 2); m = 4
2. If A, B, and C and the line is described by Ax + By = C, find its slope.
185
y
Consider the graph of the function f defined 5
(2, 5)
f(x) = 2x + 1 at the right. 4
3
Question to Ponder: 2
1 (0, 1)
1. What is the slope of the line using any of the 0 x
formulae? -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
-1
2. Compare the slope you have computed to
-2
the numerical coefficient of x in the given
function -3
-4
The slope of the function f defined by f(x) = mx + b is the value of m.
Exercise 7
Determine the slope of each line, if any. Identify which of the lines is vertical or horizontal.
1. f(x) = 2x 5 6. 2x y = 5
2. f(x) = -3x + 7 7. 7x 3y 10 = 0
1 1
3. f(x) = x + 6 8. x+ y8=0
2 4
1
4. f(x) = x 8 9. x = 8
4
2 1
5. f(x) = x 10. 2y + 1 = 0
3 2
A ctivity 9
STEEP UP!
Description: This activity will enable you to use the concept of slope in real life. This can
be done by groups of 5 members.
Directions: Find any inclined object or location that you could see in your school and
then determine its steepness.
ES TIO
1. How did you find the steepness of the inclined object?
?
QU
NS
2. Have you encountered any difficulty in determining the steepness of

the object? Explain your answer.
186
Graphs of Linear Equations
You have learned earlier that a linear function can be described by its equation, either
in the form y = mx + b or Ax + By = C. A linear equation can also be described by its graph.
Graphing linear equations can be done using any of the four methods:
1. Using two points
2. Using x- and y-intercepts
3. Using the slope and the y-intercept
4. Using the slope and a point
Using Two Points
One method of graphing a linear equation is using two points. In Geometry, you learned
that two points determine a line. Since the graph of the linear equation is a line, thus two
points are enough to draw a graph of a linear equation. y
5
Graph the function y = 2x + 1. 3 (1, 3)
2
You may assign any two values for x, say 0 and 1.
By substitution,
1 (0, 1)
0 1 2 3 4
x
-3 -2 -1
y = 2x + 1 y = 2x + 1 -1
y = 2(0) + 1 y = 2(1) + 1 -2
y = 0 + 1 y=2+1 -3
y = 1 y=3
-4
If x = 0, then y = 1. Furthermore, if x = 1, then y = 3. So, the ordered pairs are (0, 1) and
(1, 3). This means that the line passes through these points.
After finding the ordered pairs of the two points, plot and connect them. Your output is
the graph of the linear equation.
Exercise 8
Graph each linear equation that passes through the given pair of points.
5 1 1
1. (1, 2) and (3, 4) 3. (-2, ) and ( , - )
3 2 3
1 1 3 1
2. (5, 6) and (0, 11) 4. (- , - ) and ( , )
3 5 2 2
Using x-Intercept and y-Intercept
Secondly, the linear equation can be graphed by using the x-intercept a and the
y-intercept b. The x- and y-intercepts of the line could represent two points, which are (a, 0)
and (0, b). Thus, the intercepts are enough to graph the linear equation.
187
To graph the equation y = 2x + 1 using this method, you need to solve for the x-intercept
by letting y = 0 and the y-intercept by letting x = 0.
y
Letting y = 0, the equation y = 2x + 1 becomes
5
0 = 2x + 1 Substitution
-2x = 1 Addition Property of Equality 4
1 3
x = - Multiplication Property of Equality y-intercept
2
2
Letting x = 0, y = 2x + 1 becomes 1 1
-1
y = 2(0) + 1 Substitution 2
x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
y = 0 + 1 Simplification
-1
y = 1 Simplification x-intercept
-2
1 -3
The x-intercept a is - while the y-intercept b is 1.
2 -4
Now, plot the x- and y-intercepts, then connect them.
Web Links
Click these links for further
The x-intercept is the abscissa of the coordinates of the point in
references:
which the graph intersects the x-axis. However, the y-intercept is the
ordinate of the coordinates of the point in which the graph intersects the 1. http://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=mvsUD3tDnHk
y-axis. &feature=related.
watch?v=mxBoni8N70Y
Exercise 9
Graph each linear equation whose x-intercept a and y-intercept b are given below.
1. a = 2 and b = 1 3. a = -2 and b = -7
1
2. a = 4 and b = -1 4. a = and b = -2
2
Using Slope and y-Intercept y
5
The third method is by using the slope and the
4 run = 1
y-intercept. This can be done by identifying the slope
and the y-intercept of the linear equation. 3 (1, 3)
rise = 2 2
1
In the same equation y = 2x + 1, the slope m is 2 y-intercept
x
and y-intercept b is 1. Plot first the y-intercept, then use the -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
2 -1
slope to find the other point. Note that 2 means , which
1 -2
means rise = 2 and run = 1. Using the y-intercept as the -3
starting point, we move 2 units upward since rise = 2, and -4
1 unit to the right since run = 1.
188
Web Links
Click these links for more Note that if the rise is less than zero (or negative), we move
examples:
downward from the first point to look for the second point. Similarly,
watch?v=QIp3zMTTACE
if the run is less than zero (or negative), we move to the left from
watch?v=jd-ZRCsYaec
3. http://www.youtube.com/wa the first point to look for the second point. Moreover, a negative
tch?v=EbuRufY41pc&featur
1 -1 1 -1
e=related rational number - can be written as either or but not .
2 2 -2 -2
Exercise 10
Graph each linear equation given slope m and y-intercept b.
1
1. m = 2 and b = 3 3. m= and b = 3
2
3
2. m = 1 and b = 5 4. m = -3 and b = -
2
y
Using Slope and One Point
4
The fourth method in graphing linear equation is by using 3
the slope and one point. This can be done by plotting first the 2
given point, then finding the other point using the slope. B (0, 1) 1
The linear equation y = 2x + 1 has a slope of 2 and a point -3 -2 -1

0
0
2
1 2 3
x
(-1, -1). To find a point from this equation, we may assign any A (-1, -1) -1
value for x in the given equation. Lets say, x = -1. The value of y 1-2
could be computed in the following manner: -3
-4
y = 2x + 1 Given
y = 2(-1) + 1 Substitution
y = -2 + 1 Simplification
y = -1 Simplification
Complete the statement below:
The line passes through the point _____.
The point found above is named A whose coordinates are (-1, -1). Since the slope of the
2
line is 2 which is equal to , use the rise of 2 and the run of 1 to determine the coordinates of
1
B (refer to the graph). This can also be done this way.
B = (-1 + 1, -1 + 2) = (0, 1)
Web Links
Use this link http://
w w w. y o u t u b e . c o m / Note that 2 (the rise) must be added to the y-coordinate while 1
watch?v=f58Jkjypr_I
which is a video lesson
(the run) must be added to the x-coordinate.
for another example.
189
Exercise 11
Graph the following equations given slope m and a point.
1
1. m = 3 and (0, -6) 3 m= and (0, 4)
2
3
2. m = -2 and (2, 4) 4. m= and (2, -3)
2
A ctivity 10
WRITE THE STEPS
Description: This activity will enable you to summarize the methods of graphing a linear
equation.
Directions: Fill in the diagram below by writing the steps in graphing a linear equation
using 4 different methods.
Using
Two
Points
Using x- and
y-Intercepts
Using Slope
and y-Intercept
Using Slope
and One
Point
ES TIO 1. Among the four methods of graphing a linear equation, which one is
?
QU
NS
easiest for you? Justify your answer.

2. Have you encountered any difficulty in doing any of the four methods?
190
y
A ctivity 11
MY STORY 50
40
(4, 40)
Description: This activity will enable you to analyze 30
the graph and connect this to real life. (3, 30)
Directions: Create a story out of the graph of the 20

(2, 20)
linear equation at the right. Share this 10
(1, 10)
to your classmate.
0 (0, 0)
x
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5
-10
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. Do you have the same story with your classmates?

2. Is your story realistic? Why?
A ctivity 12
DESCRIBE ME (PART III)!
y
Description: This activity will enable you to describe the 2
graph of a linear equation in terms of its
1
intercepts, slope, and points.
0
Directions: Given the graph at the right, find the following: x
-2 -1 0 -1 -2 -3
1. x-intercept 4. run -1
2. y-intercept 5. slope
-2
3. rise 6. trend
-3
-4
Complete the table below:
x
y
E S TI 1. How did you identify the x-intercept and the y-intercept?

ON
QU
? 2. In your own words, define x-intercept and y-intercept.

S
3. How did you find the rise and the run?

4. How did you find the slope?
5. Is the graph increasing or decreasing from left to right? Justify your
answer.
6. Have you observed a pattern?
7. What happens to the value of y as the value of x increases?
8. How can the value of a quantity given the rate of change be predicted?
191
Finding the Equation of the Line
The equation of a line can be determined using the following formulae:

a. slope-intercept form: y = mx + b;
b. point-slope form: y y1 = m(x x1); and
y y1
c. two-point form: y y1 = 2 (x x1).
x2 x1
A ctivity 13
SLOPE AND Y-INTERCEPT
Description: This activity will enable you to find the equation of a line using slope-intercept
form.
pencil or ballpen
Direction: Graph these equations in one Cartesian plane.
a. y = 2x c. y = 2x 5 e. y = -2x + 4
b. y = 2x + 4 d. y = x + 5

ES TIO 1. What is the slope of each line? Use the formula m =
rise
to answer
run
?
QU
NS
this question.
2. What is the y-intercept of each line?
3. Complete the table below using your answers in 1 and 2.
Equation of the Line Slope y-Intercept
a. y = 2x
b. y = 2x + 4
c. y = 2x 5
d. y = x + 5
e. y = -2x + 4
4. What can you say about the values of m and b in the equation y = mx + b
and the slope and the y-intercept of each line? Write a short description
below.
____________________________________________________
5. Consider the equation y = 7x + 1. Without plotting points and
computing for m, what would you expect the slope to be? How
about the y-intercept? Check your answer by graphing. Are your
expectations about the slope and the y-intercept of the line correct?
Example:
Find the equation of the line whose slope is 3 and y-intercept is -5.
Solution:
The equation of the line is y = 3x 5.
192
Slope-Intercept Form of the Equation of a Line
The linear equation y = mx + b is in slope-intercept form. The slope of the line is m and
the y-intercept is b.
A ctivity 14
FILL IN THE BOX
Description: This activity will assess what you have learned in identifying the slope and
y-intercept of the line whose equation is in the form Ax + By = C.
Directions: Complete the boxes below in such a way that m and b are slope and y-intercept
of the equation, respectively. You are allowed to write the numbers 1 to 10
once only.

1. 2x + y= 3. 3 x+ y=1
m = b = m
2 = b=2
5
2. x 6y = 7
m = b=
2 6
A ctivity 15
THINK-PAIR-SHARE
y
Description: This activity will enable you to generate 5
point-slope form of the equation of a 4
line. Shown at the right is a line that (x, y)
3
contains the points (x1, y1) and (x, y).
2
Note that the (x1, y1) is a fixed point
1
on the line while (x, y) is any point (x1, y1)
contained on the line. -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
x
Directions: Give what are asked. -1
-2
1. Recall the formula for slope
given two points. -3
2. How do you compute the slope -4
of this line?
3. What formula did you use?
4. Solve for the point-slope form of a line by completing the following:
y
m=
x
y = m(x ) Why?
193
Point-Slope Form of the Equation of a Line
The linear equation y y1 = m(x x1) is the point-slope form. The value of m is the slope
of the line which contains a fixed point P1(x1, y1).
Exercise 12
Find the equation of the line of the form y = mx + b given the slope and a point.
1
1. m = 2; (0, 4) 6. m = ; (-6, 0)
2
2
2. m = 1; (5, -2) 7. m = ; (0, 8)
3
7
3. m = -5; (-3, 9) 8. m = - ;(-4, 3)
2
7
4. m = -7; (4, -1) 9. m = - ;(-2, 8)
4
1 1 8
5. m = -1; (7, 2) 10. m = , (- , )
2 2 3
A ctivity 16
THINK-PAIR-SHARE
Description: This activity will enable you to derive the two-point form of the equation of
the line. Again, recall the formula for the slope and the point-slope form of
the equation of the line.
Direction: Answer the following guide questions:
1. Write in the box the formula of slope m of the line given two points.
2. Write in the box the point-slope form of the equation of the line in the
box.
3. State the justification in the second statement below.
y y1 = m(x x1) point-slope form

y2 y1
y y1 = x x (x x1) Why?
2 1
Two-Point Form of the Equation of a Line

y2 y1
The linear equation y y1 = x x (x x1) is the two-point form, where (x1, y1) and (x2, y2)
2 1
are the coordinates of P1 and P2, respectively.

194
Exercise 13
Find the equation of the line of the form y = mx + b that passes through the following
pairs of points.
1 1
1. (3, 4) and (4, 7) 6. (0, ) and (1, - )
2 2
7 1
2. (8, 4) and (6, 10) 7. ( , 1) and (- , 2)
2 2
1 5 3 3
3. (3, -1) and (7, -5) 8. (- , - ) and (- , )
2 2 2 2
15 1 1 1
4. (-8, 5) and (-9, 11) 9. (- , ) and (- , )
2 3 2 3
5 3 1 1
5. (-1, 10) and (0, 15) 10. (- , ) and ( , - )
2 2 2 4
To enrich your skills in finding the equation of the line, which is horizontal, vertical, or slanting, go
to this link http://www.mathplayground.com/SaveTheZogs/SaveTheZogs_IWB.html. You can also visit
the link in finding the equation of the line, where two points can be moved from one place to another.
http://www.mathwarehouse.com/algebra/linear_equation/linear-equation-interactive-activity.php
A ctivity 17
about the concept.
Directions: Give your revised answers of the questions provided in the first column and
write them in the third column. Compare your revised answers with your
initial answers.
Revised Final
Answer Answer
linear function?
function?
equation of a line?
In this section, the discussions are about linear functions. Go back to the previous
section and compare your initial ideas with the discussions. How much of your initial ideas
are found in the discussions? Which ideas are different and need revision?
Deepen your understanding of the ideas learned by moving on to the next section.
195
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
196
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at the real-life problems involving
linear equations and relations.
A ctivity 18
RIDING A TAXI
Description: This activity will enable you to solve real-life problems involving linear
functions.
Directions: Consider the situation below and answer the questions that follow.
Emman often rides a taxi from one

place to another. The standard fare in
riding a taxi is Php 40 as a flag-down rate
plus Php 3.50 for every 200 meters or a
fraction of it.
Complete the table below:

Distance
(in meters) 0 200 400 600 800 1000
x
Amount
(in Php)
y
ES TIO 1. What is the dependent variable? Explain your answer.
?
QU
NS
2. What is the independent variable? Explain your answer.

3. Based on the completed table, would the relation represent a line?
4. What is the y-intercept? Explain your answer.
5. What is the slope? Explain your answer.
6. Write the linear function and answer the following questions.
(a) If Emman rides a taxi from his workplace to the post office with
an approximate distance of 600 meters, how much will he pay?
197
(b) If he rides a taxi from his residence to an airport with an
approximate distance of 6 kilometers, how much will he pay?
(c) If Emman pays Php 68, how many kilometers did he travel?
How about Php 75? Php 89? Php 92.50?
7. Write the equation of the line in the form Ax + By = C using your
answer in number 6.
8. Draw the graph of the equation you have formulated in item 7.
A ctivity 19
GERMAN SHEPHERD
Description: This activity will enable you to solve problems involving linear functions by
following the steps provided.
Direction: Do the activity as directed.
You own a newly-born German shepherd. Suppose the

dog weighs 1 kg at birth. Youve known from your friend that
the monthly average weight gained by the dog is 5 kg. If the
rate of increase of the dogs weight every month is constant,
determine the equation that will describe the dogs weight.
Predict the dogs weight after five months using mathematical
equation and graphical representation.
Complete the flow chart below then use it to answer the questions that follow.
198
ES TIO 1. What equation describes the dogs weight?
?
QU
NS
2. What method did you use in graphing the linear equation?
3. How will you predict the dogs weight given the rate of change
in his weight?
A ctivity 20
WORD PROBLEMS
Description: This activity will enable you to solve more word problems involving linear
functions. In this activity, you are allowed to use the flow chart given in
Activity 19.
Directions: Solve the following. Show your solutions and graphs.
1. A pay phone service charges Php 5 for the first three minutes and Php 1
for every minute additional or a fraction thereof. How much will a caller
have to pay if his call lasts for 8 minutes? Write a rule that best describes
the problem and draw its graph using any method.
2. A motorist drives at a constant rate of 60 kph. If his destination is

240 kilometers away from his starting point, how many hours will it
take him to reach the destination? Write a rule that best describes the
problem and draw its graph using any method.
3. Jolli Donuts charges Php 18 each for a special doughnut plus a fixed
charge of Php 5 for the box which can hold as many as 24 doughnuts.
How many doughnuts would be in a box priced at Php 221? Write a
rule that best describes the problem and draw its graph. In your graph,
assume that only 1 to 24 doughnuts are sold.
A ctivity 21
FORMULATE YOUR OWN WORD PROBLEM!
Description: This activity will enable you to formulate your own word problem involving
linear functions and to answer it with or without using the 5-step procedure.
Directions: Formulate a word problem involving linear functions then solve. You may
or may not use the flow chart to solve the problem. Be guided by the given
rubric found on the next page.
199
ES TIO 1. What equation describes the dogs weight?
?
QU
NS
Did you
2. encounter
What method
any difficulty
did youinuse
formulating
in graphing
real-life
the linear
problems
equation?
involving
3. How will you
linear predict Explain
functions? the dogs
yourweight
answer.given the rate of
change in his weight?
RUBRIC: PROBLEMS FORMULATED AND SOLVED

Score Descriptors
Poses a more complex problem with 2 or more correct possible solutions and
6 communicates ideas clearly; shows in-depth comprehension of the pertinent
concepts and/or processes and provides explanations wherever appropriate.
Poses a more complex problem and finishes all significant parts of the solution
5 and communicates ideas clearly; shows in-depth comprehension of the pertinent
concepts and/or processes.
Poses a complex problem and finishes all significant parts of the solution and
4 communicates ideas clearly; shows in-depth comprehension of the pertinent
concepts and/or processes.
Poses a complex problem and finishes most significant parts of the solution and
3 communicates ideas unmistakably, shows comprehension of major concepts
although neglects or misinterprets less significant ideas or details.
Poses a problem and finishes some significant parts of the solution and communicates
2
ideas unmistakably but shows gaps on theoretical comprehension.
Poses a problem but demonstrates minor comprehension, not being able to develop
1
an approach.
A ctivity 22
YOU ARE THE SCHOOL PRINCIPAL
This is a preparatory activity which will lead you to perform well the transfer
task in the next activity. This can be a group work.
Situation:
You are the school principal of a certain school. Every week you conduct
an information drive on the different issues or concerns in your school through
announcements during flag ceremony or flag retreat or during meetings with the
department heads and teachers. For this week, you noticed that water consumption is
high. You will make and present an informative leaflet with design to the members of
the academic community. In your leaflet design, you must clearly show water bill and
water consumption and how these two quantities related each other. The leaflet must
also reflect data on the amount of water bill for the previous five months, and a detailed
mathematical computation and a graphical presentation that will aid in predicting the
amount of water bill that the school will pay.
200
A ctivity 23
about the concept.
Direction: Complete the IRF sheet below.

Questions
linear function?
function?
equation of a line?
you made for yourself? Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are
ready to do the tasks in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
201
A ctivity 24
YOU ARE A BARANGAY COUNCILOR

This activity is the transfer task. You have to perform this in your own community.
Situation:
Suppose you are a barangay councilor. Every month, you conduct information
drive on the different issues that concern every member in the community. For the next
month, your focus is on electric consumption of every household. You are tasked to
prepare a leaflet design which will clearly explain about electric bill and consumption. You
are to include recommendations to save water. You are expected to orally present your
design to the other officials in your barangay. Your output will be assessed according to
the rubric below.
RUBRIC: LEAFLET DESIGN

CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
The mathematical The mathematical The mathematical The mathematical
concepts used concepts used concepts used concepts used
Use of
are correct and are correct and are correct but are wrong and the
mathematical
the computations the computations the computations computations are
concepts and
are accurate. are accurate. are inaccurate. inaccurate.
accuracy
Brief explanation
is provided.
The ideas The ideas The ideas The ideas and
and facts are and facts are and facts are facts are not well
Organization complete, orderly completely mostly orderly presented.
presented, and and orderly presented.
well prepared. presented.
The presentation The presentation The presentation The presentation
Quality of uses appropriate uses appropriate uses some visual does not include
presentation and creative visual designs. designs which are any visual
visual designs. inappropriate. design/s.
The recom- The recommen- Some recom- The recommenda-
mendations are dations are sensi- mendations are tions are insensi-
Practicality of sensible, doable, ble and doable. sensible and ble and undoable.
recommendations and new to the doable.
community.
You have just completed this lesson. Before you go to the next lesson, you have to
answer the post-assessment.
202
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
203
SUMMARY/SYNTHESIS/GENERALIZATION
Lets summarize. You have learned that:
1. The Cartesian plane is composed of two perpendicular number lines that meet at
the point of origin (0, 0) and divide the plane into four regions called quadrants.
2. Let be the set of real numbers. The notation 2 is the set of ordered pairs (x, y),
where x and y. In symbols, 2 = = {(x, y)|x, y.}.
3. The signs of the first and second coordinates of a point vary in the four quadrants
as indicated below.
Quadrant I x > 0, or x is positive y > 0, or y is positive or (+, +);
Quadrant II x < 0, or x is negative y > 0, or y is positive or (, +);
Quadrant III x < 0, or x is negative y < 0, or y is negative or (, );
Quadrant IV x > 0, or x is positive y < 0, or y is negative or (+, ).
4. The points which lie in the x-axis have coordinates (x, 0) and the points which lie
in the y-axis have coordinates (0, y), where x and y
5. A relation is any set of ordered pairs.
6. The set of all first coordinates is called the domain of the relation while the set of
all second coordinates is called the range.
7. A function is a special type of relation. It is a relation in which every element in the

domain is mapped to exactly one element in the range.
8. A correspondence may be classified as one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many.

It is one-to-one if every element in the domain is mapped to a unique element in
the range, many-to-one if any two or more elements of the domain are mapped to
the same element in the range, and one-to-many if each element in the domain is
mapped to any two or more elements in the range.
9. A set of ordered pairs is a function if no two ordered pairs in the set have equal
abscissas.
10. If every vertical line intersects the graph no more than once, the graph represents
a function by the Vertical Line Test.
11. The function described by a horizontal line drawn on a Cartesian plane is a

Constant function.
12. A vertical line does not represent a function.
13. The dependent variable depends on the value of independent variable. One is
free to assign values to the independent variable, which controls the value of the
dependent variable.
204
14. f(x), read as f of x, is used to denote the value of the function f at the given value
of x.
15. The domain of the function f is the set of all permissible values of x that will make
the values of f real numbers.
16. A Linear Function is defined by f(x) = mx + b, where m and b are real numbers. Its
graph is a line, m is the slope and b is the y-intercept.
17. The domain of the linear function f is the set of all real numbers. If m 0, then its
range is the set of real numbers. In symbols, Df = {x|x} and Rf = {y|y}.
18. A linear function may be described using its points, equation, and graph.
19. A linear equation is an equation in two variables which can be written in two forms:
a. Standard form: Ax + By = C, where A, B, and C, A 0 and B 0; and
b. Slope-intercept form: y = mx + b, where m is the slope and b is the y-intercept,
where m and b are real numbers.
20. The slope of a line refers to its steepness. It can be solved by using:
rise
a. m = if the graph is given.
run
y2 y1
b. m= if two points are given.
x2 x1
21. The slope of a non-vertical line is constant.
22. The slope of the horizontal line is zero while that of the vertical line is not defined.
23. The sign of the slope tells the trend of the graph.
a. If the slope m is positive, then the line rises to the right.
b. If the slope m is negative, then the line falls to the right.
c. If m is zero, then the graph is a horizontal line.
d. If m is undefined, then the graph is a vertical line.
24. Linear equations can be graphed in four ways:

a. using two points
b. using x- and y-intercepts
c. using the slope and the y-intercept
d. using the slope and a point
25. Linear functions can be solved in three ways:

a. using slope-intercept form
b. using point-slope form
c. using two-point form
25. Problems involving constant rate of change can be solved using linear functions.
205
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Cartesian plane Also known as the Rectangular Coordinate System which is composed of
two perpendicular number lines (vertical and horizontal) that meet at the point of origin (0, 0).
degree of a function f The highest exponent of x that occurs in the function f.
dependent variable The variable (usually) y that depends on the value of the independent
variable (usually) x.
domain of the relation The set of first coordinates of the ordered pairs.
function A relation in which each element in the domain is mapped to exactly one element in
the range.
function notation A notation in which a function is written in the form f(x) in terms of x.
horizontal line A line parallel to the x-axis.
independent variable The variable (usually) x that controls the value of the dependent
variable (usually) y.
line A straight line in Euclidean Geometry.
linear function A function of first degree in the form f(x) = mx + b, where m and b are real
numbers.
mapping diagram A representation of a relation in which every element in the domain

corresponds to one or more elements in the range.
mathematical phrase An algebraic expression that combines numbers and/or variables

using mathematical operators.
ordered pair A representation of a point in the form (x, y).
point-slope form The linear equation y y1 = m(x x1) is the point-slope form, where m is the
slope and x1 and y1 are coordinates of the fixed point.
quadrants The four regions of the xy-plane separated by the x- and y-axes.
range of the relation The set of second coordinates of the ordered pairs.
rate of change The slope m of the line and is the quotient of change in y-coordinate and the
change in x-coordinate.
206
Rectangular Coordinate System Also known as Cartesian plane or xy-plane
relation Any set of ordered pairs.
slope of a line Refers to the steepness of a line which can be solved using the formulae:
rise y y1
m= or m = 2 .
run x2 x1
slope-intercept form The linear equation y = mx + b is in slope-intercept form, where m is the

slope and b is the y-intercept.
standard form The linear equation in the form Ax + By = C, where A, B and C are real
numbers, and A and B not both zero
trend Tells whether the line is increasing or decreasing and can be determined using the
value of m (or slope).
y y1
two-point form The linear equation y y1 = 2 (x x1) is the two-point form, where x1
x2 x1
and y1 are coordinates of the first point while x2 and y2 are coordinates of the second point.
vertical line A line parallel to the y-axis.
vertical line test If every vertical line intersects the graph no more than once, the graph
represents a function.
x-axis The horizontal axis of the Cartesian plane.
x-intercept The x-coordinate of the point at which the graph intersects the x-axis.
y-axis The vertical axis of the Cartesian plane.
y-intercept The y-coordinate of the point at which the graph intersects the y-axis.

Dolciani, M. P., Graham, J. A., Swanson, R. A., Sharron, S. (1986). Algebra 2 and Trigonometry.
Houghton Mifflin Company, One Beacon Street, Boston, Massachussetts.
Oronce, O. A., Mendoza, M. O. (2003). Worktext in Mathematics for Secondary Schools:

Exploring Mathematics (Elementary Algebra). Rex Book Store, Inc. Manila, Philippines.

Oronce, O. A., Mendoza, M. O. (2003). Worktext in Mathematics for Secondary Schools:
Exploring Mathematics (Intermediate Algebra). Rex Book Store, Inc. Manila, Philippines.
Oronce, O. A., Mendoza, M. O. (2010). Worktext in Mathematics: e-math for Advanced

Algebra and Trigonometry. Rex Book Store, Inc. Manila, Philippines.
207
Ryan, M., et al. (1993). Advanced Mathematics: A Precalculus Approach. Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
You Min, G.N. (2008). GCE O Level Pure Physics Study Guide. Fairfield Book Publishers:
Singapore.
http://hotmath.com/help/gt/genericalg1/section_9_4.html
http://jongeslaprodukties.nl/yj-emilb.html
http://math.about.com/od/geometry/ss/cartesian.htm
http://mathsfirst.massey.ac.nz/Algebra/StraightLinesin2D/Slope.htm
http://members.virtualtourist.com/m/p/m/21c85f/
http://people.richland.edu/james/lecture/m116/functions/translations.html
http://roof-materials.org/wp-content/uploads/2011/09/Roof-Trusses.jpg
http://store.payloadz.com/details/800711-Other-Files-Documents-and-Forms-sports-car-.
html
http://wonderfulworldreview.blogspot.com/2011/05/mayon-volcano-albay-philippines.html
http://www.dog-guides.us/german-shepherds/
http://www.go2album.com/showAlbum/323639/coordinartiguana_macaw
http://www.mathtutor.ac.uk/functions/linearfunctions
http://www.myalgebrabook.com/Chapters/Quadratic_Functions/the_square_function.php
http://www.nointrigue.com/docs/notes/maths/maths_relfn.pdf
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/rectangular-coordinate-system.html
http://www.plottingcoordinates.com/coordinart_patriotic.html
http://www.purplemath.com/modules/fcns.htm
http://www.teachbuzz.com/lessons/graphing-functions
http://www.webgraphing.com/
http://www.youtube.com/watch?NR=1&v=uJyx8eAHazo&feature=endscreen
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EbuRufY41pc&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f58Jkjypr_I
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hdwH24ToqZI
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I0f9O7Y2xI4
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jd-ZRCsYaec
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mvsUD3tDnHk&feature=related.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mxBoni8N70Y
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QIp3zMTTACE
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-xvD-n4FOJQ&feature=endscreen&NR=1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UgtMbCI4G_I&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7Hg9JJceywA
208
LINEAR INEQUALITIES
IN TWO VARIABLES
Have you asked yourself how your parents budget their income for your familys
needs? How engineers determine the needed materials in the construction of new
houses, bridges, and other structures? How students like you spend their time studying,
accomplishing school requirements, surfing the internet, or doing household chores?
These are some of the questions which you can answer once you understand the
key concepts of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables. Moreover, youll find out how these
mathematics concepts are used in solving real-life problems.

In this module, you will examine the above questions when you take the following lessons:
Mathematical Expressions and Equations in Two Variables

Equations and Inequalities in Two Variables
Graphs of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
209
differentiate between mathematical expressions and mathematical equations;
differentiate between mathematical equations and inequalities;
illustrate linear inequalities in two variables;
graph linear inequalities in two variables on the coordinate plane; and
solve real-life problems involving linear inequalities in two variables.
Module Map
Module Map
This chart shows the lessons that will be covered in this module.
Mathematical Expressions and

Equations in Two Variables
Equations and Inequalities in Two

Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
Variables
Graphs of Linear Inequalities in Two

Variables
210
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this module. Choose the letter that
corresponds to your answer. Take note of the items that you were not able to answer
correctly. Find the right answer as you go through this module.
1. Janel bought three apples and two oranges. The total amount she paid was at
most Php 123. If x represents the number of apples and y the number of oranges,
which of the following mathematical statements represents the given situation?
a. 3x + 2y 123 c. 3x + 2y > 123

b. 3x + 2y 123 d. 3x + 2y < 123
2. How many solutions does a linear inequality in two variables have?
a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. Infinite
3. Adeth has some Php 10 and Php 5 coins. The total amount of these coins is at
most Php 750. Suppose there are 50 Php 5-coins. Which of the following is true
about the number of Php 10-coins?
I. The number of Php 10-coins is less than the number of Php 5-coins.
II. The number of Php 10-coins is more than the number of Php 5-coins.
III. The number of Php 10-coins is equal to the number of Php 5-coins.
a. I and II b. I and III c. II and III d. I, II, and III
4. Which of the following ordered pairs is a solution of the inequality 2x + 6y 10?
a. (3, 1) b. (2, 2) c. (1, 2) d. (1, 0)
5. What is the graph of linear inequalities in two variables?
a. Straight line c. Half-plane

b. Parabola d. Half of a parabola
6. The difference between the scores of Connie and Minnie in the test is not more
than 6 points. Suppose Connies score is 32 points, what could possibly be the
score of Minnie?
a. 20
b. 30
c. 40
d. 50
211
7. What linear inequality is represented by the
graph at the right?
a. xy>1
b. xy<1
c. -x + y > 1
d. -x + y < 1
In the inequality c 4d 10, what could be the values of d if c = 8?

8.
1 1 1 1
a. d - b. d - c. d d. d
2 2 2 2
9. Mary and Rose ought to buy some chocolates and candies. Mary paid Php 198
for 6 bars of chocolates and 12 pieces of candies. Rose bought the same kinds
of chocolates and candies but only paid less than Php 100. Suppose each piece
of candy costs Php 4, how many bars of chocolates and pieces of candies could
Rose have bought?
a. 4 bars of chocolates and 2 pieces of candies

b. 3 bars of chocolates and 8 pieces of candies
c. 3 bars of chocolates and 6 pieces of candies
d. 4 bars of chocolates and 4 pieces of candies
10. Which of the following is a linear inequality in two variables?
a. 4a 3b = 5 c. 3x 16
b. 7c + 4 < 12 d. 11 + 2t 3s
11. There are at most 25 large and small tables that are placed inside a function room
for at least 100 guests. Suppose only 6 people can be seated around the large
table and only 4 people for the small tables. Which of the following number of tables
are possibly placed inside the function room?
a. 10 large tables and 9 small tables

b. 8 large tables and 10 small tables
c. 10 large tables and 12 small tables
d. 6 large tables and 15 small tables
212
12. Which of the following shows the plane divider of the graph of y x + 4?
a. c.
b. d.
13. Cristina is using two mobile networks to make phone calls. One network charges
her Php 5.50 for every minute of call to other networks. The other network charges
her Php 6 for every minute of call to other networks. In a month, she spends at least
Php 300 for these calls. Suppose she wants to model the total costs of her mobile
calls to other networks using a mathematical statement. Which of the following
mathematical statements could it be?
a. 5.50x + 6y = 300 c. 5.50x + 6y 300

b. 5.50x + 6y > 300 d. 5.50x + 6y 300
14. Mrs. Roxas gave the cashier Php 500-bill for 3 adults tickets and 5 childrens tickets
that cost more than Php 400. Suppose an adult ticket costs Php 75. Which of the
following could be the cost of a childrens ticket?

a. Php 60 b. Php 45 c. Php 35 d. Php 30
213
15. Mrs. Gregorio would like to minimize their monthly bills on electric and water
consumption by observing some energy- and water-saving measures. Which of
the following should she prepare to come up with these energy- and water-saving
measures?
I. Budget Plan
II. Previous Electric and Water Bills
III. Current Electric Power and Water Consumption Rates
16. The total amount Cora paid for 2 kilos of beef and 3 kilos of fish is less than Php 700.
Suppose a kilo of beef costs Php 250. What could be the maximum cost of a kilo of
fish to the nearest pesos?
17. Mr. Cruz asked his worker to prepare a rectangular picture frame such that its
perimeter is at most 26 in. Which of the following could be the sketch of a frame that
his worker may prepare?
a. c.
b. d.
214
18. The Mathematics Club of Masagana National High School is raising at least Php 12,000
for their future activities. Its members are selling pad papers and pens to their school-
mates. To determine the income that they generate, the treasurer of the club was asked
to prepare an interactive graph which shows the costs of the pad papers and pens sold.
Which of the following sketches of the interactive graph the treasurer may present?
a. c.
b. d.
19. A restaurant owner would like to make a model which he can use as guide in writing a
linear inequality in two variables. He will use the inequality in determining the number
of kilograms of pork and beef that he needs to purchase daily given a certain amount
of money (C), the cost (A) of a kilo of pork, the cost (B) of a kilo of beef. Which of the
following models should he make and follow?
I. Ax + By C II. Ax + By = C III. Ax + By C

20. Mr. Silang would like to use one side of the concrete fence for the rectangular pig pen
that he will be constructing. This is to minimize the construction materials to be used.
To help him determine the amount of construction materials needed for the other three
sides whose total length is at most 20 m, he drew a sketch of the pig pen. Which of the
following could be the sketch of the pig pen that Mr. Silang had drawn?
a. c.
b. d.
215
What to
What to Know
Know
Start the module by assessing your knowledge of the different mathematical
concepts previously studied and your skills in performing mathematical operations. This
may help you in understanding Linear Inequalities in Two Variables. As you go through
this module, think of the following important question: How do linear inequalities in two
variables help you solve problems in daily life? To find out the answer, perform each
activity. If you find any difficulty in answering the exercises, seek the assistance of your
teacher or peers or refer to the modules you have gone over earlier. To check your work,
refer to the answers key provided at the end of this module.
A ctivity 1
WHEN DOES LESS BECOME MORE?
Directions: Supply each phrase with what you think the most appropriate word. Explain
your answer briefly.
1. Less money, more __________

2. More profit, less __________
3. More smile, less __________
4. Less make-up, more __________
5. More peaceful, less __________
6. Less talk, more __________
7. More harvest, less __________
8. Less work, more __________
9. Less trees, more __________
10. More savings, less __________
ES TIO a. How did you come up with your answer?
?
QU
NS
b. How did you know that the words are appropriate for the given
phrases?
c. When do we use the word less? How about more?
d. When does less really become more?
e. How do you differentiate the meaning of less and less than?
How are these terms used in Mathematics?
216
f. How do you differentiate the meaning of more and more than?
g. Give at least two statements using less, less than, more, and
more than.
h. What other terms are similar to the terms less, less than, more,
or more than? Give statements that make use of these terms.
i. In what real-life situations are the terms such as less than and
more than used?
How did you find the activity? Were you able to give real-life situations that make use
of the terms less than and more than? In the next activity, you will see how inequalities
are illustrated in real-life.
A ctivity 2
BUDGET, MATTERS!
Directions: Use the situation below to answer the questions that follow.
Amelia was given by her mother Php 320 to buy some food ingredients
for chicken adobo. She made sure that it is good for 5 people.
E S TI O 1. Suppose you were Amelia. Complete the following table with the
?
NS
QU
needed data.
Cost per Unit Estimated

Ingredients Quantity
or Piece Cost
chicken
soy sauce
vinegar
garlic
onion
black pepper
sugar
tomato
green pepper
potato
217
2. How did you estimate the cost of each ingredient?
3. Was the money given to you enough to buy all the ingredients?
Justify your answer.
4. Suppose you do not know yet the cost per piece or unit of each
ingredient. How will you represent this algebraically?
5. Suppose there are two items that you still need to buy. What
mathematical statement would represent the total cost of the two
items?
From the activity done, have you seen how linear inequalities in two variables are
illustrated in real life? In the next activity, you will see the differences between mathematical
expressions, linear equations, and inequalities.
A ctivity 3
EXPRESS YOURSELF!
Direction: Shown below are two sets of mathematical statements. Use these to answer
the questions that follow.
y = 2x + 1 y > 2x + 1
3x + 4y = 15 10 5y = 7x 3x + 4y < 15 10 5y 7x
y = 6x + 12 9y 8 = 4x y 6x + 12 9y 8 < 4x
ES TIO 1.
2.
How do you describe the mathematical statements in each set?
What do you call the left member and the right member of each
?
QU
NS
mathematical statement?
3. How do you differentiate 2x + 1 from y = 2x + 1? How about 9y 8
and 9y 8 = 4x?
4. How would you differentiate mathematical expressions from
mathematical equations?
5. Give at least three examples of mathematical expressions and
mathematical equations.
6. Compare the two sets of mathematical statements. What statements
can you make?
7. Which of the given sets is the set of mathematical equations? How
about the set of inequalities?
8. How do you differentiate mathematical equations from inequalities?
9. Give at least three examples of mathematical equations and
inequalities.
218
Were you able to differentiate between mathematical expressions and mathematical
equations? How about mathematical equations and inequalities? In the next activity, you
will identify real-life situations involving linear inequalities.
A ctivity 4 WHAT AM I?
Directions: Identify the situations which illustrate inequalities. Then write the inequality
model in the appropriate column.
Classification
Real-Life Situations Inequality Model
(Inequality or Not)
1. The value of one Philippine
peso (p) is less than the
value of one US dollar (d).
2. According to the NSO, there
are more female (f) Filipinos
than male (m) Filipinos.
3. The number of girls (g) in the
band is one more than twice
the number of boys (b).
4. The school bus has a
maximum seating capacity
(c) of 80 persons
5. According to research, an
average adult generates
about 4 kg of waste daily (w).
6. To get a passing mark in
school, a student must have
a grade (g) of at least 75.
7. The daily school allowance
of Jillean (j) is less than the
daily school allowance of
Gwyneth (g).
8. Seven times the number
of male teachers (m) is the
number of female teachers (f).
9. The expenses for food (f) is
greater than the expenses
for clothing (c).
10. The population (p) of the
Philippines is about 103
000 000.
219
ES TIO 1. How do you describe the situations in 3, 5, 8, and 10? How about the
?
QU
NS
situations in 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, and 9?
2. How do the situations in 3, 5, 8, and 10 differ from the situations in 1,
2, 4, 6, 7, and 9?
3. What makes linear inequality different from linear equations?
4. How can you use equations and inequalities in solving real-life
problems?
From the activity done, you have seen real-life situations involving linear inequalities
in two variables. In the next activity, you will show the graphs of linear equations in two
variables. You need this skill to learn about the graphs of linear inequalities in two variables.
A ctivity 5
GRAPH IT! A RECALL
Direction: Show the graph of each of the following linear equations in a Cartesian
coordinate plane.
1. y = x + 4

2. y = 3x 1

3. 2x + y = 9
4. 10 y = 4x
5. y = -4x + 9
220
ES TIO
1. How did you graph the linear equations in two variables?
?
QU
NS 2. How do you describe the graphs of linear equations in two variables?

3. What is the y-intercept of the graph of each equation? How about the
slope?
4. How would you draw the graph of linear equations given the
y-intercept and the slope?
Were you able to draw and describe the graphs of linear equations in two variables?
In the next task, you will identify the different points and their coordinates on the Cartesian
plane. These are some of the skills you need to understand linear inequalities in two
variables and their graphs.
A ctivity 6
INFINITE POINTS
Directions: Below is the graph of the linear equation y = x + 3. Use the graph to answer
the following questions.
ES TIO 1. How would you describe the line in relation to the plane where it lies?
2. Name 5 points on the line y = x + 3. What can you say about the
?
QU
NS
coordinates of these points?

3. Name 5 points not on the line y = x + 3. What can you say about the
coordinates of these points?
4. What mathematical statement would describe all the points on the
left side of the line y = x + 3?
How about all the points on the right side of the line y = x + 3?
5. What conclusion can you make about the coordinates of points on

the line and those which are not on the line?
221
From the activity done, you were able to identify the solutions of linear equations and
linear inequalities. But how are linear inequalities in two variables used in solving real-life
problems? You will find these out in the activities in the next section. Before performing
these activities, read and understand first important notes on linear inequalities in two
variables and the examples presented.
A linear inequality in two variables is an inequality that can be written in one of the
following forms:
Ax + By < C Ax + By C
Ax + By > C Ax + By C

where A, B, and C are real numbers and A and B are not both equal to zero.
Examples: 1. 4x y > 1 4. 8x 3y 14
2. x + 5y 9 5. 2y > x 5
3. 3x + 7y < 2 6. y 6x + 11
Certain situations in real life can be modeled by linear inequalities.
Examples: 1. The total amount of 1-peso coins and 5-peso coins in the bag is more than
Php 150.

The situation can be modeled by the linear inequality x + 5y > 150, where x is the
number of 1-peso coins and y is the number of 5-peso coins.
2. Emily bought two blouses and a pair of pants. The total amount she paid for
the items is not more than Php 980.
The situation can be modeled by the linear inequality 2x + y 980, where x is the cost
of each blouse and y is the cost of a pair of pants.
The graph of a linear inequality in

two variables is the set of all points in the
rectangular coordinate system whose ordered
pairs satisfy the inequality. When a line is
graphed in the coordinate plane, it separates
the plane into two regions called half- planes.
The line that separates the plane is called the
plane divider.
222
To graph an inequality in two variables, the following steps could be followed.
1. Replace the inequality symbol with an equal sign. The resulting equation becomes
the plane divider.
Examples: a. y > x + 4 y=x+4

b. y < x 2 y=x2
c. y -x + 3 y = -x + 3
d. y -x 5 y = -x 5
2. Graph the resulting equation with a solid line if the original inequality contains or
symbol. The solid line indicates that all points on the line are part of the solution
of the inequality. If the inequality contains < or > symbol, use a dash or a broken
line. The dash or broken line indicates that the coordinates of all points on the line
are not part of the solution set of the inequality.

a. y > x + 4 c. y -x + 3
b. y < x 2 d. y -x 5
223
3. Choose three points in one of the half-planes that are not on the line. Substitute
the coordinates of these points into the inequality. If the coordinates of these
points satisfy the inequality or make the inequality true, shade the half-plane or
the region on one side of the plane divider where these points lie. Otherwise, the
other side of the plane divider will be shaded.
a. y > x + 4 c. y -x + 3
For example, points (0, 3), (2, 2), and For example, points (-2, 8), (0, 7), and
(4, -5) do not satisfy the inequality y > x + 4. (8, -1) satisfy the inequality y -x + 3.
Therefore, the half-plane that does not Therefore, the half-plane containing
contain these points will be shaded. these points will be shaded.
The shaded portion constitutes the The shaded portion constitutes the
solution of the linear inequality. solution of the linear inequality.
b. y < x 2 d. y -x 5
Learn more about
Linear Inequalities
in Two Variables
through the WEB.
You may open the
following links.
1. http://library.think-
quest.org/20991/alg
/systems.html
2. http://www.kgsepg.
com/project-id/6565-
inequalities-two-vari-
able
3. http://www.monterey-
institute.org/courses/
Algebra1/COURSE_
TEXT_RESOURCE/
U05_L2_T1_text_fi-
nal.html
4. http://www.phschool.
com/atschool/acade-
my123/english/acad-
emy123_content/wl-
book-demo/ph-237s.
html
For example, points (0, 5), (-3, 7), and (2, 10) For example, points (12, -3), (0, -9), and (3, -11)
5. http://www.purple- do not satisfy the inequality y < x 2. satisfy the inequality y -x 5.
math.com/modules/
ineqgrph.html
Therefore, the half-plane that does not Therefore, the half-plane containing these
6. http://math.tutorvista. contain these points will be shaded. points will be shaded.
com/algebra/linear-
equations-in-two-
The shaded portion constitutes the solution The shaded portion constitutes the solution of
variables.html of the linear inequality. the linear inequality.
224
Now that you learned about linear inequalities in two variables and their graphs, you
may now try the activities in the next section.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand key concepts of linear inequalities
in two variables including their graphs and how they are used in real-life situations. Use
the mathematical ideas and the examples presented in answering the activities provided.
A ctivity 7
THATS ME!
Directions: Tell which of the following is a linear inequality in two variables. Explain your
answer.
1. 3x y 12 6. -6x = 4 + 2y
19 < y 7.
2. x + 3y 7
2
3. y= x 8. x > -8
5
4. x 2y + 5 9. 9(x 2) < 15
5. 7(x - 3) < 4y 10. 13x + 6 < 10 7y
ES TIO a. How did you identify linear inequalities in two variables? How about
those which are not linear inequalities in two variables?
?
QU
NS
b. What makes a mathematical statement a linear inequality in two

variables?
c. Give at least 3 examples of linear inequalities in two variables.
Describe each.
How did you find the activity? Were you able to identify linear inequalities in two
variables? In the next activity, you will determine if a given ordered pair is a solution of a
linear inequality.
225
A ctivity 8
WHATS YOUR POINT?
Directions: State whether each given ordered pair is a solution of the inequality. Justify
your answer.
1. 2x y > 10; (7, 2) 6. -3x + y < -12; (0, -5)
2. x + 3y 8; (4, -1) 7. 9 + x y; (-6, 3)
3. y < 4x 5; (0, 0) 8. 2y 2x 14; (-3, -3)

1 1
4. 7x 2y 6; (-3, -8) 9. x + y > 5; (4, )
2 2
2 1
5. 16 y > x; (-1, 9) 10. 9x + y < 2; ( ,1)
3 5
ES TIO a. How did you determine if the given ordered pair is a solution of the
?
QU
NS
inequality?
b. What did you do to justify your answer?
From the activity done, were you able to determine if the given ordered pair is a solution
of the linear inequality? In the next activity, you will determine if the given coordinates of
points on the graph satisfy an inequality.
A ctivity 9
COME AND TEST ME!
Directions: Tell which of the given coordinates of points on the graph satisfy the inequality.
1. y < 2x + 2
a. (0, 2)
b. (5, 1)
c. (-4, 6)
d. (8, -9)
e. (-3, -12)
226
2. 3x 12 6y
a. (1, -1)
b. (4, 0)
c. (6, 3)
d. (0, 5)
e. (-2, 8)
3. 3y 2x 6 5. 2x + y > 3
a. (0, 0)
b. (3, -4)
c. (0, -2)
d. (-9, -1)
e. (-5, 6)
4. -4y < 2x - 12
a. (2, 4)
b. (-4, 5)
c. (-2, -2)
d. (8.2, 5.5)
1
e. (4, )
2
227
5. 2x + y > 3
1
a. (1 , 0)
2
b. (7, 1)
c. (0, 0)
d. (2, -12)
e. (-10, -8)
ES TIO a. How did you determine if the given coordinates of points on the
?
QU
NS
graph satisfy the inequality?

b. What did you do to justify your answer?
Were you able to determine if the given coordinates of points on the graph satisfy
the inequality? In the next activity, you will shade the part of the plane divider where the
solutions of the inequality are found.
A ctivity 10
COLOR ME!
Direction: Shade the part of the plane divider where the solutions of the inequality is
found.
1. y < x + 3 2. y x > 5
228
3. x y 4 5. 2x + y < 2
4. x +y1
ES TIO a. How did you determine the part of the plane to be shaded?
?
QU
NS
b. Suppose a point is located on the plane where the graph of a linear

inequality is drawn. How do you know if the coordinates of this point
is a solution of the inequality?
c. Give at least 5 solutions for each linear inequality.
From the activity done, you were able to shade the part of the plane divider where
the solutions of the inequality are found. In the next activity, you will draw and describe the
graph of linear inequalities.
229
A ctivity 11
GRAPH AND TELL
Directions: Show the graph and describe the solutions of each of the following
inequalities. Use the Cartesian coordinate plane below.
1. y > 4x
2. y > x + 2
3. 3x + y 5
1
4. y < x
3
5. x y < -2
ES TIO a. How did you graph each of the linear inequalities?

?
QU
NS
b. How do you describe the graphs of linear inequalities in two variables?

c. Give at least 3 solutions for each linear inequality.
d. How did you determine the solutions of the linear inequalities?
Were you able to draw and describe the graph of linear inequalities? Were you able
to give at least 3 solutions for each linear inequality? In the next activity, you will determine
the linear inequality whose graph is described by the shaded region.
230
A ctivity 12
NAME THAT GRAPH!
Direction: Write a linear inequality whose graph is described by the shaded region.
1. 4.
2. 5.
3.
231
ES TIO a. How did you determine the linear inequality given its graph?
?
QU
NS b. What mathematics concepts or principles did you apply to come up

with the inequality?
c. When will you use the symbol >, <, , or in a linear inequality?
From the activity done, you were able to determine the linear inequality whose graph
is described by the shaded region. In the succeeding activity, you will translate real-life
situations into linear inequalities in two variables.
A ctivity 13
TRANSLATE ME!
Directions: Write each statement as linear inequality in two variables.
1. The sum of 20-peso bills (t) and fifty peso bills (f) is greater than
Php 420.
2. The difference between the weight of Diana (d) and Princess (p) is at
least 26.
3. Five times the length of a ruler (r) increased by 2 inches is less than
the height of Daniel (h).
4. In a month, the total amount the family spends for food (f) and
educational expenses (e) is at most Php 8,000.
5. The price of a motorcycle (m) less Php 36,000 is less than or equal to
the price of a bicycle (b).
6. A dozen of short pants (s) added to half a dozen of pajamas (p) has a
total cost of not greater than Php 960.
7. The difference of the number of 300-peso tickets (p) and 200-peso
tickets (q) is not less than 30.
8. Thrice the number of red balls (r) is less than the number of blue balls
(b).
9. The number of apples (a) more than twice the number of ponkans (p)
is greater than 24.
10. Nicole bought 2 blouses (b) and 3 shirts (s) and paid not more than
Php 1,150.
ES TIO a. How did you translate the given situations into linear inequalities?
b. When do we use the term at most? How about at least?
?
QU
NS
c. What other terms are similar to at most? How about at least?

d. Give at least two statements that make use of these terms.
e. In what real-life situations are the terms such as at most and at least
used?
232
Were you able to translate real-life situations into linear inequalities in two variables?
In the next activity, you will find out how linear inequalities in two variables are used in real-
life situations and in solving problems.
A ctivity 14
MAKE IT REAL!
Directions: Answer the following questions. Give your complete solutions or explanations.
1. The difference between Connies height and Janels height is not more
than 1.5 ft.
a. What mathematical statement represents the difference in the

heights of Connie and Janel? Define the variables used.
b. Based on the mathematical statement you have given, who is
taller? Why?
c. Suppose Connies height is 5 ft and 3 in, what could be the
height of Janel? Explain your answer.
2. A motorcycle has a reserved fuel of 0.5 liter which can be used if its
3-liter fuel tank is about to be emptied. The motorcycle consumes at
most 0.5 liters of fuel for every 20 km of travel.
a. What mathematical statement represents the amount of fuel

that would be left in the motorcycles fuel tank after traveling a
certain distance if its tank is full at the start of travel?
b. Suppose the motorcycles tank is full and it travels a distance of
55 km, about how much fuel would be left in its tank?
c. If the motorcycle travels a distance of 130 km with its tank full,
would the amount of fuel in its tank be enough to cover the given
distance? Explain your answer.
3. The total amount Jurene paid for 5 kilos of rice and 2 kilos of fish is
less than Php 600.
a. What mathematical statement represents the total amount

Jurene paid? Define the variables used.
b. Suppose a kilo of rice costs Php 35. What could be the greatest
cost of a kilo of fish to the nearest pesos?
c. Suppose Jurene paid more than Php 600 and each kilo of rice
costs Php 34. What could be the least amount she will pay for 2
kilos of fish to the nearest pesos?
233
4. A bus and a car left a place at the same time traveling in opposite
direction. After 2 hours, the distance between them is at most 350 km.
a. What mathematical statement represents the distance between

the two vehicles after 2 hours? Define the variables used.
b. What could be the average speed of each vehicle in kilometers
per hour?
c. If the car travels at a speed of 70 kilometers per hour, what could
be the maximum speed of the bus?
d. If the bus travels at a speed of 70 kilometers per hour, is it
possible that the cars speed is 60 kilometers per hour? Explain
or justify your answer.
e. If the cars speed is 65 kilometers per hour, is it possible that
the bus speed is 75 kilometers per hour? Explain or justify your
answer.
From the activity done, you were able to find out how linear inequalities in two variables
are used in real-life situations and in solving problems. Can you give other real-life situations
where linear inequalities in two variables are illustrated? Now, lets go deeper by moving on
to the next part of this module.
234
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
235
What to
What to Understand
Understand
In this part, you are going to think deeper and test further your understanding of
linear inequalities in two variables. After doing the following activities, you should be
able to answer the question: In what other real-life situations will you be able to
find the applications of linear inequalities in two variables?
A ctivity 15
THINK DEEPER.
Directions: Answer the following questions. Give your complete solutions or explanations.
1. How do you differentiate linear inequalities in two variables from linear

equations in two variables?
2. How many values of the variables would satisfy a given linear inequality
in two variables? Give an example to support your answer.
3. Airen says, Any values of x and y, satisfy the linear equation y = x + 5

also satisfy the inequality y < x + 5. Do you agree with Airen? Justify your
answer.
4. Katherine bought some cans of sardines and corned beef. She gave
the store owner Php 200 as payment. However, the owner told her
that the amount is not enough. What could be the reasons? What
mathematical statement would represent the given situation?
5. Jay is preparing a 24-m2 rectangular garden in a 64-m2 vacant square

lot.
a. What could be the dimensions of the garden?

b. Is it possible for Jay to prepare a 2 m by 12 m garden? Why?
c. What mathematical statement would represent the possible
perimeter of the garden? Explain your answer.
ES TIO What new insights do you have about linear inequalities in two
?
QU
NS
variables? What new connections have you made for yourself?
Now extend your understanding. This time, apply what you have
learned in real life by doing the tasks in the next section.
236
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
In this section, you will be applying your understanding of linear inequalities in

two variables through the following culminating activities that reflect meaningful and
relevant situations. You will be given practical tasks wherein you will demonstrate your
understanding.
A ctivity 16
LETS ROLE-PLAY!
Directions: Cite and role-play at least two situations in real-life where linear inequalities
in two variables are illustrated. Formulate problems out of these situations
then solve them. Show the graphs of the linear inequalities drawn from these
situations.
RUBRIC: Real-life Situations on Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
4 3 2 1
The situation is clear, The situation is The situation is not The situation is not
realistic and the use clear and the use of too clear and the use clear and the use of
of linear inequalities linear inequalities of linear inequalities linear inequalities
in two variables and in two variables is in two variables is in two variables is
other mathematical not illustrated. The not illustrated. The not illustrated. The
statements are problem formulated problem formulated problem formulated
properly illustrated. is related to the is related to the is not related to the
The problem situation and the situation and the situation and the
formulated is answer is correct. answer is incorrect. answer is incorrect.
relevant to the given
situation and the
answer is accurate.
237
A ctivity 17
PLAN FIRST!
Directions: Read the situation below then come up with the appropriate budget
proposal. The budget proposal should be clear, realistic, and make use of
linear inequalities in two variables and other mathematical statements.
Due to the rising prices of food commodities, you decided to raise

broiler chickens for your familys consumption. You sought permission from
your parents and asked them to give you some amount to start with. Your
parents agreed to give you some money; however, they still need to see
how you will use it. They asked you to prepare a budget proposal for the
chicken house that you will be constructing, the number of chickens to be
raised, the amount of chicken feeds, and other expenses.
RUBRIC: Budget Proposal of Raising Broiler Chickens
4 3 2 1
The budget The budget The budget The budget
proposal is proposal is clear, proposal is not proposal is not
clear, accurate, practical, and too clear and clear and the
practical, and the use of linear the use of linear use of linear
the use of linear inequalities in inequalities in inequalities
inequalities in two variables is two variables in two
two variables illustrated. is not properly variables is not
and other illustrated. illustrated.
mathematical
statements
are properly
illustrated.
How did you find the different performance tasks? How did the tasks help you see the
real world use of linear inequalities in two variables?
You have completed this lesson. Before you go to the next lesson on system of linear
equations and inequalities, you have to answer the following post-assessment.
238
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
239
This module was about linear inequalities in two variables. In this module, you were able
to differentiate between mathematical expressions and mathematical equations; differentiate
between mathematical equations and inequalities; illustrate linear inequalities in two variables;
graph linear inequalities in two variables on the coordinate plane; and solve real-life problems
involving linear inequalities in two variables. More importantly, you were given the chance to
formulate and solve real-life problems, and demonstrate your understanding of the lesson by
doing some practical tasks.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED IN THIS LESSON:

1. Cartesian coordinate plane the plane that contains the x- and y-axes
2. Coordinates of a point any point on the plane that is identified by an ordered pair of
numbers denoted as (x, y)
3. Geogebra a dynamic mathematics software that can be used to visualize and
understand concepts in algebra, geometry, calculus, and statistics
4. Half plane the region that is divided when a line is graphed in the coordinate plane
5. Mathematical equation a mathematical statement indicating that two expressions are
equal and using the symbol =
6. Linear equation in two variables - a mathematical statement with one as the highest
exponent of its independent variable
7. Linear inequality in two variables a mathematical statement that makes use of inequality
symbols such as >, <, , and
8. Mathematical expression the left or the right member of any mathematical statement
9. Plane divider the line that separates the cartesian coordinate plane into two half planes
10. Slope of a line the steepness of a non-vertical line
11. Solutions of linear equations points in the coordinate plane whose ordered pairs satisfy
the equality
12. Solutions of linear inequalities points in the coordinate plane whose ordered pairs
satisfy the inequality
13. Variables any quantity represented by a letter of the alphabet
14. x-intercept the x-coordinate of the point where a graph intersects the x-axis
REFERENCES:
Bennett, Jeannie M., David J. Chard, Audrey Jackson, Jim Milgram, Janet K. Scheer, and Bert
K. Waits. Holt Pre-Algebra, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, USA, 2005.
Bernabe, Julieta G. and Cecile M. De Leon. Elementary Agebra, Textbook for First Year, JTW
Corporation, Quezon City, 2002.
Brown, Richard G., Mary P. Dolciani, Robert H. Sorgenfrey and William L. Cole. Algebra,
Structure and Method, Book I, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston MA, 1990.
240
Brown, Richard G., Mary P. Dolciani, Robert H. Sorgenfrey, and Robert B. Kane. Algebra,
Structure and Method Book 2. Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 1990.
Callanta, Melvin M. and Concepcion S. Ternida. Infinity Grade 8, Worktext in Mathematics.

EUREKA Scholastic Publishing, Inc., Makati City, 2012.
Chapin, Illingworth, Landau, Masingila and McCracken. Prentice Hall Middle Grades Math,
Tools for Success, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 1997.
Clements, Douglas H., Kenneth W. Jones, Lois Gordon Moseley and Linda Schulman. Math
in my World, McGraw-Hill Division, Farmington, New York, 1999.
Coxford, Arthur F. and Joseph N. Payne. HBJ Algebra I, Second Edition, Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich, Publishers, Orlando, Florida, 1990.
Fair, Jan and Sadie C. Bragg. Prentice Hall Algebra I, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey, 1991.
Gantert, Ann Xavier. Algebra 2 and Trigonometry. AMSCO School Publications, Inc., 2009.
Gantert, Ann Xavier. AMSCOs Integrated Algebra I, AMSCO School Publications, Inc., New
York, 2007.
Larson, Ron, Laurie Boswell, Timothy D. Kanold, and Lee Stiff. Algebra 1, Applications,
Equations, and Graphs. McDougal Littell, A Houghton Mifflin Company, Illinois, 2004.
Smith, Charles, Dossey, Keedy and Bettinger. Addison-Wesley Algebra, Addison-Wesley

Publishing Company, 1992.
Wesner, Terry H. and Harry L. Nustad. Elementary Algebra with Applications. Wm. C. Brown
Publishers. IA, USA.
Wilson, Patricia S., et al. Mathematics, Applications and Connections, Course I, Glencoe
Division of Macmillan/McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, Westerville, Ohio, 1993.
WEBSITE Links as References and for Learning Activities:

1. http://algebralab.org/studyaids/studyaid.aspx?file=Algebra2_2-6.xml
2. http://edhelper.com/LinearEquations.htm
3. http://www.kgsepg.com/project-id/6565-inequalities-two-variables
4. http://library.thinkquest.org/20991/alg /systems.html
5. http://math.tutorvista.com/algebra/linear-equations-in-two-variables.html
6. https://sites.google.com/site/savannaholive/mathed-308/algebra1
7. http://www.algebra-class.com/graphing-inequalities.html
8. http://www.beva.org/maen50980/Unit04/LI-2variables.htm
241
9. http://www.classzone.com/books/algebra_1/page_build.cfm?id=lesson5&ch=6
10. http://www.mathchamber.com/algebra7/unit_06/unit_6.htm
11. http://www.mathwarehouse.com/algebra/linear_equation/linear-inequality.php
12. http://www.montereyinstitute.org/courses/Algebra1/COURSE_TEXT_RESOURCE/
U05_L2_T1_text_final.html
13. http://www.netplaces.com/algebra-guide/graphing-linear-relationships/graphing-linear-
inequalities-in-two-variables.htm
14. http://www.netplaces.com/search.htm?terms=linear+inequalities+in+two+variables
15. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/MyAlgorithms/MathAlgor/linear.
html
16. http://www.purplemath.com/modules/ineqgrph.html
17. http://www.saddleback.edu/faculty/lperez/algebra2go/begalgebra/index.html#systems
18. http://www.tutorcircle.com/solving-systems-of-linear-equations-and-inequalities- t71gp.
html#close_iframe#close_iframe
19. http://www.wyzant.com/Help/Math/Algebra/Graphing_Linear_Inequalities.aspx
WEBSITE Links for Videos:

1. http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/english/academy123_content/wl-
book-demo/ph-237s.html
2. http://video.search.yahoo.com/search/video?p=linear+inequalities+in+two+variables
3. http://video.search.yahoo.com/search/video?p=systems+of+linear+equations+and+ine
qualities
WEBSITE Links for Images:

1. http://lazyblackcat.files.wordpress.com/2012/09/14-lex-chores-copy.png
2. http://www.google.com.ph/imgres?q=filipino+doing+household+chores&start=166&hl=
fil&client=firefox-a&hs=IHa&sa=X&tbo=d&rls=org.mozilla:en-US:official&biw=1024&bi
h=497&tbm=isch&tbnid=e6JZNmWnlFvSaM:&imgrefurl=http://lazyblackcat.wordpress.
com/2012/09/19/more-or-lex-striking-home-with-lexter-maravilla/&docid=UATH-
VYeE9bTNM&imgurl=http://lazyblackcat.files.wordpress.com/2012/09/14-lex-chores-
copy.png&w=1090&h=720&ei=4EC_ULqZJoG4iQfQroHACw&zoom=1&iact=hc&vpx=9
5&vpy=163&dur=294&hovh=143&hovw=227&tx=79&ty=96&sig=10343724102496809
0138&page=11&tbnh=143&tbnw=227&ndsp=17&ved=1t:429,r:78,s:100,i:238
242
SYSTEMS OF LINEAR
EQUATIONS AND
INEQUALITIES IN TWO
VARIABLES

Have you ever asked yourself how businessmen make profits? How can farmers
increase their yield or harvest? How parents budget their income on food, education,
clothing and other needs? How cellular phone users choose the best payment plan?
How students spend their daily allowances or travel from home to school?
Find out the answers to these questions and determine the vast applications of
systems of linear equations and inequalities in two variables through this module.

In this module, you will examine the above questions when you take the following lessons:
Lesson 1 Systems of linear equations in two variables and their graphs

Lesson 2 Solving systems of linear equations in two variables
Lesson 3 Graphical solutions of systems of linear inequalities in two variables
243
Lesson 1 Describe systems of linear equations and inequalities using
practical situations and mathematical expressions.
Identify which systems of linear equations have graphs that are
parallel, intersecting, and coinciding.
Graph systems of linear equations in two variables.
Lesson 2 Solve systems of linear equations by (a) graphing; (b) elimination;
(c) substitution.
Solve problems involving systems of linear equations in two
variables.
Lesson 3 Graph a system of linear inequalities in two variables.
Solve a system of linear inequalities in two variables by graphing.
Solve problems involving systems of linear inequalities in two
variables.
Module Map
Module Map
Systems of Linear
Equations and Inequalities in
Two Variables
Systems of Linear Graphical

Equations in Two Method
Variables and their
Graphs
Algebraic
Methods
Solving Systems of
Linear Equations in
Two Variables Elimination Substitution
Method Method
Graphical Solutions
of Systems of Linear
Inequalities in Two
Variables
244
III. PRE - ASSESSMENT
Part I: Find out how much you already know about this module. Choose the letter that
you think best answers the question. Please answer all items. Take note of the
items that you were not able to answer correctly and find the right answer as you
go through this module.
1. Which of the following is a system of linear equations in two variables?
x + 9y = 2
a. 2x 7y = 8 c.
2x 3y > 12
3x + 5y = -2
b. d. 4x + 1 = 8
x 4y = 9
2. What point is the intersection of the graphs of the lines x + y = 8 and 2x y = 1?
a. (1, 8) b. (3, 5) c. (5, 3) d. (2, 6)
3. Which of the following is a graph of a system of linear inequalities in two variables?
a. c.
b. d.
245
2x + y < 2
4. Which of the following shows the graph of the system ?
x 4y > 9
a. c.
b. d.
5. If 2x + y = 9 and 2x y = 11 , what is the value of x?
a. 4 b. 5 c. 10 d. 20
6. A car park charges Php 45 for the first 3 hours and Php 5 for every succeeding
hour or a fraction thereof. Another car park charges Php 20 for the first 3 hours
and Php 10 for every succeeding hour or a fraction thereof. In how many hours
would a car owner pay the same parking fee in any of the two car parks?
a. 2 hr b. 3 hr c. 5 hr d. 8 hr
7. How many solutions does a consistent and independent system of linear equations
have?
a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. Infinite
8. Which of the following ordered pairs satisfy both 2x + 7y > 5 and 3x y 2?
a. (0, 0) b. (10, -1) c. (-4, 6) d. (-2, -8)
9. Mr. Agpalo paid Php 260 for 4 adults tickets and 6 childrens tickets. Suppose the
total cost of an adult's ticket and a childrens ticket is Php 55. How much does an
adult's ticket cost?
246
10. Which system of equations has a graph that shows intersecting lines?

a. 2x + 4y = 14 c. 4x + 8y = 7
x + 2y = 7 x + 2y = 3
b. -3x + y = 5 d. 3x + y = 10
6x 2y = 1 3x y = 5
11. Mr. Bonifacio asked each of his agriculture students to prepare a rectangular
garden such that its perimeter is at most 19 m and the difference between its
length and its width is at least 5 m. Which of the following could be the sketch of a
garden that a student may prepare?

a. c.
b. d.
3x + y = 2
12. Luisa says that the system has no solution. Which of the following
2y = 15 6x
reasons would support her statement?
I. The graph of the system of equations shows parallel lines.
II. The graph of the system of equations shows intersecting lines.
III. The two lines as described by the equations in the system have the same
slope.
13. Jose paid at most Php 250 for the 4 markers and 3 pencils that he bought. Suppose
the marker is more expensive than the pencil and their prices difference is greater
than Php 30. Which of the following could be the amount paid by Jose for each
item?
a. Marker: Php 56 c. Marker: Php 46

Pencil: Php 12 Pencil: Php 7

b. Marker: Php 35 d. Marker: Php 50
Pencil: Php 15 Pencil: Php 19
247
14. Bea wanted to compare the mobile network plans being offered by two
telecommunication companies. Suppose Beas father would like to see the graph
showing the comparison of the two mobile network plans. Which of the following
graphs should Bea present to his father?
a. c.
b. d.
15. Edna and Grace had their meal at a pizza house. They ordered the same kind of
pizza and drinks. Edna paid Php 140 for 2 slices of pizza and a drink. Grace paid
for Php 225 for 3 slices of pizza and 2 drinks. How much did they pay for the total
number of slices of pizza?
16. The Senior Citizens' Club of a certain municipality is raising funds by selling
used clothes and shoes. Mrs. Labrador, a member of the club, was assigned
to determine how many used clothes and shoes were sold after knowing the
important information needed. She was asked further to present to the club how
she came up with the result using a graph. Which of the following graphs could
Mrs. Labrador present?
a. c.
b. d.
248
17. The Math Club rented a sound system for their annual Mathematics Camp. They
also rented a generator in case of power interruption. After the 3-day camp, the
club paid a total amount of Php3,000, three days for the sound system and two
days for the generator. If each is rented for one day, the club should have paid a
total amount of Php1,100. What was the daily rental cost of the generator?
a. Php 300 c. Php 800

b. Php 600 d. Php 2,400
18. Mrs. Soriano would like to keep track of her familys expenses to have an idea
of the maximum or minimum amount of money that she will allot for electric and
water consumption, food, clothing, and other needs. Which of the following should
Mrs. Soriano prepare?
a. Budget Plan c. Pricelist of Commodities

b. Compilation of Receipts d. Bar Graph of Familys Expenses
19. A restaurant owner would like to make a model which he can use as guide in
writing a system of equations. He will use the system of equations in determining
the number of kilograms of pork and beef that he needs to purchase daily given
a certain amount of money (C), the cost (A) of a kilo of pork, the cost (B) of a kilo
of beef, and the total weight of meat (D). Which of the following models should he
make and follow?
Ax By = C Ax + By = C
a. c.
x+y=D x+y=D
Ax + By = C Ax By = C
b. d.
xy=D xy=D
20. Mrs. Jacinto would like to instill the value of saving and to develop decision-making
among her children. Which of the following situations should Mrs. Jacinto present
to her children?
a. Buying and selling different items

b. A person putting coins in his piggy bank
c. Buying assorted goods in a department store
d. Making bank deposits in two banks that give different interests

249
Part II. Illustrate each mathematics concept in the given figure, then describe it by
completing the statement at the bottom.
Slope of a y - intercept
Lines
Line of a Line
Points on a Coordinates
Points
Line of Points
Parallel Intersecting Linear

Lines Lines Equations
Linear
Inequality
My idea of (mathematics concept given) is ______________________________

____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
______________________
250
Part III. Use the situation below to answer the questions that follow.
One Sunday, a Butterfly Exhibit was held at the Quezon Memorial Circle in Quezon
City. A number of people, children and adults, went to see the exhibit. Admission was
Php 20 each for adults and Php 12 each for children.
Questions:
1. How much did an adult pay for the exhibit? How about a child?
2. Complete the table below for the amount that must be paid by a certain number of
adults and children who will watch the exhibit.
Number of Number of
Admission Fee Admission Fee
Adults Children
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
3. How much would 10 adults pay if they watch the exhibit? How about 10 children?
Show your solution.
4. If a certain number of adults watched the exhibit, what expression would represent
the total admission fee?
What mathematical statement would represent the total amount that will be
collected from a number of children? Explain your answer.
5. Suppose 6 adults and 15 children watch the exhibit. What is the total amount they
will pay as admission? Show your solution.
6. If a number of adults and another number of children watch the exhibit, how will
you represent the total amount they will pay for the admission? Explain your
answer.
7. Suppose the total amount collected was Php 3,000. How many adults and how
many children could have watched the exhibit?
8. The given situation illustrates the use of linear equations in two variables. In what
other real-life situations are linear equations in two variables applied? Formulate
problems out of these situations then solve.
251
After going through this module, you should be able to demonstrate understand-
ing of key concepts of systems of linear equations and inequalities in two variables,
formulate real-life problems involving these concepts, and solve these with utmost ac-
curacy using a variety of strategies.
252
Systems of Linear
Lesson 1 Equations in Two
Variables and Their
Graphs
What to
What to Know
Know
Start Lesson 1 of this module by assessing your knowledge of the different
mathematics concepts previously studied and your skills in performing mathematical
operations. These knowledge and skills may help you in understanding Systems of Linear
Equations in Two Variables and their Graphs. As you go through this lesson, think of the
following important question: How is the system of linear equations in two variables used
in solving real-life problems and in making decisions? To find the answer, perform each
activity. If you find any difficulty in answering the exercises, seek the assistance of your
teacher or peers or refer to the modules you have studied earlier. To check your work,
refer to the answer key provided at the end of this module.
A ctivity 1
DESCRIBE ME!
Directions: Draw the graph of each of the following linear equations in a Cartesian
coordinate plane. Answer the questions that follow.
1. y = 2x + 3 2. 3x y = 2

253
3. y = 5x 1 4. 2x 3y = 6
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
a. How did you graph each linear equation in two variables?

b. How do you describe the graphs of linear equations in two variables?
Were you able to draw and describe the graphs of linear equations in two variables?
Suppose you draw the graphs of two linear equations in the same coordinate plane. How
would the graphs of these equations look like? Youll find that out when you do the next
activity.
A ctivity 2
MEET ME AT THIS POINT IF POSSIBLE
Directions: Draw the graph of each pair of linear equations below using the same
Cartesian plane, then answer the questions that follow.
1. 3x + y = 5 and 2x + y = 9 2. 3x y = 4 and y = 3x + 2
254
3. x + 3y = 6 and 2x + 6y = 12

ES TIO
a. How did you graph each pair of linear equations?
? b. How would you describe the graphs of 3x + y = 5 and 2x + y = 9?

QU
NS
How about 3x y = 4 and y = 3x + 2? x + 3y = 6 and 2x + 6y = 12?

c. Which pair of equations has graphs that are intersecting?
How many points of intersection do the graphs have?
What are the coordinates of their point(s) of intersection?
d. Which pair of equations has graphs that are not intersecting? Why?
How do you describe these equations?
e. Each pair of linear equations forms a system of equations. The point
of intersection of the graphs of two linear equations is the solution of
the system. How many solutions does each pair of equations have?
e.1) 3x + y = 5 and 2x + y = 9
e.2) 3x y = 4 and y = 3x + 2
e.3) x + 3y = 6 and 2x + 6y = 12
f. What is the slope and the y-intercept of each line in the given pair of
equations?
f.1) 3x + y = 5; slope = y-intercept =
2x + y = 9; slope = y-intercept =
f.2) 3x y = 4; slope = y-intercept =

y = 3x + 2; slope = y-intercept =
f.3) x + 3y = 6; slope = y-intercept =

2x + 6y = 12; slope = y-intercept =
g. How would you compare the slopes of the lines defined by the linear
equations in each system?
How about their y-intercepts?
h. What statements can you make about the solution of the system in
relation to the slopes of the lines?
How about the y-intercepts of the lines?
i. How is the system of linear equations in two variables used in solving
real-life problems and in making decisions?
255
How did you find the preceding activities? Are you ready to learn about systems of
linear equations in two variables and their graphs? Im sure you are. From the activities
done, you were able to determine when two lines intersect and when they do not intersect.
You were able to relate also the solution of system of linear equations with the slopes
and y-intercepts of their graphs. But how are systems of linear equations in two variables
used in solving real-life problems and in making decisions? You will find these out in the
activities in the next section. Before doing these activities, read and understand first some
important notes on Systems of Linear Equations in Two Variables and their Graphs and the
examples presented.
Equations like x y = 7 and 2x + y = 8 are called simultaneous linear equations or

a system of linear equations if we want them to be true for the same pairs of numbers. A
solution of such equations is an ordered pair of numbers that satisfies both equations. The
solution set of a system of linear equations in two variables is the set of all ordered pairs of
real numbers that makes every equation in the system true.
The solution of a system of linear equations can be determined algebraically or

graphically. To find the solution graphically, graph both equations on a Cartesian plane then
find the point of intersection of the graphs, if it exists. The solution to a system of linear
equations corresponds to the coordinates of the points of intersection of the graphs of the
equations.
A system of linear equations has:

a. only one solution if their graphs intersect at only one point.
b. no solution if their graphs do not intersect.
c. infinitely many solutions if their graphs coincide.
Exactly one solution No solution Infinitely many solutions
256
There are three kinds of systems of linear equations in two variables according to the
number of solutions. These are:
1. System of consistent and dependent equations
This is a system of linear equations having infinitely many solutions. The slopes of
the lines defined by the equations are equal, their y-intercepts are also equal, and
their graphs coincide.
Example: The system of equations

xy=5
is consistent and
2x 2y = 10
dependent. The slopes of their
lines are equal, their y-intercepts
are also equal, and their graphs
coincide.
2. System of consistent and independent equations

This is a system of linear equations having exactly one solution. The slopes of the
lines defined by the equations are not equal; their y-intercepts could be equal or
unequal; and their graphs intersect.
2x + y = 5
Example: The system of equations
3x y = 9
is consistent and independent. The
slopes of their lines are not equal,
their y-intercepts could be equal or
unequal, and their graphs intersect.
3. System of inconsistent equations

This is a system of linear equations having no solution. The slopes of the lines
defined by the equations are equal, their y-intercepts are not equal; and their
graphs are parallel.
2x + y = -6
Example: The system of equations is inconsistent. The slopes of
2x + y = 10
their lines are equal; their y-intercepts are not equal; and their graphs
are parallel.
257
Systems of linear equations
Learn more about Systems
in two variables are illustrated
of Linear Equations in Two in many real-life situations. A
Variables and their Graphs system of linear equations in
through the WEB. You may two variables can be used to
open the following links. represent problems that involve
1. https://new.edu/resources/solv-
finding values of two quantities
ing-linear-systems-by-graphing such as the number of objects,
2. http://www.mathwarehouse.
com/algebra/linear_equation/ costs of goods or services, or
systems-of-equation/index.php
3. h t t p : / / w w w. p h s c h o o l . c o m / amount of investments, solutions
atschool/academy123/english/
academy123_content/wl-book-
of which can also be described
demo/ph-228s.html using graphs. But how are the
solutions to problems involving
systems of linear equations used
in making decisions?
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to apply the key concepts of systems of linear equations in
two variables and their graphs. Use the mathematical ideas and the examples presented
in the preceding section to answer the activities provided.
A ctivity 3
CONSISTENT OR INCONSISTENT?
Directions: Determine whether each system of linear equations is consistent and

dependent, consistent and independent, or inconsistent. Then, answer the
2x y = 7 x 2y = 9
1. 6.
3x y = 5 x + 3y = 14

2x + y = -3 6x 2y = 8
2. 7.
2x + y = 6 y = 3x 4
x 2y = 9 x + 3y = 8
3. 8.
2x 4y = 18 x 3y = 8
8x + 2y = 7 2y = 6x 5
4. 9.
y = -4y + 1 3y = 9x + 1
-3x + y = 10 3x + 5y = 15
5. 10.
4x + y = 7 4x 7y = 10
258
ES TIO a. How were you able to identify systems of equations that are consistent-
?
QU
NS
dependent, consistent-independent, and inconsistent?
b. When do you say that a system of linear equations is consistent and
dependent? consistent and independent? inconsistent?
c. Give examples of systems of linear equations that are consistent and
dependent, consistent and independent, and inconsistent.
Were you able to determine which systems of linear equations in two variables are
consistent and dependent, consistent and independent, or inconsistent? In the next activity,
you will describe the solution set of system of linear equations in two variables through its
graph.
A ctivity 4
HOW DO I LOOK?
Directions: Determine the solution set of the system of linear equations as shown by the
following graphs. Then answer the questions that follow.
1. 3.
2. 4.
259
ES TIO a. How many solution/s does each graph of system of linear equations
have?
?
QU
NS b. Which graph shows that the system of linear equations is consistent

and dependent? consistent and independent? inconsistent? Explain
your answer.
c. When do you say that the system of linear equations as described by
the graph is consistent and dependent? consistent and independent?
inconsistent?
d. Draw graphs of systems of linear equations that are consistent and
dependent, consistent and independent, and inconsistent. Describe
each graph.
Was it easy for you to describe the solution set of a system of linear equations given
the graph? In the next activity, you will graph systems of linear equations then describe
their solution sets.
A ctivity 5
DESCRIBE MY SOLUTIONS!
Directions: Graph each of the following systems of linear equations in two variables on
the Cartesian coordinate plane. Describe the solution set of each system
based on the graph drawn. Then answer the questions that follow.
1. x + y = 8

x + y = -3
2. 3x y = 7
x + 3y = -4
3. x + 6y = 9
2x + 6y = 18
4. x 2y = 12
6x + 3y = -9
5. 3x + y = -2
x + 2y = -4
260
ES TIO a. How did you graph each system of linear equations in two variables?
? b. How does the graph of each system look like?

QU
NS c. Which system of linear equations has only one solution? Why?

How about the system of linear equations with no solution? infinite
number of solutions? Explain your answer.
In this section, the discussion was about system of linear equations in two variables
and their graphs.
Go back to the previous section and compare your initial ideas with the discussion.
need revision?
261
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
262
What to
What to Understand
Understand
You are going to think deeper and test further your understanding of systems of
linear equations in two variables and their graphs. After doing the following activities,
you should be able to answer the following question: "How is the system of linear
equations in two variables used in solving real-life problems and in making
decisions?"
A ctivity 6
HOW WELL I UNDERSTOOD
Directions: Answer the following.
1. How do you describe a system of linear equations in two variables?
2. Give at least two examples of systems of linear equations in two

variables.
3. When is a system of linear equations in two variables used?
4. How do you graph systems of linear equations in two variables?
5. How do you describe the graphs of systems of linear equations in two

variables?
6. How do you describe systems of linear equations that are consistent

and dependent? consistent and independent? inconsistent?
7. Study the situation below:

Jose wanted to construct a rectangular garden such that its
perimeter is 28 m and its length is 6 times its width.
a. What system of linear
equations represents the
given situation?
b. Suppose the system of linear
equations is graphed. How
would the graphs look like?
c. Is the system consistent and
dependent, consistent and
independent, or inconsistent?
Why?
263
In this section, the discussion was about your understanding of systems of linear
equations in two variables and their graphs.
What new realizations do you have about the systems of linear equations in two
variables and their graphs? What new connections have you made for yourself?
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
A ctivity 7
HOW MUCH AND WHATS THE COST?
Directions: Complete the table below by writing all the school supplies that you use.
Indicate the quantity and the cost of each.

School Supply Quantity Cost
264
Formulate linear equations in two variables based from the table. Then
use some pairs of these equations to form different systems of equations.
Draw the graph of each system of linear equations. Use the rubric provided
to rate your work.
Rubric for Real-Life Situations Involving Systems of Linear Equations in

Two Variables and their Graphs
4 3 2 1
Systematically listed Systematically listed Systematically listed Systematically listed
the data in the table, the data in the table, the data in the table the data in the table.
properly formulated properly formulated and formulated linear
linear equations linear equations in equations in two
in two variables two variables that variables but unable
that form a system form a system of to form systems of
of equations, and equations but unable equations.
accurately drew the to draw the graph
graph of each system accurately.
of linear equations.
In this section, your task was to cite three real-life situations where systems of linear
equations in two variables are illustrated.
use of the topic?
265
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
266
This lesson was about systems of linear equations in two variables and their graphs. The
lesson provided you opportunities to describe systems of linear equations and their solution
sets using practical situations, mathematical expressions, and their graphs. You identified and
described systems of linear equations whose graphs are parallel, intersecting, or coinciding.
Moreover, you were given the chance to draw and describe the graphs of systems of linear
equations in two variables and to demonstrate your understanding of the lesson by doing a
practical task. Your understanding of this lesson and other previously learned mathematics
concepts and principles will facilitate your learning of the next lesson, Solving Systems of
Linear Equations Graphically and Algebraically.
267
Solving Systems of
Lesson 2 Linear Equations in
Two Variables
What to
What to Know
Know
Start the lesson by assessing your knowledge of the different mathematics
concepts previously studied and your skills in performing mathematical operations. These
knowledge and skills may help you in understanding Solving Systems of Linear Equations
in Two Variables. As you go through this lesson, think of the following important question:
How is the system of linear equations in two variables used in solving real-life
problems and in making decisions? To find out the answer, perform each activity. If you
find any difficulty in answering the exercises, seek the assistance of your teacher or peers
or refer to the modules you have studied earlier.
A ctivity 1
HOW MUCH IS THE FARE?
Suppose for a given distance, a tricycle driver charges every passenger

Php 10.00 while a jeepney driver charges Php 12.00.
1. Complete the table below for the fare collected by the tricycle and
jeepney drivers from a certain number of passengers.

Amount Collected Amount Collected
Number of
by the Tricycle by the
Passengers
Driver Jeepney Driver
1
2
3
4
5
10
268
15
20
25
30

2. How did you determine the amount collected by the tricycle and
jeepney drivers from their passengers?
3. Suppose in 3 round trips the tricycle and jeepney drivers had a total of
68 passengers.
a. How would you find the number of passengers each had?
b. What mathematical statement will you use to find the number of
passengers each had?
c. What is the total amount of fare collected from the passengers
by the two drivers? Explain how you arrived at your answer.
d. How would you draw the graph of the mathematical statement
obtained in 3b? Draw and describe the graph.
4. Suppose the total fare collected by the tricycle and jeepney drivers is
Php 780.
a. How would you find the number of passengers each carried?
b. What mathematical statement will you use to find the number of
passengers each had?
c. How would you draw the graph of the mathematical statement
obtained in 4b? Draw the graph in the Cartesian coordinate
plane where the graph of the mathematical statement in 3b was
drawn. Describe the graph.
5. How do you describe the two graphs drawn?
6. What do the graphs tell you?
7. How did you determine the number of passengers each driver had?
269
How did you find the activity? Were you able to use linear equations in two variables
to represent a real-life situation? Were you able to find some possible solutions of a linear
equation in two variables and draw its graph? In the next activity, you will show the graphs
of systems of linear equations in two variables. You need this skill to learn about the
graphical solutions of systems of linear equations in two variables.
A ctivity 2
LINES, LINES, LINES
Directions: Draw the graph of each equation in the system in one coordinate plane.

y=x+7 3x + 8y = 12
1. y = -2x + 1 3. 8x 5y = 12

y = 3x 2 xy=6
2. 8x + 7y = 15 4. 2x + 7y = -6
270
ES TIO a. How did you show the graph of each system of equations?
?
QU
NS
b. How do you describe the graph of each system of equations?
c. Are the graphs intersecting lines? If yes, what are the coordinates of
the point of intersection of these lines?
d. What do you think do the coordinates of the point of intersection of the
lines mean?
Were you able to draw the graph of each system of linear equations in two variables?
Were you able to determine and give the meaning of the coordinates of the point of
intersection of intersecting lines? As you go through this module, you will learn about this
point of intersection of two lines and how the coordinates of this point are determined
algebraically. In the next activity, you will solve for the indicated variable in terms of the
other variable. You need this skill to learn about solving systems of linear equations in two
variables using the substitution method.
A ctivity 3
IF I WERE YOU
Directions:
Solve for the indicated variable in terms of the other variable. Explain how
you arrived at your answer.

1. 4x + y = 11; y= 6. -2x + 7y = 18; x=
2. 5x y = 9; y = 7. -3x 8y = 15; x=
1
3. 4x + y = 12; x = 8. x + 3y = 2; x=
4
4 1
4. -5x 4y = 16; y = 9. x y = 7 ; y=
9 3
2 1
5. 2x + 3y = 6; y = 10. - x ;y = 8 x=
3 2
How did you find the activity? Were you able to solve for the indicated variable in
terms of the other variable? In the next activity, you will solve linear equations. You need
this skill to learn about solving systems of linear equations in two variables algebraically.
271
A ctivity 4
WHAT MAKES IT TRUE?
Directions:
Find the value of the variable that would make the equation true. Answer the

1. 5x = 15 6. x + 7 = 10

2. -3x = 21 7. 3y 5 = 4

3. 9x = -27 8. 2y + 5y = -28
4. -7x = -12 9. -3y + 7y = 12

2
5. x = 8 10. 5x 2x = -15
3
ES TIO a. How did you solve each equation?

?
QU
NS
b. What mathematics concepts or principles did you apply to solve each

equation? Explain how you applied these mathematics concepts and
principles.
c. Do you think there are other ways of solving each equation? Explain
your answer.
Were you able to solve each equation? In solving each equation, were you able to
apply the mathematics concepts or principles which you already learned? Solving equations
is an important skill that you need to fully develop so you would not find difficulty in solving
systems of linear equations in two variables algebraically. But how are systems of linear
equations in two variables used in solving real-life problems and in making decisions? You
will find these out in the activities in the next section. Before you start performing these
activities, read and understand first some important notes on solving systems of linear
equations and the examples presented.
The solution of a system of linear equations can be determined algebraically or graphically.

To find the solution graphically, graph both equations in a Cartesian coordinate plane then find
the point of intersection of the graphs, if it exists. You may also use graphing calculator or
computer software such as GeoGebra in determining the graphical solutions of systems of
linear equations. GeoGebra is an open-source dynamic mathematics software which helps
you visualize and understand concepts in algebra, geometry, calculus, and statistics.
The solution to a system of linear equations corresponds to the coordinates of the points
of intersection of the graphs of the equations.
272
Examples: Find the solutions of the following systems of linear equations graphically.
2x + y = 7 3x + y = 4 x 2 = -5
a. b. c.
-x + y = 1 3x y = -5 2x 4y = -10
Answer (a): The graphs of 2x + y = 7 and

-x + y = 1 intersect at (2, 3).
Hence, the solution of the

2x + y = 7
system is x = 2
-x + y = 1
and y = 3.
Answer (b): The graphs of 3x + y = 4 and 3x
+ y = 10 are parallel. Hence,

3x + y = 4
the system has no
3x y = -5
solution.
Answer (c): The graphs of x 2y = -5 and
2x 4y = -10 coincide. Hence,

x 2 = -5
the system has
2x 4y = -10
infinite number of solutions.
273
A system of linear equations can be solved algebraically by substitution or elimination
methods.
To solve a system of linear equations by substitution method, the following procedures

could be followed:
a. Solve for one variable in terms of the other variable in one of the equations.
If one of the equations already gives the value of one variable, you may proceed
to the next step.
b. Substitute the value of the variable found in the first stem the second equation.
Simplify then solve the resulting equation.
c. Substitute the value obtained in (b) to any of the original equations to find the
value of the other variable.
d. Check the values of the variables obtained against the linear equations in the
system.
2x + y = 5
Example: Solve the system by substitution method.
-x + 2y = 5
Solution: Use 2x + y = 5 to solve for y in terms of x.

Subtract -2x from both sides of the equation.
2x + y 2x = 5 2x y = 5 2x
Substitute 5 2x in the equation -x + 2y = 5.

-x + 2(5 2x) = 5
Simplify.
-x + 2(5) + 2(-2x) = 5 -x + 10 4x = 5
-5x = 5 10 -5x = -5

Solve for x by dividing both sides of the equation by -5.
-5x -5
= x=1
-5 -5
Substitute 1, value of x, to any of the original equations to solve for y.
-x + 2y = 5 -1 + 2y = 5
Simplify.
-1 + 2y = 5 2y = 5 + 1 2y = 6
Solve for y by dividing both sides of the equation by 2.

2y 6
= y=3
2 2
274
Check the values of the variables obtained against the linear equations in
the system.
1. 2x + y = 5; x = 1 and y = 3
2(1) + 3 = 2 + 3 = 5
If x=1 and y=3, the equation 2x + y = 5 is true.
Hence, the cooordinate (1,3) satisfies the equation.
2. -x + 2y = 5; x = 1 and y = 3
-1 + 2(3) = -1 + 6 = 5
If x=1 and y=3, the equation -x + 2y = 5 is true.
Hence, the coordinate (1,3) satisfies the equation.
2x + y = 5
Therefore, the solution to the system is the ordered pair (1, 3).
-x + 2y = 5
To solve a system of linear equations in two variables by the elimination method, the
following procedures could be followed:
a. Whenever necessary, rewrite both equations in standard form Ax + By = C.
b. Whenever necessary, multiply either equation or both equations by a nonzero
number so that the coefficients of x or y will have a sum of 0. (Note: The coefficients
of x and y are additive inverses.)
c. Add the resulting equations. This leads to an equation in one variable. Simplify
then solve the resulting equation.
d. Substitute the value obtained to any of the original equations to find the value of
the other variable.
e. Check the values of the variables obtained against the linear equations in the
system.
3x + y = 7
Example: Solve the system by elimination method.
2x 5y = 16
Solution: Think of eliminating y first.
Multiply 5 to both sides of the equation 3x + y = 7.
5(3x + y = 7) 15x + 5y = 35

Add the resulting equations.
15x + 5y = 35

2x 5y = 16
17x = 51
Solve for x by dividing both sides of the equation by 17.
17x 51
17x = 51 = x = 3
17 17
Substitute 3, value of x, to any of the original equations to solve for y.
2x 5y = 16 2(3) 5y = 16
Simplify.
6 5y = 16 -5y = 16 6 -5y = 10
275
Solve for y by dividing both sides of the equation by -5.
-5y 10
-5y = 10 = y = -2
-5 -5
Check the values of the variables obtained against the linear equations in
the system.
1. 3x + y = 7; x = 3 and y = -2
3(3) + (-2) = 9 2 = 7
If x = 3 and y = -2, the equation 3x + y = 7 is true.
Hence the coordinate (3-2) satisfies the equation.
2. 2x 5y = 16; x = 3 and y = -2
2(3) 5(-2) = 6 + 10 = 16
If x = 3 and y = -2, the equation 2x 5y = 16 is true.
Hence, the coordinate (3, -2) satisfies the equation.
3x + y = 7
Therefore, the solution to the system is the ordered pair (3, -2).
2x 5y = 16
Systems of linear equations in two variables are applied in many real-life situations.
They are used to represent situations and solve problems related to uniform motion, mixture,
investment, work, and many others. Consider the situation below.
A computer shop hires 12 technicians and 3 supervisors for total daily wages of Php 7,020.
If one of the technicians is promoted to a supervisor, the total daily wages become Php 7,110.
In the given situation, what do you think is the daily wage for each technician and super-
visor? This problem can be solved using system of linear equations.
Let x = daily wage of a technician and y = daily wage of a supervisor. Represent the total
daily wages before one of the technicians is promoted to a supervisor.
12x + 3y = 7,020
Represent the total daily wages after one of the technicians is promoted to a supervisor.

11x + 4y = 7,110
Use the two equations to find the daily wages for a technician and a supervisor.
12x + 3y = 7,020
11x + 4y = 7,110
Solve the system graphically or by using any algebraic method.
276
Lets solve the system using Elimination Method. Multiply both sides of the first equation
by 4 and the second equation by 3 to eliminate y.
12x + 3y = 7,020 4(12x + 3y = 7,020) 48x + 12y = 28,080

11x + 4y = 7,110 3(11x + 4y = 7,110) 33x + 12y = 21,330
48x + 12y = 28,080

The resulting system of linear equations is
33x + 12y = 21,330
.

Subtract the terms on both sides of the resulting equations.
48x + 12y = 28,080

33x + 12y = 21,330

15x = 6,750

Using the equation 15x = 6,750, solve for x by dividing both sides of the equation by 15.
15x 6,750
15x = 6,750 = x = 450
15 15
The daily wage of a technician is Php 450.

of Linear Equations in Two
Variables and their Graphs Find the daily wage of a supervisor by substituting 450 for x in
through the WEB. You may any of the original equations. Then, solve the resulting equation.
open the following links.
1. http://www.mathguide.com/les- 12x + 3y = 7,020; x = 450

sons/Systems.html
2. http://www.mathwarehouse. 12(450) + 3y = 7,020 5,400 + 3y = 7,020
com/algebra/linear_equation/
systems-of-equation/index.php
3y = 7,020 5,400
3. http://edhelper.com/LinearEqua- 3y 1,620
tions.htm 3y = 1,620 =
3 3
4. http://www.purplemath.com/
modules/systlin1.htm y = 540
5. h t t p : / / w w w. p h s c h o o l . c o m /
demo/ph-229s.html
The daily wage of a supervisor is Php 540.
academy123_content/wl-book- Answer: The daily wages for a technician and a supervisor are Php 450
demo/ph-232s.html
7. h t t p : / / w w w. p h s c h o o l . c o m / and Php 540, respectively.
demo/ph-233s.html
You have seen how a system of linear equations is used to solve
a real-life problem. In what other real-life situations are systems of linear
demo/ph-234s.html equations in two variables illustrated or applied? How is the system of
atschool/academy123/english/ linear equations in two variables used in solving real-life problems and
demo/ph-235s.html in making decisions?
demo/ph-236s.html
277
Now that you learned about solving systems of linear equations in two variables
graphically and algebraically, you may now try the activities in the next section.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand solving systems of linear
equations graphically and algebraically. Use the mathematical ideas and the examples
presented in the preceding section in answering the activities provided.
A ctivity 5
WHAT SATISFIES BOTH?
Directions: Solve each of the following systems of linear equations graphically, then
check. You may also use GeoGebra to verify your answer. If the system of
linear equations has no solution, explain why.
x + y = -7 3x + y = 2
1. 3.
y=x+1 2y = 4 6x
xy=5 x+y=4
2. 4.
x + 5y = -7 2x 3y = 3
278
y = 5x 2 2x 3y = 5
5. 6.
5x 3y = -14 3y = 10 + 2x
Were you able to determine the solution of each system of linear equations in two
variables graphically? In the next activity, you will determine the resulting equation when
the value of one variable is substituted to a given equation.
A ctivity 6
TAKE MY PLACE!
Directions: Determine the resulting equation by substituting the given value of one
variable to each of the following equations. Then solve for the other variable
using the resulting equation. Answer the questions that follow.

Equation Value of Variable Equation Value of Variable
1. 4x + y = 7; y=x+3 4. 5x + 2y = 8; x = 3y + 1

2. x + 3y = 12; x=4y 5. 4x 7y = -10; y=x4
3. 2x 3y = 9; y=x2 6. -5x = y 4; y = 3x + 5
ES TIO a. How did you determine each resulting equation?

?
QU
NS
b. What resulting equations did you arrive at?

c. How did you solve each resulting equation?
d. What mathematics concepts or principles did you apply to solve each
resulting equation?
e. How will you check if the value you got is a solution of the equation?
How did you find the activity? Do you think it would help you perform the next activity?
Find out when you solve systems of linear equations using the substitution method.
279
A ctivity 7
SUBSTITUTE THEN SOLVE!
Directions: Determine the resulting equation if one variable is solved in terms of the
other variable in one equation, and substitute this variable in the other
equation. Then solve the system, and answer the questions that follow.
x+y=8 3x + y = 2

1. 6.
y=x+6 9x + 2y = 7
x = -y + 7 x y = -3
2. 7.
x y = -9 3x + y = 19
y = 2x 4x + y = 6
3. 8.
4x + 3y = 20 x 2y = 15
y = 2x + 5 2x + y = 10
4. 9.
3x 2y = -5 4x + 2y = 5
2x + 5y = 9 -x + 3y = -2
5. 10.
-x + y = 2 -3x + 9y = -6
ES TIO a. How did you use substitution method in finding the solution set of
? each system of linear equations?

QU
NS
b. How did you check the solution set you got?

c. Which systems of equations are difficult to solve? Why?
d. Which systems of equations have no solution? Why?
e. Which systems of equations have an infinite number of solutions?
Were you able to find the solution set of each system of linear equations? Do you
think this is the most convenient way to solve a system of equations? In the next activity,
you will determine the number(s) that must be multiplied to the terms of one or both
equations in a system of equations. This will lead you finding the solution set of a system
of linear equations in two variables using the elimination method.
A ctivity 8
ELIMINATE ME!
Directions:
Determine the number(s) that must be multiplied to one or both equations
in each system to eliminate one of the variables by adding the resulting
equations. Justify your answer.
To eliminate To eliminate
x y = -3 x + 3y = 5

1. 4. x y
3x + y = 19 4x + 2y = 7
2. 2x + y = 7 2 x + 5y = 10
-2x + 3y = 5 5. 3
5
3. 5x 2y = 12 3x y = 1
4
2x + y = 7

280
To eliminate To eliminate
x y
-3x + 2y = 7 2x + 3y = 6

6. 9.
5x + 2 = 4y 4x + 6y = 12
9x 5y = 8 14x 6y 5 = 0
7. 10.
7y + 3x = 12 6x + 10y 1 = 0
12x + 5y = 2

8.
15x 15y = 1
How did you find the activity? Do you think it will help you perform the next activity?
Find out when you solve systems of linear equations using the elimination method.
A ctivity 9
ELIMINATE THEN SOLVE!
Directions: Solve each system of linear equations by the elimination method, then check
your answers. Answer the questions that follow.
3x + 2y = -4 3x + 7y = 12

1. 6.
2x y = -12 5x 4y = 20
7x 2y = 4 2x + y = 9
2. 7.
5x + y = 15 x 2y = 6
5x + 2y = 6 5x + 2y = 10
3. 8.
-2x + y = -6 3x 7y = -4
2x + 3y = 7 2x + 7y = -5
4. 9.
3x 5y = 1 3x 8y = -5
x 4y = 9 -3x + 4y = -12
5. 10.
3x 2y = 7 2x 5y = 6
ESTIO a. How did you use the elimination method in solving each system of linear
? equations?
NS
QU
b. How did you check your solution set?

c. Which systems of equations were most difficult to solve? Why?
d. When is the elimination method convenient to use?
e. Among the three methods of solving systems of linear equations in two
variables, which do you think is the most convenient to use? Which do
you think is not? Explain your answer.
In this section, the discussion was about solving systems of linear equations in two variables
by using graphical and algebraic methods.
Go back to the previous section and compare your initial ideas with the discussion. How
much of your initial ideas are found in the discussion? Which ideas are different and need revision?
Now that you know the important ideas about solving systems of linear equations in two
variables, lets go deeper by moving on to the next section.
281
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
282
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at some aspects of the topic. You
are going to think deeper and test further your understanding of the different methods of
solving systems of linear equations in two variables. After doing the following activities,
you should be able to answer the following question: How is the system of linear
equations in two variables used in solving real-life problems and in making
decisions?
A ctivity 10 LOOKING CAREFULLY AT THE GRAPHS
Directions: Answer the following questions:
1. How do you determine the solution set of a system of linear equations

from its graph?
2. Do you think it is easy to determine the solution set of a system of

linear equations by graphing? Explain your answer.
3. When are the graphical solutions of systems of linear equations

difficult to determine?
4. How would you check if the solution set you found from the graphs of
a system of linear equations is correct?
5. What do you think are the advantages and the disadvantages of the
graphical method of solving systems of linear equations? Explain your
answer.
Were you able to answer all the questions in the activity? Do you have better
understanding of the graphical method of solving systems of linear equations? In the next
activity, you will be given the opportunity to deepen your understanding of solving systems
of linear equations using the substitution method.
283
A ctivity 11
HOW SUBSTITUTION WORKS
5x 2y = 3
Directions: Use the system of linear equations to answer the following:
2x + y = 12
1. How would you describe each equation in the system?
2. How will you solve the given system of equations?
3. Do you think that the substitution method is more convenient to use in
finding the solution set of the system? Explain your answer.
4. What is the solution set of the given system of equations? Explain how
5. When is the substitution method in solving systems of linear equations
convenient to use?
6. Give two examples of systems of linear equations in two variables that
are easy to solve by substitution? Solve each system.
How did you find the activity? Were you able to have a better understanding of the
substitution method of solving systems of linear equations? In the next activity, you will be
given the opportunity to deepen your understanding of solving systems of linear equations
using the elimination method.
A ctivity 12
ELIMINATE ONE TO FIND THE OTHER ONE
3x 5y = 8
Directions: Use the system of linear equations to answer the following
2x + 7y = 6
questions:
1. How would you describe each equation in the system?

2. How will you solve the given system of equations?
3. Which algebraic method of solving system of linear equations do you
think is more convenient to use in finding its solution set? Why?
4. What is the solution set of the given system of equations? Explain how
5. When is the elimination method in solving systems of linear equations
convenient to use?
6. Give two examples of systems of linear equations in two variables that
are easy to solve by elimination. Solve each system.
The activity provided you with opportunities to deepen your understanding of solving
systems of linear equations in two variables using the elimination method. You were able
to find out which systems of linear equations can be solved conveniently by using the
substitution or elimination method. In the next activity, you will extend your understanding
of systems of linear equations in two variables to how they are used in solving real-life
problems.
284
A ctivity 13
SOLVE THEN DECIDE!
Directions: Answer each of the following questions. Show your complete solutions and
explanations/justifications.
1. Which of the following is more economical when renting a vehicle?

LGs Rent a Car: Php 1,500 per day plus Php 35 per kilometer traveled
Rent and Drive: Php 2,000 per day plus Php 25 per kilometer traveled
2. Luisa sells two brands of tablet PCs. She receives a commission of

12% on sales for Brand A and 8% on sales for Brand B. If she is able
to sell one of each brand of tablet for a total of Php 42,000, she will
receive a commission of Php 4,400.
a. What is the cost of each brand of tablet PC?
b. How much commission did she receive from the sale of each
brand of tablet?
c. Suppose you are Luisa and you want to maximize your earnings.
Which brand of tablet PC will you sell to maximize your earnings.
Which brand of tablet PC will you encourage your clients to buy?
Why?
3. Cara and Trisha are comparing their plans for World Celcom postpaid
subscribers. Should Cara switch to Trisha's plan? Justify your answer.
Cara's plan: Php 500 monthly charge
Free calls and texts to World Celcom subscribers
Php 6.50 per minute for calls to other networks

Trisha's plan: Php 650 monthly charge
Free calls and texts to World Celcom subscribers
Php 5.00 per minute for calls to other networks
4. Mr. Salonga has two investments. His total investment is Php 400,000.
Annually, he receives 3% interest on one investment and 7%
interest on the other. The total interest that Mr. Salonga receives
in a year is Php 16,000.
a. How much money does Mr. Salonga have in each investment?

b. In which investment did Mr. Salonga earn more?
c. Suppose you were Mr. Salonga, in which investment will you
place more money? Why?
285
5. The school canteen sells chicken and egg sandwiches. It generates
a revenue of Php 2 for every chicken sandwich sold and Php 1.25
for every egg sandwich sold. Yesterday, the canteen sold all 420
sandwiches that the staff prepared and generated a revenue of
Php 615.
a. How many sandwiches of each kind was the canteen able to sell
yesterday?
b. Suppose the teacher in charge of the canteen wishes to increase
the canteen's revenue from sandwiches sold to Php 720. Is it
possible to do this without raising the price per sandwich? How?
What new insights do you have about solving systems of linear equations? What
new connections have you made for yourself?
Lets extend your understanding. This time, apply what you have learned in real life
by doing the tasks in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning to real-life situations. You will
be given a practical task in which you will demonstrate your understanding of solving
systems of linear equations in two variables.
A ctivity 14
PLAY THE ROLE OF
Cite situations in real life where systems of linear equations in two variables are applied.
Form a group of 5 members and role play each situation. With your groupmates, formulate
problems out of these situations, then solve them in as many ways as you can.
A ctivity 15
SELECT THE BEST POSTPAID PLAN
1. Make a list of all postpaid plans being offered by different mobile network companies.
2. Use the postpaid plans to formulate problems involving systems of linear equations in
two variables. Clearly define all variables used and solve all problems formulated. Use
the given rubric to rate your work.
3. Determine the best postpaid plan that each company offers based on your current
cellphone usage. Explain your answer.
286
Rubric on Problems Formulated and Solved
Score Descriptors
6 Poses a more complex problem with 2 or more correct possible solutions
and communicates ideas unmistakably, shows in-depth comprehension of
the pertinent concepts and/or processes and provides explanations wherever
appropriate.
5 Poses a more complex problem and finishes all significant parts of the solu-
tion and communicates ideas unmistakably, shows in-depth comprehension
of the pertinent concepts and/or processes.
4 Poses a complex problem and finishes all significant parts of the solution
and communicates ideas unmistakably, shows in-depth comprehension of the
pertinent concepts and/or processes.
3 Poses a complex problem and finishes most significant parts of the solution
and communicates ideas unmistakably, shows comprehension of major con-
cepts although neglects or misinterprets less significant ideas or details.
2 Poses a problem and finishes some significant parts of the solution and com-
municates ideas unmistakably but shows gaps on theoretical comprehension.
1 Poses a problem but demonstrates minor comprehension, not being able to
develop an approach.
Source: D.O. #73 s. 2012

In this section, your tasks were to cite real-life situations and formulate and solve
problems involving systems of linear equations in two variables.
How did you find the performance task? How did the task help you see the real world
application of systems of linear equations in two variables?
287
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
288
This lesson was about solving systems of linear equations in two variables using the
graphical and algebraic methods namely: substitution and elimination methods. In this lesson,
you were able to find different ways of finding the solutions of systems of linear equations and
given the opportunity to determine the advantages and disadvantages of using each method
and which is more convenient to use. Using the different methods of solving systems of linear
equations, you were able to find out which system has no solution, one solution, and infinite
number of solutions. More importantly, you were given the chance to formulate and solve real-
life problems, make decisions based on the problems, and demonstrate your understanding
of the lesson by doing some practical tasks. Your understanding of this lesson will be extend-
ed in the next lesson, Graphical Solutions of Systems of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables.
The mathematical skills you acquired in finding the graphical solutions of systems of linear
equations can also be applied in the next lesson.
289
Graphical Solutions
Lesson 3 of Systems of Linear
Inequalities in Two
Variables
What to
What to Know
Know
Start Lesson 3 of this module by assessing your knowledge of the different
mathematics concepts previously studied and your skills in performing mathematical
operations. These knowledge and skills may help you in understanding Graphical Solutions
of Systems of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables. As you go through this lesson, think
of the following important question: How is the system of linear inequalities in two
variables used in solving real-life problems and in making decisions? To find out
the answer, perform each activity. If you find any difficulty in answering the exercises,
seek the assistance of your teacher or peers or refer to the modules you have gone over
earlier.
A ctivity 1
SUMMER JOB

Nimfa lives near a beach resort. During summer vacation, she sells
souvenir items such as bracelets and necklaces made of local shells. Each
bracelet costs Php 85 while each piece of necklace costs Php 115. She
needs to sell at least Php 15,000 worth of bracelets and necklaces.
ES TIO a. How did you use the elimination method in solving each system of
?
QU
NS
1. Complete
linear the table below.
equations?
b. How did you check the solution set you got?
c. Which system
Number of of equations
Cost isNumber
difficult to
ofsolve? Cost
Why? Total Cost
d. When is thesold
bracelets elimination method convenient
necklaces sold to use?
e. Among 1the three methods of solving 1 systems of linear equations
in two variables, which do you think is the most convenient to use?
2 2
Which do you think is not? Explain your answer.
3 3
290
4 4
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
25 25
30 30
40 40
50 50
60 60
80 80
100 100
2. How much would Nimfas total sale be if she sells 5 bracelets and 5
necklaces?
What about if she sells 10 bracelets and 20 necklaces?
3. What mathematical statement would represent the total sale of

bracelets and necklaces? Describe the mathematical statement,
then graph it for the particular case when Nimfa makes a total sale of
Php 15,000.
4. Nimfa wants to have a total sale of at least Php 15,000. What

mathematical statement would represent this? Describe the
mathematical statement. then graph.
5. How many bracelets and necklaces should Nimfa sell to have a total
sale of at least Php 15,000? Give as many answers as possible then
justify.
How did you find the activity? Were you able to use linear inequalities in two variables
to represent a real-life situation? Were you able to find some possible solutions of a linear
inequality in two variables and draw its graph? In the next activity, you will recall what you
learned about graphing linear equations and inequalities. You will need this skill in finding
the graphical solution of a system of linear inequalities in two variables.
291
A ctivity 2
A LINE OR HALF OF A PLANE?
Directions: Draw the graphs of the following linear equations and inequalities in two
variables. Answer the questions that follow.
1. 3x + y = 10

2. 5x y = 12
3. 2x + 3y = 15
4. 3x 4y = 8
5. 4x + 7y = -8
6. 3x + y < 10
7. 5x y > 12
8. 2x + 3y 15
9. 3x 4y 8
10. 4x + 7y < -8
ES TIO a. How did you graph each mathematical statement?
?
QU
Compare the graphs of 3x + y = 10 and 3x + y < 10. What statements

NS
b.
can you make?
How about 5x y = 12 and 5x y > 12? 2x + 3y = 15 and 2x + 3y 15?
c. How would you differentiate the graphs of linear equations and
inequalities in two variables?
d. How many solutions does a linear equation in two variables have?
How about linear inequalities in two variables?
e. Suppose you drew the graphs of 3x + y < 10 and 5x y > 12 in another
Cartesian coordinate plane. How would you describe their graphs?
What ordered pairs would satisfy both inequalities?
292
Were you able to draw the graph of each mathematical statement? Were you able
to compare the graphs of linear equations and inequalities in two variables? Were you
able to find ordered pairs that satisfy two linear inequalities? Finding solutions of a linear
inequality leads you to understand the graphical solution of a system of linear inequalities
in two variables.
To prepare yourself for the activities that follow, first, read and understand some
important notes on the Graphical Solutions of System of Linear Inequalities in Two
Variables. Acquaint yourself with the solutions of the examples presented so that you can
answer the next activities successfully.
An ordered pair (x, y) is a solution to a system of inequalities if it satisfies all the

inequalities in the system. Graphically, the coordinates of a point that lie on the graphs of all
inequalities in the system is part of its solution.
To solve a system of inequalities in two variables by graphing,
1. Draw the graph of each inequality on the same coordinate plane. Shade the
appropriate half-plane. Recall that if all points on the line are included in the
solution, it is a closed half plane, and the line is solid. On the other hand, if the
points on the line are not part of the solution of the inequality, it is an open half-
plane and the line is broken.
2. The region where shaded areas overlap is the graphical solution to the system. If
the graphs do not overlap, then the system has no solution.
2x y > -3
Example: To solve the system graphically, graph 2x y > -3 and
x + 4y 9
x + 4y 9 on the same Cartesian coordinate plane. The region
where the shaded regions overlap is the graph of the solution to
the system.
Like systems of linear equations

in two variables, systems of linear
inequalities may also be applied to
many real-life situations. They are
used to represent situations and solve
problems related to uniform motion,
mixture, investment, work, and many
others.
Example: There are at most 56 people composed of children and adults who
are riding in a bus. Each child and adult paid Php 80 and Php 100,
respectively. If the total amount collected was not more than Php 4,800,
how many children and adults can there be in the bus?
293
Solution: Let x = number of children in the bus
y = number of adults in the bus
Represent the number of people in the bus as x + y 56.

Represent the amount collected as 80x + 100y 4,800.

Thus, the system associated with the example is actually composed of four linear
inequalities: x + y 56
80x + 100y 4,800
x 0
y 0
The region where the shaded regions overlap is the graph of the
solution of the system. Consider any point in this shaded region, then
substitute its coordinates in the system to check.
Consider the point whose coordinates are (20, 30). Check this against
the inequalities x + y 56 and 80x + 100y 4,800.
If x = 20 and y = 30, then 20 + 30 56. The first inequality is satisfied.
If x = 20 and y = 30, then 80(20) + 100(30) = 4,600 4,800.

Aside from this, (20,30) is also a point that lies on the region where
the shaded areas overlap. This means that under the given conditions, it is
possible that 20 children and 30 adults are in the bus.
Are there any other conditions that you think should be satisfied? Note
that (-2, -5) is also a point that is on the region where the shaded areas
intersect. Does this answer make sense in the context of the given problem?
You are right if you think that it does not make sense.
Since x was defined to be the number of children in the bus, x = -2 is

meaningless. In fact, another constraint for the problem is that x 0 since
there can never be a negative number of children inside the bus.
294
Similarly, since y was defined to be the number of adults in the
of Linear Equations in Two bus, y = -5 is meaningless. In fact, another constraint for the problem is
Variables and their Graphs that y 0 since there can never be a negative number of adults inside
through the WEB. You may the bus.
open the following links.
1. http://www.purplemath.com/
modules/syslneq.htm
2. https://new.edu/resources/solv-
ing-systems-of-linear-inequali- Now that you have learned about the graphical solutions
ties-two-variables
3. h t t p : / / w w w. n e t p l a c e s . c o m / of systems of linear inequalities in two variables, you may try the
algebra-guide/graphing-linear-
relationships/graphing-linear-
activities in the next section.
demo/ph-238s.html
demo/ph-240s.html
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand how systems of linear inequalities
in two variables are solved graphically. Use the mathematical ideas and the examples
presented in answering the succeeding activities.
A ctivity 3
DO I SATISFY YOU?
Directions: Determine if each ordered pair is a solution of the system of linear inequality
2x + 5y < 10
. Then, answer the questions that follow.
3x 4y -8
1. (3, 5) 6. (2, 15)
2. (-2, -10) 7. (-6, 10)
3. (5, -12) 8. (-12, 1)
4. (-6, -8) 9. (0, 2)
5. (0, 0) 10. (5, 0)
ES TIO a. How did you determine if the given ordered pair is a solution of the
system?
?
QU
NS
b. How did you know that the given ordered pair is not a solution of the
system?
c. How many solutions do you think does the given system of inequalities
have?
295
Were you able to find out which ordered pairs are solutions of the given system of
linear inequalities in two variables? In the next activity, you will determine the graphical
solutions of systems of linear inequalities in two variables.
A ctivity 4
REGION IN A PLANE
Directions: Answer the following questions.

2x + 5y < 15
1. Show the graph of the solution of the system . Use the
3x y 8
Cartesian coordinate plane below..
2. How would you describe the graphs of 2x + 5y < 15 and 3x y 8?

3. How would you describe the region where the graphs of 2x + 5y < 15
and 3x y 8 meet?
4. Select any three points in the region where the graphs of 2x + 5y < 15 and
3x y 8 meet. What statements can you make about the coordinates of
these points?
5. How would you describe the graphical solution of the system
2x + 5y < 15 ?
3x y 8
6. How is the graphical solution of a system of linear inequalities
determined?
How is it similar or different from the graphical solution of a system of

linear equations?
296
Were you able to answer all the questions in the activity? Do you now have a better
understanding of the graphical solution of a system of linear inequalities in two variables?
In the next activity, you will be given the opportunity to deepen your understanding.
A ctivity 5
AM I IN THAT REGION?
Directions: Solve the following systems of inequalities graphically. Find three points that
satisfy both inequalities. Plot the points to show that they belong to the solution
of the system. The first one was done for you.
5x + y > 3 2x y -2
1. yx4 3. y<x+4
Some ordered pairs satisfying the system of

inequalities are (10, 2), (5, -4), and (10, -9).
x+y7 y > 2x 9
2. 3x y 10 4. y < 4x + 1
297
x + y < 12 x + 3y > 9
5. y < -3x + 5 7. x 3y 9
y > 2x + 7 2x y 10
6. 2x y < 12 8. 2y 5x + 1
298
2x y < 11 6x + 2y 9
9. 10.
3x + 5y 8 3x + y -6
ES TIO a. How did you determine the graphical solution of each system of linear
?
QU
NS
inequalities in two variables?

b. How did you know that the ordered pairs you listed are solutions of
the system of inequalities?
c. Which system of linear inequalities has no solution? Why?
d. When can you say that a system of linear inequalities has a solution?
no solution?
e. Give 2 examples of a system of linear inequalities in two variables
that do not have any solution. Justify your answer.
A ctivity 6
LOOKING CAREFULLY AT THE REGION
Directions: Answer the following questions.
1. How do you determine the solution set of a system of linear inequalities

in two variables from its graph?
2. Do you think it is easy to determine the solution set of a system of

linear inequalities by graphing? Explain your answer.
3. In what instance will you find it difficult to determine the solution set of
a system of linear inequalities from its graph?
4. How would you know if the solutions you found from the graphs of
linear inequalities in a system are true?
299
5. What do you think are the advantages and the disadvantages of
finding the solution set of a system of linear inequalities graphically?
6. Is it possible to find the solution set of a system of linear inequalities in

two variables algebraically? Give examples if there are any.
These activities provided you with opportunities to deepen your understanding of

solving systems of linear inequalities in two variables graphically. In the next activity, you
will extend your understanding to find out how these systems are used in solving real-life
problems and in making decisions.
A ctivity 7
SOLVE THEN DECIDE!
Directions: Answer each of the following. Show your complete solutions and explanations.
1. Tickets for a play cost Php 250 for adults and Php 200 for children.
The sponsor of the show collected a total amount of not more than
Php 44,000 from more than 150 adults and children who watched the
play.

a. What mathematical statements represent the given situation?
b. Draw and describe the graphs of the mathematical statements.
c. How can you find the possible number of children and adults
who watched the play?
d. Give 4 possible numbers of adults and children who watched the
play. Justify your answers.
e. The sponsor of the show realized that if the prices of the tickets
were reduced, more people would have watched the play. If you
were the sponsor of the play, would you reduce the prices of the
tickets? Why?
2. Mr. Agoncillo has at least Php 150,000 deposited in two banks. One
bank gives an annual interest of 4% while the other bank gives 6%. In
a year, Mr. Agoncillo receives at most Php 12,000.

c. How will you determine the amount deposited in each bank?
d. Give four possible amounts Mr. Agoncillo could have deposited
in each bank. Justify your answers.
e. If you were Mr. Agoncillo, in what bank account would you place
greater amount of money? Why?
300
3. Mrs. Burgos wants to buy at least 30 kilos of pork and beef for her
restaurant business but can spend no more than Php 12,000. A kilo of
pork costs Php 180 and a kilo of beef costs Php 220.

c. How will you determine the amount of pork and beef that Mrs.
Burgos needs to buy?
d. Give 4 possible amounts of pork and beef that Mrs. Burgos can
buy. Justify your answers.
4. Ronald needs to earn at least Php 2,500 from his two jobs to cover his
weekly expenses. This week, he can work for at most 42 hours. His
job as a gas station attendant pays Php 52.50 per hour while his job
as parking attendant pays Php 40 per hour.
a. Write a system of linear inequalities to model the given situation?

b. Given this conditions, can Ronald be able to meet his target of
earning Php 2,500? Why or why not? Justify your answer.
5. Jane is buying squid balls and noodles for her friends. Each cup of
noodles costs Php 15 while each stick of squid balls costs Php 10.
She only has Php 70 but needs to buy at least 3 sticks of squid balls.
a. Write a system of linear inequalities to model the given situation.

b. Solve the system graphically
c. Find at least 3 possible numbers of sticks of squid balls and
cups of noodles that Jane can buy. Justify your answers.

What new insights do you have about the graphical solutions of systems of linear
inequalities in two variables? What new connections have you made for yourself?
Lets extend your understanding. This time, apply to real-life situations what you
have learned by doing the tasks in the next section.
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at some aspects of the graphical
solutions of systems of linear inequalities in two variables. After doing the following
activities, you should be able to answer the following question: How is the system
of linear inequalities in two variables used in solving real-life problems and in
making decisions?
301
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
given a practical task which will demonstrate your understanding of the graphical solu-
tions of systems of linear inequalities in two variables.
A ctivity 8
PLAY THE ROLE OF
Form a group of 3 members and think of at least 3 real-life situations where systems of
linear inequalities in two variables can be applied. Formulate problems out of these situations
and solve each. Present your findings to the class.
A ctivity 9
JOIN THE CAMP!
You are chosen to be one of the members of the Boy Scouts of the Philippines who will
represent your school in the National Jamboree next month. Your scoutmaster assigned you
to take charge of all the camping materials needed for the trip. These materials include tent,
ropes, cooking utensils, firewood, as well as other items you may think are necessary. He also
asked you to prepare a menu for the first 3 days of the jamboree and specify the ingredients
that you will need.
1. Make a list of all camping materials needed. Specify the quantity for each, as well as its
price, if available
2. Make a list of all ingredients you will need for your chosen menu. Specify quantities
needed and the unit price for each ingredient.
3. Set a possible amount that your scoutmaster will give you to buy all the ingredients.
4. Use the data from (1), (2), and (3) to formulate at least 5 problems involving systems
of linear inequalities in two variables. Solve each problem and use the given rubric to
check the quality of your work.
Rubric on Problems Formulated and Solved
Score Descriptors
6 Poses at least 5 problems with complete and accurate solutions.
Defines all variables used clearly and accurately.
Communicates ideas clearly, shows in-depth comprehension of the pertinent
concepts and/or processes in this lesson.
Provides explanations whenever appropriate.
302
5 Poses at least 5 problems, at least 4 of which have complete and accurate
solutions.
Defines all variables used clearly and accurately.
Communicates ideas clearly, shows in-depth comprehension of the pertinent
concepts and/or processes in this lesson.
4 Poses at leat 4 problems,
at least 3 of which have complete and accurate solutions
OR
commits no more than 3 minor errors (e.g., wrong sign, lack of proper
units, etc.)
Defines most variables used clearly and accurately.
Communicates most ideas clearly, shows in-depth comprehension of the
pertinent concepts and/or processes in this lesson.
3 Poses at least 3 problems,
at least 2 of which have complete solutions
AND
commits no more than 4 minor errors (e.g., wrong sign, lack of proper units,
etc.)
Defines most variables used clearly and accurately.
Communicates ideas clearly, and shows comprehension of the major concepts
and/or processes in this lesson, but neglects or misinterprets less significant
ideas or details.
2 Poses at least 2 problems and finishes some significant parts of the solution.
Communicates some ideas but shows gaps in theoretical comprehension
1 Poses a problem but demonstrates little comprehension of how it can be
solved.
Source: D.O. #73 s. 2012
How did you find the performance task? Did the task help you see the real-world
applications of systems of inequalities in two variables? What important things have you
learned from the activity? What values can be practiced through this task?
303
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
304
This lesson was about the graphical solutions of systems of linear inequalities in two
variables. In this lesson, you were able to use the graphical method of finding the solutions
of systems of linear inequalities and given the opportunity to determine the advantages
and disadvantages of using this method. You were able to find out when a system has no
solution and when it has an infinite number of solutions. More importantly, you were given the
chance to formulate and solve real-life problems, make decisions based on the problems, and
demonstrate your understanding of the lesson by doing some practical tasks.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS:
1. Elimination Method an algebraic method of solving systems of linear equations. In
this method, the value of one variable is determined by eliminating the other variable
through algebraic manipulation.
2. GeoGebra an open-source dynamic mathematics software that can be used to

visualize and understand concepts in algebra, geometry, calculus, and statistics.
3. Graphical Method a method of finding the solution(s) of a system of linear equations

or inequalities by graphing.
4. Simultaneous linear equations or system of linear equations a set or collection of

Ax + By = C
linear equations, all of which must be satisfied. It can be written as , where
Dx + Ey = F
A, B, C, D, E, and F are all real numbers, and the coefficients of x and y are not both
zero for each equation.
5. Simultaneous linear inequalities or system of linear inequalities a set or collection of

linear inequalities, all of which must be satisfied. The linear inequalities are also referred
to as constraints.
6. Solution to a system of linear equations - the coordinates of all points of intersection of

the graphs of the equations in the system whose coordinates must satisfy all equations
in the system.
7. Substitution Method an algebraic method of solving systems of linear equations. In

this method, the expression equivalent to one variable in one equation is substituted into
the other equation to solve for the remaining variable.
8. System of consistent and dependent equations is a system of linear equations having

infinitely many solutions. The slopes of the lines defined by the equations are equal,
their y-intercepts are also equal, and their graphs coincide.
305
9. System of consistent and independent equations a system of linear equations having
exactly one solution. The slopes of the lines defined by the equations are not equal, their
y-intercepts could be equal or unequal, and their graphs intersect at exactly one point.
10. System of inconsistent equations a system of linear equations having no solution. The
slopes of the lines defined by the equations are equal or both lines have no slopes, their
y-intercepts are not equal, and their graphs are parallel.
REFERENCES:
Bennett, Jeannie M., David J. Chard, Audrey Jackson, Jim Milgram, Janet K. Scheer, and Bert
K. Waits. Holt Pre-Algebra, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, USA, 2005.
Bernabe, Julieta G. and Cecile M. De Leon. Elementary Algebra, Textbook for First Year, JTW
Corporation, Quezon City, 2002.
Brown, Richard G., Mary P. Dolciani, Robert H. Sorgenfrey and William L. Cole. Algebra,
Structure and Method, Book I, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston MA, 1990.
Brown, Richard G., Mary P. Dolciani, Robert H. Sorgenfrey, and Robert B. Kane. Algebra,
Structure and Method Book 2. Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 1990.
Callanta, Melvin M. and Concepcion S. Ternida. Infinity Grade 8, Worktext in Mathematics.

EUREKA Scholastic Publishing, Inc., Makati City, 2012.
Chapin, Illingworth, Landau, Masingila and McCracken. Prentice Hall Middle Grades Math,
Tools for Success, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 1997.
Clements, Douglas H., Kenneth W. Jones, Lois Gordon Moseley and Linda Schulman. Math
in my World, McGraw-Hill Division, Farmington, New York, 1999.
Coxford, Arthur F. and Joseph N. Payne. HBJ Algebra I, Second Edition, Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich, Publishers, Orlando, Florida, 1990.
Fair, Jan and Sadie C. Bragg. Prentice Hall Algebra I, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey, 1991.
Gantert, Ann Xavier. Algebra 2 and Trigonometry. AMSCO School Publications, Inc., 2009.
Gantert, Ann Xavier. AMSCOs Integrated Algebra I, AMSCO School Publications, Inc., New
York, 2007.
306
Smith, Charles, Dossey, Keedy and Bettinger. Addison-Wesley Algebra, Addison-Wesley

Publishing Company, 1992.
Wesner, Terry H. and Harry L. Nustad. Elementary Algebra with Applications. Wm. C. Brown
Publishers. IA, USA.
Wilson, Patricia S., et al. Mathematics, Applications and Connections, Course I, Glencoe
Division of Macmillan/McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, Westerville, Ohio, 1993.
WEBLINKS
A. Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
WEBSITE Links as References for Learning Activities:
1. Algebra-class.com. (2009). Graphing Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012,

from http://www.algebra-class.com/graphing-inequalities.html
2. AlgebraLab Project Manager. Mainland High School. (2013). Algebra II Recipe:

Linear Inequalities in Two Variables. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://
algebralab.org/studyaids/studyaid.aspx?file=Algebra2_2-6.xml
3. edHelper.com. Math Worksheets. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://

edhelper.com/LinearEquations.htm
4. Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company. (2008). Algebra I: Solving and

Graphing Linear Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.
classzone.com/books/algebra_1/page_build.cfm?id=lesson5&ch=6
5. http://www.montereyinstitute.org/courses/Algebra1/COURSE_TEXT_
RESOURCE/U05_L2_T1_text_final.html
6. http://www.purplemath.com/modules/ineqgrph.html
7. KGsePG. (2010). Inequalities in Two Variables. Retrieved December 11, 2012,

from http://www.kgsepg.com/project-id/6565-inequalities-two-variables
8. Llarull, Marcelo. Department of Mathematics, William Patterson University. (2004).
Linear Inequalities in Two Variables and Systems of Inequalities. Retrieved
December 11, 2012, from http://www.beva.org/maen50980/Unit04/LI-2variables.
htm
307
9. Monahan, Christopher. Netplaces.com. New York Times Company. Graphing
www.netplaces.com/algebra-guide/graphing-linear-relationships/graphing-linear-
10. Muhammad, Rashid Bin. Department of Computer Science, Kent University.

Linear Inequalities and Linear Equations. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/MyAlgorithms/MathAlgor/
linear.html
11. Mr. Chamberlain.Frelinghuysen Middle School. (2012). Systems of Equations and

Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.mathchamber.com/
algebra7/unit_06/unit_6.htm
12. Perez, Larry. (2008). Beginning Algebra: Linear Equations and Inequalities in Two
Variables. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.saddleback.edu/faculty/
lperez/algebra2go/begalgebra/index.html#systems
13. Savannah Steele. (2008). Algebra I Resources: Systems of Linear Equations and
Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from https://sites.google.com/site/
savannaholive/mathed-308/algebra1
14. Tutorvista.com. (2010). Graphing Linear Equations in Two Variables. Retrieved

December 11, 2012, from http://math.tutorvista.com/algebra/equations-and-
inequalities.html#
15. www.mathwarehouse.com. Linear Inequalities: How to graph the equation of a

linear inequality. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.mathwarehouse.
com/algebra/linear_equation/linear-inequality.php
16. WyzAnt tutoring. (2012). Graphing Linear Inequalities. Retrieved December

11, 2012, from http://www.wyzant.com/Help/Math/Algebra/Graphing_Linear_
Inequalities.aspx
308
1. Pearson Education, Inc. Modeling real-world situations using linear inequalities.

Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.phschool.com/atschool/
academy123/english/academy123_content/wl-book-demo/ph-237s.html
2. Yahoo. (2012). Linear Inequalities in Two Variables. Retrieved December 11,

2012, from http://video.search.yahoo.com/search/video?p=linear+inequalities+in
+two+variables
3. Yahoo. (2012). Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved December

11, 2012, from http://video.search.yahoo.com/search/video?p=systems+of+linear
+equations+and+inequalities
WEBSITE Links for Images:
1. http://lazyblackcat.files.wordpress.com/2012/09/14-lex-chores-copy.png
2. http://www.google.com.ph/imgres?q=filipino+doing+household+chores&start
=166&hl=fil&client=firefox-a&hs=IHa&sa=X&tbo=d&rls=org.mozilla:en-US:off
icial&biw=1024&bih=497&tbm=isch&tbnid=e6JZNmWnlFvSaM:&imgrefurl=h
ttp://lazyblackcat.wordpress.com/2012/09/19/more-or-lex-striking-home-with-
lexter-maravilla/&docid=UATH-VYeE9bTNM&imgurl=http://lazyblackcat.files.
wordpress.com/2012/09/14-lex-chores-copy.png&w=1090&h=720&ei=4EC_ULq
ZJoG4iQfQroHACw&zoom=1&iact=hc&vpx=95&vpy=163&dur=294&hovh=143&
hovw=227&tx=79&ty=96&sig=103437241024968090138&page=11&tbnh=143&t
bnw=227&ndsp=17&ved=1t:429,r:78,s:100,i:238
309
B. Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities in Two Variables
WEBSITE Links as References and for L earning Activities:
1. Aprelium. (2012). Supply-AS-Sheet1.pdf . Retrieved December 12, 2012, from

http://illuminations.nctm.org/lessons/9-12/supply/ Supply-AS-Sheet1.pdf
2. Aprelium. (2012). Supply-AS-Sheet2.pdf . Retrieved December 12, 2012, from

http://illuminations.nctm.org/lessons/9-12/supply/Supply-AS-sheet2.pdf
3. Coolmath.com, Inc. (2012). Solving 2 x 2 Systems of Equations. Retrieved

December 11, 2012, from http://www.coolmath.com/crunchers/algebra-problems-
systems-equations-2x2.htm
4. Dendane, Abdelkader. United Arab Emirates University (2007). Solve Systems of

Linear Equations. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.analyzemath.
com/equations_inequalities.html
5. edHelper.com. Math Worksheets. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://

edhelper.com/LinearEquations.htm
6. Education.com, Inc. (2012). Graphing Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities

Practice Questions. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.education.
com/study-help/article/graphing-systems-linear-equations-inequalities1/
7. Education.com, Inc. (2012). Solving Systems of Equations and Inequalities Help.

Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.education.com/study- tackling-
help/article/systems-equations-inequalities/
8. Flat World Knowledge. New Charter University. (2012). Elementary Algebra

Chapter 4. Solving Linear Systems by Graphing. Retrieved December 11, 2012,
from https://new.edu/resources/solving-linear-systems-by-graphing
9. Flat World Knowledge. New Charter University. (2012). Elementary Algebra

Chapter 4. Solving Systems of Linear Inequalities (Two Variables). Retrieved
December 11, 2012, from https://new.edu/resources/solving-systems-of-linear-
inequalities-two-variables
10. Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company. (2008). Algebra I: Systems of

Lienar Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://
www.classzone.com/books/algebra_1/page_build.cfm?id=none&ch=7
310
11. KGsePG. (2010). Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved
December 11, 2012, from http://www.kgsepg.com/project-id/6653-systems-linear-
equations-and-inequalities
12. +Khan Academy. (2012). Addition Elimination Method 2. Retrieved December 11,
2012, from http://www.khanacademy.org/math/algebra/systems-of-eq-and-ineq/v/
addition-elimination-method-2
13. Lake Tahoe Community College. Solving Systems of Equalities and Inequalities,
and More Word Problems. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://ltcconline.
net/greenl/courses/152b/QuadraticsLineIneq/systems.htm
14. Ledwith, Jennifer. About.com. (2012). Systems of Linear Equations Worksheets.

Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://math.about.com/od/algebra1help/a/
System_of_Equations_Worksheets.htm
15. Monahan, Christopher. Netplaces.com. New York Times Company. Graphing

www.netplaces.com/algebra-guide/graphing-linear-relationships/graphing-linear-
16. Monahan, Christopher. Netplaces.com. New York Times Company. Systems

of Linear Equations: Solving Graphically. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from
http://www.netplaces.com/algebra-guide/systems-of-linear-equations/solving-
graphically.htm
17. Monahan, Christopher. Netplaces.com. New York Times Company. Systems of

Linear Equations. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.netplaces.com/
algebra-guide/systems-of-linear-equations/
18. Mr. Chamberlain.Frelinghuysen Middle School. (2012). Systems of Equations and

Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.mathchamber.com/
algebra7/unit_06/unit_6.htm
19. Muhammad, Rashid Bin. Department of Computer Science, Kent University.

Linear Inequalities and Linear Equations. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/MyAlgorithms/MathAlgor/
linear.html
311
20. Perez, Larry. (2008). Beginning Algebra: Linear Equations and Inequalities in Two
Variables. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.saddleback.edu/faculty/
lperez/algebra2go/begalgebra/index.html#systems
21. Reger, Cheryl (2008). Systems of Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved December
11, 2012, from http://wveis.k12.wv.us/teach21/public/project/Guide.cfm?upid=335
4&tsele1=2&tsele2=118
22. Stape, Elizabeth. (2012). Systems of Linear Inequalities. Retrieved December 11,
2012, from http://www.purplemath.com/modules/syslneq.htm
23. Steele, Savannah. Brigham Young University (2008). Systems of Linear Equations
and Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from https://sites.google.com/
site/savannaholive/mathed-308/algebra1
24. SOPHIA Learning, LLC. (2012) Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities
Pathway. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://www.sophia.org/systems-of-
linear-equations-and-inequalities--2-pathway
25. Tutorvista.com. (2010). Graphing Linear Equations in Two Variables. Retrieved

December 11, 2012, from http://math.tutorvista.com/algebra/equations-and-
inequalities.html#
26. www.mathwarehouse.com. Systems of Linear Equations. Retrieved December 11,

2012, from http://www.mathwarehouse.com/algebra/linear_equation/systems-of-
equation/index.php
312
1. Mr. Johnsons Math Class, Hartland High School. (2012). Systems of Linear
Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from http://
johnsonsmath.weebly.com/chapter-3---systems-of-linear-equations--inequalities.
html
2. Pearson Education, Inc. Break Even Points. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from
http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/english/academy123_content/
wl-book-demo/ph-236s.html
3. Pearson Education, Inc. Solutions to Systems of Equations. Retrieved December

11, 2012, from http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/english/
academy123_content/wl-book-demo/ph-229s.html
4. Pearson Education, Inc. Solving Systems by Graphing. Retrieved December

5. Pearson Education, Inc. Solving Systems of Equations Using Elimination. Retrieved

December 11, 2012, from http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/
english/academy123_content/wl-book-demo/ph-233s.html
6. Pearson Education, Inc. Solving Systems Using Elimination. Retrieved December

7. Pearson Education, Inc. Systems of Linear Inequalities. Retrieved December

8. Pearson Education, Inc. Using Systems. Retrieved December 11, 2012, from
http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/english/academy123_content/
wl-book-demo/ph-232s.html
9. Pearson Education, Inc. Using Systems of Inequalities. Retrieved December

313
10. Pearson Education, Inc. Writing Linear Systems. Retrieved December 11, 2012,
from http://www.phschool.com/atschool/academy123/english/academy123_
content/wl-book-demo/ph-235s.html
11. Pearson Education, Inc. Writing Systems of Inequalities. Retrieved December

12. YAHOO. (2012) Systems of Linear Equations and Inequalities. Retrieved

December 11, 2012, from http://video.search.yahoo.com/search/video?p=system
s+of+linear+equations+and+inequalities
314
REASONING
REASONING CONCLUSION
Do you think it is possible to make a valid conclusion without even going through the
process of investigation? What would you do if you were asked to make a decision that
will affect many people? Many aspects in our life involve decisions.
Geometry deals with logical reasoning to prove a certain statement. In this module
you will find the answer to the questions: How do you make a valid conclusion? and
How can you show that your conclusion is valid?

In this module, you will go through the following lessons:
Lesson 1 If-then Statements

Lesson 2 Inductive and Deductive Reasoning
Lesson 3 Writing Proofs

Lesson 1 Identify the hypothesis and conclusions of If-then and other types
of statements.
Formulate the inverse, converse, and contrapositive of an
implication.
Lesson 2 Distinguish between inductive and deductive reasoning.
315
Lesson 3 Provide formal arguments that explain results of a phenomenon or
a situation.
Use syllogism in writing formal arguments as a series of statements
that make up a proof.
Explain the need and importance of defined terms previously
learned.
Differentiate between postulate and theorem and give the
importance of each.
Module Map
Module Map
Here is a simple map of the lessons that will be covered in this module:
Inductive and
If-then Deductive Writing
Statements Reasoning Proofs
EXPECTED SKILLS:

To do well in this module, you need to remember and do the following:
1. Define terms that are unfamiliar to you.

2. Explore websites that would be of great help for your better understanding of the
lessons.
3. Take down notes on important concepts in your journal.
4. Perform and complete the exercises provided.
5. Collaborate with your teacher and peers.
316
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Choose the letter of the correct answer.
1. Which of the following best describes deductive reasoning?
a. using logic to draw conclusions based on accepted statements

b. accepting the meaning of a term without definition
c. defining mathematical terms in relation to physical objects
d. inferring a general truth by examining a number of specific examples
2. Theorem: A triangle has at most one obtuse angle.

Francisco is proving the theorem above by contradiction. He began by assuming
that in ABC, A and B are both obtuse. Which theorem will Francisco use to
reach a contradiction?
a. If two angles of a triangle are congruent, the sides opposite the angles are
congruent.
b. If two supplementary angles are congruent, each angle measures 90.
c. The largest angle in a triangle is opposite the longest side.
d. The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180.
3. If mR + mM = 90, then

a. R M.
b. R and M are right angles.
c. R and M are complementary.
d. R and M are supplementary.
4. The converse of the statement: "If you are in love, then you are inspired, is
a. If you are not in love, then you are not inspired.

b. If you are inspired, then you are in love.
c. If you are not inspired, then you are not in love.
d. if you are in love, you are not inspired.
5. The If-then form of the statement "Parallel lines never intersect, is:
a. If two lines intersect, then they are parallel.

b. If two lines are parallel, then they never intersect.
c. If two lines are not parallel, then they intersect.
d. If two lines intersect, then they are not parallel.
317
6. What is the inverse of the statement "If the number is divisible by 2 and 3, then it
is divisible by 6.
a. If the number is divisible by 6, then it is divisible by 2 and 3.

b. If the number is not divisible by 2 and 3, then it is not divisible by 6.
c. If the number is not divisible by 6, then it is not divisible by 2 and 3.
d. If the number is divisible by 2 and 3, then it is not divisible by 6.
7. What property is illustrated in: If A B, B C, then A C.
a. Reflexive Property
b. Symmetric Property
c. Transitive Property
d. Addition Property
8. Using the distributive property,

4 (a + b) = _________.
a. 4a + b
b. b + 4a
c. 4a + 4b
d. 4 + a + b
9.

Supply a valid conclusion for the given hypothesis: if OM bisects LON, then
a. LOM NOM
b. LOM LON
c MON NOL
d. no valid conclusion can be made
10. The method of proof by contradiction is:
a. direct proof
b. formal proof
c. indirect proof
d. two column proof
11. If garbages are disposed properly then dengue diseases will be prevented.
What do you call the underlined portion in this conditional statement?

a. conclusion
b. hypothesis
c. argument
d. the converse

318
12. How many dots are there in the 20th figure?
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
13. Which of the following statements is true?

a. If 1 has a measure of 90, then 1 is obtuse.
b. If 1 has a measure of 140, then 1 is acute.
c. If 1 has a measure of 35, then 1 is acute.
d. If 1 has a measure of 180,then 1 is right.
14. Which of the following statements is true?
a. Any four non-collinear points lie in a distinct plane.

b. A plane contains at least 3 non-collinear points.
c. Any two lines intersect at a point.
d. Through two given points we can draw three lines.
15. Rewrite the statement "A quadrilateral is a figure with four sides." in the If-then
form.
a. A figure has four sides if and only if it is a quadrilateral.

b. If a figure is a quadrilateral, then it has four sides.
c. If a figure has four sides, then it is a quadrilateral.
d. A figure is a quadrilateral if and only if it has four sides.
16 Name the property which justifies the following conclusion.
Given: JB = 28
Conclusion: JB + 4 = 32
a. Addition property of equality

b. Multiplication property of equality
c. Reflexive property
d. Transitive property
For 17-20 Give the answer.
17. 1 and 2 are complementary angles. 1 and 3 are vertical angles

If m3 = 49, find m2.
319
18. What is the missing reason in the following proof?
Given: m1 = m3, m2 = m3
Prove: m1 = m2
1
2
3
Statement Reason
1. m1 = m3, m2 = m3 1. Given
2. m1 = m2 2. _______
19. Supply the missing statement in the following proof.
Given: m1 + m2 = m2 + m3
Prove: m1 = m3
1
2
3
Statement Reason
1. m1 + m2 = m2 + m3 1. Given
2. _______________ 2. Reflexive Property
3. m1 = m3 3. Subtraction property
20. Show that the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a triangle is 1800.
320
1
If-then
Lesson Statements
What to
What to Know
Know
Let us begin this lesson by accomplishing the activity sheet below called INBOX
OUTBOX sheet.
A ctivity 1
INBOX OUTBOX SHEET
Description: This activity is intended to elicit your prior knowledge regarding the lesson.
Direction: Answer the question below and write your answer in the space provided IN
THE BOX.
What conclusions can you give why some students are faced with
problems in life such as failing grades, difficulties in meeting deadlines, and
even troubles with their love life?
IN THE BOX
321
You gave your initial ideas on how to make conclusions based on given situations. If
you move further, the things that you will learn will enable you to do the final project which
involves mathematical investigation.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this module is to learn and understand key concepts on reasoning and
proving. If-then statement, deductive and inductive reasoning, and writing proofs will be
discussed.
A ctivity 2
JUDGE US!
Description: Many statements that we encounter are logically constructed but NOT valid
or acceptable. This activity deals with determining which statement is valid
or not.
Direction: Tell whether the second statement is a valid consequence of the first
statement.
1. Students who are good in mathematics are smart.

Enchong is smart, then he is good in mathematics.
2. Young actresses, are health conscious.
Kim is a young actress then she is health conscious.
3. If it rains, then the sports fest will be cancelled.
It rains therefore the sports fest is cancelled.
4. If the lines are parallel, they do not intersect
Line x and line y do not intersect; therefore, they are parallel.
5. If two angles are right angles, then they are congruent.
A and B are congruent, then they are right angles.
For item 6, complete the statement and justify your answer
6 . Miss Earth candidates are environmentalists.

Miss Jaybee is a candidate to the Miss Earth search, therefore
__________________________________________________.
322
ES TIO
a. What have you noticed about the statements given above?
?
QU
NS b. Take one of the statements and tell something about it.

c. What is common to all of the statements?
Write your answers in your journal and have a small discussion with your group.
You have just encountered conditional statements or the if-then statements.
An if-then statement is composed of two clauses: the if-clause and the then-clause. We
can denote a letter for each clause, p for the if-clause and q for the then clause. The statement
is in the form, "If p then q." Conditional statements are formed by joining two statements p and
q using the words if and then. The p statement is called the hypothesis and the q statement is
called the conclusion.
A simple flow of reasoning from the if-clause to the then-clause is called simple
implication.
There are some conditional statements not written in this form but you can rewrite
them using the if-then form. How will you identify the hypothesis and the conclusion? You
can try this.
1. Cigarette smoking is dangerous to your health.

If-then form ________________________________________
Hypothesis ________________________________________
Conclusion ________________________________________
2. It is more fun in the Philippines.

If-then form ________________________________________
Hypothesis ________________________________________
Conclusion ________________________________________
3. A segment has exactly one midpoint.

If-then form ________________________________________
Hypothesis ________________________________________
Conclusion ________________________________________
4. Angles in a linear pair are supplementary.

If-then form ________________________________________
Hypothesis ________________________________________
Conclusion ________________________________________
323
5. Vertical angles are congruent.
If-then form ________________________________________
Hypothesis ________________________________________
Conclusion ________________________________________
How do you distinguish the hypothesis from the conclusion when the statement is not in
the if-then form? Consider the five statements below.
1. National Disaster Risk Reduction Council volunteers are busy during calamities.
2. An eighteen year-old Filipino can cast his/her vote during election.
3. All right angles are congruent.
4. Three non-collinear points determine a plane.
5. Perpendicular lines are intersecting lines.
Discuss with a partner the underlined part of the sentence and the one in bold letters.
What part of the sentence are the underlined words? What part of the sentence are in bold
letters? Which is the hypothesis and which is the conclusion? Rewrite the statements to if-then
form.

Now that you know what conditional statements are, and can identify the hypothesis
and the conclusion, have more practice by answering the exercises below.
Exercise 1
Convert each statement to if-then form, then identify the hypothesis and the conclusion.
1. Good citizens obey rules and regulations.

2. Filipinos are God-fearing people.
3. The sum of the measures of complementary angles is 90.
4. Opposite sides of a rectangle are parallel.
5. A triangle is a polygon with three sides.
6. A quadrilateral has four sides.
7. Two points determine a line.
8. The intersection of two lines is a point.
9. Two intersecting lines lie in one plane.
10. The sum of angles forming a linear pair is 180.

Now that you are well-versed in converting conditional statement to if-then form and
can easily identify the hypothesis and the conclusion, when do you say that the implication
is true or false?
324
The implication p q is always true except in the case that p is true and q is false. See
the truth table for the implications below.
p q pq
T T T
T F F
F T T
F F T
Do activities 3 and 4 for practice.
A ctivity 3
DESCRIBING TRIANGLES
Direction: Tell something about triangles.
Possible answer:
A triangle is a polygon.
Let us consider your answer. We can convert it to if-then form, then we can
form its converse, inverse, and contrapositive.
Study the table below.

Statement If-then form Converse Inverse Contrapositive
A triangle is If a shape is a If a shape is a If a shape is If a shape is
a polygon. triangle, then polygon, then not a triangle not a polygon,
it is a polygon. it is a triangle. then it is not a then it is not a
polygon. triangle.
Discuss with your group how the converse, inverse, and contrapositive of a
given statement is written.
If p: If a shape is a triangle
then q is: then it is a polygon
What happens to p and q in the converse?

Compare the inverse and the original statement. What did you do with p?
What did you do with q?
325
Observe the changes in the contrapositive.
Summarize your observation in terms of p and q.
Lets take another statement: An even number is divisible by two.
If-then form __________________________________________________

Converse __________________________________________________
Inverse __________________________________________________
Contrapositive __________________________________________________
We can summarize how to convert the statement in terms of p and q. Study

the table below.
Statement If p, then q
Converse If q, then p
Inverse If not p, then not q
Contrapositive If not q, then not p
Exercise 2
A. Fill up the table below.

If two angles are congruent, then they
Statement
have the same measure.
Converse
Inverse
Contrapositive
B. State the converse of the following statements:

1. Three non-collinear points determine a plane.
2. A rectangle has four right angles.
3. Perpendicular lines intersect.
Go back to Activity 3.
If p, then q: If a shape is a triangle, then it is a polygon.
Converse
If q, then p: If a shape is a polygon, then it is a triangle.
Analyze the converse. Is it true? If not, give a counter example.
The converse is false because a square is also a polygon. It is not

necessarily a triangle.
326
If p, then q: If a number is even, then it is divisible by two.
If q, then p: If a number is divisible by two, then it is even.

The converse is true.
Try to analyze the converse of the statements in B.

What can you conclude about the converse of each statement?
Is the converse of a given statement always true?
A ctivity 4
PICTURE ME
Observe the set of pictures. Describe the pictures using conditional statements. State
the converse, inverse, and contrapositive of the conditional statements.
Classify each as true or false and justify.
Go to other groups, share your answers, and come up with a common conclusion.
Now that you can identify the hypothesis and the conclusion in the If-then statement,
and form its converse, you are now ready to study the kinds of reasoning in the next
lesson.
327
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
328
2
Inductive and
Lesson Deductive Reasoning
A ctivity 1
WHY OH WHY?
Select a partner and answer each item.

1. Look carefully at the figures, what is next?
2. Study the pattern. Draw the next figure.
3. My mathematics teacher is strict.

My previous mathematics teacher was strict.
Tita's mathematics teacher is strict too.
Tita's previous mathematics teacher was also strict.
What can you say about mathematics teachers?
4. 1 10 = 10
2 10 = 20
3 10 = 30
5 10 = 50
24 10 = 240
2345 10 = ______.
5. Every time Jackie visits her doctor, she receives excellent services. With this she
believes that ____________________________________.
Discuss the following questions with your partner.
How did you arrive at your answer?
Did you agree at once on your answer?
Were there arguments between you and your partner?
What you have experienced is inductive reasoning. Give 3 examples of
inductive reasoning.
Based on the activity, what is inductive reasoning?
Inductive reasoning uses specific examples to arrive at a general rule, generalizations,
or conclusions.
329
A ctivity 2
CUBRA CUBE
Complete the table below.

Statement Conclusion
1. Filipinos are hospitable.
Bonifacio is a Filipino.
2. If points are collinear, then they lie on
the same plane
Points R, M, and N are collinear .
3. A quadrilateral is a polygon with four
sides. A parallelogram is a quadrilateral.
4. Smoking can cause cancer. Tomas
smokes.
5. An angle is acute if its measure is
between 00 and 900. Angle B is acute.
You have just experienced deductive reasoning. Can you give the difference between
inductive and deductive reasoning?
Deductive reasoning uses basic and/or general statements to arrive at a conclusion.
The parts of a deductive reasoning are:

Hypothesis the statement which is accepted or known at the beginning
Conclusion the statement drawn from the hypothesis.
Exercise 3
Draw a conclusion from each given situation and identify the kind of reasoning used.
1. 5, 10,15, 20. The next number is __________________.

2. Coplanar points are points on the same plane. X,Y, Z are coplanar.
Therefore, ___________________.
3. A regular polygon is equilateral. BELEN is a regular pentagon.
Therefore, ___________________.
4. A childs teacher in pre-school was a female. In his grades 1 and 2, his teachers
were both female. The child may say that __________________.
5. Filipinos are a peace-loving people. Julia is a Filipino. Therefore, ______________.
330
A ctivity 3
LET'S CONCLUDE
A . Supply the conclusion for the given hypothesis
1. If 1 2, then __________.
2. If AB = CE, then __________.
3. If B and E are complementary, then __________.
4. If m3 + m5 = 180, then __________.
5. If A and X form a linear pair, then __________.
B. Supply a valid conclusion for the given hypothesis on the first blank and the corresponding
reason on the second blank
6. If B is a right angle,
then _______________. ______________
7. If m3 + m4 = 180,
then _______________. ______________

8. If PM bisects APO,
then _______________. ______________

9. If BP BC,
then _______________. ______________
10. If BOS is isosceles,
then _______________. ______________
From the hypothesis you formulate another statement, that is, the conclusion. Where
do you base the conclusion?
Recall the undefined terms, definitions, and postulates we have discussed. You will be
using them in the next lesson.
331
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
332
Lesson 3 Writing Proofs
In writing proofs, the properties of equality and congruence are used as bases for
reasoning.
Properties of Equality
Addition Property of Equality (APE)
For all real numbers a, b, c, and d, if a = b and c = d,

then a + c = b + d.
Subtraction Property of Equality (SPE)
If a = b and c = d, then a c = b d.
Multiplication Property of Equality (MPE)
If a = b, then ac = bc.
Division Property of Equality (DPE)

a b
If a = b and c 0, then = c .
c
Substitution Property of Equality
If a = b, then "a" may be replaced with "b" at any time.
Distributive Property
a(b + c) = ab + ac.
Reflexive Property
a = a (Anything is equal to itself.)
Symmetric Property
If a = b, then b = a.
Transitive Property
If a = b and b = c, then a = c.
333
Properties of Congruence
Reflexive Property
AB AB, (An angle or a segment is congruent to itself.)
Symmetric Property
If A B, then B A.
Transitive Property
If A B and B C, then A C.
Aside from the properties of equality and congruence, you should be equipped with the
knowledge on undefined terms, definitions, postulates, and theorems in geometry. These are
necessary to successfully support the statement of a proof.
Exercise 4
Justify each statement by giving the Property of Equality or Property of Congruence

used.
If TX = BK, then BK = TX
8(m + n) = 8m + 8n
If CT = 12 and PR + CT = 20, then PR + 12 = 20.
mHIT = mHIT
If S P, B S, then P B
One of the tools used in proving is reasoning, specifically deductive reasoning.

Deductive reasoning is a type of logical reasoning that uses accepted facts to reason in a
step-by-step manner until we arrive at the desired statement.
A proof is a logical argument in which each statement is supported/justified by given

information, definitions, axioms, postulates, theorems, and previously proven statements.
Remember:
A postulate is a statement that is accepted without proof.

A theorem is a statement accepted after it is proved deductively.

Proofs can be written in different ways
334
1. Paragraph Form
The paragraph form is one way of proof where you write a paragraph to
explain why a conjecture for a given situation is true.
Given: LOE and EOV L

are complementary
Prove: LO OV E

O V
Proof: Since LOE and EOV are complementary, then mLOE + mEOV = 90
by definition of complementary angles. Thus, mLOE + mEOV = mLOV
by angle addition postulate and mLOV = 90 by transitive property. So,
LOV is a right angle by definition of right angles; therefore, LO OV by
definition of perpendicularity.
2. Two-Column Form S
Given: mSEP = mTER
E 1
Prove : m1 = m3
2 T
3
P
Write the missing reasons
Proof: R
Statement Reason
1. mSEP = mTER 1.
2. mSEP = m1 + m2 2. Angle Addition Postulate
3. mTER = m2 + m3 3.
4. m1 + m2 = m2 + m3 4. Substitution Property
5. m2 = m2 5.
6. m1 = m3 6. Subtraction Property
Study carefully the proof. How do you derive the statements and the
reasons?

335
3. Flowchart Form:
The flow chart form is another way of writing proof where a series of
statements are organized in logical order using boxes and arrows. Each
statement together with its justification is written in a box. Arrows are used to
show how each statement leads to another.
E
Example:
Given: RA RE
CE CA R C
Prove: E A
A
1. RA RE
Given 5. E A
Corresponding
2. CE CA 4. RAC REC angles of congruent
Given SSS Congruence triangles are
congruent.
3. RC RC
Reflexive Property
If you want to watch a video lesson on this kind of proof, you may visit the
following link:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=3Ti7-Ojr7Cg
336
Indirect Proof
An indirect proof is a method of reasoning usually written in paragraph form. The

opposite of the statement to be proven is assumed true until the assumption leads to a
contradiction.
Example:
F
Given:
Points D, G, and E are collinear with G

between D and E D G E
Point F is not on DE
Prove: mDGF 180
Proof:
Assume that mDGF = 180. It is given that points D, G, and E are collinear with G
between D and E. Hence, DGF and FGE form a linear pair. If two angles form a linear
pair, then they are supplementary. It follows that DGF and FGE are supplementary.
By the definition of supplementary angles,
mDGF + mFGE = 180
By substitution, 180 + mFGE = 180. Solving the equation, whe have mFGE = 0.
By the Angle Measurement Postulate, an angle measures between 0 and 180. But
since mFGE = 0, this means that there is no angle formed. This implies that F is on
DE. This contradicts the given that F is not on DE. Therefore, the assumption is false.
So, mDGF 180.
In this lesson, the discussion was about proofs.
Go back to the previous lessons and compare your initial ideas with the ideas
discussed. How much of your initial ideas are found in the discussion? Which of your ideas
are not yet discussed?
Now that you know the important ideas about this topic, let us go deeper by moving on
to the next activity.
337
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
338
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
In this activity, you will be applying your understanding of inductive and deductive
reasoning in a given situation.
A ctivity IMBESTIGADOR

Math Magazine will release its November issue with the theme MATH
INVESTIGATES.
As one of the investigators you were tasked to make a mathematical

investigation on a certain mathematics concept. The written output of your investigation will
be submitted to the head writer, writers, and editor-in-chief of the magazine for evaluation
using the following rubric:
Rubric for Mathematical Investigation

CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
The explanation Explanation is Explanation Explanation

is in-depth and comprehensive. is vague but is vague and
comprehensive. The use of the use of the use of
The use of appropriate appropriate appropriate
appropriate and sufficient and sufficient and sufficient
Mathematical
and sufficient statements statements statements is
Reasoning
statements is evident in is evident in NOT evident in
is extremely the process of the process of the process of
evident in the proving. proving. proving.
process of
proving.
339
CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable Statements are
statements are statements are statements NOT logical
logical and there logical and there are logical and there are
are no errors are no errors in but there are major errors in
Coherence in the process the process of minor errors in the process of
of proving. The proving. the process of proving.
procedures proving.
were strictly
utilized.
The proving The proving Some parts All parts of the

process and process is in the proving proving process
acceptable clearly written process are are vaguely
statements which facilitates somehow written which do
are clearly a straightforward unclearly not facilitate a
Clarity
written which understanding. written straightforward
facilitates a which do not understanding.
straightforward facilitate a
understanding. straightforward
understanding.
340
CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
A valid and A valid and A valid and An invalid and
acceptable acceptable acceptable unacceptable
conclusion was conclusion was conclusion conclusion was
derived from derived from was derived derived from
the result of the the result of the from the result the result of the
proving thus, proving thus, of the proving proving thus,
was able to give was able to give but was unable to give
Conclusion enlightenment enlightenment to moderately enlightenment to
to others and others. able to give others.
create an enlightenment
innovative to others.
statement/
formula for
future use in
Mathematics.
OVERALL RATING
341
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
342
TRIANGLE
CONGRUENCE

Have you ever wondered how bridges and buildings are designed? What factors
are being considered in the construction of buildings and bridges?.
Designing structures requires the knowledge of triangle congruence, its properties,
and principles.
This module includes definition of congruent triangles, the congruence postulates
and theorems, and proving congruency of triangles. These concepts and skills will
equip you to investigate, formulate, communicate, analyze, and solve real-life problems
related to structure stability.
How are problems on structure stability solved?

Let us investigate the answers to these questions in this module.

In this module, you will examine these questions when you study the topics below:
Lesson 1 Definition of Congruent Triangles
Lesson 2 Triangle Congruence Postulates
Lesson 3 Proving Congruence of Triangles
Lesson 4 Applications of Triangle Congruence
343
OBJECTIVES:
In these lessons you will learn to:

Lesson 1 Define and illustrate congruent triangles.
Lesson 2 State and illustrate the SAS, ASA, and SSS Congruence Postulates.
Apply the postulates and theorems on triangle congruence to prove
Lesson 3
statements on congruences.
Apply triangle congruences to perpendicular bisector and angle
Lesson 4
bisector.
Module Map
Module Map
Definition
and examples
of Congruent
Triangles
Triangle
Congruence
Triangle Proving Triangle
Postulates and
Congruence Congruence
Theorems
Applications
of Triangle
Congruence
Learning Goals and Targets

To do well in this module, you need to remember and do the following.
1. Define the terms that are unfamiliar to you.

2. Explore the websites which will help you to better understand the lessons.
3 Make a portfolio of your output
4. Answer and complete the exercises provided.
5. Collaborate with your teacher and peers.
Find out how much you already know about this module. Please answer all items.
Take note of the items that you were not able to answer correctly and look for the right
answer as you go through this module.
344
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
1. In the figure POG SOR, what is the side corresponding to PO?
P G
a. OS
b. RO
c. RS O
d. SO
R S
2. Listed below are the six pairs of corresponding parts of congruent triangles. Name
the congruent triangles.
SA JO D Y
AD OY A O
SD JY S J
a. ASD JOY
b. ADS YJO
c. SAD JOY
d. SAD JYO
3. In DOS, what side is included between D and O ?

D
a. DO
b. DS
c. SD
d. SO
S O
4. Name the corresponding congruent parts as marked that will make each pair of
triangles congruent by SAS. B R
a. BY NR, BOY NOR, BO NO O

b. BO NO, BOY NOR, RO YO
c. YO OR, BO ON, BOY NOR
d. B N,BO NO, OY OR
Y N
5. If corresponding congruent parts are marked, how can you prove BEC BAC?
B
a. ASA
b. LL
c. SAS
d. SSS
C
E A
345
6. Identify the pairs of congruent right triangles and tell the congruence theorem
used. M T
a. PMA APS
b. MAP SPA
c. MPA SPA
d. AMP PAS
A P
7. What property of congruence is illustrated in the statement? If AB DE, EF DE

then AB EF.
A. Symmetric C. Reflexive
B. Transitive D. Multiplication
8. GIV SAV deduce a statement about point V.

G

a. V is in the interior of GIV.
b. V is in the exterior of SAV.
V A

I c. V is in the midpoint of GS.
d. V is collinear with G and I.
9. Is the statement corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent based

on
a. Definition c. Theorem
b. Postulate d. Axiom
10. Use the marked triangles to write a correct congruence statement.

S
L O S
A. LT MS C. LT MS
LO ME OL ME
OT ES OT SE
LOT MES LOT MSE

B. LT SM D. TL MS
LO ME LO ME
OT
E
M ES OT ME
T
LOT SME TOL SME
T E M

346
11. Hexagon CALDEZ has six congruent sides.
CE, CD, CL are drawn on the hexagon
forming 4 triangles. C A
Which triangles can you prove congruent?
a. CEZ CDE
CDE CAL
Z L
b. CEZ CLA
CED CLD
c. CED CEZ
CLA CLD
d. CZE CED E D
DEC LCD
12. If ABC DEF, which segment is congruent to AB:
a. BC
b. AC
c. DE
d. EB
13. If SUM PRO, which angle is congruent to M?
a. S
b. P
c. R
d. O
14. If TIN CAN, then NAC is congruent to ____.
a. ITN
b. NIT
c. TNI
d. INT
15. Jancent knows that AB = XY and AC = XZ. What other information must he know
to prove ABC XYZ by SAS postulate?

a. B Y
b. C Z
c. A X
d. C X
347
16. Miguel knows that in MIG and JAN, MI = JA, IG = AN, and MG = JN. Which
postulate or theorem can he use to prove the triangles congruent?
a. ASA
b. AAS
c. ASA
d. SSS
17. In ABC, AB = AC. If mB = 80, find the measure of A.

a. 20
b. 80
c. 100
d. 180
18. You are tasked to make a design of the flooring of a chapel using triangles. The
available materials are square tiles. How are you going to make the design?
a. Applying triangle congruence by ASA

b. Applying triangle congruence by SAS.
c. Applying triangle congruence by SSS
d. Applying triangle congruence by AAS
For items 19 to 20
Complete the proof. Fill in the blank with the letter of the correct answer.
a. CO CO
b. ASA
c. SAS
d. BCO ACO
In ABC, let O be a point in AB such that CO bisects ACB, if AC BC.

Prove that ACO BCO.
Statements Reasons
1. AC BC 1. Given
2. CO bisects ACB 2. Given
3. ____(19)_____ 3. Definition of angle bisector
4. CO CO 4. Reflexive Property of Congruence
5. ACO BCO 5. ____(20)_______
348
1
Definition of
Lesson Congruent Triangles
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets begin this lesson by finding out what congruent triangles are. As you go over
the activities, keep this question in mind, When are two triangles congruent?
Activating Prior Knowledge
1. What is the symbol for congruence?

2. If ABC XYZ, what are the six pairs of corresponding congruent parts?
3. How do we measure an angle?
4. How can you draw an angle of specified measure?
5. What is the sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle?
For numbers 6 to 10 define or illustrate each of the following:
6. Midpoint
7. Vertical angles
8. Right Triangle
9. Hypotenuse
10. Isosceles Triangle
The wonders of Geometry are present everywhere, in nature and in structures. Designs
and patterns having the same size and same shape play important roles especially on the
stability of buildings and bridges. What ensures the stability of any structures?
In coming to school, have you met Polygon? Name it and indicate where you met it.
(Answers vary: I saw rectangles in windows; I have a 20-peso bill in my pocket and its shape
is rectangle. I saw triangles in bridges.)
349
A ctivity 1
PICTURE ANALYSIS
Form a group. Answer the following questions based on the pictures above.
1. How will you relate the picture to your ambition?

2. If you were an architect or an engineer, what is your dream project?
3. What can you say about the long bridge in the picture? How about the tall building?
4. Why are there triangles in the structures? Are the triangles congruent? When are
two triangles congruent?
5. Why are bridges and buildings stable?
You gave your initial ideas on congruent triangles and the stability of bridges and
buildings.
Let us now find out how others would answer the question and compare their ideas
to our own.
350
What to
What to Process
Process
Lets begin by finding out what congruent triangles are.
A ctivity 2
FIND YOUR PARTNER
Instruction
Your group (with 10 members) will be given ten figures, one figure for each member. At
the count of three, find your partner who is holding the same shape as yours.
ES TIO 1. Why/How did you choose your partner?

2. Describe the two figures you have.
?
QU
NS
3. What can you say about the size and shape of the two figures?
4. We say that congruent figures have the same size and the same
shape. Verify that you have congruent figures.
For each group pick up a pair of congruent triangles

B E
A C F D
Name your triangles as ABC and DEF as shown in the figure.
Investigate: Matching vertices of the two triangles

First Match: ABC EDF (A corresponds to E, B corresponds to D, C
corresponds to F)
Second Match: ABC EFD
Third Match: ABC DEF
In which of the above pairings are the two triangles congruent? Fill
up the activity sheet on the next page.
351
Group No.__________
Congruent Congruent
Corresponding Corresponding
Match or not or not
Sides Angles
congruent? congruent?
First
Second
Third
Two triangles are congruent if their vertices can be paired so that corresponding
sides are congruent and corresponding angles are congruent.
ABC DEF Read as "triangle ABC is congruent to triangle DEF."

symbol for congruency
symbol for triangle.
The congruent corresponding parts are marked identically.

Can you name the corresponding congruent sides? Corresponding congruent angles?
Answer the questions below. Write your answers in your journal.

What are congruent triangles?
How many pairs of corresponding parts are congruent if two triangles are congruent?
Illustrate TNX HOP. Put identical markings on congruent corresponding parts.
Where do you see congruent triangles?
Exercise 1 A C
B
D
1. ABD CBD, Write down the six pairs of congruent corresponding parts
2. Which triangles are congruent if MA KF, AX FC, MX KC; M K, A F,
X C. Draw the triangles.
352
3. Which of the following shows the correct congruence statement for the figure
below?
a. PQR KJL
b. PQR LJK
c. PQR LKJ
d. PQR JLK
You can now define what congruent triangles are. In order to say that the two
triangles are congruent, we must show that all six pairs of corresponding parts of the two
triangles are congruent.
Let us see how we can verify if two triangles are congruent using fewer pairs of
congruent corresponding parts.
Lesson 2: Triangle Congruence Postulates
Before we study the postulates that give some ways to show that the two triangles
are congruent given less number of corresponding congruent parts, let us first identify the
parts of a triangle in terms of their relative positions..
Included angle is the angle between two sides of a triangle.

Included side is the side common to two angles of a triangle.
In SON S
S is an included angle between SN and SO.
O is an included angle between OS and ON.
N is an included angle between NS and NO.
SO is an included side between S and O.
ON is an included side between O and N.
SN
O is an included side between S and N.
353
Exercise 2
Given FOR, can you answer the following questions even without the figure?
1. What is the included angle between FO and OR?

2. What is the Included angle between FR and FO?
3. What is the included angle between FR and RO?
4. What is the included side between F and R?
5. What is the included side between O and R?
6. What is the included side between F and O?
A ctivity 3 LESS IS MORE
SAS (Side-Angle-Side) Congruence Postulate
Prepare a ruler, a protractor, a pencil, a bond paper, and a pair of scissors

Work in groups of four.
Do the following activity.
1. Draw a 15-cm segment.
2. Name it BE.
3. Using your protractor, draw angle B equal to 70 degrees.
4. From vertex B, draw BL measuring 18 cm long.
5. Draw LE.
6. What figure is formed?
7. Compare the figure you have drawn with the figures drawn by the other
members of your group.
8. What can you say about the figures? Justify your answer.
SAS (Side-Angle-Side) Congruence Postulate

If the two sides and an included angle of one triangle are congruent to the
corresponding two sides and the included angle of another triangle, then the triangles are
congruent.
If MA TI, M T, MR TN
Then MAR TIN by SAS Congruence Postulate
Mark the congruent parts.
A I
M R T N
354
Exercise 3
Complete the congruence statement using the SAS congruence postulate.
1. BIG _____ 3. ABO _____

B
I A
A O D
B G F T
C
2. PON ____ 4. PAT _____
N A
D
O
E
P P S
S T
After showing that the two triangles are congruent with only two sides and the
included angle of one triangle congruent to two sides and the included angle of another
triangle, you try another way by doing activity 4.
A ctivity 4 TRY MORE
ASA (Angle-Side Angle) Congruence

Prepare the following materials: pencil, ruler, protractor, pair of scissors
Working independently, use a ruler and a protractor to draw BOY with two angles and
the included side having the following measures: mB = 50, mO = 70, and BO =18 cm.

1. Compare the triangle you have drawn with the triangles drawn by four of your
classmates.
2. What can you say about the triangles. Justify your answer.

355
ASA (Angle-Side-Angle) Congruence Postulate
If the two angles and the included side of one triangle are congruent to the cor-
responding two angles and an included side of another triangle, then the triangles are
congruent.
If A E, JA ME, J M, then JAY MEL

Draw the triangles and mark the congruent parts.
A ctivity 5 SIDE UP
SSS (Side-Side-Side) Congruence Postulate

You need patty papers, pencil, and a pair of scissors
1. Draw a large scalene triangle on your patty paper.
2. Copy the three sides separately onto another patty paper and mark with a dot
each endpoint. Cut the patty paper into three strips with one side on each strip.
3. Arrange the three segments into a triangle by placing one endpoint on top of the
another.
4. With a third patty paper, trace the triangle

formed. Compare the new triangle with the
original triangle. Are they congruent?
5. Try rearranging the three segments into another triangle. Can you make a triangle
not congruent to the original triangle? Compare your results with the results of
your classmates.
356
SSS (Side-Side-Side) Congruence Postulate
If the three sides of one triangle are congruent to the three sides of another triangle,
then the triangles are congruent.
If EC BP, ES BJ, CS PJ, then ESC BJP. Draw the triangles and mark the
congruent parts. Then answer exercise 4.
Exercise 4
Corresponding congruent parts are marked. Indicate the additional corresponding parts
needed to make the triangles congruent by using the specified congruence postulates.

A D
a. ASA _______
b. SAS _______
C B F E

P
L
a. SAS ______
b. SSS ______
O
M

T
a. SAS ______
b. ASA ______
With your knowledge of the definition of congruent triangles and the different triangle
congruence postulates, you are now ready to prove deductively the congruence of two
triangles.
357
Lesson 3: Proving Congruence of Triangles
A ctivity 6
LETS DO IT
Let us find out how we can apply the Congruence Postulates to prove that two triangles
congruent. Study the following example.
B E
Given: AB DE
B E
BC EF
Prove: ABC DEF
A C F D
Statements Reasons
1. AB DE 1. Given
2. B E 2. Given
3. BC EF 3. Given
4. ABC DEF 4. SAS Postulate
You are now ready to do Exercise 5.
Exercise 5

B E
Given: BE LO, BO LE
Prove: BEL LOB

O L
358
Let us try to prove a theorem on congruence,
Given the triangles below, a pair of corresponding sides are congruent, and two pairs of
corresponding angles have the same measure.
D
C
47o
47o
O
A
48o 48o
G T
Work in pairs and discuss the proof to show that DOG CAT
When you completed the proof, review the parts of the two triangles which are given
congruent.
Have you realized that you have just proved the AAS Congruence Theorem?
359
AAS (Angle-Angle-Side) Congruence Theorem
If two angles and a non-included side of one triangle are congruent to the
corresponding two angles and a non-included side of another triangle, then the triangles
are congruent.
Study the example below.
Example:
Given: NER NVR
RN bisects ERV
Prove: ENR VNR
Statements Reasons
1. NER NVR 1. Given
2. RN bisects ERV 2. Given
3. NER NVR 3. Definition of angle bisector
4. RN RN 4. Reflexive Property
5. ENR VNR 5. AAS Congruence Theorem
Exercise 6
For each figure prove that the two triangles are congruent.
Figure Proof
360
CM bisects BL at A
L B
How are we going to apply the congruence postulates and theorems in right triangles?
Do activity 7.
A ctivity 7
KEEP RIGHT
Recall the parts of a right triangle with your groupmates.

B M
1. Get a rectangular sheet of paper.
2. Divide the rectangle diagonally as shown.
3. What kind of triangles are formed? Explain
your answer.
4. Discuss with your group and illustrate the I G
the sides and angles of a right triangle using
your cutouts.
What do you call the side opposite the right angle?
What do you call the perpendicular sides?
How many acute angles are there in a right triangle?
5. Name your triangles as shown below.

B S M
I G L
361
6 . Based on number 5, what do you know about BIG and SML?
7. How would you prove that BIG SML?
8. Discuss the proof with your group.
9. Answer the following questions:

What kind of triangles did you prove congruent?
What parts of the right triangles are given congruent?
What congruence postulate did you use to prove that the two triangles are
congruent?
Complete the statement: If the ______ of one right triangle are congruent to the
corresponding ___ of another right triangle, then the triangles are _____.
The proof you have shown is the proof of the LL Congruence Theorem .
LL Congruence Theorem
If the legs of one right triangle are congruent to the legs of another right triangle, then
the triangles are congruent.
Consider the right triangles HOT and DAY with right angles at O and A, respectively,
such that HO DA, and H D.
Prove: HOT DAY. H D
T Y
O A
Discuss the proof with your group.
What congruence postulate did you use to prove HOT DAY?

The proof you have shown is the proof of the LA (leg-acute angle) Congruence
Theorem.
LA (Leg-Acute angle) Congruence Theorem

If a leg and an acute angle of one right triangle are congruent to a leg and an acute
angle of another right triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
Now, it is your turn to prove the other two theorems on the congruence of right triangles.
362
A ctivity 8
ITS MY TURN
1. Form a group of 4.
2. Make a power point presentation to prove the following theorems.
HyL (Hypotenuse-Leg) Congruence Theorem

If the hypotenuse and a leg of one right triangle are congruent to the
corresponding hypotenuse and a leg of another triangle, then the triangles
are congruent.
HyA (Hypotenuse-Acute angle) Congruence Theorem

If the hypotenuse and an acute angle of one right triangle are
congruent to the corresponding hypotenuse and an acute angle of another
right triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
3. Include the following in your presentation:

a. Figures that are completely labeled
b. The given and what is to be proved
b. The proof
Exercise 7
In each figure, congruent parts are marked. Give additional congruent parts to prove
that the right triangles are congruent and state the congruence theorem that .justifies your
answer. A B A B
1. 2. 3. F
A C C
D E
B C
D D
___________________ ___________________ ___________________

___________________ ___________________ ___________________
363
State the congruence theorem on right triangles to show that the two right triangles are
congruent.
4. __________ 5. __________
6. __________ 7. __________ 8. __________
Lesson 4: Applications of Triangle Congruence
After studying the congruence postulates and theorems you are now ready to apply
them.
How can you prove that two angles or two segments are congruent?
If they are parts of congruent triangles, we can conclude that they are congruent. Let us
see how.
A ctivity 9 Vertex
WHAT ELSE? Angle
Do you still remember what an isosceles triangle is? leg
leg
A triangle is isosceles if two of its sides are
congruent. The congruent sides are its legs; the third
side is the base; the angles opposite the congruent
sides are the base angles; and the angle included by Base
Base
the legs is the vertex angle. Angle Angle
364
Consider TMY with TM TY
Is M Y? Justify your answer.

T

M O Y
Isosceles Triangle Theorem:

If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles opposite these sides are
congruent.
Exercise 8
Is the converse of the isosceles triangle theorem true? Justify your answer.
If two angles of a triangle are congruent, then the sides opposite these angles are
congruent.
Exercise 9
Discuss with your group the proof of the statement: An equilateral triangle is equiangular.
Use the figure and be guided by the questions below. M
Given: MIS is equilateral

Prove: MIS is equiangular
1. MI MS Why? I S
2. What kind of triangle is MIS?.
3. What angles are congruent? Why?
4. MI MS Why?
5. What angles are congruent? Why?
6 M I S Why?
How will you show that each angle of an equilateral triangle measures 60?
Guide Questions:
a. What is the sum of the measures of the angles of a triangles?
b. What is true about equilateral triangle?
You are now ready to write the proof to show the MIS is equiangular.
365
Exercise 10
1. What is the difference between an equilateral triangle and an isosceles triangle?
2. One angle of an isosceles triangle measures 60. What are the measures of the
other two angles?
3. An angle of an isosceles triangle measures 50. What are the measures of the
other two angles? With this as given, how many possible triangles can you draw?
Discuss the proof of: The bisector of the vertex angle of an isosceles triangle is
perpendicular to the base at its midpoint. Do this with your group. (Hint: Draw an isosceles
triangle and the bisector of the vertex angle.)
Your work will be presented in class.
Theorem: The bisector of the vertex angle of an isosceles triangle is perpendicular to the
base at its midpoint.
In this module, the discussion was on Triangle Congruence.
Reflect and then compare your initial ideas with the ideas we have discussed in this
module. How much of your initial ideas are found in the discussion? Which of your initial
ideas are not discussed?
Write your reflections on a sheet of paper (see page 367 for your guide).
Now that you know the important ideas about triangle congruence, let us go deeper
by applying what you have learned in solving real-life problems.
366
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
367
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Keep in mind the question: How does knowledge on triangle congruence

help you solve real-life problems?
Before doing activities 10 and 11, try answering the following questions:
Questions:
When are two triangles congruent?
How can we show congruent triangles through paper folding?
What are the conditions for triangle congruence?
What is an isosceles triangle.
Is an equilateral triangle isosceles?
Is an equilateral triangle equiangular?
What can you say about the bisector of the vertex angle of an isosceles triangle?
A ctivity 10
FLY FLY FLY
In a Mathematics Fair, one of the activities is a symposium
in which the delegates will report on an inquiry about an important
concept in Mathematics.
Suppose you are one of the delegates and you are asked
to make a report on: How the concept of triangle congruence is
applied in real life. In making your report be guided by these tasks.
1. Design at most 5 different paper planes using congruent triangles.

2. Fly the paper planes one at a time. Record the flying time of each plane. Then, choose
the most stable one.
3. Point out the factors that affect the stability of the plane.
4. Explain why such principle works.
5. Draw out a conclusion and make recommendations.
368
A ctivity 11
SARANGOLA NI PEPE
Another application of triangle congruence is on stability of
kites.
Show how triangle congruence works in the situation below.

Assume that you are one of the contestants.
Situation:
In the upcoming City Festival, there will be a contest on kite
flying. As a contestant, you are to submit the design of your kite
and an instruction guide on how to make and fly a kite. You will also
submit the mechanics on how you came up with your design.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
At this point, you will be given a practical task which will demonstrate your
understanding of triangle congruence.
Performance
GRASPS TASK
One of the projects of the City Council for economic development is to connect a nearby
island to the city with a suspension bridge for easy accessibility of the people. Those from the
island can easily deliver their produce and those from the city can enjoy the beautiful scenery
and beaches of the island.

Suppose you are one of the engineers of the DPWH who is
commissioned by the Special Project Committee to present a design/
blueprint of a suspension bridge to the City Council. How would your
design/blueprint look like? How would you convince the City Council that
the design is stable and strong. Make a power point presentation of your
answers to the questions. Your presentation will be evaluated according to
its accuracy, practicality, stability, and mathematical reasoning.
369
Now that you are done, check your work using the rubric below.
CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
The The Some The
are accurate are accurate are erroneous are erroneous
and show and show use and show and do not
Accuracy
wise use of of the concepts use of some show use of
the concepts of triangle concepts the concepts
of triangle congruence. of triangle of triangle
congruence. congruence. congruence.
The design is The design is The design The design
comprehensive presentable and makes use of doesnt use
and displays makes use of the geometric geometric
the aesthetic the concepts representations representations
Creativity
aspects of the of geometric but not and not
mathematical representations. presentable. presentable.
concepts
learned.
The design The design The design The design
is stable and is stable, makes use of does not use
comprehensive presentable triangles, but triangles and is
and displays and makes use not stable. not stable.
Stability the aesthetic of congruent
aspects of triangles.
the principles
of triangle
congruence.
The The explanation The The
explanation is clear and explanation is explanation is
is clear, coherent. It understandable incomplete and
exhaustive covers the but not logical. inconsistent.
Mathematical
or thorough, important
reasoning
and coherent. concepts.
It includes
interesting facts
and principles.
OVERALL
RATING
Another challenge to you are these tasks. Accomplish them at home.
Task A: Submit a journal. In your journal include answers to the following questions:
1. What have you learned?
2. Which part of the module did you enjoy most?
3. Do you still have question(s) in mind that you want to seek an answer?
Task B: Take a picture of objects in your house where you can see traingles. For each
picture, identify congruent triangles. Justify why these triangles are congruent.
Make a portfolio of this task.
370
Designs and patterns having the same size and the same shape are seen in almost all
places. You can see them in bridges, buildings, towers, in furniture even in handicrafts, and
fabrics.
Congruence of triangles has many applications in the real world. Architects and
engineers use triangles when they build structures because they are considered to be the
most stable of all geometric figures. Triangles are oftentimes used as frameworks, supports
for many construction works. They need to be congruent.
In this module you have learned that:
Two triangles are congruent if their vertices can be paired such that corresponding
sides are congruent and corresponding angles are congruent.
The three postulates for triangle congruence are:
a. SAS Congruence: If two sides and the included angle of one triangle are congruent
respectively to the two sides and the included angle of another triangle, then the
b. ASA Congruence: If two angles and the included side of one triangle are congruent
respectively to the two angles and the included side of another triangle, then the
c. SSS Congruence: If the three sides of one triangle are congruent respectively to
the three sides of another triangles, then the triangles are congruent.
AAS Congruence Theorem: If the two angles and the non-included side of one triangle
are congruent to the two angles and the non-included side of another triangle, then
the triangles are congruent.
The congruence theorems for right triangles are:
a. LL Congruence: If the legs of one right triangle are congruent respectively to the
legs of another right triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
b. LA Congruence: If a leg and an acute angle of one triangle are congruent
respectively to a leg and an acute angle of another right triangle, then the triangles
are congruent.
c. HyL Congruence: If the hypotenuse and a leg of one right triangle are congruent
respectively to the hypotenuse and a leg of another right triangle, then the triangles
are congruent.
d. HyA Congruence: If the hypotenuse and an acute angle of one right triangle are
congruent respectively to the hypotenuse and an acute angle of another right
triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
371
Isosceles Triangle Theorem: If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles
opposite these sides are congruent.
Converse of Isosceles Triangle Theorem: If two angles of a triangle are congruent
,then the sides opposite these angles are congruent.
An equilateral triangle is equiangular.
The measure of each angle of an equilateral triangle is 60.
POST-ASSESSMENT
Now take the test that you took at the start of this module. If there are questions whose
answers you are not sure of, study the module again.
372
INEQUALITIES
IN TRIANGLES
Have you ever wondered how artists utilize triangles in their artworks? Have you
ever asked yourself how contractors, architects, and engineers make use of triangular
features in their designs? What mathematical concepts justify all the triangular intricacies
of their designs? The answers to these queries are unveiled in this module.
The concepts and skills you will learn from this lesson on the axiomatic development
of triangle inequalities will improve your attention to details, shape your deductive
thinking, hone your reasoning skills, and polish your mathematical communication. In
short, this module unleashes that mind power that you never thought you ever had
before!
Remember to find out the answers to this essential question: How can you justify
inequalities in triangles?
II. LESSON AND COVERAGE

In this module, you will examine this question when you take this lesson on Inequalities
in Triangles.
1. Inequalities among Sides and among Angles of a Triangle

2. Theorems on Triangle Inequality
3. Applications of the Theorems on Triangle Inequality
373
In this lesson, you will learn to:
state and illustrate the theorems on triangle inequalities such as exterior angle
inequality theorem, triangle inequality theorem, and hinge theorem.
apply theorems on triangle inequalities to:
a. determine possible measures for the angles and sides of triangles.
b. justify claims about the unequal relationships between side and angle
measures; and
use the theorems on triangle inequalities to prove statements involving triangle
inequalities.
Module Map
Module Map
Inequalities
in Triangles
Inequalities Inequalities
in One Triangle in Two Triangles
Triangle
Inequality Hinge Theorem
Theorem 1(Ss Aa)
Triangle
Inequality Converse of
Theorem 1(Aa Ss) Hinge Theorem
Triangle
Inequality
Theorem 3(S1+S2>S3)
Exterior
Angle Inequality
Theorem
374
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this topic. On a separate sheet, write
only the letter of the choice that you think correctly answers the question. Please answer
all items. During the checking, take note of the items that you were not able to answer
correctly and find out the right answers as you go through this module.
1. The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is always ____________.
a. greater than its adjacent interior angle.

b. less than its adjacent interior angle.
c. greater than either remote interior angle.
d. less than either remote interior angle.
2. Which of the following angles is an exterior angle of TYP?
U T
7 1
2 P
5
4 3
6
Y R
A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7
3. Each of Xylie, Marie, Angel, and Chloe was given an 18-cm piece of stick. They
were instructed to create a triangle. Each cut the stick in their own chosen lengths
as follows: Xylie6 cm, 6 cm, 6 cm; Marie4 cm, 5 cm, 9 cm; Angel7 cm, 5
cm, 6 cm; and Chloe3 cm, 7 cm, 5 cm. Who among them was not able to make
a triangle?
a. Xylie b. Marie c. Angel d. Chloe
4. What are the possible values of x in the figure?

12 A 11
S F
(4x3)0
420
E
a. x < 11.25 c. x 11.25
b. x > 11.25 d. x 11.25
375
5. From the inequalities in the triangles shown, a conclusion can be reached using
the converse of hinge theorem. Which of the following is the last statement?
O
10 8
H M
10 7
E
a. HM HM c. HO HE
b. mOHM > mEHM d. mEHM > mOHM
6. Hikers Oliver and Ruel who have uniform hiking speed walk in opposite directions-
Oliver, eastward whereas Ruel, westward. After walking three kilometers each,
both of them take left turns at different angles- Oliver at an angle of 300 and
Ruel at 400. Both continue hiking and cover another four kilometers each before
taking a rest. Which hiker is farther from their point of origin?
a. Ruel c. It cannot be determined.

b. Oliver d. Ruel is as far as Oliver
from the rendezvous.
7. Which of the following is the accurate illustration of the problem in item 6?
a.
b.
c.
d.
376
8. The chairs of a swing ride are farthest from the base of the swing tower when the
swing ride is at full speed. What conclusion can you make about the angles of the
swings at different speeds?
a. The angles of the swings remain constant whether the speed is low or full.
b. The angles of the swings are smaller at full speed than at low speed.
c. The angles of the swings are larger at full speed than at low speed.
d. The angles of the swings are larger at low speed than at full speed.
9. Will you be able to conclude that EM > EF if one of the following statements is not
established: AE AE, AF AM, mMAE > mFAE? A
a. Yes, I will. 36o 42o

b. No, I wont.
c. It is impossible to decide.
d. It depends on which statement is left out. E M
F
10. Which side of GOD is the shortest? O

86o
a. GO c. DG
b. DO d. It cannot be determined 49o D
G
11. The diagram is not drawn to scale. Which of the following combined inequalities
describes p, q, r, s, and t?
a. p < q < r < s < t q

59o

b. s < p < q < r < t s
P t
c. t < r < s < q < p 60 o
59o 61o
d. q < p < t < r < s r
377
12. In TRU, TR = 8 cm, RU = 9 cm, and TU = 10 cm. List the angles in order from
least to greatest measure.
a. T, R, U c. R, T, U
b. U, T, R d. U, R, T
13. List the sides of LYK in order from least to greatest measure.
84o
Y 58o 38o
L

a. LY, YK, LK c. LY, LK, KL
b. YK, YL, LK d. YK, LK, LY
14. What is the range of the values of the diagonal d of a parallelogram if adjacent
sides are 10 cm and 14 cm?
a. 5 d 23 c. 4 d 24
b. 4 < d < 24 d. 5 < d < 23

For items no. 15-20, use the figure shown.
15. A balikbayan chose you to be one of the contractors to design two A-frame houses
maximizing the size of two square lots with dimensions 18 ft and 24 ft on each
side. Which of the following is affected by the dimensions of the lot if the owner
would like to spend the same amount of money on the roofs?
I. The width of the base of the house frames

II. Design of the windows
III. The height of the houses
IV. The roof angles
a. I and IV c. II, III and IV

b. III and IV d. I, II, III, and IV
378
16. Which of the following theorems justifies your response in item no. 15?
I. If one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, then the angle opposite
the first side is larger than the angle opposite the second side.
II. If one angle of a triangle is larger than a second angle, then the side opposite
the first angle is longer than the side opposite the second angle.
III. The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the
length of the third side.
IV. If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle,
but the included angle of the first triangle is greater than the included angle
of the second, then the third side of the first triangle is larger than the third
side of the second.
V. If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but
the third side of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second,
then the included angle of the first triangle is larger than the included angle
of the second.

a. I, II, and III b. IV only c. IV and V d. V only
17. If the owner would like the same height for both houses, which of the following is
true?
I. Roof costs for the larger lot is higher than that of the smaller lot.
II. The roof of the smaller house is steeper than the larger house.

a. I only c. neither I nor II
b. II only d. I and II
18. What considerations should you emphasize in your design presentation so that
the balikbayan would award you the contract to build the houses?
I. Kinds of materials to use considering the climate in the area

II. Height of floor-to-ceiling corner rooms and its occupants
III. Extra budget needed for top-of-the-line furnishings
IV. Architectural design that matches the available funds
V. Length of time it takes to finish the project
a. I, II, and IV c. I, II, IV, and V

b. I, IV, and V d. I, II, III, IV, and V
379
19. Why is it not practical to design a house using A-frame style in the Philippines?
I. A roof also serving as wall contributes to more heat in the house.

II. Placement of the windows and doors requires careful thinking.
III. Some rooms of the house would have unsafe low ceiling.
IV. An A-frame design is an unusually artful design.

a. I and III c. I, II, and III
b. II and IV d. I, II, III, and IV
20. Why do you think an A-frame house is practical in countries with four seasons?
A. The design is customary.

B. An artful house is a status symbol.
C. The cost of building is reasonably low.
D. The snow glides easily on steep roofs.
380
Inequalities inTriangles
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets start the module by doing three activities that will reveal your background
knowledge on triangle inequalities.
A ctivity 1
MY DECISIONS NOW AND THEN LATER
Directions:
1. Replicate the table below on a piece of paper.

2. Under the my-decision-now column of the first table, write A if you agree with the
statement and D if you dont.
3. After tackling the whole module, you will be responding to the same statements
using the second table.
My Decision
Statement
Now
1 To form a triangle, any lengths of the sides can be used.
2 The measure of the exterior angle of a triangle can be greater than the measure
of its two remote interior angles.
3 Sticks with lengths 3 cm, 4 cm, and 8 cm can form a triangle.
4 Three segments can form a triangle if the length of the longest segment is greater
than the difference but less than the sum of the two shorter segments.
5 If you want to find the longest side of a triangle, look for the side opposite the
largest angle.
My Decision
Statement
Later
1 To form a triangle, any lengths of the sides can be used.
2 The measure of the exterior angle of a triangle can be greater than the measure
of its two remote interior angles.
3 Sticks with lengths 3 cm, 4 cm, and 8 cm can form a triangle.
4 Three segments can form a triangle if the length of the longest segment is greater
than the difference but less than the sum of the two shorter segments.
5 If you want to find for the longest side of a triangle, look for the side opposite the
largest angle.
381
A ctivity 2 More Triangular
Designs and
ARTISTICALLY YOURS!
Artworks
1. Triangular Girl by
Caroline Johansson
Direction: Study the artworks below and answer the questions that follow. http://thecaroline-
johansson.com/
blog/2011/10/triangu-
lar-girl-2/
2. Tile works: Diminish-
ing Triangles
http://sitteninthehills64.
blogspot.com/2010/05/
tile-house-8.html
3. Repetitive Graduation
by Scott Mihalik
http://mathtourist.
blogspot.com/2012/02/
flight-of-tetrahedra.html
4. Maths-the best use
for golf balls
http://www.whizz.com/
blog/fun/maths-best-
use-for-golf-balls/
5. Luxury sailboat
http://edgeretreats.
com/
6. Triangle Card Stand
http://www.be-
hance.net/gallery/
TRIANGLE-CARD-
STAND/3883741
7. Triangular Periodic
Table
h t t p : / / w w w. m e t a -
synthesis.com/web-
book/35_pt/pt_data-
base.php?PT_id=40
8. A triangular approach
to fat loss by Stephen
Tongue
http://www.flickr.com/
photos/32462223@
ES TIO
N05/3413593357/in/
photostream/
1. What features prevail in the artworks, tools, 9. Triangular Petal Card
?
QU
NS
equipment, and furniture shown? http://www.flickr.com/

photos/32462223@
2. Have you observed inequalities in triangles in the N05/3413593357/in/
photostream/
designs? Explain. Question:
3. What is the significance of their triangular designs? Which among these
designs and artworks
4. How can you justify inequalities in triangles in these do you find most inter-
esting? Explain.
designs? Which design would
you like to pattern from
for a personal project?
A ctivity 3 What is a
HELLO, DEAR CONCEPT CONTRACTOR! contractor?
A contractor is someone
who enters into a binding
agreement to build things.
The figure on the next page is a concept museum of inequalities in
~Wordweb 4.5a by
triangles. You will be constructing this concept museum throughout this Anthony Lewis~
module.
What is a
museum?
Each portion of the concept museum, mostly triangular, poses a task Museum is a depository for
collecting and displaying
for you to perform. All tasks are related to knowledge and skills you should objects having scientific or
learn about inequalities in triangles. historical or artistic value.
~Wordweb 4.5a by
Anthony Lewis~
382
Note that the triangles in this concept museum are not drawn to scale and all sides
can be named using their endpoints. Consider using numbers to name the angles of these
triangles.
Notice that markings are shown to show which angles are larger and which sides are
longer. These markings serve as your hints and clues. Your responses to the tasks must be
justified by naming all the theorems that helped you decide what to do.
How many tasks of the concept museum can you tackle now?
T H E
Knowing TH>TX>HX,
Write three inequalities to
what question involving
Write two describe the sides of Write two
inequality should you
Inequalities to this triangle. Inequalities to
use to check if
describe angle 1. they form a describe angle 2.
triangle?
MY
1 X CONCEPT N 2
M 4 C
Write the combined MUSEUM 3 Write an if-then
inequality you will use statement about
to determine the on TRIANGLE the sides given the
marked angles.
length of MK? INEQUALITIES
Come visit now!
5
K R
B 6 7
Write if-then Write if-then
Write a detailed if- statement about the Write statement about Write a detailed
then statement to angles given the an the sides given if-then statement to
describe triangles marked sides. if-then the marked describe triangles
MXK and KBF if statement about angles. MXK and KBF if
angle X is larger the angles given the MK is longer than
than angle B. marked sides. KF.
F W
Replicate two (2) copies of the unfilled concept museum. Use the first one for your
responses to the tasks and the second one for your justifications.
T H E
.
MY
X
CONCEPT N
1 2
M MUSEUM 3 4 C
on TRIANGLE
INEQUALITIES
Come visit now!
5
K R
B 6 7
F W
383
Are you excited to completely build your concept museum, Dear Concept Contractor?
The only way to do that is by doing all the succeeding activities in the next section of this
module. The next section will also help you answer this essential question raised in the
activity Artistically Yours: How can you justify inequalities in triangles?
The next lesson will also enable you to do the final project that is inspired by the
artworks shown in Artistically Yours. When you have already learned all the concepts and
skills related to inequalities in triangles, you will be required to make a model of a folding
ladder and justify the triangular features of its design. Your design and its justification
will be rated according to these rubrics: accuracy, creativity, efficiency, and mathematical
justification.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your first goal in this section is to develop and verify the theorems on inequalities
in triangles. To succeed, you need to perform all the activities that require investigation.
When you make mathematical generalizations from your observations, you are
actually making conjectures just like what mathematicians do. Hence, consider yourself
little mathematicians as you perform the activities.
Once you have developed these theorems, your third goal is to prove these
theorems. You have to provide statements and/or reasons for statements used to
deductively prove the theorems.
The competence you gain in writing proofs enables you to justify inequalities in
triangles and in triangular features evident in the things around us.
Before you go through the process, take a few minutes to review and master again
the knowledge and skills you learned in previous geometry lessons. The concepts and
skills on the following topics will help you succeed in the investigatory and proof-writing
activities.
1. Axioms of Equality
1.1 Reflexive Property of Equality
For all real numbers p, p = p.
1.2 Symmetric Property of Equality
For all real numbers p and q, if p = q, then q = p.
1.3 Transitive Property of Equality
For all real numbers p, q, and r, if p = q and q = r, then p = r.
1.4 Substitution Property of Equality
For all real numbers p and q, if p = q, then q can be substituted for p in any
expression.
384
2. Properties of Equality
2.1 Addition Property of Equality
For all real numbers p, q, and r, if p = q, then p + r = q + r.
2.2 Multiplication Property of Equality
For all real numbers p, q, and r, if p = q, then pr = qr.

3. Definitions, Postulates, and Theorems on Points, Lines, Angles, and Angle Pairs
3.1 Definition of a Midpoint
If points P, Q, and R are collinear (PQR) and Q is the midpoint of PR,then
PQ QR.
3.2 Definition of an Angle Bisector
If QS bisects PQR, then PQS SQR.
3.3 Segment Addition Postulate
If points P, Q, and R are collinear (PQR) and Q is between points P and R,
then PQ + QR = PR.
3.4 Angle Addition Postulate
If point S lies in the interior of mPQS + mSQR = mPQR
3.5 Definition of Supplementary Angles
Two angles are supplementary if the sum of their measures is 180.
3.6 Definition of Complementary Angles
Two angles are complementary if the sum of their measures is 90.
3.7 Definition of Linear Pair
Linear pair is a pair of adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
3.8 Linear Pair Theorem
If two angles form a linear pair, then they are supplementary.
3.9 Definition of Vertical Angles
Vertical angles refer to two non-adjacent angles formed by two intersecting
lines.
3.10 Vertical Angles Theorem
Vertical angles are congruent.
4. How to Measure Angles Using a Protractor

Internet Learning
100
70
80
90 80
110
12
Mastering the Skill in Estimating Measures of Angles
60 100 70 0
110 13
0 60 Interactive:
50 12 0
50 http://www.mathplayground.com/measuringangles.html
130
14
http://www.teacherled.com/resources/anglemeasure/angle-
40
0
0
40
14
measureload.html
15
30
Games:
0
0
30
15
http://www.bbc.co.uk/schools/teachers/ks2_activities/
160
20
160
20
maths/angles.shtml
http://www.innovationslearning.co.uk/subjects/maths/activi-
170
10
180 170
10
ties/year6/angles/game.asp
180
http://www.bbc.co.uk/keyskills/flash/kfa/kfa.shtml
0
http://resources.oswego.org/games/bananahunt/bhunt.html
Origin Base Line http://www.fruitpicker.co.uk/activity/
385
To measure an angle, the protractors origin is placed over the vertex Mathematical
of an angle and the base line along the left or right side of the angle. The History
Who invented the
illustrations below show how the angles of a triangle are measured using a first advanced
protractor. protractor?
100 100
70
80
90 80
110
12
70
80
90 80
110
12
60 100 70 0 60 100 70 0
110 13 110 13
0 60 0 60
50 12 0 50 12 0
0 50 0 50
13 13
14
14
40
40
Capt. Joseph Huddart
0
0
0
0
40
40
14
14
15
15
(1741-1816) of the United
30
30
0
0
0
0
30
30
15
15
States Navy invented the
160
160
20
20
160
160
20
20
170 first advanced protractor
170
10
10
180 170
180 170
10
10
32o 40o in 1801. It was a three-
arm protractor and was
180
180
0
0
used for navigating and
determining the location
of a ship
0
18
0
10
170
20
160 150
~Brian Brown of www.
108o ehow.com~
30
140 1
40
To read more about the
30
50
history of protractor, visit
12 these website links:
0
60
0
0
11
18
0
10
70
10
http://www.counton.
0
0
17
20 90 80
org/museum/floor2/
0 30
16 80
0 40 50 70
15 60
gallery5/gal3p8.html
100
140 130 120
110
h t t p : / / w w w .
a b l o g a b o u t h i s t o r y.
com/2011/07/29/the-
worlds-first-protractor/
5. Definitions and Theorems on Triangles

5.1 The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a triangle is 180.
5.2 Definition of Equilateral Triangle
An equilateral triangle has three congruent sides.
5.3 Definition of Isosceles Triangle
A triangle with two congruent sides is called isosceles.
5.4 Isosceles Triangle Theorem
Base angles of isosceles triangles are congruent.
5.5 Exterior Angle of a Triangle
An exterior angle of a triangle is an angle that forms a linear pair with an interior
angle of a triangle when a side of the triangle is extended.
5.6 Exterior Angle Theorem
The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the meas-
ures of the two remote interior angles of the triangle.
5.7 Sides and Angles of a Triangle
S is opposite EC and EC is opposite S.

E is opposite SC and SC is opposite E
C is opposite ES and ES is opposite C.
386
6. Definition and Postulates on Triangle Congruence
Internet Learning
Mastering the Triangle
Congruence Postulates
6.1 Definition of Congruent Triangles:
Video
Two triangles are congruent if and only if their vertices can
http://www.onlinemathle- be paired so that corresponding sides are congruent and
arning.com/geometry-con-
gruent-triangles.html corresponding angles are congruent.
Interactive
http://www.mrperezonlin 6.2 Included Angle
emathtutor.com/G/1_5_Prov-
ing_Congruent_SSS_SAS_ Included angle is the angle formed by two distinct sides of a
ASA_AAS.html
h t t p : / / n l v m . u s u . e d u /
triangle. Y
e n / n a v / f r a m e s _
asid_165_g_1_t_3.
html?open=instructions YES is the included angle of EY and ES E
http://www.mangahigh.com/
en/maths_games/shape/ EYS is the included angle of YE and YS
congruence/congruent_
YSE is the included angle of SE and SY
triangles?localeset=en
S
6.3 Included Side

W
Included side is the side common to two angles of a triangle.
AW is the included side of WAE and EWA
EW is the included side of AEW and AWE A
AE is the included side of WAE and AEW
6.4 SSS Triangle Congruence Postulate
E
6.5 SAS Triangle Congruence Postulate
6.6 ASA Triangle Congruence Postulate
7. Properties of Inequality
7.1 For all real numbers p and q where p > 0, q > 0:
If p > q, then q < p.
If p < q, then q > p.
7.2 For all real numbers p, q, r and s, if p > q and r s, then p + r > q + s.
7.3 For all real numbers p, q and r, if p > q and r > 0, then pr > qr.
7.4 For all real numbers p, q and r, if p > q and q > r, then p > r.
7.5 For all real numbers p, q and r, if p = q + r, and r > 0, then p > q.
The last property of inequality is used in geometry such as follows:
Q 1 2
P R
Q R
Q is between P and R. 1 and 2 are adjacent angles.
PR = PQ + QR mPQR = m1 + m2
Then PR > PQ and PR > QR. Then mPQR > m1 and mPQR > m2
387
8. How to Combine Inequalities
Example: How do you write x < 5 and x > -3 as a combined inequality?
x > -3
x<5
-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
From the number line, we observe that the value of x must be a value between -3
and 5, that is, x is greater than -3 but less than 5. In symbols, -3 < x < 5.
9. Equality and Congruence
Congruent figures (segments and angles) have equal measures such that:
If PR PR, then PR = PR.
If PQS PQS, then mPQS = mPQS.
Note that to make proofs brief and concise, we may opt to use PR PR or PQS PQS
instead of PR = PR or mPQS = mPQS. Because the relation symbol used is for congruence;
instead of writing, say, reflexive property of equality as reason, we just have to write, reflexive
property. Note that some books sometimes call reflexive property as reflexivity.
10. How to Write Proofs
Proofs in geometry can be written in paragraph or two-column form. A proof in paragraph

form is only a two-column proof written in sentences. Some steps can be left out when
paragraph form is used so that two-column form is more detailed.
A combination of both can also be used in proofs. The first part can be in paragraph form
especially when the plan for proof is to add some constructions first in the illustration.
Proving theorems sometimes requires constructions to be made.
The first column of a two-column proof is where you write down systematically every step
you go through to get to the conclusion in the form of a statement. The corresponding
reason for each step is written on the second column.
Possible reasons are as follows: Given, by construction, axioms of equality, properties of

equality, properties of inequality, definitions, postulates or previously proven theorems.
388
The following steps have to be observed in writing proofs:
Draw the figure described in the problem. The figure may have already been drawn
for you, or you may have to draw it yourself.
Label your drawn figure with the information from the given by:
marking congruent or unequal angles or sides,

marking perpendicular, parallel, or intersecting lines or
indicating measures of angles and/or sides
The markings and the measures guide you on how to proceed with the proof. They also
direct you whether your plan for proof requires you to make additional constructions in
the figure.
Write down the steps carefully. Some of the first steps are often the given statements
(but not always), and the last step is the statement that you set out to prove.
11. How to Write an Indirect Proof

11.1 Assume that the statement to be proven is not true by negating it.
11.2 Reason out logically until you reach a contradiction of a known fact.
11.3 Point out that your assumption must be false; thus, the statement to be proven
must be true.
12. Greatest Possible Error and Tolerance Interval in Measurements

You may be surprised why two people measuring the same angle or length may give
different measurements. Variations in measurements happen because a measurement
using a measuring device, according to Donna Roberts (2012), is approximate. This
variation is called uncertainty or error in measurement, but not a mistake. She added
that there are ways of expressing error of measurement. Two of these are the following:
Greatest Possible Error (GPE)

One half of the measuring unit used is the greatest possible error. For example, you
measure a length to be 5.3 cm. This measurement is to the nearest tenth. Hence, the
GPE should be one half of 0.1 cm which is equal to 0.05 cm. This means that your
measurement may have an error of 0.05 cm, that is, it could be 0.05 cm longer or
shorter.
Tolerance Intervals
Tolerance interval (margin of error) may represent error in measurement. This interval is
a range of measurements that will be tolerated or accepted before they are considered
flawed.
Supposing that a teacher measures a certain angle x as 36 degrees. The measurement

is to the nearest degree, that is, 1. The GPE is one half of 1, that is, 0.5. Your answer
should be within this range: 36 - 0.5 x 36 + 0.5. Therefore, the tolerance interval or
margin of error is 35.5 x 36.5 or 35.5 to 36.5.
389
Now that you have already reviewed concepts and skills previously learned that are useful
in this module, let us proceed to the main focus of this sectiondevelop, verify, and prove
the theorems on inequalities in triangles.
A ctivity 4
WHAT IF ITS LONGER?
Materials Needed: protractor, manila paper, ruler

Procedure:
1. Replicate the activity table on a piece of manila paper.
2. Using a protractor, measure the angles opposite the sides with given lengths. Indicate
the measure in your table.
3. Discover the relationship that exists between the lengths of the sides of a triangle and
the angles opposite them. Write them on the manila paper.
T
T
F
10
5
3.5
U Y 6 P Y
4.5 N R 5
Measures of Angles
Triangle Lengths of Sides
Opposite the Sides
FN 3.5 mU
FUN
NU 4.5 mF
TP 5 mY
PTY
PY 6 mT
RY 5 mT
RYT
TY 10 mR
390
U E S TI O
?
Q
1. Is there a relationship between the length of a side of a triangle and
NS
the measure of the angle opposite it?
Yes, there is. No, there isnt.
2. Making Conjecture: What is the relationship between the sides of a

triangle and the angles opposite them?
When one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, the
angle opposite the _________.
3. Your findings in no. 2 describe the Triangle Inequality Theorem 1.

Write it in if-then form.
If one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, then
____________________________.
4. What is the relationship between the longest side of a triangle and

5. What is the relationship between the shortest side of a triangle and

6.
Without using a protractor, determine the measure of the third angles
of the triangles in this activity.
(Hint: The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180.)
Name of Working Measure of the

Triangle Equations Third Angle
FUN mN
TYP mP
TRY mY
Quiz No. 1
Direction: Write your answer on a separate answer sheet.

A. Name the smallest angle and the largest angle of the following triangles:
Triangle Largest Smallest
Angle Angle
1. AIM
2. END
3. RYT
391
B. The triangles in the exercises are not drawn to scale. If each diagram were drawn
to scale, list down the sides and the angles in order from the least to the greatest
measure.
NAY FUN WHT

Sides
Angle
C. Your parents support you in your studies. One day, they find out that your topic in
Grade 8 Mathematics is on Inequalities in Triangles. To assist you, they attach a
triangular dart board on the wall with lengths of the sides given.
They say they will grant you three wishes if you can hit with an arrow the corner
with the smallest region and two wishes if you can hit the corner with the largest
region.
Which region should you hit so your parents will grant you three wishes?
Which region should you hit so your parents will grant you two wishes?
Mathematics in Art
Geometric Shapes for
Foundation Piecing by
Dianna Jesse
Challenge:
1. Which figure is drawn
first in the artworks--the
Grant: Grant: smallest polygon or the
largest polygon?
3 wishes 2 wishes 2. Make your own design by
changing the positions or
Region to Hit with the lengths of the sides
of the triangles involved
an Arrow in constructing the figure.
Visit this web link to see the

artworks shown: http://dian-
najessie.wordpress.com/tag/
triangular-design/~
392
A ctivity 5
WHAT IF ITS LARGER?
Materials Needed: ruler, manila paper

Procedure:
2. Using a ruler, measure the sides opposite the angles with given sizes. Indicate the
lengths (in mm) on your table.
3. Develop the relationship of angles of a triangle and the lengths of the sides
opposite them by answering the questions below on a piece of manila paper.
L
Q O
54o o
81 48o
36o 90o 38o 61o 103o

Y F T U 29o
G M
Lengths of Sides Opposite

Triangle Measure of the Angles
the Angles
mL FY
LYF mY LF
mF LY
mQ TU
QUT mU QT
mT QU
mO MG
OMG mM GO
mG MO
ES TIO 1. Is there a relationship between the size of an angle and the length
of the side opposite it?
?
QU
NS
Yes, there is. No, there isnt.

2. Making Conjecture: What is the relationship between the angles of
a triangle and the sides opposite them?
When one angle of a triangle is larger than a second angle,
the side opposite the _______________________________.
3. Your findings in no. 2 describe Triangle Inequality Theorem 2. Write
it in if-then form.
4. What is the relationship between the largest angle of a triangle and
the side opposite it?
5. What is the relationship between the smallest angle of a triangle and
the side opposite it?
393
6. Arrange in increasing order of measures the angles of the triangles in this
activity.
Name of Smallest Smaller Largest
Triangle Angle Angle Angle
LYF
QUT
OMG
7. Arrange in decreasing order of lengths the sides of the triangles in this

activity.
Name of Longest Longer Shorter
Triangle Side Side Side
LYF
QUT
OMG
8. Having learned Triangle Inequality 2, answer the question in the table.

Kind of How do you know that a certain side is
Triangle the longest side?
Acute
Right
Obtuse
QUIZ No. 2
Directions: Write your answer on a separate answer sheet. Note that the triangles in the
exercises are not drawn to scale.
A. Name the shortest side and the longest side of the following triangles:
Triangle Longest Side Shortest Side

1. TRY
2. APT
3. LUV
394
B. List down the sides from longest to shortest.
TRP ZIP FRE
C. Skye buys a triangular scarf with angle measures as in the figure shown. She
wishes to put a lace around the edges. Which edge requires the longest length of
lace?
A ctivity 6
WHEN CAN YOU SAY ENOUGH!?
Materials Needed: plastic straws, scissors, manila paper, and ruler

Procedures:
1. Cut pieces of straws with the indicated measures in centimeters. There are three
pieces in each set.
2. Replicate the table in this activity on a piece of manila paper.
3. With each set of straws, try to form triangle LMN.
4. Write your findings on your table and your responses to the ponder questions on
a piece of manila paper.
L
m n
N M
l
395
Compare the
Do the sum of the
straws lengths of
Sets of Straw Compare Compare
form a shorter straws
Pieces (m + n) and l (l + n) and m
triangle or (l + m) with that
not? of the longest
length n
l m n YES NO l+m <,>,= n m+n <,>,= l l +n <,>,= m

1. 3 3 7
2. 3 3 5
3. 4 6 10
4. 4 6 9
5. 5 5 10
6. 5 5 8
7. 6 7 11
8. 6 7 9
9. 4 7 12
10. 4 7 10
ES TIO 1. Making Conjectures:
?
QU
NS
1.1 What pattern did you observe when you

compared the sum of the lengths of the two Mathematics in
shorter straws with the length of the longest Geography
Feasible Possible
straw? Write your findings by completing the Distance
(McDougal Little
phrases below: Geometry, 2001)
If the sum of the lengths of the two shorter
straws is equal to the length of the longest
straw ____________________________.
If the sum of the lengths of the two shorter
straws is less than the length of the longest
straw ____________________________.
If the sum of the lengths of the two shorter Suppose you know the
following information about
straws is greater than the length of the distances between cities in
the Philippine Islands:
longest straw _____________________. Cadiz to Masbate 159 km
1.2 What pattern did you observe with the sets of Cadiz to Guiuan 265 km
straws that form and do not form a triangle? Considering the angle
formed with Cadiz as the
Complete the phrases below to explain your vertex, describe the range
findings: of possible distances from
Guiuan to Masbate.
When the straws form a triangle, the sum of
the lengths of any two straws __________.
396
When the straws do not form a triangle, the sum of the lengths of
any two straws__________.
2. Your findings in this activity describe Triangle Inequality Theorem 3. State

the theorem by describing the relationship that exists between the lengths
of any two sides and the third side of a triangle.
The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is
___________________.
QUIZ No. 3
1. Describe AW, EW and AE of AWE using Triangle Inequality Theorem 3.

2. Check whether it is possible to form a triangle with lengths 8, 10, and 14 by
accomplishing the table below. Let the hints guide you.
Can a
Is the
In Simplified triangle be
Hints simplified
Symbols Form formed?
form true?
Justify
Is the sum of 8 and
1
10 greater than 14?
Is the sum of 8 and
2
14 greater than 10?
Is the sum of 10 and
3
14 greater than 8?
Which question should be enough to find out if a triangle can be formed?
3. Is it possible to form a triangle with sides of lengths 5, 8, and 13? Complete the
table to find out the answer.
Is the simplified Can a triangle be
Find out if: Simplified Forms
form true? formed? Justify
1
2
3
Which question should be enough to find out if a triangle can be formed?
397
4. Can you form a triangle from sticks of lengths 7, 9, and 20?
Can a
Is the
Simplified triangle be
Find out if: simplified
Forms formed?
form true?
Justify
1
2
3
Which question should be enough to find out if a triangle
can be formed?
5. Study the figure shown and complete the table of inequalities using Triangle
Inequality Theorem 3.

CA + AR >
ER + AR >
< RE + AE
AC + CE >
< AE + CE
6. Using Triangle Inequality Theorem 3, what inequality will you write to check
whether segments with lengths s1, s2, and s3 form a triangle if s1 < s2 < s3?
7. If two sides of a triangle have lengths 7 cm and 10 cm, what are the possible
integral lengths of the third side? Between what two numbers is the third side?
8. The distance Klark walks from For items no. 8-10, use the figure shown
home to school is 120 meters
and 80 meters when he goes School
to church from home. Xylie
estimates that the distance Church
Klark walks when he goes 120 m
directly to church, coming 80 m
from school is 180 meters.
Realees estimation is 210 Home
meters. Which estimation is
feasible? Justify your answer.
9. Supposing that the shortest distance among the three locations is the school-
church distance, what are its possible distances?
398
10. Which of the following paths to church is the shortest if you are coming from
school? Justify your answer.
Path No. 1: School to Home then to Church
Path No. 2: School to Church
11. Some things are wrong with the measurements of the sides and angles of the
triangle shown. What are they? Justify your answer.
The next activity is about discovering the triangle inequality

theorem involving an exterior angle of a triangle. Before doing it, let us
first recall the definition of an exterior angle of a triangle.
P
M N
By extending MN of LMN to a point P, MP is formed. As a

result, LNP forms a linear pair with LNM. Because it forms a linear
pair with one of the angles of LMN, LNP is referred to as an exterior
angle of LMN. The angles non-adjacent to LNP, L and M, are
called remote interior angles of exterior LNP.
In the triangle shown, 4, 5, and 6 are exterior angles. The

remote interior angles of 4 are 2 and 3; of 5, 1 and 3; of 6, 1
and 2.
Internet Learning
Measures of Interior
and Exterior Angles of
4
a Triangle 1
Interactive:
h t t p : / / w w w .
mathwarehouse.com/
geometry/triangles/
angles/remote-exterior- 2 3
and-interior-angles-of-a-
triangle.php
5 6
399
MEASURE MANIA: Mathematics in Art
A ctivity 7 Color Triangle
EXTERIOR OR REMOTE INTERIOR?
Materials Needed: protractor, manila paper, and ruler
Procedures:
1. Measure the numbered angles of HEY, DAY, and JOY.
2. Replicate the table in this activity on a piece of manila paper.
3. Indicate the measures on your table and write your answers to The Color Triangle makes
it easier to determine the
the questions on a piece of manila paper. resulting color if two colors
are combined.
Questions:
1. What is the resulting
Y color with the following
combinations?
2 Yellow and Blue
4 D 2 J
2 Red and Yellow
Blue and Red
1 4 4 2. How many possible
H 5 exterior angles do the
6 Y following sets of color
triangles have?
3
6 1 5 6 3 1 5 B, R, Y
G, O, V
3 Y A O YO, YG, RO, RV, BG,
E BV
To read more about the color
triangle, visit this website
link:
http://www.atpm.com/9.08/
design.shtml
MEASURES
Name of
1st 2nd 3rd
Triangle Remote Interior Remote Interior Remote Interior
Exterior Exterior Exterior
s s s

1 4 6 2 5 6 3 4 5
HEY
DAY
JOY
400
ES TIO 1. Compare the measure of exterior 1 with either remote interior 4 or
?
QU
NS
6 using the relation symbols >, <, or =.
In HEY, m1 is _____ m4.
In HEY, m1 is _____ m6.
In DAY, m1 is _____ m4.
In DAY, m1 is _____ m6.
In JOY, m1 is _____ m4.
In JOY, m1 is _____ m6.
2. Compare the measure of exterior 2 with either remote interior 5 or
In HEY, m2 is _____ m5.
In HEY, m2 is _____ m6.
In DAY, m2 is _____ m5.
In DAY, m2 is _____ m6.
In JOY, m2 is _____ m5.
In JOY, m2 is _____ m6.
3. Compare the measure of exterior 3 with either remote interior 4 or

In HEY, m3 is _____ m4.
In HEY, m3 is _____ m5.
In DAY, m3 is _____ m4.
In DAY, m3 is _____ m5.
In JOY, m3 is _____ m4.
In JOY, m3 is _____ m5.
4. Making Conjecture: Your comparison between the measure of an

exterior angle of a triangle and either interior angle in this activity
describes the Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem. With the pattern that
you observed, state the exterior angle inequality theorem.
The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is__________.
QUIZ No. 4
1. Use the Exterior Angle Inequality theorem to write inequalities that can be observed
in the figures shown. T
E A
118o
83o
35o A
R
51o H
C M
401
Considering REA Considering HAM
2. Use >, <, or = to compare the measures of angles.
mAED mCED
mDEB mDCE
mDEB mDBE
mCDE mDEB
mDEC mACD
3. Name the exterior angle/s of the triangles shown in the figure.
DEB
CDG
AGE
BAC
You have successfully learned all the theorems on inequalities in one triangle. You
can now do Activity No. 8 applying them.
A ctivity 8 My Grandpa, My Model of

Healthy Lifestyle!
Leruana has a triangular picture frame that
her grandpa gave her on her 13th birthday. Like
her, her grandpa loves triangular shapes. Since
it is going to be her grandpas 65th birthday soon,
her birthday gift idea is to have two triangular
frames made so she can place in them photos
of his grandpa as health exercise instructor.
As her woodworker friend, she asks you to do
the triangular frames for her. To determine the
shapes of the picture frames, how should the
photos be cropped?
402
U E S TI O
?
Q
NS
1. How do you plan to crop the photographs?

Indicate the vertices of the triangular part of the photos.
Mark the sides of the new triangular photos.
2. What made you decide to have that shape and not something else?
What is your basis for determining the largest corner?
What is your basis for determining the longest side?
A ctivity 9
Clock Wisdom, Pretty One!
A complete revolution around a point is equivalent to 360. The minute and hour hands
of the clock also cover that in a compete revolution.
Materials: ruler and manila paper

Procedure:

2. Study the faces of the clock shown at different hours one afternoon and complete
your copy of the activity table.
403
3. Write also your answers to the ponder questions on a piece of manila paper.
4. Compute for the measure of the angle formed by the hands of the clock given that
one revolution for each hand is equivalent to 360.
Distance between
Measure of angle
the tips of the
Time formed by the
Clock Face hour hand and
(Exact PM Hours ) hour hand and
minute hand
minute hand
(in mm)
A
B
C
D
ES TIO 1. How do you describe the lengths of the hour hands of the clock
?
QU
NS
faces using a relation symbol?

2. How do you describe the lengths of the minute hands of the clock
faces using a relation symbol?
3. The angles formed by the hands of the clock can be called
as___________.
4. In the activity, what do you observe about the measures of the
angles formed by the hands of the clock at different hours?
5. What affects the measure of the distance between the tips of the
hands of the clock? Explain.
6. Making a Conjecture: Your findings describe the Hinge Theorem
(This is otherwise known as SAS Triangle Inequality Theorem). How
will you state this theorem if you consider the clock hands of two
faces (say, Clock Faces A and B) as sides of two triangles and the
angles they make as the included angles? State it in if-then form.
If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of
another triangle, but the included angle of the first triangle is
greater than the included angle of the second, then______.
7. Using Hinge Theorem, write an if-then statement about the
appropriate sides and angles of CAT and DOG.
8. Is the name Hinge for this theorem suitable? Explain.

9. Hinge theorem characterizes many objects around us. Give
examples of these objects.
404
A ctivity 10
ROOF-Y FACTS, YEAH!
M
Q
L N P
R
House A House B
Materials: protractor, manila paper, and ruler

Procedure: Study the house models and complete your copy of the activity table. For questions,
write your answers on a piece of manila paper. Note that the scale used in this
drawing is 1 cm = 1 m.
Roof Lengths at Roof Lengths at Lengths of Roof
HOUSE Roof Angle
the Right (in cm) the Left (in cm) Base (in cm)
A ML MN LN LMN
B QP QR PR PQR
ES TIO 1. Write your observations on the following:
?
The lengths of the roofs at the left part of both houses __.
QU
NS
The lengths of the roof at the right part of both houses __.
The lengths of the roof bases of both houses __.
The roof angles of both houses __.
2. What influences the measures of the roof angles of both houses? Justify.
3. Making a Conjecture: Your findings describe the Converse of Hinge Theorem
(This is otherwise known as SSS Triangle Inequality Theorem). How will you
state this theorem if you consider the two corresponding roof lengths as two
sides of two triangles, the roof bases as their third sides, and the roof angles
as included angles? State it in if-then form.
If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle,
but the third side of the first triangle is greater than the third side of the second,
then ________________________.
4. With both houses having equal roof lengths, what conclusion can you make
about their roof costs?
5. Using the Converse of Hinge Theorem, write an if-then statement to describe
the appropriate sides and angles of RAP and YES.
A E
R Y
P S
405
QUIZ No. 5
A. Use the symbol <, > or = to complete the statements about the figure shown. Justify your
answer.
C
1 4
A 2 3 B
D

Statements Justification
1. If AC AD and m1 = m2, then BC BD
2. If BC BD and AC > AD, then m4 m3
3. If AD AC and m2 < m1, then BD BC
4. If BD BC and AD > AC, then m3 m4
B. Make necessary markings on the illustration based on the given. What conclusion can
you make, if there is any, given the facts about the two triangles? Provide justifications
to your conclusions.
R
N
B
A
Y
T
FOR
GIVEN FACTS CONCLUSION JUSTIFICATION
MARKINGS
1. R N
BY = AT BR = AN mB > mA B A
Y T
2. R N
BR = AN RY = NT mR > mN B A
Y T
3. R N
BY = AT BR = AN RY > NT B A
Y T
4 R N
BR = AN RY = NT BY > AT B A
Y T
5. R N
RY = NT BY = AN N < Y B A
Y T
406
C. Using the Hinge Theorem and its converse, write a conclusion about each figure.
A
1. 3. R
F
B A T
D
C
E Y
2. 4. A E
D. Using the Hinge Theorem and its converse, solve for the possible values of m.
m+4
2m 1
5 3 3 5
E. Enrichment Activities
1. Hinges in Tools and Devices

Hinges are used to fasten two things together and allow adjustment, rotation,
twisting, or pivoting. Choose at least one of the following hinged devices and
explain how it works.
407
2. Mathematics in Fashion: Ladies Fan
From the sixteenth century up to the late
1800s throughout the whole of Europe, each
fashionable lady had a fan and because of its
prominence, it was considered as a womans
sceptertool for communicating her thoughts.
http://www.victoriana.com/Fans/historyofthefan.html
Questions:
1. Do you think that fan is an important fashion item?
2. Describe the concept of inequality in triangles that is evident about a ladies
fan.
From the prior investigations, we have discovered the following theorems on triangle
inequalities:
Inequalities in One Triangle:
Triangle Inequality Theorem 1 (Ss Aa)

If one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, then the angle opposite the first
side is larger than the angle opposite the second side.
Triangle Inequality Theorem 2 (Aa Ss)

If one angle of a triangle is larger than a second angle, then the side opposite the first
angle is longer than the side opposite the second angle.
Triangle Inequality Theorem 3 (S1 + S2 > S3)

The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the length of the
third side.
Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem

The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either
remote interior angle
Inequalities in Two Triangles:
Hinge Theorem or SAS Inequality Theorem

If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the
included angle of the first triangle is greater than the included angle of the second,
then the third side of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second.
Converse of Hinge Theorem or SSS Inequality Theorem:

If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the
third side of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second, then the
included angle of the first triangle is larger than the included angle of the second.
408
How can we prove these theorems?
Writing proofs is an important skill that you will learn in geometry. It will develop your
observation skills, deductive thinking, logical reasoning, and mathematical communication.
Guide questions are provided to help you succeed in the next activities.
In writing proofs, you have to determine the appropriate statements and give reasons
for these statements. There are cases when you only have to complete a statement or a
reason. Make use of hints to aid you in your thinking.
Be reminded that theorems may be proven in different ways. The proofs that follow are
some examples of how these theorems are to be proven.

For activity 11-16, you are required to use a piece of manila paper for each proof.
A ctivity 11
PROVING TRIANGLE INEQUALITY THEOREM 1
Triangle Inequality Theorem 1 (Ss Aa)

If one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, then the angle opposite the first side
is larger than the angle opposite the second side.
Given: LMN; LN > LM

Prove: mLMN > mLNM
Proof: There is a need to make additional constructions to prove that mLMN > mLNM.
With the compass point on L and with radius LM, mark a point P on LN and connect
M and P with a segment to form a triangle.
Statements Reasons
1. How do you describe the relationship
between LM and LP? By construction
2. Based on statement 1, what kind of a

triangle is LMP? Definition of isosceles triangle
3. Based on statement 1, how do you

describe 1 and 2? Base angles of isosceles triangles are
congruent.
409
4. Study the illustration and write a
statement about LMN if the reason
is the one given. Angle Addition Postulate
5. Basing on statement 4, write an

inequality statement focusing on 1. Property of Inequality
6. Using statement 3 and statement 5:

mLMN > m2 Substitution Property
7. Study the illustration and write an

operation statement involving MPN, The sum of the measures of the interior
N, and 3 angles of a triangle is 180o.
8. Study the illustration and write an

operation statement involving 2 and
MPN Linear Pair Theorem
What property supports the step where-

9. m2 + mMPN = mMPN + mN + in we replace the right side of statement
m3 8 with its equivalent in statement 7?
10. What will be the result if mMPN

is subtracted from both sides of
statement 9?
11. Basing on statement 10, write an

inequality statement focusing on N. Property of Inequality
12 Based on statements 6 and 11: If

mLMN > m2 and m2 > mN, then Property of Inequality
Congratulations! You have contributed much in proving Triangle Inequality Theorem 1.

In the next activity, you will see that Triangle Inequality Theorem 1 is used in proving Triangle
Inequality Theorem 2.
410
A ctivity 12 INDIRECT PROOF OF TRIANGLE
INEQUALITY THEOREM 2
Triangle Inequality Theorem 2 (AaSs)

If one angle of a triangle is larger than a second angle, then the side opposite the first
angle is longer than the side opposite the second angle.
L
Given: LMN; mL > mN
Prove: MN > LM
Indirect Proof:
M N
Assume: MN LM
Statements Reasons
1. MN = LM or MN < LM 1. Assumption that MN LM
2. Considering MN = LM. If MN LM,
then 2. Definition of
Consequently, what can you say

about L and N? of isosceles
The assumption that MN = LM is The conclusion that L N

True False the given that mL > mN.
3. Considering MN < LM: 3. If one side of a triangle is longer
If MN < LM, then than a second side, then the angle
opposite the first side is larger than
the angle opposite the second side.
The conclusion that mL < mN
The assumption that MN < LM is
contradicts the given that
True False
4. Therefore, MN > LM must be 4. The that

True False MN LM contradicts the known
fact that mL > mN.
Amazing! You have helped in proving Triangle Inequality Theorem 2. Let us proceed
to prove Triangle Inequality Theorem 3 using a combination of paragraph and two-column
form. You will notice that Triangle Inequality Theorem 2 is used as reason in proving the
next theorem.
411
A ctivity 13 PROVING TRIANGLE
INEQUALITY THEOREM 3

The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the length of the third
side.
Given: LMN where LM < LN < MN

L
Prove: MN + LN > LM M
MN + LM > LN
LM + LN > MN
N
Proof: P
2
Notice that since MN > LN and that MN > LM, then L
its obvious that MN + LM > LN and MN + LN > LM
are true. M
Hence, what remains to be proved is the third
statement: LM + LN > MN 1 3
N
Let us construct LP as an extension of LM such that L is between M and P, LP

LN and LNP is formed.
Statements Reasons
1. Write a statement to describe LP
and LN. 1. By construction
2. Describe LNP.
2.
3. Describe LNP and LPN 3. Bases of isosceles triangles are

congruent.
4. The illustration shows that
4. Reflexive Property of Equality
LPN MPN
5. If LNP LPN (statement 3) and
LPN MPN (statement 4), then 5. Transitive Property of Equality
6. From the illustration,

mMNP = mLNM + mLNP 6.
412
7. Using statement 5 and statement 6,
mMNP = mLNM + mMPN 7.
8. From statement 7, mMNP > mMPN 8. Property of Inequality
9. Using statement 8 and the
illustration, write a statement with
the reason given. 9. Triangle Inequality Theorem 2
10. From the illustration, what operation

involving LM and LP can you write? 10. Segment Addition Postulate
11. Write a statement using statement

10 and statement 9. 11. Substitution Property of Inequality
12. Write a statement using statement 1

in statement 11. 12. Substitution Property of Equality
Hurray! Triangle Inequality Theorem 3 is already proven. Let us proceed to writing

the proof of Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem.
A ctivity 14 PROVING THE EXTERIOR ANGLE

INEQUALITY THEOREM

The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either remote
interior angle.
L
Given: LMN with exterior angle LNP
Prove: mLNP > mMLN
P
M N
Proof:
Let us prove that mLNP > mMLN by L R
constructing the following: Q
3 4
1. midpoint Q on LN such that LQ NQ 1 2 P
2. MR through Q such that MQ QR M N
413
Statements Reasons
1. LQ NQ; MQ QR 1.
2. What relationship exists between
3 and 4? 2.
3. Basing on statements 1 and 2, relate

two triangles from the illustration: 3. What triangle congruence postulate
supports statement 3?
4. Basing on statement 3,
MLN 4.
5. Basing on the illustration,

5. Angle Addition Postulate
LNP
6. Basing on statement 5, mLNP > m1 6.
7. Using statement 4 and statement 6,
7. Substitution Property
The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either
remote interior angle.
414
A ctivity 15
PROVING THE HINGE THEOREM
Hinge Theorem or SAS Triangle Inequality Theorem

If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the included
angle of the first triangle is greater than the included angle of the second, then the third
side of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second.
Given: CAN and LYT; CA LY, AN YT, mA > mY

Prove: CN > LT
L T
C
A N Y
Proof:
1. Construct AW such that :
AW AN YT
AW is between AC and AN, and
CAW LYT.
L T
C W
A N Y
Consequently, CAW LYT by SAS Triangle Congruence Postulate. So,

CW LT because corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent.
415
2. Construct the bisector AH of NAW such that:
H is on CN
NAH WAH
Consequently, NAH WAH by SAS Triangle Congruence Postulate because

AH AH by reflexive property of equality and AW AN from construction no. 1. So,
WH HN because corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent.
Statements Reasons
1. From the illustration: 1.
CN = CH + HN
2. CN = CH + WH 2.
3. In CHW, CH + WH > CW 3.
4. Using statement 2 and 3: 4.

CN > CW
5. Using statement in construction 1 5.
and statement 4: CN > LT
Bravo! The Hinge Theorem is already proven. Notice that the use of paragraph form
on the first part of the proof of the Hinge Theorem shortens the proof process.
A ctivity 16 INDIRECT PROOF OF THE CONVERSE

OF HINGE THEOREM
Converse of the Hinge Theorem or SSS Triangle Inequality Theorem

If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the third side
of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second, then the included angle of
the first triangle is larger than the included angle of the second.
Given: ODG and LUV; D U

OD LU, DG UV,
OG > LV
Prove: mD > mU
L
O
G V
416
Indirect Proof:
Assume: mD mU
Statements Reasons
1. Assumption that
1. D U or mD < mU
2. Consider D U: 2. Triangle Congruence

Its given that OD LU, DG UV. Postulate
If D U, then ODG LUV.
OG LV
The assumption that D U is

false.
3. Consider mD < mU:
3. Hinge Theorem
If mD < mU, then
OG < LV contradicts the given that
OG > LV
4. Assumption that mD mU is
4. proven to be false.

After proving the theorems on inequalities in triangles, you are now highly equipped
with skills in writing both direct and indirect proofs. Moreover, you now have a good grasp
on how to write proofs in paragraph and/or two-column form.
You will be undergoing more complex application problems involving inequalities in

triangles in the next section.
Dear Concept Contractor, your task is to revisit your concept museum. How many
more tasks can you tackle? Which concepts that you have built previously need revision?
Check also your decisions in Activity No.1. Would you like to change any decision?
How can you justify inequalities in triangles? Do you have a new insight on how
to address this essential question raised in the activity Artistically Yours?

417
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
418
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Having developed, verified, and proved all the theorems on triangle inequalities
in the previous section, your goal now in this section is to take a closer look at some
aspects of the topic. This entails more applications of the theorems on triangle
inequalities.
Your goal in this section is to use the theorems in identifying unknown inequalities
in triangles and in justifying them.
The first set of activities showcases model examples that will equip you with
ideas and hints on how to solve problems of the same kind but already have twists.
When it is your turn to answer, you have to provide justifications to every step you
take as you solve the problem. The model examples provide questions for you to
answer. Your answers are the justifications.
The second set of activities requires you to use the theorems on inequalities in
triangles in solving problems that require you to write proofs.
There are no limits to what the human imagination can fathom and marvel. Fun
and thrill characterize this section. It is also where you will wrap up all the concepts you
learned on Triangle Inequalities.
A ctivity 17
SHOW ME THE ANGLES!!!
Watch this!
For extra fun, groups of students in a class are tasked to create algebraic expressions
to satisfy the measures of the angles of their triangular picture frame project. If the measure
of the angles are as follows: mA = 5x 3, mC = 2x + 5, mE = 3x 2, arrange the sides of
the frame in increasing order of lengths.
Solution:
Solving for Solving for Solving for
To solve for x:
mA mC mE
(5x - 3) + (2x + 5) + (3x 2) = 180 mA= 5x 3 mC = 2x + 5 mE = 3x 2
5x + 2x + 3x 3 + 5 2 = 180 = 5(18)3 = 2(18) + 5 = 3(18)2
10x 5 + 5 = 180 = 90 3 = 36 + 5 = 54 2
10x = 180 = 87 = 41 = 52
x = 18
Therefore, listing the sides in increasing order should follow this order: Sides opposite
C, E, and A. That is, AE, AC, and CE.
419
E S TIO 1. Why is the value x being solved first?
?
QU
2. Why is the sum of the measures of the angles being equated to
NS 180?
3. What theorem justifies the conclusion that the increasing order of
the sides is AE, AC, and CE?
4. What makes us sure that our answer is correct considering that we
have not exactly seen the actual triangle and have not used tools to
measure the lengths of its sides and the measures of its angles?
Its Your Turn!
Angle S of the triangular picture frame of another group is 58.

The rest of the angles have the following measures: mE = 2x 1,
mA = 4x 3. Determine the longest and the shortest sides. Give
justifications.
A ctivity 18
BELIEVE ME, THERE ARE LOTS OF POSSIBILITIES!
Watch this!
Problem:
You are tasked to draw a triangle wherein the lengths of two sides are specified. What
are the possible lengths for the third side of the triangle that you will draw if two sides
should have lengths 11 and 17, respectively? How many possible integer lengths has
the third side?
Solution:
Since the third side is unknown, lets represent its length by t.
Inequality 1 Inequality 2 Inequality 3

17 + t >11
11 + 17 > t 11 + t >17
t > 11 17
28 > t t > 17 11
t>6
t < 28 t>6
Nonpositive values of t to
t must be less than 28 t must be greater than 6
be disregarded
The resulting inequalities show that t must be between 6 and 28, that is, 6 as the
lower boundary and 28 as the higher boundary. Using combined inequality, the order by
which they will be written should be 6, t, then 28.
Therefore,
the possible length for the third side is 6 < t < 28.
the set of possible integer lengths for the third side of the triangle is described as
follows: {7, 8, 9, , 27}. Hence, there are 27 6 = 21 possible integer lengths for
the third side.
420
ES TIO 1. What theorem justifies the three inequalities being written about the
?
QU
NS
sides?
2. Are you convinced that 6 < t < 28 is accurate even if you have not tried
drawing all the possible lengths of the third side to form a triangle with
two sides of lengths 11 and 17? Why?
3. Do you observe a relationship between 6 in 6 < t < 28 and the two
known lengths 11 and 17? Describe the relationship.
4. Do you observe a relationship between 28 in 6 < t < 28 and the two
known lengths 11 and 17? Describe the relationship.
5. If the known lengths are l and s, where l is longer and s is shorter, what
should be the formula in solving for the unknown length of the third side t?
6. There are 21 possible integer lengths for the third side when two
respective sides of a triangle have lengths 11 and 17. Can you count
all the possible lengths other than the integer lengths? Explain.
Its Your Turn!

Problem:
The lengths of the sides of a triangle are 16 k, 16, and 16 + k. What is

the range of the possible values of k? Create a table of the possible integer
lengths of the sides of the triangle. Is 16-k always the shortest length?
Develop a general formula for the lengths with this description. Provide
justifications.
A ctivity 19 AND YOU THOUGHT ONLY

SURVEYORS TRACE, HUH!
Watch this!
Problem:
Kerl and Kyle play with their roller skates at the town oval. From the center of the oval,
Kerl skates 4 meters east and then 5 meters south. Kyle skates 5 meters west. He then
takes a right turn of 70 and skates 4 meters. Who is farther from the center of the oval?
Solution: Kyle
4m
70o 110o 4m
5m 90o
5m
Therefore, Kyle is farther than
Kerl from the center of the oval.
Kerl
421

ES TIO 1. How are 110 and 90 produced?
? 2. What theorem justifies the conclusion that Kyle is farther from the
QU
NS center of the oval than Kerl?

3. Would this problem be answered without a detailed illustration of the
problem? Explain.
4. Had the illustration of the problem not drawn, what would have been
your initial answer to what is asked? Explain.
5. We have not actually known Kerl and Kyles distances from the center
of the oval but it is concluded that Kyle is farther than Kerl. Are you
convinced that the conclusion is true? Explain.
Its Your Turn!

1. Problem:
From a boulevard rotunda, bikers Shielou and Chloe who have
uniform biking speed, bike 85 meters each in opposite directions
Shielou, to the north and Chloe, to the south. Shielou took a right
turn at an angle of 50o and Chloe, a left turn at 35o. Both continue
biking and cover another 60 meters each before taking a rest. Which
biker is farther from the rotunda? Provide justifications.
2. Enrichment Activity
Career in Mathematics: Air Traffic Controller

Air traffic controllers coordinate the movement
of air traffic to make certain that planes stay
apart a safe distance. Their immediate concern
is safety, but controllers also must direct planes
efficiently to minimize delays.

They must be able to do mental mathematics
quickly and accurately. Part of their job is
directing aircraft at what altitude and speed to fly.
Task:

Make a research of problems related to the work of air traffic controllers.
Solve problem and present them in class
422
A ctivity 20
TRUST YOURSELF, YOURE A GEOMETRICIAN!
Watch this! F
Problem: The diagram is not drawn to
A scale. Which of the sides HF,
7o HA, HI, and HT of polygon
I 8o
9o
FAITH is the longest? Which is
T H the shortest?
F Considering HIT:
Solution:
83o HT < HI
A
82o 7o Considering HAI:
I
81 o 8o HI < HA
T 9o
H Considering HFA:
HA < HF
HT < HI < HA < HF
Therefore, the longest side is HF and the shortest side is HT.
ES TIO 1. By just looking at the original figure, which side do you think is the
?
QU
NS
longest? There is a misconception to explain why HT would have

been the initial choice as having the longest side. Explain.
2. Why is it necessary to consider each right triangle in the figure
individually?
3. What theorem justifies the choice of the longer side in each triangle?
4. Notice that the triangles are not drawn to scale. However, we are
still able to tell which side is the longest and which side is the
shortest. Are you convinced that your answer is true? Explain.
Its Your Turn!

Problem:
M 9 E 5
The triangles are not drawn to scale. Using 1 T
1, 2, T, M, and MAT, complete
12
the combined inequalities below: 15
13
< < < 2
A
423
A ctivity 21
I BELIEVE I CAN FLY
WARNING! This could

be dangerous and
could cause a nasty fall.
Be extra careful and
DO NOT try this with
tall coconut trees.
The figure shows two pictures of a kid swinging away from a coconut trunk while holding
on a stalk of a coconut leaf. Compare the distances of the kid from the bottom of the coconut
trunk in these pictures. Note that the kids distance from the bottom of the coconut trunk is
farthest when he swings at full speed.
ES TIO 1. Name the sides of the triangle formed as the kid swings away holding
? on to the stalk of a coconut leaf.

QU
NS
2. An inequality exists in the two triangles shown. Describe it.

3. Compare the angles formed by the coconut leaf stalk and the coconut
trunk at the kids full speed and low speed.
4. How can you justify the inequality that exists between these triangles?
5. Many boys and girls in the province have great fun using coconut leaf
stalks as swing rides. Have you tried a coconut leaf swing ride?
6. Aside from coconut leaf swing rides, what other swing rides do you
know in your area or from your knowledge or experience?
7. If you were asked to improvise a swing ride in your community, how
would you design the swing ride? Explain.
8. Concepts on inequalities in triangles are useful in improvising a swing
ride. What are the disadvantages if a designer of a swing ride does
not apply these concepts?
9. What are the qualities of a good improvised swing ride?
10. What are the things that you should do to attain these qualities?
11. Should all designers of tools and equipment comply with standards
and guidelines in designing them? Why?
424
A ctivity 22
YOU ARE NOW PROMOTED AS PROOFESSOR!
1. Write the statements supported by the reasons on the right side of the two-column
proof.
H E
Given: HO EP, mOHP > mEPH

Prove: OP > EH
P
O
Statements Reasons
1 Given
Reflexive Property of
2
Equality
3 Given
4 Hinge Theorem
2. Make necessary markings to the congruent angles and sides as you analyze the given
and the meanings behind them. Write the reasons for the statements in the two-column
proof.
Given: I is the midpoint of AT, 1 2, m3 > m4

Prove: HT > FA
Statements Reasons
1 1 2
2 FIH is isosceles
3 FI HI
4 I is the midpoint of AT
5 AI TI
6 m3 > m4
7 HT > FA
425
3. Write the statement or reason in the two-column proof.

Given: VAE VEA, AF > EF

Prove: mAVF > mEVF
Statements Reasons
1 VAE VEA
2 AVE is an isosceles triangle.
Legs of isosceles triangles
3
are congruent.
4 FV FV
5 Given
6 mAVF > mEVF
In this section, the discussion focuses mainly on using the triangle inequality
theorems in solving both real-life problems and problems that require writing proofs.
Considering the application and proof-writing problems found in this module, share
your insights on the following questions:
Can you solve these problems without accurate illustrations and markings on the
triangles?
Can you solve these problems without prior knowledge related to triangles and
writing proofs?
Has your knowledge of algebra helped you in solving the problems?
Have the theorems on triangle inequalities helped you in writing proofs of
theorems?
Having tackled all concepts and skills to be learned on inequalities in triangles,

revisit your decisions in Activity No.1 and write your responses to the statements under
My Decisions Later. Are there changes to your responses? Explain.
What would be your reply to the essential question, How can you justify inequalities
in triangles?
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, it is time for you to put your
knowledge and skills to practice before you do the tasks in the next section.
426
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning to real-life situations. You will
be given a practical task which will enable you to demonstrate your understanding of
inequalities in triangles.
A ctivity 23 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS: MAKING IT

THROUGH THE RAIN
Goal: To design and create a miniature model of a folding ladder

Role: A design engineer
Audience: Company head
Situation: The lessons learned from the widespread flooding in many parts of the country
during typhoons and monsoon season include securing tools and gadgets needed
for safety. More and more people are buying ladders that could reach as high as
10 feet, long enough for people to gain access to their ceiling or their roof. There
is a high demand for folding ladders for they can be stored conveniently. Being the
design engineer of your company, your boss asks you to submit a miniature model
of that ladder and justify the design.
Product: design of a folding ladder that can reach up to 10-feet height and its miniature
Standards: accurate, creative, efficient, and well-explained/well-justified
427
RUBRIC

CRITERIA RATING
4 3 2 1
The The The The

are accurate are accurate are are
and show a and show erroneous erroneous
Accuracy wise use of the use of and show and do not
geometric geometric some use show the use
concepts concepts of concepts of concepts
specifically specifically on triangle on triangle
on triangle on triangle inequalities. inequalities.
inequalities. inequalities.
The overall The overall The overall The overall

impact of the impact of the impact of the impact of the
presentation presentation presentation presentation
is highly is impressive is fair and is poor and
Creativity impressive and the use of the use of the use of
and the use technology is technology is technology is
of technology commendable. evident. not evident.
is highly
commendable.
The miniature The miniature The The

is functional is functional miniature miniature
Efficiency and flawlessly and flawless. has some has many
done. It is also defects. defects.
attractive.
428
Justification is Justification Justification Justification
logically clear, is clear and is not so is
convincing, and convincingly clear. Some ambiguous.
professionally delivered. ideas are not Only few
delivered. Appropriate connected concepts
The concepts concepts to each on triangle
Mathematical on triangle on triangle other. Not inequalities
Justification inequalities inequalities all concepts are applied.
are applied on triangle on triangle
and previously inequalities are inequalities
learned applied. are applied.
concepts are
connected to
the new ones.
ES TIO 1. How do you find the experience of designing?
?
QU
NS
2. What insights can you share from the experience?
3. Has the activity helped you justify inequalities in triangles? How?
4. How did the task help you see the real-world use of the concepts on
inequalities in triangles?
5. Aside from designing a folding ladder, list down the real-life applications
of concepts learned on inequalities in triangles from this module.
6. Can you think of other real-life applications of this topic?
429
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
430
A ctivity 24 FINAL CONSTRUCTION OF CONCEPT
MUSEUM
Directions: After learning all the concepts and skills on Inequalities in Triangles, take a final
visit to your responses in Activity No.3 Hello, Dear Concept Contractorof this
module and make some modifications or corrections to your responses and their
corresponding justifications.
T H E
Knowing TH>TX>HX, what
Write three inequalities to
question involving
Write two describe the sides of Write two
inequality should
inequalities to this triangle inequalities to
you use to check
describe angle 1. if they form a describe angle 2.
triangle?
MY
1 X CONCEPT N 2
M 4 C
Write the combined MUSEUM 3 Write an if-then
inequality you will use statement about
to determine the on TRIANGLE the sides given the
marked angles
length of MK? INEQUALITIES
Come visit now!
5
K 6 7 R
B
Write an if-then Write an if-then
Write a detailed if- statement about the Write statement about Write a detailed
then statement to angles given the an the sides given if-then statement to
describe triangles marked sides. if-then the marked describe triangles
MXK and KBF if statement about angles. MXK and KBF if
angle X is larger the angles given the MK is longer than
than angle B marked sides. KF.
F W
431
A ctivity 25 CONCEPTS IVE LEARNED THAT LAST
FOREVER
Direction: Fill in the blanks with the right words to make the statements complete.
in
You have completed the lesson on Inequalities in Triangles. Before you go to the next
geometry lesson on Parallelism and Perpendicularity, you have to answer a post-
assessment.
432
Inequalities in One Triangle:
Triangle Inequality Theorem 1 (SsAa)
If one side of a triangle is longer than a second side, then the angle opposite the first side is
larger than the angle opposite the second side.
Triangle Inequality Theorem 2 (AaSs)

If one angle of a triangle is larger than a second angle, then the side opposite the first angle
is longer than the side opposite the second angle.

The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the length of the third
side.

The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is greater than the measure of either remote
interior angle.
Inequalities in Two Triangles:
Hinge Theorem
If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the included
angle of the first triangle is greater than the included angle of the second, then the third side
of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second.
Converse of Hinge Theorem

If two sides of one triangle are congruent to two sides of another triangle, but the third side
of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second, then the included angle of the
first triangle is larger than the included angle of the second.
433
REFERENCES AND WEBSITE LINKS USED IN THIS MODULE
A. Reference Books
Baccay, A. (n.d.). Geometry for Secondary Schools. Philippines: Phoenix Publishing

House
Jurgensen, R.C., R.J. Brown, and J.W. Jurgensen (1990). Mathematics 2 An Integrated
Approach. Quezon City: Abiva Publishing House, Inc.
Moise, E. and F. Downs, Jr. (1977). Geometry Metric Edition. Philippines: Addison-Wes-
ley Publishing Company, Inc.
Strader, W. and L. Rhoads (1934). Plane Geometry. Philippine Islands: The John C.
Winston Company
B. Website Links as References
Bathroomphotogallery.com (n.d.). Kitchen Plans. Retrieved November 22, 2012 from

http://bathroomphotogallery.com/kitchen-plans.php
Burns, C. (2011, March 18). More on Exterior Angles in Triangles. Retrieved October
20, 2012 from http://onemathematicalcat.org/Math/Geometry_obj/exterior_angles.htm
Burns, C. (2012, May 22). Honors Geometry Lesson Inequalities in One Triangle. Re-
trieved November 16, 2012 from www.slideserve.com/elias/honors-geometry
CliffsNotes.com. (2012, October 6). The Triangle Inequality Theorem. Retrieved

October 20, 2012 from http://www.cliffsnotes.com/study_guide/topicArticleId-
18851,articleId-18791.html
Cuer, K. (2007, July 19). Geometry 5.6 Indirect Proof and Inequalities in Two Triangles.
Retrieved November 21, 2012, from http://mcuer.blogspot.com/2007/07/geometry-
56-indirect-proof-and.html
Dailymotion. (2005-2012). Real life application of triangle inequality theorem. Retrieved

October 6, 2012, from http://www.dailymotion.com/video/xgeb9n_how-to-apply-the-tri-
angle-inequality-theorem-to-real-life-problems_tech
Fuller, C. (2009, March 9). 5.6: Hinge Theorem Indirect Proof. Retrieved October 6,
2012, from http://propertiesoftriangles.wikispaces.com/file/view/5.6+HingeTheorem+In
direct+Proof.pdf
434
Irrigationrepair.com. (2010). How To Properly Space Rotors and Sprays. Retrieved No-
vember 23, 2012, from http://www.irrigationrepair.com/how_to_space_rotors_sprays.
html
Marain, D. (2008, August 6). A Triangle Inequality and Algebra Application. Retrieved
October 6, 2012, from http://mathnotations.blogspot.com/2008/08/triangle-inequality-
and-algebra.
Mason Jr., F. (2011, July 7). A proof of Exterior angle inequality. Retrieved October 6,
2012, from http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Mq6uExuUl6o
Math Warehouse. (n.d.). Triangle Inequality Theorem. Retrieved October 6, 2012, from
http://www.mathwarehouse.com/geometry/triangles/triangle-inequality-theorem-rule-
explained.php
McDougal Little Geometry. (2001). Chapter 5-5 and 5-6: Inequalities in One and Two
Triangles. Retrieved November 21, 2012, from http://www.nexuslearning.net/books/ml-
geometry/
Mercer, J. (2008-2009). What is the Hinge Theorem? Retrieved October 6, 2012, from
http://ceemrr.com/Geometry1/HingeTheorem/HingeTheorem_print.html
Millersville University. (2012). Exterior angle inequality theorem proof. Retrieved Octo-
ber 6, 2012, from www.millersville.edu/~rumble/math.353/triangle_defect.pdf
Mr. Pis Algebra and Geometry (2011, July 7). A proof of Exterior angle inequality theo-
rem. Retrieved October 6, 2012, from http://mrpilarski.wordpress.com/2010/01/10/how-
to-write-indirect-proofs-exterior-angle-inequality-theorem/
Murray, M. (1998-2012). Triangle Inequalities. Retrieved October 20, 2012, from Oswe-
go City School District Regents Exam Prep Centers website: http://www.regentsprep.
org/Regents/math/geometry/GP7/LTriIneq.htm
NixaMath. (2011, November 30). Hinge theorem Retrieved October 20, 2012, from
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=endscreen&v=4POzqAKzY3E&NR=1
Sioux Falls School District. (2002-2012). Geometry-SFSD Model for Mathematics. Re-
trieved October 10, 2012, from http://www.sf.k12.sd.us/index.php?option=com_flexico
ntent&view=items&cid=71:staff&id=266:high-school-mathematics&Itemid=312
435
University of Washington Department of Mathematics (n.d). Triangle Inequality. Retrieved
October 6, 2012, from http://www.math.washington.edu/~king/coursedir/m444a03/
notes/10-03-Triangle-Inequality.html
Wikipedia The Free Encyclopedia. (2012, November 16) Triangle Inequality. Retrieved
October 6, 2012, from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Triangle_inequality
WyzAnt Tutoring. (n.d.). Inequalities and Relationships Within a Triangle. Retrieved

October 6, 2012, from http://www.wyzant.com/Help/Math/Geometry/Triangles/Inequali-
ties_and_Relationships.aspx
Yeh, J. (2008, April 8). Exterior angle inequality. Retrieved October 6, 2012, from the
website of Idaho State University Department of Mathematics: web.math.isu.edu.tw/
yeh/2008spring/Geometry/LectureNotes/Lecture7-section3_4.pdf
C. Website Links for Images
123rf.com. (2012). Close up of a geodesic design with triangular patterns. Retrieved

November 22, 2012, http://www.123rf.com/photo_9981572_closeup-of-a-geodesic-de-
sign-with-triangular-patterns.html
Algernon, C. (2012, March 13) Robert Stenbergs Triangular Theory of Love. Retrieved
November 22, 2012, from http://gentlemencalling.wordpress.com/2012/03/13/for-the-
love-of-triangles/
Arthritis Self-Management. (2012). Stretches. Retrieved November 10, 2012, from

http://www.arthritisselfmanagement.com/health/exercise-and-physical-therapy/exercis-
es-for-oa/
Cebu Island Hotels. (2012). Nipa Hut. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://1.
bp.blogspot.com/_eOQA8UzOj50/SzuGMqtZlGI/AAAAAAAADHE/MA7T2A9jhtE/
s1600-h/muslim-bahay-kubo.jpg
Custommade.com. (n.d). Ideas for Custom Mahogany Ornate Furniture Designs. Re-
trieved November 22, 2012, from http://www.custommade.com/ornate-mahogany-furni-
ture/smo-19242/s/1/13/
Directindustry.com. (2012). Backhoe Loader. Retrieved December 4, 2012, from http://

www.directindustry.com/prod/sichuan-chengdu-cheng-gong-construction-machinery/
backhoe-loaders-52849-889813.html
436
Dragoart.com. (2012). How to Draw a Peacock for Kids. Retrieved November 22, 2012,
http://www.dragoart.com/tuts/8963/1/1/how-to-draw-a-peacock-for-kids.htm
Duncan. (2010, May 5). Mathsthe best use for golf balls. Retrieved November 22,
2012, from WhizzEducation2011 website: http://www.whizz.com/blog/fun/maths-best-
use-for-golf-balls/
Eshi Internatioan Pte Ltd. (2009, August 3) Eco Architecture: Triangular skyscraper de-
signed with vegetated mini-atriums. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://www.
ecofriend.com/eco-architecture-triangular-skyscraper-designed-with-vegetated-mini-
atriums.html
Fallout.wikia.com. (2012). See Saw. Retrieved December 4, 2012, http://images2.wikia.

nocookie.net/__cb20110327045932/fallout/images/0/06/See_Saw.png
Franks, S. (2011, July 29). The worlss first protractor. Retrieved November 19, 2012,
from http://www.ablogabouthistory.com/2011/07/29/the-worlds-first-protractor/
Gregelope. (2009, March 9) Triangle Petal Card. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from
http://www.flickr.com/photos/32462223@N05/3413593357/in/photostream/
J1 Studio. (2010, June 7). Triangle Shelf serves both as an artwork and a shelf. Re-
trieved October 23, 2012, from http://www.livbit.com/article/2010/06/07/triangle-shelf-
serves-both-as-an-artwork-and-a-shelf/
Jesse, D. (2012, May 9) Geometric Shapes for Foundation Piecing. Retrieved Novem-
ber 22, 2012, from http://diannajessie.wordpress.com/tag/triangular-design/
Johansson, C. (2011, October 6). Triangular Girl. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from
http://thecarolinejohansson.com/blog/2011/10/triangular-girl-2/
Kator, A. (2012) Quick Tips in Design. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from ATPM, Inc.:
http://www.atpm.com/9.08/design.shtml
Leach, M. (2012) Triangular Periodic Table by Emil Zmaczynski. Retrieved November
23, 2012, from http://www.meta-synthesis.com/webbook/35_pt/pt_database.php?PT_
id=40
437
Mathteacher.com. (2012). Compass. Retrieved December 4, 2012, from
http://64.19.142.13/www.mathsteacher.com.au/year8/ch10_geomcons/03_circles/
comph2.gif_hyuncompressed
MATRIX Maths and Technology Revealed in Exhibition. (2010, May 5) Architects Pro-
tractor. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://www.counton.org/museum/floor2/
gallery5/gal3p8.html
Mihalik, S. (2012, February 21). Repetitive Graduation. Retrieved November 22, 2012,
from http://mathtourist.blogspot.com/2012/02/flight-of-tetrahedra.html
MurrayBrosShows (2011, July 29). Hurricane Ride. Retrieved December 4, 2012, from
http://www.flickr.com/photos/60372684@N08/6538606003/
OLX.com.ph. (n.d). Amusement Ride. Retrieved December 4, 2012, from http://imag-

es02.olx.com.ph/ui/13/28/64/1299473362_174282464_9-AMUSEMENT-RIDES-FOR-
SALE-IN-KOREA-.jpg
Parr, L. (2012) History of the Fan. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://64.19.142.12/
www.victoriana.com/Fans/images/antiquefan-1.JPG
Peterson, J.A. (2012, May 9) Triangular Card Stand. Retrieved November 22, 2012,
from http://www.behance.net/gallery/TRIANGLE-CARD-STAND/3883741
Sz.promo.com (n.d). Aluminum folding ladder. Retrieved December 4, 2012, from http://
www.sz-promo.com/cn-img/877/881cnal1/aluminum-folding-ladder-hy-1500-627.jpg
The Tile House. (2010, May 25). Diminishing Triangles. Retrieved November 22, 2012,
from http://sitteninthehills64.blogspot.com/2010/05/tile-house-8.html
Tongue, S. (2012, March 2) A triangle of health in A triangular approach to fat loss

by Stephen Tongue. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://www.fitnessnewspaper.
com/2012/03/02/a-triangular-approach-to-fat-loss-by-stephen-tongue/
Tradeford.com. (2012). Bamboo Table. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://fo-
rum.tradeford.com/topic-455/information-about-bamboo-furniture.html
438
Tripwow.TripAdvisor.com. (2012). Vinta. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from http://trip-
wow.tripadvisor.com/slideshow-photo/vinta-zamboanga-philippines.html?sid=1593419
2&fid=upload_12986215846-tpfil02aw-26270
Tumbler.com. (2011). Triangle Collage. Retrieved October 23, 2012, from http://discov-
erpetrichor.tumblr.com/post/13119238098
WeUseMath.org. (2012, May 9) Air Traffic Controller. Retrieved November 22, 2012,
from BYU Mathematics Department: http://math.byu.edu/when/?q=careers/airtrafficco-
ntroller
Wikipedia The Free Encyclopedia. (2012, November 20). Joseph Huddart. Retrieved
November 19, 2012, from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Joseph_Huddart
Wikipedia The Free Encyclopedia. (2010, October 16). Small Pair of Blue scissors. Re-
trieved December 4, 2012, from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Small_pair_of_blue_
scissors.jpg
Williamson, C. (2012, November 5) Bartek Warzecha Photographs for Polish Modern

Art Foundation of the Worlds Thinnest House: Keret House by Jakub Szczesny. Re-
trieved November 22, 2012, from http://design-milk.com/worlds-thinnest-house-keret-
house-by-jakub-szczesny/
Yeebiz.com. (2012). Bamboo Furniture. Retrieved November 22, 2012,from http://www.

yeebiz.com/p/361/Bamboo-Furniture-322820.html
D. Website Links for Games
Mangahigh.com. (2012) Congruent Triangles. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from

http://www.fruitpicker.co.uk/activity/
MathPlayground.com. (2012) Measuring Angles. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from

http://www.bbc.co.uk/schools/teachers/ks2_activities/maths/angles.shtml
Mr. Perez Online Math Tutor. (n.d.) Congruence in Triangles using: CPCTC, SSS, SAS,
ASA, AAS, HL, HA, LL, and LA. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from WhizzEduca-
tion2011 website: http://www.bbc.co.uk/keyskills/flash/kfa/kfa.shtml
439
TeacherLED.com. (n.d) Angle Measure. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from: http://
www.innovationslearning.co.uk/subjects/maths/activities/year6/angles/game.asp
Utah State University. (2012) Congruent Triangles. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from
http://resources.oswego.org/games/bananahunt/bhunt.html
E. Website Links for Interactive
Mangahigh.com. (2012). Congruent Triangles. Retrieved November 22, 2012,

from http://www.mangahigh.com/en/maths_games/shape/congruence/congruent_
triangles?localeset=en
MathPlayground.com. (2012). Measuring Angles. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from

http://www.mathplayground.com/measuringangles.html
MathWarehouse.com. (n.d.). Remote, Exterior and Interior Angles of A Triangle. Re-

trieved November 22, 2012, from http://www.mathwarehouse.com/geometry/triangles/
angles/remote-exterior-and-interior-angles-of-a-triangle.php
Mr. Perez Online Math Tutor. (n.d.). Congruence In Triangles using: CPCTC, SSS,
SAS, ASA, AAS, HL, HA, LL, and LA. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from WhizzEdu-
cation2011 website: http://www.mrperezonlinemathtutor.com/G/1_5_Proving_Congru-
ent_SSS_SAS_ASA_AAS.html
TeacherLED.com. (n.d). Angle Measure. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from: http://
www.teacherled.com/resources/anglemeasure/anglemeasureload.html
Utah State University. (2012). Congruent Triangles. Retrieved November 22, 2012, from
http://nlvm.usu.edu/en/nav/frames_asid_165_g_1_t_3.html?open=instructions
F. Dictionary
Lewis, A. (2006). Wordweb 4.5a Freeware version.
440
PARALLELISM AND
PERPENDICULARITY
Have you ever wondered how

carpenters, architects, and engineers
design their work? What factors are being
considered in making their designs? The use
of parallelism and perpendicularity of lines in
real life necessitates the establishment of
these concepts deductively.
This module seeks to answer the

question: How can we establish parallelism
or perpendicularity of lines?
II. LESSON AND COVERAGE

In this module, you will examine this question when you study the following about
Parallelism and Perpendicularity
1. Proving Theorems on Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

2. Proving Properties of Parallel Lines Cut by a Transversal
3. Conditions to Prove that a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram
4. Applications of Parallelism and Perpendicularity
441
In this lesson, you will learn to:
illustrate parallel and perpendicular lines;
demonstrate knowledge and skills involving angles formed by parallel lines and
transversals;
determine and prove the conditions under which lines and segments are parallel or
perpendicular;
determine the conditions that make a quadrilateral a parallelogram and prove that
a quadrilateral is a parallelogram and;
use properties of parallel and perpendicular lines to find measures of angles, sides,
and other quantities involving parallelograms.
Module Map
Module Map
Here is a simple map of the lesson that will be covered in this module.
Theorems
and
Proofs
Properties Conditions for a

Parallelism and
of Parallel and Quadrilateral to be a
Perpendicularity
Perpendicular Lines Parallelogram
Applications
442
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this module. Choose the letter that
corresponds to the best answer and write it on a separate sheet. Please answer all
items. After taking this test, take note of the items that you were not able to answer
correctly. Correct answers are provided as you go through the module.
1. In the figure below, l1 || l2 and t is a transversal. Which of the following are

corresponding angles? t
l1 1 2
a. 4 and 6, 3 and 5 4 3
b. 1 and 7, 2 and 8
c. 1 and 5, 2 and 6 l 5 6
d. 4 and 5, 3 and 6
2 8 7

2. All of the following are properties of a parallelogram EXCEPT:
a. Diagonals bisect each other.

b. Opposite angles are congruent.
c. Opposite sides are congruent.
d. Opposite sides are not parallel.
3. Lines m and n are parallel cut by transversal t which is also perpendicular to m and
n. Which statement is NOT correct?
m n
a. 1 and 6 are congruent.
b. 2 and 3 are supplementary. 12 3 4
c. 3 and 5 are congruent angles. t 56 7 8
d. 1 and 4 form a linear pair.
4. In the figure below, which of the following guarantees that m || n?

t
a. 1 7 n 1 2
3 4
b. 3 5
c. 4 5 5 6
d. 4 7 m
7 8
5. Parallel lines a and b are cut by transversal t. If m1 = 85, what is the measure of
5? t
a 21
a. 5 34
b. 85
c. 95
d. 275 b 8 7
5 6
443
6. If JOSH is a parallelogram and mJ = 57, find the measure of H.
a. 43
b. 57
c. 63
d. 123
In the figure below, if m || n and t is a transversal which angles are congruent to

7.
5? t
n 1 2
a. 1, 2 and 3 3 4
b. 1, 4 and 8
c. 1, 4 and 7 5 6
d. 1, 2 and 8 m 7 8
8. If LOVE is a parallelogram and SE = 6, what is SO?

L O
a. 3
b. 6 S
c. 12
d. 15
E V
9. The Venn Diagram on the right shows the relationships of quadrilaterals. Which
statements are true?
Quadrilaterals
I - Squares are rectangles. Parallelograms
II- A trapezoid is a parallelogram. Rectangle Square Rhombus
III- A rhombus is a square.
IV- Some parallelograms are squares.
Trapezoid
a. I and II
b. III and IV
c. I and IV
d. II and III
10. All of the figures below illustrate parallel lines except:
a. c.
b. d.
444
11. In the figure below, a d with e as the transversal. What must be true about 3 and
4, if b c?
a
e
a. 3 is a complement of 4. b
b. 3 is congruent to 4. 1 4
c. 3 is a supplement of 4.
d. 3 is greater than 4. c 3 2
d
12. Which of the following statements ensures that a quadrilateral is a parallelogram?
a. Diagonals bisect each other.

b. The two diagonals are congruent.
c. The consecutive sides are congruent.
d. Two consecutive angles are congruent.
13. Which of the following statements is always true?
a. Lines that do not intersect are parallel lines.

b. Two coplanar lines that do not intersect are parallel lines.
c. Lines that form a right angle are parallel lines.
d. Skew lines are parallel lines.
STAR is a rhombus with diagonal RT. If mSTR = 3x 5 and mART = x + 21, what
14.
is mRAT?
S T
a. 13
b. 34
c. 68
d. 112 R A
15. You are tasked to divide a blank card into three equal rows/pieces but you do not
have a ruler. Instead, you will use a piece of equally lined paper and a straightedge.
What is the sequence of the steps you are going to undertake in order to apply the
theorem on parallel lines?
I Mark the points where the second and third lines intersect the card.
II Place a corner of the top edge of the card on the first line of the paper.
III Repeat for the other side of the card and connect the marks.
IV Place the corner of the bottom edge on the fourth line.
a. I, II, III, IV
b. II, III, IV, I
c. I, III, IV, II
d. II, IV, I, III
445
16. You are a student council president. You want to request for financial assistance
for the installation of a bookshelf for the improvement of your schools library.
Your student council moderator asked you to submit a proposal for their approval.
Which of the following will you prepare?
I. design proposal of the bookshelf

II. research on the importance of bookshelf
III. estimated cost of the project
IV. pictures of different libraries
a. I only
b. I and II only
c. I and III only
d. II and IV only
17. Based on your answer in item 16, which of the following standards should be the
basis of your moderator in approving or granting your request?
a. accuracy, creativity, and mathematical reasoning

b. practicality, creativity, and cost
c. accuracy, originality, and mathematical reasoning
d. organization, mathematical reasoning, and cost
18. Based on item 16, design is common to all the four given options. If you were to
make the design, which of the illustrations below will you make to ensure stability?
a. c.
b. d.
446
19. You are an architect of the design department of a mall. Considering the increasing
number of mall-goers, the management decided to restructure their parking lot so
as to maximize the use of the space. As the head architect, you are tasked to
make a design of the parking area and this design is to be presented to the mall
administrators for approval. Which of the following are you going to make so as to
maximize the use of the available lot?
a.
b.
c.
d.
20. Based on your answer in item 19, how will your immediate supervisor know that
you have a good design?
a. The design should be realistic.

b. The design should be creative and accurate.
c. The design should be accurate and practical.
d. The design shows in-depth application of mathematical reasoning and it is
practical.
447
LEARNING GOALS AND TARGETS:

The learner demonstrates understanding of the key concepts of parallel and
perpendicular lines.
The learner is able to communicate mathematical thinking with coherence and
clarity in solving real-life problems involving parallelism and perpendicularity using
appropriate and accurate representations.
What to
What to Know
Know
Start the module by looking at the figures below. Then, answer the succeeding
questions.
A ctivity 1
OPTICAL ILLUSION
Can you see straight lines in the pictures above? ________

Do these lines meet/intersect? ________
Are these lines parallel? Why? ________
Are the segments on the faces of the prism below parallel? Why? ________

What can you say about the edges of the prism? ________
Describe the edges that interesect and the edges that do not intersect. ________
448
You have just tried describing parallel and perpendicular lines. In Activities 2 and 3,
your prior knowledge on parallelism and perpendicularity will be used.
A ctivity 2
GENERALIZATION TABLE
Direction: Fill in the first column of the generalization table below by stating your initial
thoughts on the question.
How can parallelism or perpendicularity of lines be established?
My Initial
Thoughts
A ctivity 3
AGREE OR DISAGREE!
ANTICIPATION-REACTION GUIDE
Read each statement under the TOPIC column and write A if you agree with the
statement; otherwise, write D.
Before-Lesson
TOPIC: Parallelism and Perpendicularity
Response
1. Lines on the same plane that do not intersect are
parallel lines.
2. Skew lines are coplanar.
3. Transversal is a line that intersects two or more
lines.
4. Perpendicular lines are intersecting lines.
5. If two lines are parallel to a third line, then the
two lines are parallel.
449
6. If two lines are perpendicular to the same line,
then the two lines are parallel.
7. If one side of a quadrilateral is congruent to
its opposite side, then the quadrilateral is a
parallelogram.
8. Diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
9. Diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent.
10. Diagonals of a parallelogram are perpendicular.
11. Opposite sides of a parallelogram are parallel.
12. Opposite angles of a parallelogram are congruent.
13. Consecutive angles of a parallelogram are
congruent.
14. Squares are rectangles.
15. Squares are rhombi.
Well, those were your thoughts and ideas about our lesson. Start a new activity
to further explore the key concepts on parallel and perpendicular lines. I guess you had
already in your previous Mathematics lessons, but just to recall, then answer the next
activity.
A ctivity 4
NAME IT! A RECALL...
We see parallel lines everywhere. Lines on a pad paper, railways, edges of a door or
window, fence, etc. suggest parallel lines. Complete the table below using the given figure as
your reference:
p
m 1 2
3 4
n 5 6
7 8
Corresponding Alternate Interior Alternate Same Side Same Side

Angles Angles Exterior Angles Interior Angles Exterior Angles
450
You gave your initial ideas on naming angle pairs formed by two lines cut by a
transversal. What you will learn in the next sections will enable you to do the final project
which involves integrating the key concepts of parallelism and perpendicularity of lines in
model-making of a bookcase. Now find out how these pairs of angles are related in terms
of their measures by doing the first activity on investigating the relationship between the
angles formed by parallel lines cut by a transversal.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand key concepts on measurement
of angles formed by parallel lines cut by a transversal and basic concepts on
perpendicularity and the properties of a parallelogram. Towards the end of this section,
you will be encouraged to learn the different ways of proving deductively. You may
also visit the link for this investigation activity. http://www.mathwarehouse.com/geometry/
angle/interactive-transveral-angles.php
A ctivity 5
LETS INVESTIGATE!
Two parallel lines when cut by a transversal form eight angles. This activity will lead you
to investigate the relationship between and among angles formed.
Measure the eight angles using your protractor and list all inferences or observations in
the activity.
m1= ________
m2= 1 2 ________
m3= 3 4 ________
m4= ________

5 6 m5= ________
m6= 7 8 ________
m7= ________
m8= ________

OBSERVATIONS:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Now, think about the answers to the following questions. Write your answers in your
answer sheet.
451
ES TIO 1. What pairs of angles are formed when two lines are cut by a
transversal line?
?
QU
NS 2. What pairs of angles have equal measures? What pairs of angles

are supplementary?
3. Can the measures of any pair of angles (supplementary or equal)
guarantee the parallelism of lines? Support your answer.
4. How can the key concepts of parallel lines facilitate solving real-life
problems using deductive reasoning?
Discussion: Parallelism
1. Two lines are parallel if and only if they are coplanar and they do not intersect.
(m || n) t
m 1 2
3 4

5 6 transversal
n 7 8
2. A line that intersects two or more lines is called a transversal.
a. The angles formed by the transversal with the two other lines are called:
exterior angles (1, 2, 7, and 8)
interior angles (3, 4, 5, and 6).
b. The pairs of angles formed by the transversal with the other two lines are called:
corresponding angles (1 and 5, 2 and 6, 3 and 7, 4 and 8)
alternate interior angles (3 and 6, 4 and 5)
alternate exterior angles (1 and 8, 2 and 7)
interior angles on the same side of the transversal (3 and 5, 4 and 6)
exterior angles on the same side of the transversal (1 and 7, 2 and 8)
To strengthen your knowledge regarding the different angles formed by parallel

lines cut by a transversal line and how they are related to one another, you may visit the
following sites:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AE3Pqhlvqw0&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VA92EWf9SRI&feature=relmfu
452
A ctivity 6 UNCOVERING THE MYSTERY OF PARALLEL
LINES CUT BY A TRANSVERSAL
Study the problem situation below and answer the succeeding questions:
A zip line is a very strong cable between two points with a pulley attached to it.
This could be used as a means of transportation. The zip line in the figure goes from
a 20-foot tall tower to a 15-foot tower 150 meters apart in a slightly inclined ground as
shown in the sketch. (Note: Tension of the rope is excluded.)
M
2z +15
A
3z
a
b
y + 18
H y
T
1. What kind of angle pairs are M and A? MHT and ATH?

_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
2. In the figure above, what are the measures of the four angles?
Solution: Answers:
mM = _________
mA = _________
mMHT = _________
mATH = _________
3. Are the two towers parallel? Why do you say so?
4. Is the zip line parallel to the ground? Why do you say so?
For practice you may proceed to this link:

http://www.regentsprep.org/Regents/math/geometry/GP8/PracParallel.htm
453
A ctivity 7
LINES AND ANGLES
I. Study the figure and answer the following questions as accurately as you can. The
figure below shows a || b with t as transversal.
a b
t 3
142
6
7 8
5
Name:
1. 2 pairs of corresponding angles __________ _________
2. 2 pairs of alternate interior angles __________ _________
3. 2 pairs of alternate exterior angles __________ _________
4. 2 pairs of interior angles on the same __________ _________
side of the transversal
5. 2 pairs of exterior angles on the same __________ _________
side of the transversal
II. Based on your observations of the measures of the angles formed by parallel lines cut
by a transversal, what can you say about the following angles?
a. Corresponding angles _________

b. Alternate interior angles _________
c. Alternate exterior angles _________
d. Pairs of exterior angles _________
e. Interior angles on the same side of the transversal _________
III. Find the value of x given that l1 l2.
l1 l2
1. m1 = 2x + 25 and m8 = x + 75 ________
12
2. m2 = 3x 10 and m6 = 2x + 45 ________
5 6
34
78
3. m3 = 4v 31 and m8 = 2x + 7 ________
454
A ctivity 8
AM I PERPENDICULAR? LETS FIND OUT!
Given any two distinct lines on a plane, the lines either intersect or are parallel. If two
lines intersect, then they form four angles. Consider the figures below to answer the questions
that follow.

n a
m
Figure 1 Figure 2
b
s
l1
l2
Figure 3 Figure 4
ES TIO
?
QU
NS
1. What is common in the four figures given above?

_____________________________________________________
2. What makes figures 3 and 4 different from the first two figures?
_____________________________________________________
3. Which among the four figures show perpendicularity? Check by
using your protractor.
_____________________________________________________
4. When are lines said to be perpendicular to each other?
_____________________________________________________
5. How useful is the knowledge on perpendicularity in real-life? Cite an
example in which perpendicularity is important in real-life.
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
455
Discussion: Perpendicularity
Two lines that intersect to form right angles are said to be perpendicular. Line segments
and rays can also be perpendicular. A perpendicular bisector of a line segment is a line or
a ray or another line segment that is perpendicular to the line segment and intersects it at its
midpoint. The distance between two parallel lines is the perpendicular distance between
one of the lines and any point on the other line.
u lar
dic
rpen
Pe
90o
perpendicular distance
X Y Z
between the parallel lines
Perpendicular bisector
(XY YZ)
The small rectangle drawn on intersecting lines indicates a right angle. The symbol
indicates perpendicularity of lines as in XZ PY.

To prove that two lines are perpendicular, you must show that one of the following
theorems is true:
1. If two lines are perpendicular to each other, then they form four right angles.
m
If m n, then 1, 2, 3,
and 4 are right angles.
1 2
n 3 4
456
2. If the angles in a linear pair are congruent, then the lines containing their sides are
perpendicular.
l1
If 1 and 2 form a
linear pair and 1 2,
l2 1 2 then l1 l2.
3 4
3. If two angles are adjacent and complementary, the non-common sides are perpendicular.
C R
If 1 and and
CAR 2 form a linear
EAR
pair complementary
are andl1
and 1 2, then
l2.
adjacent, then AC AE.
A E
You may watch the video lesson using the given links. These videos will explain how
to construct a perpendicular line to a point and a perpendicular line through a point not on
a line.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dK3S78SjPDw&feature=player_embedded
Activity 9 will test your skill and knowledge about perpendicular lines. This will
prepare you also to understand the final task for this module. Come on. Try it!
A ctivity 9
DRAW ME RIGHT!
Directions: Copy each figure on a separate sheet of bond paper. Draw the segment that
is perpendicular from the given point to the identified side. Extend the sides if
necessary.
A

A to RH
1.
R H
457
E I
E to RN
2.
R N
L
D to IE
3. D E

R I
ES TIO 1. What did you use to draw the perpendicular segments?

?
QU
NS
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
2. How sure are you that the segments you drawn are really
perpendicular to the indicated side?
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
A ctivity 10
THINK TWICE!
Part I : Refer to the given figure and the given conditions in answering the succeeding
questions. Raise your YES card if your answer is yes; otherwise, raise your NO
card. S
Given:
MI IL
SE EL E
mSEI = 90
M L
I
YES NO
1. Is ML IS?
2. Is MS SL?
3. Is SL ML?
4. Are MSI and ISL complementary angles?
458
5. Are MIS and SIE complementary angles?
6. Is IE a perpendicular bisector of SL?
7. Do MIS and SIL form a linear pair?
8. Is the mMIS = 90?
9. Is SI shorter than SE?
10. Is SE shorter than MI?
Part II: Fill in the second, third, and fourth columns of the generalization table below by
stating your present thoughts on the question.
My Findings
Supporting Qualifying
and
Evidence Conditions
Corrections
Discussion: KINDS OF QUADRILATERALS:
A quadrilateral is a polygon with four sides. The symbol is used in

this module to indicate a quadrilateral. For example, ABCD, this is read as
quadrilateral ABCD.
Quadrilaterals are classified as follows:
1. Trapezium a quadrilateral with no pair of parallel sides.

2. Trapezoid a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides. If the non-
parallel sides are congruent, the trapezoid is isosceles.
3. Parallelogram a quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides. There are
two special kinds of parallelogram: the rectangle which has four right angles
and the rhombus which has four congruent sides. A square which has four
congruent angles and four congruent sides can be a rectangle or a rhombus
because it satisfies the definition of a rectangle and a rhombus.
459
A ctivity 11
SPECIAL QUADRILATERALS
Study the blank diagram below. Write the name of the quadrilateral in the box. After
which, complete the table below.
Direction: Place a check mark () in the boxes below if the quadrilateral listed along the top
row has the properties listed in the left column.

Parallelogram
Rectangle
Rhombus
Square
Properties
Opposite sides are congruent.

Opposite angles are congruent.
Sum of the measures of the consecutive angles is 180.
Diagonals are congruent.
Diagonals are perpendicular.
Diagonals bisect each other
460
ES TIO
1. What properties are common to rectangles, rhombi, and squares?
?
QU
NS _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
2. What makes a rectangle different from a rhombus? A rectangle from
a square? A rhombus from a square?
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
3. What makes parallelograms special in relation to other quadrilaterals?
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
4. Are the properties of parallelograms helpful in establishing parallelism
and perpendicularity of lines?
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
You may visit this URL to have more understanding of the properties of a parallelogram.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_detailpage&v=0rNjGNI1Uzo
A ctivity 12
HIDE AND SEEK!
Each figure below is a parallelogram. Use your observations in the previous activity to
find the value of the unknown parts.
1. 34 cm YOUR ANSWER
cm
27 a a = __________
b = __________
c
2. c = __________
d = __________
480 d
461
e f
3. e = __________
f = __________
630
780
Discussion: Writing Proofs/Proving
In the previous modules you solved a lot of equations and inequalities by applying the
different properties of equality and inequality. To name some, you have the APE (Addition
Property of Equality), MPE (Multiplication Property of Equality), and TPE (Transitive Property
of Equality). Now, you will use these properties with some geometric definitions, postulates,
and theorems to write proofs.
In proving we use reasoning, specifically deductive reasoning. Deductive reasoning

is a type of logical reasoning that uses accepted facts as reasons in a step-by-step manner
until the desired statement is established or proved.
A proof is a logical argument in which each statement is supported/justified by given

information, definitions, axioms, postulates, or theorems.
Proofs can be written in three different ways:
1. Paragraph Form
Proof in paragraph form is the type of proof where you write a paragraph to explain
why a conjecture for a given situation is true.
Given: LOE and EOV

are complementary
Prove: LO OV
L
O V
462
Proof:
Since LOE and EOV are complementary, then mLOE + mEOV = 90 by

definition of complementary angles. Thus, mLOE + mEOV = mLOV by angle
addition postulate and mLOV = 90 by transitive property of equality. So, LOV
is a right angle by definition of right angles. Therefore, LO OV by definition of
perpendicularity.
2. Two-Column Form
Proof in two-column form has statements and reasons. The first column is for the
statements and the other column is for the reasons.
Using the same problem in number 1, the proof is as follows:

Statements Reasons
1. LOE and EOV are complementary. 1. Given
2. mLOE + mEOV = 90 2. Definition of Complementary Angles
3. mLOE + mEOV = mLOV 3. Angle Addition Postulate (AAP)
4. mLOV = 90 4. Transitive Property of Equality (TPE)
5. LOV is a right angle. 5. Definition of Right Angle
6. LO OV 6. Definition of Perpendicularity
You may watch the video lesson on this kind of proof using the following link: http://
www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=3Ti7-Ojr7Cg
3. Flow Chart Form
A flow chart proof organizes a series of statements in a logical order using a flow
chart. Each statement together with its justification is written in a box and arrows
are used to show how each statement leads to another. It can make one's logic
visible and help others follow the reasoning.
The flow chart proof of the problem in number 1 is shown below.
LOE and EOV are

mLOE + mEOV = 90 mLOE + mEOV = LOV
complementary.
Given Definition of Complementary A.A.P.
Angles
mLOV = 90
T.P.E
LO OV LOV is a right angle.
Definition of Perpendicularity Definition of Right Angle
463
This URL shows you a video lessons in proving using flow chart. http://www.youtube.
com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=jgylP7yPgFY
The following rubric will be used to rate proofs.

4 3 2 1
Logic and The The The proof The
Reasoning mathematical mathematical contains some mathematical
reasoning is reasoning is flaws or reasoning is
sound and mostly sound, omissions in either absent
cohesive. but lacking mathematical or seriously
some minor reasoning. flawed.
details.
Use of Notation is Notation and There is a clear Terminology and
mathematical skillfully used; terminology need for notation
terminology and terminology is are used improvement in are incorrectly
notation used correctly with the use of and
flawlessly only a few terminology or inconsistently
exceptions. notation used.
Correctness The proof is The proof is More than one The argument
complete and mostly correct, correction given does
correct. but has a minor is needed for a not prove the
flaw. proper desired
proof. result.
Its your turn. Accomplish Activity 13 and for sure you will enjoy it!
A ctivity 13 l1 l2
PROVE IT!
Complete each proof below:
2
1. Given: Line t intersects l1 and l2 such 1
that 1 2 . t 3
Prove: l1 l2
Proof:

Statements Reasons
1. 1 2 1. __________________
2. _______________ 2. Vertical angles are congruent.
3. 3 2 3. Transitive Property of Congruence
4. l1 l2 4. _________________
464
S M A
2. Given: SA RT 1 2
2 3
Prove: MT AR
Proof:

3
T R
SA RT
Given Alternate interior angles are

congruent.
Given _________________ _________________
A B
3. Given: ABCD is a parallelogram.
Prove: A and B are supplementary.
Proof: D C
Statements Reasons
1. ABCD is a parallelogram. 1.
2. BC AD 2.
3. A and B are supplementary. 3.
465
4. Given: AC and BD bisect each other at E. A B
Prove: ABCD is a parallelogram. E

D C
AE EC AEB DEC
BE DE AED BEC
Given _________________ _________________
AEB CED
AED CEB
SAS Postulate
Converse of Alternate Interior Angles Theorem ABE CDE and ADE CBE
ABCD is a parallelogram CPCTC
In this section, the discussion was about the key concepts on parallelism and
perpendicularity. Relationships of the different angle pairs formed by parallel lines cut by a
transversal and the properties of parallelograms were also given emphasis. The different
ways of proving through deductive reasoning were discussed with examples presented.
Go back to the previous section and compare your initial ideas with the discussion.
need revision?
Now that you know the important ideas about this topic, go deeper by moving on to
the next section.
466
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ______
_ _ _ _ _ ______ _________
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
learne __________ ___________ _____
d
a v e
What
I h
_ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ ___ _
_ _ _ _ ___ _
_ _ _ _ _ __ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_
___
_ _ _ _ _ _____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ _______
_____ _ _ _ _ _ ___
_ _ _ _ _ ____ _ _ ______ _____
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
467
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Your goal in this section is to take a closer look at some aspects of the topic. I hope
that you are now ready to answer the exercises given in this section. Expectedly, the
activities aim to intensify the application of the different concepts you have learned.
A ctivity 14 PROVE IT!
Prove the given statements below using any form of writing proofs.

t
1. Given:
m n and t is a transversal. 1 2
m 3 4
Prove:
1 and 7 are supplementary.
5 6
n 7 8
2. In the figure, if m1 = 3x + 15 and m2 = 4x 10, prove that CT is perpendicular

to UE.
C
12
U E
T
468
ES TIO 1. What are the three different ways of proving deductively?
?
QU
NS
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
2. Which of the three ways is the best? Why?

______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
3. How can one reason out deductively?

______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
4. Why is there a need to study deductive reasoning? How is it related

to real life? Cite a situation where deductive reasoning is applied.
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
A ctivity 15
PROVE SOME MORE
To strengthen your skill in proving deductively, provide a complete proof for each problem
below. The use of flow chart is highly recommended.
1. Given: D N
LAND has LA AN ND DL 3 1
with diagonal AD .
Prove: LAND is a rhombus.

4
2
L A
2. Given:
BEAD is a rectangle. B E
Prove: AB DE
D A
469
A ctivity 16
PARALLELOGRAMS
I. What value of x will make each quadrilateral a parallelogram?
1. (3x - 70) Solution:
(2x + 5)
(5x + 2) Solution:
2.
(3x + 14)
II. Show a complete proof:
Given: CE || NI, CE NI
Prove: NICE is a parallelogram.
Proof:
470
A ctivity 17 (REVISIT) AGREE OR DISAGREE!
ANTICIPATION-REACTION GUIDE
Instruction: You were tasked to answer the first column during the earlier part of this module.
Now, see how well you understood the lessons presented. Write A if you agree
with the statement and write D if you disagree.
After-Lesson
TOPIC: Parallelism and Perpendicularity
Response
1. Lines on the same plane that do not
intersect are parallel lines.
2. Skew lines are coplanar.
3. Transversal lines are lines that
intersects two or more lines.
4. Perpendicular lines are intersecting
lines.
5. If two lines are parallel to a third line,
then the three lines are parallel.
6. If two lines are perpendicular to the
same line, then the two lines are
parallel.
7. If one side of a quadrilateral is
congruent to its opposite side, then
the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
8. Diagonals of parallelograms bisect
each other.
9. Diagonals of parallelograms are
congruent.
10. Diagonals of parallelograms are
perpendicular.
11. Opposite sides of parallelograms
are parallel.
12. Opposite angles of a parallelogram
are congruent.
13. Consecutive angles of a
parallelogram are congruent.
14. Squares are rectangles.
15. Squares are rhombi.
471
A ctivity 18
CONCEPT MAPPING
Group Activity: Summarize the important concepts about parallelograms by completing the
concept map below. Present and discuss them in a large group.
Definition
Properties Examples
PARALLELOGRAM
Non-examples
A ctivity 19
GENERALIZATION TABLE
Fill in the last column of the generalization table below by stating your conclusions or
insights about parallelism and perpendicularity.
My
Generalizations
472
A ctivity 20
DESIGN IT!
You are working in a furniture shop as a designer. One day, your immediate supervisor
asked you to make a design of a wooden shoe rack for a new client, who is a well-known artist
in the film industry. In as much as you dont want to disappoint your boss, you immediately
think of the design and try to research on the different designs available in the internet.

Below is your design:
ES TIO 1. Based on your design, how will you ensure that the compartments of
?
QU
NS
the shoe rack are parallel? Describe the different ways to ensure that
the compartments are parallel.
2. Why is there a need to ensure parallelism on the compartments?

What would happen if the compartments are not parallel?
3. How should the sides be positioned in relation to the base of the shoe
rack? Does positioning of the sides in relation to the base matter?
473
A ctivity 21
SUMMATIVE TEST
The copy of the summative test will be given to you by your teacher. Do your best to
answer all the items correctly. The result will be one of the bases of your grade.
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are ready to do the tasks
in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
This task challenges you to apply what you have learned about parallel lines,
perpendicular lines, parallelograms, and the angles and segments related to these
figures. Your work will be graded in accordance with the rubric presented.
A ctivity 22
DESIGNERS FORUM!
Scenario:
The Student Council of a school had a fund raising activity in order to

put up a bookshelf for the Student Council Office. You are a carpenter who is
tasked to create a model of a bookshelf using Euclidean tools (compass and a
straightedge) and present it to the council adviser. Your output will be evaluated
according to the following criteria: stability, accuracy, creativity, and mathematical
reasoning.
Goal You are to create a model of a bookshelf
Role Carpenter
Audience Council Adviser
Situation The Student Council of a school had a fund raising activity in order to put up a
bookcase or shelf for the Student Council Office.
Product Bookshelf
Standards stability, accuracy, creativity, and mathematical reasoning.
474
RUBRIC FOR THE PERFORMANCE TASK

CRITERIA 4 3 2 1 RATING
The computations are The The The computations

accurate and show a computations computations are erroneous
wise use of the key are accurate are erroneous and do not show
concepts of parallelism and show the and show some the use of key
Accuracy and perpendicularity of use of key use of the key concepts of
lines. concepts of concepts of, parallelism and
parallelism and parallelism and perpendicularity of
perpendicularity perpendicularity lines.
of lines. of lines.
The model is well fixed The model The model is The model is
and in its place. is firm and less firm and not firm and has
Stability
stationary. show slight the tendency to
movement. collapse.
The design is The design is
comprehensive and presentable and The design The design does
displays the aesthetic makes use of makes use of not use geometric
aspects of the the concepts the geometric representations
Creativity
mathematical concepts of geometric representations and is not
learned. representations. but not presentable.
presentable.
The explanation is The explanation The The explanation

clear, exhaustive or is clear and explanation is is incomplete and
thorough, and coherent. coherent. It understandable inconsistent with
It includes interesting covers the but not logical little evidence
Mathematical
facts and principles. important with some of mathematical
Reasoning
It uses complex and concepts. It evidence of reasoning.
refined mathematical uses effective mathematical
reasoning. mathematical reasoning.
reasoning.
OVERALL
RATING
475
A ctivity 23
LESSON CLOSURE REFLECTION ORGANIZER
You have accomplished the task successfully. This shows that you have learned the
important concepts in this module. To end this lesson meaningfully and to welcome you to the
next module, accomplish this activity.
In this unit I learned about

_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
These concepts can be used in

_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
I understand that
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
These are important because

_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
I can use the concepts of parallelism and perpendicularity in my life by

_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
In this section, your task was to create a model of a bookcase using a protractor, a
compass, and a straightedge and present it to the council adviser.
application of the topic?
You have completed this lesson. Before you go to the next lesson, you have to answer
the post assessment to evaluate your learning. Take time to answer the post assessment
which will be given to you. If you do well, you may move on to the next module. If your score
is not at the expected level, you have to go back and study the module again.
476
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
477
In this module, you were given the opportunity to explore, learn, and apply the key
concepts on parallelism and perpendicularity of lines. Doing the given activities and performing
the transfer task with accuracy, creativity, stability, and use of mathematical reasoning were
the evidence of your understanding the lesson.

1. Adjacent Sides
These are two non-collinear sides with a common endpoint.
2. Alternate Exterior Angles

These are non-adjacent exterior angles that lie on opposite sides of the
transversal.
3. Alternate Interior Angles

These are non-adjacent interior angles that lie on opposite sides of the
transversal.
4. Consecutive Angles
These are two angles whose vertices are the endpoints of a common
(included) side.
5. Consecutive Vertices
These are the vertices which are at the endpoints of a side.
6. Corresponding Angles
These are non-adjacent angles that lie on the same side of the transversal,
one interior angle and one exterior angle.
7. Deductive Reasoning
It is a type of logical reasoning that uses accepted facts as reason in a step-
by-step manner until the desired statement is arrived at or proved.
8. Flow Chart Form of Proof

It is a series of statements in a logical order placed on a flow chart. Each
statement together with its reason written in a box, and arrows are used to show
how each statement leads to another.
9. Kite
It is a quadrilateral with two distinct pairs of adjacent congruent sides.
478
10. Opposite Angles
In a quadrilateral, these are two angles which do not have a common side.
11. Opposite Sides

In a quadrilateral, these are the two sides that do not have a common
endpoint.
12. Paragraph Form of Proof

It is the form of proof where you write a paragraph to explain why a conjecture
for a given situation is true.
13. Parallel lines

Parallel lines are coplanar lines that do not intersect.
14. Parallelogram
It is a quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides.
15. Perpendicular Bisector

It is a line, a ray, or another segment that is perpendicular to the segment
and intersects the segment at its midpoint.
16. Perpendicular lines

These are lines that intersect at 900- angle.
17. Proof
It is a logical argument in which each statement made is justified by a
statement that is accepted as true.
18. Rectangle
It is a parallelogram with four right angles.
19. Rhombus
It is a parallelogram with four congruent sides.
20. Same-Side Interior Angles

These are consecutive interior angles that lie on the same side of the
transversal.
21. Same-Side Exterior Angles

These are consecutive exterior angles that lie on the same side of the
transversal.
22. Skew Lines

These are non-coplanar lines that do not intersect.
479
23. Square
It is a parallelogram with four congruent sides and four right angles.
24. Transversal
It is a line that intersects two or more coplanar lines at different points.
25. Trapezoid
It is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.
26. Two-Column Form of Proof

A deductive argument that contains statements and reasons organized in
two columns.
POSTULATES OR THEOREMS ON PROVING LINES PARALLEL:
1. Given two coplanar lines cut by a transversal, if corresponding angles are

congruent, then the two lines are parallel.
2. Given two lines cut by a transversal, if alternate interior angles are congruent, then
the lines are parallel.
3. If two lines are cut by a transversal such that the alternate exterior angles are
congruent, then the lines are parallel.
4. Given two lines cut by a transversal, if the same side interior angles are
supplementary, then the lines are parallel.
5. If two lines are cut by a transversal so that exterior angles on the same side of the
transversal are supplementary, then the lines are parallel.
6. In a plane, if two lines are both parallel to a third line, then they are parallel.
THEOREMS ON PROVING LINES PERPENDICULAR:
1. If two lines are perpendicular, then they form four right angles.
2. If the angles in a linear pair are congruent, then the lines containing their sides are
perpendicular.
3. In a plane, through a point on a given line there is one and only one line
perpendicular to the given line.
4. In a plane, a segment has a unique perpendicular bisector.
5. If two angles are adjacent and complementary, the non-common sides are
480
perpendicular.
DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS INVOLVING PARALLELOGRAMS
Given a parallelogram, related definition and theorems are stated as follows:

1. A parallelogram is a quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides.
2. If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then 2 pairs of opposite sides are congruent.
3. If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then 2 pairs of opposite angles are congruent.
4. If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then the consecutive angles are supplementary.
5. If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then the diagonals bisect each other.
6. If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then the diagonals form two congruent
triangles.
REFERENCES AND WEBSITE LINKS USED IN THIS LESSON:

References:
Alferez, Gerard S., Alferez, Merle S. and Lambino, Alvin E. (2007). MSA Geometry. Quezon
City: MSA Publishing House.
Bernabe, Julieta G., De Leon, Cecile M. and Jose-Dilao, Soledad (2002). Geometry. Quezon
City: JTW Corporation.
Coronel, Iluminada C. and Coronel, Antonio C. (2002). Geometry. Makati City: The Bookmark,
Inc.
Fisico, Misael Jose S., Sia, Lucy O., et al. (1995). 21st Century Mathematics: First Year.
Quezon City: Phoenix Publishing House, Inc.
Oronce, Orlando A. and Mendoza, Marilyn O. (2013). E-Math: Intermediate Algebra. Quezon
City: Rex Book Store, Inc.
Bass, Laurice E., Hall Basia Rinesmith, Johnson, Art and Wood, Dorothy F., (2001) Geometry
481
Tools for a Changing World Prentice Hall, Inc, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey
WEBSITES:
*http://oiangledlineswaves. jpg
Design by Becarry and Weblogs.com Oct. 17, 2008
*http://brainden.com/images/cafe-wall.jpg
By Jan Adamovic
Copyright 2012 BrainDen.com
These sites provide the optical illusions.
*http://www.mathwarehouse.com/geometry/angle/transveral-and-angles.php
*http://www.mathwarehouse.com/geometry/angle/interactive-transveral-angles.php
Created by Math Warehouse
Copyright by www.mathwarehouse.com
These sites provide exercises and review in the relationships of the different angles formed by
parallel lines cut by a transversal.
*http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AE3Pqhlvqw0&feature=related
*http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VA92EWf9SRI&feature=relmfu
Created by Geometry4Everyone
Copyright2010 Best Records
These sites provide an educational video presentation about parallel lines.
*http://www.nbisd.org/users/0006/docs/Textbooks/Geometry/geometrych3.pdf
By New Braunfels ISD
2007 Artists Right Society (ARS), New York/ADAGP, Paris
This site provides reference to exercises involving parallel and perpendicular lines.
*http://www.regentsprep.org/Regents/math/geometry/GP8/PracParallel.htm
Created by Donna Roberts
Copyright 1998-2012 http://regentsprep.org
Oswego City School District Regents Exam Prep Center
This site provides an interactive quiz which allows the students to practice solving problems
482
on parallel lines cut by a transversal.
* http://www.nexuslearning.net/books/ml-geometry/
Created by McDougal Littell Geometry(2011)
Copyright1995-2010 Houghton Mifflin Company
This site the discussions and exercises involving parallel and perpendicular lines and
quadrilaterals.
*http://www.connect ED.mcgraw_hill.com
chapter_03_89527.3pdf
Created by McGraw Hill School Education Group
Copyright The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc
This site provides lessons and exercises on parallel and perpendicular lines.
*http://www.flvs.net/areas/studentservices/EOC/Documents/Geometry%20Practice%20
Test%20with%20Answers.pdf
Created by Florida Virtual School
Copyright2012 Florida Virtual School
2145 Metro Center Boulevard, Suite 200, Orlando, FL 32835
This site provides exercises involving quadrilaterals.
*http://www.cpm.org/pdfs/skillBuilders/GC/GC_Extra_Practice_Section12.pdf
Geometry Connections Extra Practice
Copyright2007 by CPM Educational Program
http://viking.coe.uh.edu/~jvanhook/geometry/chapter2/unit2lesson7notes.pdf
by University of Houston
Holt Geometry
Copyrightby Holt, Rinehart and Winston
These sites provide reference and exercises in writing proofs.
*http://www.redmond.k12.or.us/14552011718214563/lib/14552011718214563/
Lesson_4.7.pdf
Created by StudentWebLinks@Keymath.com Lesson 4.7
2008 Key Curriculum press
This site provides discussions on how to make a flow chart and exercises in proving through
483
deductive reasoning.
* http://www.regentsprep.org/Regents/math/geometry/GP9/LParallelogram.htm
Created by Donna Roberts
Copyright 1998-2012 http://regentsprep.org
Oswego City School District Regents Exam Prep Center
This site provides discussions on the definitions and theorems involving parallelograms.
* http://www.glencoe.com/sec/teachingtoday/downloads/pdf/ReadingWritingMathClass.pdf
Author: Lois Edward
Mathematics Consultant
Minneapolis, Minnesota
Copyright by the McGraw Hill Companies, Inc
This site provides discussions on the concept map.
484
MEASURES OF CENTRAL
TENDENCY AND
MEASURES OF VARIABILITY
Have you ever wondered why a certain size of shoe or brand of shirt is made more
available than other sizes?
Have you asked yourself why a certain basketball player gets more playing time
than the rest of his team mates?
Have you thought of comparing your academic performance with your

classmates? Have you wondered what score you need for each subject area to qualify
for honors? Have you, at a certain time, asked yourself how norms and standards are
made?
485
In this module you will study about the measures of central tendency and measures of
variability. Remember to look for the answer to the following question(s):
How can I make use of the representations and descriptions of a given set of data?
What is the best way to measure a given set of data?
In this module, you will examine these questions when you study the following lessons.

Lesson 1: Measures of Central Tendency of Ungrouped Data
Lesson 2: Measures of Variability of Ungrouped Data
Lesson 3: Measures of Central Tendency of Grouped Data
Lesson 4: Measures of Variability of Grouped Data

Lesson Objectives:
1 Find the mean, median, and mode of ungrouped data
Describe and illustrate the mean, median, and mode of ungrouped data
Discuss the meaning of variability
Calculate the different measures of variability of a given ungrouped data:
2 range, standard deviation, and variance
Describe and interpret data using measures of central tendency and
measures of variability
Find the mean, median, and mode of grouped data
3
Describe and illustrate the mean, median, and mode of grouped data
Discuss the meaning of variability
Calculate the different measures of variability of a given grouped data:
4 range, standard deviation, and variance
Describe and interpret data using measures of central tendency and
measures of variability
486
Module Map
Module Map
Descriptive Statistics
Ungrouped Data Grouped Data
Measures of Measures of Measures of Measures of

Central Tendency Variability Central Tendency Variability
To do well in this module, you will need to remember and do the following:
1. Study each part of the module carefully.

2. Take note of all the formulas given in each lesson.
3. Have your own scientific calculator. Make sure you are familiar with the keys and
functions in your calculator.
487
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this topic. On a separate sheet, write
only the letter of the choice that you think best answers the question.
1. Which measure of central tendency is generally used in determining the size of

the most saleable shoes in a department store?
a. mean c. mode
b. median d. range
2. Which measure of variability is considered most reliable?
a. range c. average deviation

b. variance d. standard deviation
3. For the set of data consisting of 8, 8, 9, 10, 10, which statement is true?
a. mean = mode c. mean = median

b. median = mode d. mean < median
4. Which measure of central tendency is greatly affected by extreme scores?
a. mean c. mode
b. median d. none of the three
5. Margie has grades 86, 68, and 79 in her first three tests in Algebra. What grade
must she obtain on the fourth test to get an average of 78?
a. 76 c. 78
b. 77 d. 79
6. What is the median age of a group of employees whose ages are 36, 38, 28, 30
26 and 25 years?
a. 25 c. 25
b. 26 d. 30
7. Nine people gave contributions in pesos: 100, 200, 100, 300, 300, 200, 200, 150,
100, and 100 for a door prize. What is the median contribution?
a. Php 100 c. Php 175

b. Php 150 d. Php 200
488
8. If the heights in centimetres of a group of students are 180, 180, 173, 170, and
167, what is the mean height of these students?
a. 170 c. 174
b. 173 d. 180
9. If the range of a set of scores is 14 and the lowest score is 7, what is the highest
score?
a. 21 c. 14
b. 24 d. 7
10. What is the standard deviation of the scores 5, 4, 3, 6, and 2?
a. 2 b. 2.5 c. 3 d. 3.5
11. What is the average height of each team in inches?
6 4 7 12 16
11
6
Feet and
inches 6' 6'1" 6'4" 6'4" 6'6" 5'7" 6' 6'4" 6'4" 7'
inches 72 73 76 76 78 67 72 76 76 84
a. 76 b. 78 c. 72 d. 75

If you were to join any of these two teams, which team would you choose? Why?
12. Electra Company measures each cable wire as it comes off the product line. The
lengths in centimeters of the first batch of ten cable wires were: 10, 15, 14, 11, 13,
10, 10, 11, 12, and 13. Find the standard deviation of these lengths.
a. 1.7 b. 1.8 c. 11.9 d. 10.9
13. What is the variance in item 12?
a. 3.4 b. 3.3 c. 3.24 d. 2.89
For Items 14 15.

A video shop owner wants to find out the performance sales of his two branch stores for
the last five months. The table shows their monthly sales in thousands of pesos.
Branch A 20 18 18 19 17
Branch B 17 15 25 17 18
489
14. What are the average sales of each store, in thousand pesos?
a. 18 b. 18.4 c. 19 d. 19.5
15. Which store is consistently performing? Why?
For items 16 20 refer to the data below. Choose the letter that corresponds to the best answer:
Class Frequency
46 50 1
41 45 2
36 40 3
31 35 10
26 30 6
21 25 9
16 20 5
11 15 6
6 10 4
15 2
16. What is the class size?
a. 4 b. 3 c. 5 d. 6
17. What is the value of the median score?
a. 24.10 b. 24.29 c. 24.15 d. 24.39
18. What is the range of the given set of data?
a. 50 b. 50.5 c. 49.5 d. 99.5

19. What is the variance?
a. 119.59 b. 119.49 c. 119.40 d. 119.50

20. What is the standard deviation?
a. 10.90 b. 10.91 c. 10.92 d. 10.93
LEARNING GOALS AND TARGETS

After this lesson, you are expected to:
a. demonstrate understanding of the key concepts on the different measures of
central tendency and measures of variability of a given data.
b. compute and apply accurately the descriptive measures in statistics to data
analysis and interpretation in solving problems related to research, business,
education, technology, science, economics, and others.
490
Measures of Central
Lesson 1 Tendency of
Ungrouped Data
What to
What to Know
Know
Let us begin with exploratory activities that will introduce you to the basic concepts
of measures of central tendency and how these concepts are applied in real life.

Activity 1 contains familiar exercises provided to you in your Grade 7 modules.
A ctivity 1 WHATS THE STORY BEHIND?
1. Daria bought T-shirts from a department store. She paid an average of Php 74 per shirt.
Part of the torn receipt is shown below.
a. How much did she pay for each white shirt?

b. How much did she pay in all? Why?
c. What measure of central tendency is most appropriate here? Why?
2. The bar chart shows the number of magazines borrowed from the library last week.
491
a. How many magazines were borrowed on Friday? Why?
b. What is the mean number of magazines borrowed per day last week? What does
this value tell you? Why? `
c. On what day is the most number of magazines borrowed? Why?
d. Describe the number of magazines borrowed on a Tuesday. Why do you think
so?
A ctivity 2
MEAL DEAL
To cater to five hundred (500) students having snacks all at the same time, your school
canteen offered three meal packages for the students to choose from. The monitors of each
section are tasked to collect the weekly orders of each student.
MEAL 1 MEAL 2 MEAL 3

===================== ===================== =====================
Item Price Item Price Item Price
Hamburger 15.00 Baked Mac 15.00 Hotdog Sandwich 10.00
Spaghetti 10.00 Garlic Bread 5.00 Fruit Salad 7.00
French Fries 5.00 Veggie Salad 5.00 French Fries 5.00
Juice 5.00 Juice 5.00 Juice 5.00
===================== ===================== =====================
Cost 35.00 Cost 30.00 Cost 27.00
Directions: Form yourselves into groups of 10 members. Distribute to each member of

the group the three meal packages. Make a week's list of your preferred meal
package. Record your groups order for the week on the sheet of paper below.
Discuss with your groupmate the answer to the questions below the table.
492
DAILY MEAL PACKAGE PREFERENCE
Meal
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Total Sales
Package
1
2
3
Total
Sales
ES TIO
?
A. In your group,
QU
NS
1. what is the most preferred meal package?

2. how much was the canteens daily sales from each package?
weekly sales?
B. If all the groups will summarize their report,
1. which "average" do you think is most appropriate here? Why?
2. what might be the average weekly sales of the school canteen
on each type of package?
3. explain how these will help the canteen manager improve
3.1 the sales of the school canteen.
3.2 the combination of the food in each package.
C. Make a combination of the food package of your choice.
The activities that you have just accomplished provided you situations where the
basic concepts of statistics are applied. In this module, you will do activities that will help
you in answering the question How can I make use of the representations and descriptions
of a given set of data?
What to
What to Process
Process
Here are some enabling activities/experiences that you will perform to validate your
understanding on averages in the What to Know phase.
After doing the activities in this section, it is expected that you will be able to
answer the question, What is the best way to measure a given set of data?. The
understanding gained would erase misconceptions about the different measures of
central tendency that you have encountered before.
493
A ctivity 3 WATCH THIS!
3.1 A group of students obtained the following scores in a math quiz:

8, 7, 9, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3
Arranging these scores in increasing order: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9,10,

the mean is 6.7. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10 Mean, Median,
and Mode are also
referred to as
_v_r_g_s
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10
the median is 7.
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10
the mode is 8.
Observe how the mean, median, and mode of the scores were obtained. Complete
the statements below.
a. The mean 6.7 was obtained by _________________________________.

b. The median 7 is the __________________________________________.
c. The mode 8 is the ___________________________________________.
For additional exercises, please proceed to Activity 3.2.
3.2 If the score 5 of another student is included in the list.

3, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10
The mean is 6.5. 3, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10
The median is 6.5 3, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10

The mode is 5 and 8. 3, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 10
494
ES TIO Discuss with your groupmates,
?
QU
NS
a. your observation about the values of the mean, the median, and the
mode;
b. how each value was obtained; and
c. your generalizations based on your observations.
From these activities, you will see that the values are made to represent or describe
a given set of data. You will know more about the characteristics of each type of measures
of central tendency in the next activities and discussions.
Lets take a look at the mean.
The Mean
The mean (also known as the arithmetic mean) is the most commonly used measure of
central tendency. It is used to describe a set of data where the measures cluster or concentrate
at a point. As the measures cluster around each other, a single value appears to represent
distinctively the typical value.
It is the sum of measures x divided by the number N of measures in a variable. It is

symbolized as x (read as x bar). To find the mean of an ungrouped data, use the formula
x
x= N
where x = the summation of x (sum of the measures) and N = number of values of x.
Example:
The grades in Mathematics of 10 students are 87, 84, 85, 85, 86, 90, 79, 82, 78, and
76. What is the mean grade of the 10 students?
Solution:
x
x= N
87 + 84 + 85 + 85 + 86 + 90 + 79 + 82 + 78 + 76
x=
10

832
=
10

x = 83.2
Hence, the mean grade of the 10 students is 83.2.
Consider another activity.
495
A ctivity 4
WHOS REPRESENTING?
Sonyas Kitchen received an invitation to a food exposition for one person. The service
crew of 7 members is very eager to go. To be fair to all, Sonya decided to choose a person
whose age is also the mean age of her seven members.
Sonyas Kitchen Crew
Cashier
She made a list such as below:
Service Crew Age
Manager 47
Cook A 21
Cook B 20
Cashier 19
Waiter A 18
Waiter B 18
Waitress 18
ES TIO a. What is the mean age of the service crew?

b. Is there someone in this group who has this age?
?
QU
NS
c. How many persons are older than the mean age? How many are
younger?
d. Do you think this is the best measure of central tendency to use?
Explain.
496
Take note of how the mean is affected by extreme values. Very high or very low values
can easily change the value of the mean.
Do the next activity to solve problems encountered.
A ctivity 5
WHOS IN THE MIDDLE?
From our previous example, the ages of the crew are given as 18, 20, 18, 19, 21, 18,
and 47. Follow the steps below.
ES TIO a. Arrange the ages in numerical order.
?
QU
NS
b. What is the middle value?

c. Is there a crew with this representative age?
d. How many crew are younger than this age? Older than this age?
e. Who is now the representative of Sonyas Kitchen in the Food Fair?
f. Compare the results from the previous discussion (how the mean is
affected by the set of data). Explain.
The middle value here or term in a set of data arranged according to size/magnitude
(either increasing or decreasing) is called the median.
Consider another situation in the next activity.
A ctivity 6
THE NEWLY-HIRED CREW
At the end of the month, Sonyas Kitchen hired another crew member whose age is 22.
The data now consist of eight ages: 18, 20, 18, 19, 21, 18, 47, and 22, an even number. How
many middle entries are there?
Sonyas Kitchen Crew
497
Let us find out by following these simple steps:
ES TIO a. Arrange the crews ages in numerical order.
?
QU
NS b. Find the two middle values (ages).

c. Get the average of the two middle values.
d. What is now the median age?
e. How many are below this age? above this age?
Here are more examples for you to develop your skills in finding the median of a set of
data.
Example 1:
The library logbook shows that 58, 60, 54, 35, and 97 books, respectively, were bor-
rowed from Monday to Friday last week. Find the median.
Solution:
Arrange the data in increasing order.
35, 54, 58, 60, 97
We can see from the arranged numbers that the middle value is 58.
Since the middle value is the median, then the median is 58.
Example 2:
Andreas scores in 10 quizzes during the first quarter are 8, 7, 6, 10, 9, 5, 9, 6, 10, and
7. Find the median.
Solution:
Arrange the scores in increasing order.
5, 6, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9, 9, 10, 10
Since the number of measures is even, then the median is the mean of the two middle
scores.
7+8
Md = = 7.5
2
Hence, the median of the set of scores is 7.5
The next activity is another measure of central tendency. Try and discover for yourself
the typical value we are looking for.
498
A ctivity 7
THE MOST POPULAR SIZE
1. A shoe store was able to sell 10 pairs of black shoes in one day. Which shoe size is
saleable? How many of this size were sold for the day?

6 5 4 6 5
5 6 7 7 6
2. The principal of a school had the number of students posted at the door of each section.
What section(s) has the same number of students? What is that number?
I-Camia I-Rosal I-Lily I-Adelfa
SCHOOL
50 Students 52 Students 50 Students 53 Students
I-Santan I-Tulip I-Rose I-Iris
51 Students 53 Students 52 Students 53 Students
I-Ilang-Ilang
50 Students
499
3. Below are the scores of five students in a ten-item test. How many got the same score?
Loida 5 Jackie 8 Jen 5 Julie 3 Fe 9
1. b 6. d 1. a 6. c 1. b 6. a 1. b 6. d 1. a 6. a
2. b 7. b 2. b 7. b 2. b 7. b 2. b 7. b 2. b 7. b
3. b 8. b 3. b 8. a 3. b 8. a 3. c 8. b 3. a 8. a
4. c 9. d 4. c 9. d 4. c 9. a 4. d 9. a 4. c 9. d
5. b 10. c 5. b 10. a 5. b 10. a 5. b 10. c 5. b 10. c
From this activity, what is the characteristic of this value that we are looking for? This
typical value is what we call the mode.
The next discussion will give you a clearer idea about the mode.
The Mode
The mode is the measure or value which occurs most frequently in a set of data. It is the
value with the greatest frequency.
To find the mode for a set of data:
1. select the measure that appears most often in the set;
2. if two or more measures appear the same number of times, then each of these
values is a mode; and
3. if every measure appears the same number of times, then the set of data has no
mode.
Try answering these items.
Find the mode in the given sets of scores.

1. {10, 12, 9, 10, 13, 11, 10}
2. {15, 20, 18, 19, 18, 16, 20, 18}
3. { 5, 8, 7, 9, 6, 8, 5}
4. { 7, 10, 8, 5, 9, 6, 4}
5. { 12, 16, 14, 15, 16, 13, 14}
500
A ctivity 8
WHO'S THE CONTENDER
The Mathematics Department of Juan Sumulong High School is sending a contestant
to a quiz bee competition. The teachers decided to select the contestant from among the top
two performing students of Section 1. With very limited data, they considered only the scores
of each student in 10 quizzes.
The scores are tabulated below.

Quiz Number Zeny Richard
1 11 10
2 13 10
3 5 12
4 13 14
5 7 15
6 10 9
7 36 13
8 13 13
9 9 12
Total 117 108
a. What is the mean of the scores of both students?

b. How many scores are above and below the mean of these scores?
c. Check once more the distribution of scores. Which of the two has a more consistent
performance?
d. Which of the two students do you think should be sent to represent the school in
the competition?
e. Try getting the median of these scores and compare with their mean.
f. Which do you think is the best measure to use to assess their performance?
Explain.
A ctivity 9
JOURNAL WRITING
Write your reflection about where you have heard or encountered averages
(e.g., business, sports, weather). How did this help you analyze a situation in the activities
discussed?
501
A ctivity 10
WHAT A WORD!
Rearrange the letters to name the important words you have learned. Tell something
about these words.
1. Find the mean, median, and mode/modes of each of the following sets of data.
a. 29, 34, 37, 22, 15, 38, 40
b. 5, 6, 7, 7, 9, 9, 9, 10, 14, 16, 20
c. 82, 61, 93, 56, 34, 57, 92, 53, 57
d. 26, 32, 12, 18, 11, 12, 15, 18, 21
e. The scores of 20 students in a Biology quiz are as follows:
25 33 35 45 34
26 29 35 38 40
45 38 28 29 25
39 32 37 47 45
2. The mean of 12 scores is 68. If two scores, 70 and 63 are removed, what is the
mean of the remaining scores?
3. Athena got the following scores during the first quarter quizzes: 12, 10, 16, x, 13,
and 9. What must be the value of x so that the median score is 11?
4. The mean weight of Loida, Jackie, and Jen is 55 kilograms.
a. What is the total weight of these girls?
b. Julie weighs 60 kilograms. What is the mean weight of the four girls?
502
5. The data below show the score of 40 students in the 2010 Division Achievement
Test (DAT).
35 16 28 43 21 17 15 16
20 18 25 22 33 18 32 38
23 32 18 25 35 18 20 22
36 22 17 22 16 23 24 15
15 23 22 20 14 39 22 38
a. What score is typical to the group of students? Why?

b. What score appears to be the median? How many students fall below that
score?
c. Which score frequently appears?
d. Find the Mean, Median, and Mode.
e. Describe the data in terms of the mean, median, and mode.
503
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
504
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Reflect and analyze how you were able to develop a concept out of the activities
you have studied. The knowledge gained here will further help you understand and do
the next activities.
A ctivity 11
WORK IN PAIRS
Analyze the following situations and answer the questions that follow. Make the
necessary justifications if possible.
1. The first three test scores of each of the four students are shown. Each test is
100 points. Each student hopes to maintain a mean score of 85. Find the score
needed by each student on the fourth test to have a mean score of 85, or explain
why such value is not possible.
a. Lisa: 78, 80, 100 c. Lina: 79, 80, 81
b. Mary: 90, 92, 95 d. Willie: 65, 80, 80
2. The weekly salaries in pesos of 6 workers of a construction

firm are 2400, 2450, 2450, 2500, 2500, and 4200.
a. Compute for the mean, the median, and the mode
b. Which measure of central tendency is the most
appropriate? Why?
3. The monthly salaries of the employees of ABC

Corporation are as follows:
Manager: Php 100,000
Cashier: Php 20,000
Clerk (9): Php 15,000
Utility Workers (2): Php 8,500
In the managers yearly report, the average salary of the employees is

Php 20,923.08. The accountant claimed that the average monthly salary is
Php15 ,000.

Both employees are correct since the average indicates the typical value of the
data.
a. Which of the two salaries is a better average of the employees,
salaries? Justify your answer.
b. Which measure of central tendency did you use? Why?
505
A ctivity 12
LET'S SUMMARIZE!
Who am I?
I am the most
commonly used I am a typical value
measure of central and I am in three
tendency. forms.
I am also referred to
as an average.
I am the middle
I appear the
value in a set of
most number of
data arranged in
times.
numerical order
The three measures of central tendency that you have learned in the previous module
do not give an adequate description of the data. We need to know how the observations
spread out from the mean.
506
Lesson 2
2
Measures
of Variability
What to
What to Know
Know
Lets begin with interesting and exploratory activities that would lead to the basic
concepts of measures of variability. In this lesson, you will learn to interpret, draw
conclusions, and make recommendations.
After these activities, you shall be able to answer the question, How can I make
use of the representations and descriptions of a given set of data in real-life
situations?.
The lesson on measures of variability will tell you how the values are scattered or
clustered about the typical value.
It is quite possible to have two sets of observations with the same mean or median that
differs in the amount of spread about the mean. Do the following activity.
A ctivity 1
WHICH TASTES BETTER?
A housewife surveyed canned ham for a special family affair.
She picked 5 cans each from two boxes packed by company A
and company B. Both boxes have the same weight. Consider the
following weights in kilograms of the canned ham packed by the two
companies (sample A and sample B).
Sample A: 0.97, 1.00, 0.94, 1.03, 1.11

Sample B: 1.06, 1.01. 0.88, 0.90, 1.14
Help the housewife choose the best sample by doing the following procedure.
ES TIO a. Arrange the weights in numerical order.

?
QU
NS
b. Find the mean weight of each sample.

c. Analyze the spread of the weights of each sample from the mean.
d. Which sample has weights closer to the mean?
e. If you were to choose from these two samples, which would you
prefer? Why?
507
Measures other than the mean may provide additional information about the same data.
These are the measures of variability.
Measures of variability refer to the spread of the values about the mean. Smaller
dispersion of scores arising from the comparison often indicates more consistency and more
reliability.
The most commonly used measures of variability are the range, the average deviation,
the standard deviation, and the variance.
What to
What to Process
Process
Here you will be provided with enabling activities that you have to go through to
validate your understanding of measures of variability after the activities in the What
to Know phase. These would answer the question How can I make use of the
representations and descriptions of given set of data in real-life situations?.
The Range
The range is the simplest measure of variability. It is the difference between the largest
value and the smallest value.
R=HL
where R = Range, H = Highest value, L = Lowest value
Test scores of 10, 8, 9, 7, 5, and 3, will give us a range of 7. The range 7 is obtained by
subtracting 3 from 10.
Let us consider this situation.
The following are the daily wages of 8 factory workers of

two garment factories, Factory A and factory B. Find the range
of salaries in peso (Php).
Factory A: 400, 450, 520, 380, 482, 495, 575, 450.

Factory B: 450, 400, 450, 480, 450, 450, 400, 672
508
Finding the range of wages: Range = Highest wage Lowest wage
Wage Range in A = 575 380 = 195

Wage Range in B = 672 400 = 272
Comparing the two wages, you will note that the wages of workers of factory B have a
higher range than the wages of workers of factory A. These ranges tell us that the wages of
workers of factory B are more scattered than the wages of workers of factory A.
Look closely at the wages of workers of factory B. You will see that except for 672 the
highest wage, the wages of the workers are more consistent than the wages in A. Without the
highest wage of 672 the range would be 80 from 480 400 = 80. Whereas, if you exclude the
highest wage 575 in A, the range would be 140 from 520 380 = 140.
Can you now say that the wages of workers of factory B are more scattered or variable
than the wages of workers of factory A?
The range is not a stable measure of variability because its value can fluctuate greatly
even with a change in just a single value, either the highest or the lowest.
A ctivity 2
WHO IS SMARTER?
1. The IQs of 5 members of 2 families A and B are:
Family A: 108, 112, 127, 118, and 113

Family B: 120, 110, 118, 120, and 110
a. Find the mean IQ of the two families.

b. Find the range of the IQ of both families.

2. The range of each set of scores of the three students is as follows:
Ana H = 98, L = 92, R = 98 92 = 6

Josie H = 97, L = 90, R = 97 90 = 7
Lina H = 98, L = 89, R = 98 89 = 9
a. What have you observed about the range of the scores of the three students?
b. What does it tell you?
509
3. Consider the following sets of scores: Find the range and the median.
Set A Set B
3 3
4 7
5 7
6 7
8 8
9 8
10 8
12 9
15 15
A ctivity 3
TRY THIS!
A. Compute the range for each set of numbers.
1. {12, 13, 17, 22, 22, 23, 25, 26}

2. {12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18}
3. {12, 12, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 15, 19, 20, 20}
4. {7, 7, 8, 12, 14, 14, 14, 14, 15, 15}
5. {23, 25, 27, 27, 32, 32, 36, 38}
B. Solve the following:
1. If the range of a set of scores is 29 and the lowest score is 18, what is the highest
score?
2. If the range of a set of scores is 14 and the highest score is 31, what is the lowest
score?
3. The reaction times for a random sample of 9 subjects to a stimulant were recorded
as 2.5, 3.6, 3.1, 4.3, 2.9, 2.3, 2.6, 4.1, and 3.4 seconds. Calculate the range.
4. Two students have the following grades in 6 Mathematics tests. Compute the
mean and the range. Tell something about the two sets of scores.

Pete Ricky
82 88
98 94
86 89
80 87
100 92
94 90
510
The Mean Deviation

The dispersion of a set of data about the average of these data is the average deviation
or mean deviation.
To compute the mean deviation of an ungrouped data, we use the formula:
|x-x|
M.D. =
N
where M.D. is the mean deviation;
x is the individual score;
x is the mean; and
N is the number of scores.
|x-x| is the absolute value of the deviation from the mean.
Procedure in computing the mean deviation:

1. Find the mean for all the cases.
2. Find the absolute difference between each score and the mean.
3. Find the sum of the differences and divide it by N.
Example:
Find the mean deviation of the following data: 12, 17, 13, 18, 18, 15, 14, 17, 11
1. Find the mean (x).
x 12 + 17 + 13 + 18 + 18 + 15 + 14 + 17 + 11
x = N = 9

135
x = 9 = 15
2. Find the absolute difference between each score and the mean.
|x-x| = |12 15| = 3
= |17 15| = 2
= |13 15| = 2
= |18 15| = 3
= |18 15| = 3
= |15 15| = 0
= |14 15| = 1
= |17 15| = 2
= |11 15| = 4

3. Find the sum of the absolute difference |x-x|.
|x-x| = |12 15| = 3
= |17 15| = 2
= |13 15| = 2
= |18 15| = 3
511
= |18 15| = 3
= |15 15| = 0
= |14 15| = 1
= |17 15| = 2
= |11 15| = 4
-------------------------------------------
|x-x| = 20
This can be represented in tabular form as shown below.
x x |x-x|
12 15 3
17 15 2
13 15 2
18 15 3
18 15 3
15 15 0
14 15 1
17 15 2
11 15 4
|x-x| = 20
4. Solve for the mean deviation by dividing the result in step 3 by N.
|x-x| 20
M.D. = = = 2.22
N 9
A ctivity 4
TRY THIS!
Solve the mean deviation of the following:

1. Science achievement test scores: 60, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95
2. The weights in kilogram of 10 students: 52, 55, 50, 55, 43, 45, 40, 48, 45, 47.
3. The diameter (in cm) of balls: 12, 13, 15, 15, 15, 16, 18.
4. Prices of books (in pesos): 85, 99, 99, 99, 105, 105, 120, 150, 200, 200.
5. Cholesterol level of middle-aged persons: 147, 154, 172, 195, 195, 209, 218, 241,
283, 336.

The mean deviation gives a better approximation than the range. However, it does not
lend itself readily to mathematical treatment for deeper analysis.
Let us do another activity to discover another measure of dispersion, the standard

deviation.
512
The Standard Deviation
A ctivity 5
WORKING IN PAIRS
Compute the standard deviation of the set of test scores: {39, 10,
24, 16, 19, 26, 29, 30, 5}.
a. Find the mean.

b. Find the deviation from the mean (x-x).
c. Square the deviations (x-x)2.
d. Add all the squared deviations. (x-x)2
e. Tabulate the results obtained:

x x-x (x-x)2
5
10
16
19
24
26
29
30
39
(x-x)2
f. Compute the standard deviation (SD) using the formula
(x-x)2
SD =
N
g. Summarize the procedure in computing the standard deviation.
From the activity, you have learned how to compute for the standard deviation.
Like the mean deviation, standard deviation differentiates sets of scores with equal
averages. But the advantage of standard deviation over mean deviation is that it has several
applications in inferential statistics
To compute for the standard deviation of an ungrouped data, we use the formula:
513

(x-x)2
SD =
N
Where SD is the standard deviation;
x is the individual score;
x is the mean; and
N is the number of scores.
In the next discussion, you will learn more about the importance of using the standard
deviation.
Let us consider this example.
Compare the standard deviation of the scores of the three students in their Mathematics
quizzes.
Student A 97, 92, 96, 95, 90

Student B 94, 94, 92, 94, 96
Students C 95, 94, 93, 96, 92
Solution:
Student A:
Step 1.
Compute the mean score.
x 92 + 92 + 96 + 95 + 90
x = N = 5 = 94
Step 2. Complete the table below.

x x-x (x-x)2
97 3 9
92 -2 4
96 2 4
95 1 1
90 4 16
(x-x)2 = 34
Step 3. Compute the standard deviation.
(x-x)2 34
SD = = = 6.8 = 26
N 5
514
Student B:
Step 1. Compute the mean score.
x 92 + 92 + 96 + 95 + 90
x = N = 5 = 94

x x-x (x-x)2
94 0 0
94 0 0
92 -2 4
94 0 0
96 2 4
(x-x)2 = 8
(x-x)2 8
SD = = = 1.6 = 1.3
N 5
Student C:
Step 1. Compute the mean score.
x 95 + 94 + 93 + 96 + 92
x = N = 5 = 94

x x-x (x-x)2
95 1 1
94 0 0
93 -1 1
96 2 4
92 -2 4
(x-x)2 = 10
(x-x)2 10
SD = = = 2 = 1.4
N 5
515
The result of the computation of the standard deviation of the scores of the three students
can be summarized as:
SD (A) = 2.6
SD (B) = 1.3
SD (C) = 1.4
The standard deviation of the scores can be illustrated below by plotting the scores on
the number line.
Graphically, a standard deviation of 2.6 means most of the scores are within 2.6 units
from the mean. A standard deviation of 1.3 and 1.4 suggest that most of the scores are within
1.3 and 1.4 units from the mean.
The scores of Student B is clustered closer to the mean. This shows that the score of
Student B is the most consistent among the three sets of scores.
The concept of standard deviation is especially valuable because it enables us to

compare data points from different sets of data. When two groups are compared, the group
having a smaller standard deviation is less varied.
516
A ctivity 6
WORKING IN PAIRS
A. Compute the standard deviation for each set of numbers.

1. (12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
2. (7, 7, 8, 12, 14, 14, 14, 14, 15, 15)
3. (12, 12, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 15, 19, 20, 20)
4. (12, 13, 17, 22, 22, 23, 25, 26)
5. (23, 25, 27, 27, 32, 32, 36, 38)
B. The reaction times for a random sample of nine subjects to a stimulant were recorded as
2.5, 3.6, 3.1, 4.3, 2.9, 2.3, 2.6, 4.1, and 3.4 seconds. Calculate the range and standard
deviation.
C. Suppose two classes achieved the following grades on a Mathematics test, find the
range and the standard deviation.
Class 1: 64, 70, 73, 77, 85, 90, 94

Class 2: 74, 75, 75, 76, 79, 80, 94
You may use a scientific calculator to solve for the standard deviation.
A ctivity 7
WORKING IN PAIRS
The grades of a student in nine quizzes: 78, 80, 80, 82, 85, 85, 85, 88, 90. Calculate the
mean and standard deviation using a scientific calculator.
Procedure
Procedure

Press the following keys:
Shift Mode (Setup) 4 (Stat) 1 (ON)
Mode 3 (Stat) 1 (1-var)
517
x f(x)
1
2 Is displayed. Input values of x.
3
78 = 80 = 82 = 85 = 88 = 90 =
1 = 2 = 1 = 3 = 1 = 1
x f(x)
1 78 1
2 80 2
3 82 1
The displayed output.
4 85 3
5 88 1
6 90 1
AC Shift 1(Stat) 4 (var) 2(x) =
Answer: Mean 83.67
AC Shift 1(Stat) 4 (var) 2(xn) =
Answer: SD 3.74
In the next discussion, you will learn about another measure of variability.
The variance of a set of data is denoted by the symbol 2. To find the variance (2), we
use the formula:
(x-x)2
2 =
N
where:
N is the total number of data;
x is the raw score; and
x is the mean of the data.
518
Variance is not only useful, it can be computed with ease and it can also be broken into
two or more component sums of squares that yield useful information.
A ctivity 8
ANSWER THE FOLLOWING.
The table shows the daily sales in peso of two sari-sari stores near a school.
Store A Store B
300 300
310 120
290 500
301 100
299 490
295 110
305 300
300 480
Compute the variance and interpret.
519
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
520
What to
What to Understand
Understand
You will be provided with activities that will allow you to reflect, revisit, revise and
rethink about a variety of experiences in life. Moreover, you will be able to express your
understanding of the concept of measures of variability that would engage you in self-
assessment.
A ctivity 9
ANSWER THE FOLLOWING.
1. Find the range of each set of data.
a. scores on quizzes: 10, 9, 6, 6, 7, 8, 8, 8, 8, 9
b. Number of points per game: 16, 18, 10, 20, 15, 7, 16, 24
c. Number of VCRs sold per week: 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 7, 6, 14, 18, 20
2. Given the scores of two students in a series of tests

Student A: 60, 55, 40, 48, 52, 36, 52, 50
Student B: 62, 48, 50, 46, 38, 48, 43, 39
a. Find the mean score of each student.

b. Compute the range.
c. Interpret the result.
3. The minimum distances (in feet) a batter has to hit the ball down the center of the field
to get a home run in 8 different stadiums is 410, 420, 406, 400, 440, 421, 402, and 425
ft. Compute the standard deviation.
4. The scores received by Jean and Jack in ten math quizzes are as follows:
Jean: 4, 5, 3, 2, 2, 5, 5, 3, 5, 0
Jack: 5, 4, 4, 3, 3, 1, 4, 0, 5, 5
a. Compute the standard deviation.

b. Which student has the better grade point average?
c. Which student has the most consistent score?
521
Measures of Central
Lesson 3 Tendency of Grouped
Data
What to
What to Know
Know
knowledge and skills may help you in understanding Measures of Central Tendency for
Grouped Data. As you go through this lesson, think of the following important question:
How are the measures of central tendency for grouped data used in solving real-life
problems and in making decisions? To find out the answer, perform each activity. If you
find any difficulty in answering the exercises, seek the assistance of your teacher or peers
or refer to the modules you have studied earlier.
A ctivity 1
DO YOU STILL REMEMBER THIS?
Directions:
A. Write the following expressions in expanded form:
4 5 4
1. 4x1 2. (Yi 5) 3. (Xi + 2Yi)
i=1 i=2 i=1
B. Evaluate the following expressions using the given data:

x1 = 5 x2 = -2 x3 = -1 x4 = 7 x5 = 2
y1 = 1 y2 = 6 y3 = -4 y4 = -3 y5 = -5
1.
5
(5 Xi) 3.
4
2
i=2 i = 2Xi Yi
4 4 2
2. 5Yi 4. (3Yi Xi )
i=1 i=1
ES TIO 1. How did you find the given activity?

?
QU
NS
2. Have you applied your previous knowledge about summation

notation?
522
Grouped Data
The data in a real-world situation can be overwhelming. However, by appropriately or-

ganizing data, it is often possible to make a rather complicated set of data easier to under-
stand.
Although the basic ideas of grouping use common sense, there are associated termi-
nologies. To understand the terms, we consider the following:
Frequency and relative frequency distributions

The number of pieces of data that fall into a particular class is called the frequency of
that class. For example, as we see below, the frequency of the class 31-35 is seven. A table
listing all classes and their frequencies is called a frequency distribution.
Table 1. Score of a Grade 8 Student in the 4th Periodical Test.
Score Frequency Relative Frequency

46-50 2 0.10
41-45 2 0.10
36-40 5 0.25
31-35 7 0.35
26-30 4 0.20
The percentage of a class, expressed as a decimal, is called the relative frequency of

the class. For the class 31-35, the relative frequency is 0.35. How do you think is this value
obtained?
A table listing all classes and their relative frequencies is called a relative-frequency
distribution.
523
A ctivity 2
TRY THIS!
Directions: Complete the frequency distribution table by finding the unknown values. Write
your complete solutions and answers on a piece of paper.

A. Scores of Grade 8-Avocado Students in the
4th Periodic Test in Mathematics
Less Than Lower

Frequency Class Mark Cumulative Class
Score fX
(f) (X) Frequency Boundary
(<cf) (lb)
46 50 2
41 45 9
36 40 13
31 35 11
26 30 10
21 25 5
i= f = fX =
B. Ages of San Pedro Jose High School Teachers
Age f X fX <cf lb
61 65 2
56 60 5
51 55 12
46 50 14
41 45 13
36 40 10
31 35 5
26 30 3
21 25 1
i= f = fX =
524
Questions A B
1. How did you determine the unknown values in the
frequency distribution table?
2. What is the class size?
3. What is the class mark of the class with the highest
frequency?
4. In each frequency distribution table, determine the
following:
a. Median class
b. Cumulative frequency of the median class
c. Modal class
d. Lower boundary of the modal class
5. Find the following measures in each data set:
a. Mean
b. Median
c. Mode
Were you able to complete the frequency distribution table? Were you able to
find the unknown values in the frequency distribution table? In the next activity, you
will calculate the mean, median, and mode of a given set of data.
A ctivity 3
NEXT ROUND
Directions: The frequency distribution below shows the height (in cm) of 50 students in
Buslo High School. Use the table to answer the questions that follow. Write

Height (in cm) of 50 Students in Buslo High School
Height
Frequency X
(in cm)
170-174 8
165-169 18
160-164 13
155-159 7
150-154 4
525
ES TIO 1. What is the total frequency of the given data?
2. Complete the frequency distribution table. What is fX?
?
QU
NS 3. How would you find the mean of the given data?

4. Find the mean of the set of data.
5. Determine the following. Explain your answer.
a. Median class
b. Modal class
c. Lower boundary of the median class
d. Lower boundary of the modal class
6. Find the median and the mean of the set of data?
7. How do the mean, median, and the mode of the set of data compare?
What to
What to Process
Process
How did you find the previous activity? Were you able to find the unknown measures/
values? Are you ready to perform the next activity? Will you be able to find the mean,
median, and the mode of a set of data such as the ages, grades, or test scores of your
classmates? Before proceeding to these activities, read first some important notes on
how to calculate the mean, median, and mode for grouped data.
Before we proceed to find the mean, median, and mode of grouped data, let us recall
the concepts about Summation Notation:
Summation Notation
It is denoted by the symbol using the Greek letter (a capital sigma) which means the
summation of.
The summation notation can be expressed as:

n
Xi = X1 + X2 + X3 + ... + Xn
i=1
and it can be read as the summation of X sub i where i starts from 1 to n.
Illustrative Example:
1. Write the expression in expanded form:
5
a. 2Xi = 2X1 + 2X2 + 2X3 + 2X4 + 2X5
i=1

= 2(X1 + X2 + X3 + X4 + X5)
4
b. (2Xi Yi) = (2X2 Y2) + (2X3 Y3) + (2X4 Y4)
i=2
526
To find the mean, median, and mode for grouped data, take note of the following:
1. Mean for Grouped Data

When the number of items in a set of data is too big, items are grouped for
convenience. To find the mean of grouped data using class marks, the following formula
can be used:
(fX)
Mean =
f
where: f is the frequency of each class
X is the class mark of each class
Directions: Calculate the mean of the mid-year test scores of students in Filipino.
Mid-year Test Scores of Students in Filipino
Score Frequency
41 45 1
36 40 8
31 35 8
26 30 14
21 25 7
16 20 2
Solutions:
Frequency Class Mark

Score fX
(f) (X)
41 45 1 43 43
36 40 8 38 304
31 35 8 33 264
26 30 14 28 392
21 25 7 23 161
16 20 2 18 36
i=5 f = 40 fX = 1,200
fX 1,200
Mean = = = 30
f 40
Therefore, the mean of the mid-year test is 30.
527
There is an alternative formula for computing the mean of grouped data and this makes
use of coded deviation
(fd)
Mean = A.M + f i
where: A.M. is the assumed mean;

f is the frequency of each class;
d is the coded deviation from A.M.; and
i is the class interval
Any class mark can be considered as the assumed mean. But it is convenient to choose
the class mark with the highest frequency to facilitate computation. The class chosen to
contain the A.M. has no deviation from itself and so 0 is assigned to it.
Subsequently, similar to a number line or Cartesian coordinate system, consecutive

positive integers are assigned to the classes above the A.M. going upward and negative inte-
gers to the classes below the A.M. going downward.
Let us find the mean of the given illustrative example about the mid-year test scores of
students in Filipino using coded deviation.

Score Frequency
41 45 1
36 40 8
31 35 8
26 30 14
21 25 7
16 20 2
Solutions:
Score f X d fd
41 45 1 43 3 3
36 40 8 38 2 16
31 35 8 33 1 8
26 30 14 28 0 0
21 25 7 23 -1 -7
16 20 2 18 -2 -4
i=5 f = 40 fd = 16
528
A.M. = 28 f = 40
fd =16 i=5
(fd)
Mean = A.M + f i
16
Mean = 28 + 40 5
16(5)
Mean = 28 +
40
80
Mean = 28 +
40
Mean = 28 + 2
Mean = 30
Therefore, the mean of the mid-year test scores is 30.
What have you observed? This implies that even if you use class marks or coded
deviation, the results are the same.
2. Median for Grouped Data

The median is the middle value in a set of quantities. It separates an ordered
set of data into two equal parts. Half of the quantities is located above the median
and the other half is found below it, whenever the quantities are arranged according to
magnitude (from highest to lowest.)
In computing for the median of grouped data, the following formula is used:
f
<cf
Median = lbmc + 2 i
fmc
where: lbmc is the lower boundary of the median class;
f is the frequency of each class;
<cf is the cumulative frequency of the lower class next to the median class;
fmc is the frequency of the median class; and
i is the class interval.
The median class is the class with the smallest cumulative frequency greater than or
f
equal to 2 . The computed median must be within the median class.
529
Direction: Calculate the median of the Mid-year Test Scores of students in Filipino.

Score Frequency
41 45 1
36 40 8
31 35 8
26 30 14
21 25 7
16 20 2
Solution:
Score Frequency lb <cf
41 45 1 40.5 40
36 40 8 35.5 39
31 35 8 30.5 31
26 30 14 25.5 23 Median Class
21 25 7 20.5 9
16 20 2 15.5 2
i=5 f = 40
f
<cf
Median = lbmc + 2 i
fmc
f 40
a. 2 = 2 = 20
The 20th score is contained in the class 26-30. This means that the median
falls within the class boundaries of 26-30. That is, 25.5-30.5
b. <cf = 9
c. fmc = 14
d. lbmc = 25.5
e. i = 5
Solution:
f
<cf
Median = lbmc + 2 i
fmc
40
9
Median = 25.5 + 2 5
14
530
20 9
Median = 25.5 + 5
14
11
Median = 25.5 + 5
14
55
Median = 25.5 +
14
Median = 25.5 + 3.93
Median = 29.43
Therefore, the median of the mid-year test scores is 29.43.
(Note: The median 29.43 falls within the class boundaries of 26-30 which is 25.5-30.5)
3. Mode for Grouped Data

The mode of grouped data can be approximated using the following formula:
D
Mode = lbmo + D +1D i
1 2
where: lbmo is the lower boundary of the modal class;

D1 is the difference between the frequencies of the modal class and the next
upper class;
D2 is the difference between the frequencies of the modal class and the next
lower class; and
i is the class interval.
The modal class is the class with the highest frequency.
Directions: Calculate the mode of the mid-year test scores of students in Filipino.
Score Frequency
41 45 1
36 40 8
31 35 8
26 30 14
21 25 7
16 20 2
531
Solution:
Score Frequency lb
41 45 1 40.5
36 40 8 35.5
31 35 8 30.5
26 30 14 25.5 Modal Class
21 25 7 20.5
16 20 2 15.5
Since class 26-30 has the highest frequency, therefore the modal class is 26-30.
lbmo = 25.5
D1 = 14 8 = 6
D2 = 14 7 = 7
i=5
D
Mode = 25.5 + D +1D i
1 2
6
Mode = 25.5 + 5
6+ 7
6
Mode = 25.5 + 5
13
30
Mode = 25.5 +
13
Mode = 25.5 + 2.31
Mode = 27.81
Therefore, the mode of the mid-year test scores is 27.81.
532

Height of Nursing Students in Our Lady of Piat College
Height (cm) Frequency <cf
170-174 8 50
165-169 10 42
160-164 11 32
155-159 11 21
150-154 10 10
(Note: The given data have two classes with the highest frequency; therefore, the first
formula in solving the mode is not applicable.)
Solutions:
(fX) 8075
a. Mean = = = 161.5
f 50
Mean = 161.5
b.
Median
f 50
2 = 2 = 25
The smallest cumulative frequency greater than 25 occurs in the class 160-
164. This means that the median falls within the class boundaries of 160-164.
That is, 159.5-164.5
<cf = 21
fmc = 11
lbmc = 159.5
i = 5
f
<cf
Median = lbmc + 2 i
fmc
25 21
Median = 159.5 + i
11
4
Median = 159.5 + 5
11
4(5)
Median = 159.5 +
11
20
Median = 159.5 +
11
Median = 159.5 + 1.82
Median = 161.32
533
Were you able to learn different formulas in solving the mean, median, and
mode of grouped data? In the next activity, try to apply those important notes in
getting the value of the mean, median, and mode of grouped data.
A ctivity 4
LETS SOLVE IT
Directions: Calculate the mean, median and mode of the weight of IV-2 students. Write
your complete solutions and answers on a sheet of paper.
Weight of IV-2 Students
Weight in kg Frequency
75 79 1
70 74 4
65 69 10
60 64 14
55 59 21
50 54 15
45 69 14
40 44 1
Mean = _______________________
Median
= _______________________
Mode = _______________________
ES TIO
1. How did you find the mean, median, and mode of the set of data?
?
QU
NS
2. What comparisons can you make about the three measures obtained?
3. What have you learned and realized while doing the activity?
534
Have you solved the mean, median, and mode easily with your partner? Were
you able to apply the notes on how to calculate the mean, median, and mode? Do
the next activity by yourself.
A ctivity 5
ONE MORE TRY
Directions: Calculate the mean, median, and mode of the given grouped data.
Pledges for the Survivors of Typhoon Pablo

Pledges in Pesos Frequency
9,000 9,999 4
8,000 8,999 12
7,000 7,999 13
6,000 6,999 15
5,000 5,999 19
4,000 4,999 30
3,000 3,999 21
2,000 2,999 41
1,000 1,999 31
0 999 14
ES TIO 1. What is the class interval of the given frequency distribution table?
2. How many pledges are there for the survivors of the typhoon?
?
QU
NS
3. Determine the following:

a. Class mark of the pledges having the highest number of donors
b. Median class
c. Modal class
4. How did you determine the mean, median, and the mode of the given
data set?
How about the lower boundary of the median class of the pledges?
5. What is the lower boundary of the median class of the pledges in
pesos?
6. What is the lower boundary of the modal class?
7. What is the modal score of the pledges in pesos?
535
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
536
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Reflect how you were able to develop a concept out of the activities you
have studied. The knowledge gained here will further help you understand
and answer the next activities. After doing the following activities, you should
be able to answer the following question: How are the measures of central
tendency for grouped data used in solving real-life problems and in making
decisions?
A ctivity 6
WE CAN DO IT
1. Below are the scores of 65 students in a Mathematics test.

Score f X d fd <cf
55 58 2
51 54 4
47 50 5
43 46 6
39 42 10
35 38 13
31 34 8
27 30 6
23 26 6
19 22 2
15 18 2
11 14 1
a. Complete the table by filling in the values of X (the class marks or midpoints),
d(deviation), fd, and <cf (cumulative frequency). Explain how you arrived at your
answers.
b. Find the mean, median, and the mode of the set of data.
c. How would you compare the mean, the median, and the mode of the set of data?
d. Which measure best represents the average of the set of data? Why?
2. Which is the most appropriate measure of central tendency for the set of data? Why?
3. Is it always necessary to group a set of data when finding its mean, median, or mode?
Why?
537
What new insights do you have about solving measures of central tendency
of grouped data? What do you realize after learning and doing different activities?
Lets extend your understanding. This time, apply what you have learned in
real life by doing the tasks in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
given a practical task which will demonstrate your understanding of solving measures of
central tendency of grouped data.
A ctivity 7
LETS APPLY IT.
Prepare some power saving measures. Gather data from your classmates or peers
which may include the following: electric bills, electric appliances, and the estimated time of
usage. Use the data and different statistical measures obtained for analysis and coming up
with power-saving measures.
Make use of this rubric in assessing your work or output.
RUBRIC ON GROUP TASK
4 3 2 1
Understanding I/we I/we I/we I/we
of Task demonstrated demonstrated demonstrated demonstrated
an in-depth substantial gaps in our minimal
understanding understanding understanding of understanding
of the content, of the content the content and of the content.
processes, and and task, even task.
demands of the though some
task. supporting
ideas or details
may have been
overlooked or
misunderstood.
538
Completion ofI/we fully I/we I/we completed I/we attempted
Task achieved the accomplished most of the task. to accomplish
purpose of the the task. the task, but
task, including with little or no
thoughtful, success.
insightful
interpretations
and conjectures.
Communication I/we I/we I/we I/we did not
of Findings communicated communicated communicated finish the
our ideas our findings our ideas and investigation
and findings effectively. findings. and/or were
effectively, not able to
raised communicate
interesting and our ideas very
provocative well.
questions, and
went beyond
what was
expected.
Group Process We used all We worked well We worked We really
of our time together most together some did not pull
productively. of the time. We of the time. together or
Everyone was usually listened Not everyone work very
involved and to each other contributed productively
contributed and used each equal efforts to as a group.
to the group other's ideas. the task. Not everyone
process and contributed
product. to the group
effort.
Problem Solving Problems did We worked We might have Some people
not deter us. We together to worked more did more work
were proactive overcome productively as than others.
and worked problems we a group. OR Nobody
together to solve encountered. worked very
problems. well in the
group.
Adopted from Intel Teach Elements (Assessment on 21st Century Classroom)
In this section, your tasks were to cite real-life situations and formulate and
solve problems involving measures of central tendency of grouped data.
How did you find the performance task? How did the task help you see the
real world application of measures of central tendency of grouped data?
539
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
540
This lesson was about measures of central tendency of grouped data. The lesson
provided you with opportunities to describe on how to solve the mean, median, and mode of
the given grouped data. Moreover, you were given the chance to apply the important notes
on how to solve the mean, median, and mode of the given grouped data and to demonstrate
your understanding of the lesson by doing a practical task.
541
Measures
Lesson 4 of Variability
of Grouped Data
What to
What to Know
Know
knowledge and skills may help you in understanding Measures of Variability of Grouped
Data. As you go through this lesson, think of the following important question: How are
the measures of variability of grouped data used in solving real-life problems and in
making decisions? To find out the answer, perform each activity. If you find any difficulty
in answering the exercises, seek the assistance of your teacher or peers or refer to the
modules you have studied earlier.
A ctivity 1
LETS TRY THIS!
Directions: Complete the frequency distribution table by finding the unknown values. Write
Scores of Grade 8 Avocado Students in the

4th Periodic Test in Mathematics
Score Frequency Class
fX (X x) (X x)2 f(X x)2
(f) Mark (X)
46 50 2
41 45 9
36 40 13
31 35 11
26 30 10
21 25 5
i= f = fX = f(X x)2 =

542
ES TIO 1. How did you determine the unknown values in the frequency
distribution table?
?
QU
NS 2. What is the class size?

3. What is the fX?
4. What is the value of the mean in the given distribution table?
5. What is the upper class boundary of the top interval? What about the
lower class boundary of the bottom interval?
6. What is the range?
7. What is the variance of the given distribution table?
8. How would you find the variance?
10. How would you solve for the standard deviation?
Were you able to complete the frequency distribution table? Were you able
to find the unknown values in the frequency distribution table? In the next activity,
you will calculate the range, variance, and standard deviation of a given data set.
A ctivity 2
GO FOR IT
Directions: The frequency distribution below shows the number of mistakes 50 students
made in factoring 20 quadratic equations. Use the table to answer the questions
that follow. Write your complete solutions and answers on a piece of paper.
Number of Mistakes Made by 50 Students

in Factoring 20 Quadratic Equations
Number of Mistakes Frequency X

18 20 2
15 17 5
12 14 6
9 11 10
68 15
35 8
02 4
543
ES TIO 1. What is the total frequency of the given data set?
2. Complete the frequency distribution table. What is fX?
?
QU
NS 3. How would you find the mean of the given data set?
4. What is the mean of the set of data?
5. What is the upper class boundary of the top interval?
6. What is the lower class boundary of the bottom interval?
8. Find the variance and standard deviation of the set of data.
9. How are the range, variance, and standard deviation used in
interpreting the set of data?
What to
What to Process
Process
How did you find the previous activity? Were you able to find the unknown
measures/values? Are you ready to perform the next activity? Will you be able to find the
mean, range, variance, and standard deviation of a set of data such as the grades or test
scores? Before proceeding to these activities, read first some important notes on how to
calculate the range, variance, and standard deviation of grouped data.
To find the range, variance, and standard deviation of grouped data, take note of the
following:
1. The Range of Grouped Data
The range is the simplest measure of variability. The range of a frequency

distribution is simply the difference between the upper class boundary of the top interval
and the lower class boundary of the bottom interval.
Upper Class Boundary Lower Class Boundary
Range = of the Highest Interval of the Lowest Interval
Solve for the range:
Scores in the Second Periodical Test of
I Faith in Mathematics I
Scores Frequency
46 50 1
41 45 10
36 40 10
31 35 16
26 30 9
21 25 4
544
Solutions:
Upper Class Limit of the Highest Interval = 50
Upper Class Boundary of the Highest Interval = 50 + 0.5 = 50.5

Lower Class Limit of the Lowest Interval = 21
Lower Class Boundary of the Lowest Interval = 21 0.5 = 20.5
Upper Class Boundary Lower Class Boundary
Range =
of the Highest Interval of the Lowest Interval
Range = 50.5 20.5
Range = 30
Therefore, the range of the given data set is 30.
2. The Variance of Grouped Data (2)
Variance is the mean of the square of the deviations from the mean of a frequency
distribution. For large quantities, the variance is computed using frequency distribution
with columns for the midpoint value, the product of the frequency and midpoint value
for each interval, the deviation and its square, and the product of the frequency and the
squared deviation.
To find variance of a grouped data, use the formula:
f(X x)2
2 = f 1
where; f = class frequency
X = class mark
x = class mean
f = total number of frequency
In calculating the variance, do the following steps:
1. Prepare a frequency distribution with appropriate class intervals and write the
corresponding frequency ( f ).
2. Get the midpoint (X) of each class interval in column 2.
3. Multiply frequency ( f ) and midpoint (X) of each class interval to get fX.
4. Add fX of each interval to get fX.
fX
5. Compute the mean using x = .
f
Calculate the deviation (X x ) by subtracting the mean from each midpoint.
6.
Square the deviation of each interval to get (X x )2.
7.
Multiply frequency ( f ) and (X x )2. Find the sum of each product to get f(x x)2.
8.
9.
Calculate the variance using the formula
f(X x)2
2 =
f 1
545
Find the variance of the given data set:
Scores in the Second Periodical Test

of I Faith in Mathematics I
Scores Frequency
46 50 1
41 45 10
36 40 10
31 35 16
26 30 9
21 25 4
Solutions:
Frequency Class
Scores fX (X x) (X x)2 f (X x)2
(f) Mark (X)
46 50 1 48 48 13.4 179.56 179.56
41 45 10 43 430 8.4 70.56 705.6
36 40 10 38 380 3.4 11.56 115.6
31 35 16 33 528 -1.6 2.56 40.96
26 30 9 28 252 -6.6 43.56 392.04
21 25 4 23 92 -11.6 134.56 538.24
i=5 f = 50 fX = 1,730 f(X x)2= 1,972
fX 1,730
Mean (x) = = 50 = 34.60
f
2 = f(X x)
2
f 1
1,972
2 = 50 1
1,972
2 = 49 = 40.2448 40.24
Therefore, the variance(2) is 40.24.
546
3. Standard Deviation (s)
The standard deviation is considered the best indicator of the degree of dispersion
among the measures of variability because it represents an average variability of the
distribution. Given the set of data, the smaller the range, the smaller the standard
deviation, the less spread is the distribution.
To get the value of the standard deviation (s), get the square root of the variance
( ):
2
s = 2
Refer to the previous example. Get the square root of the value of variance:
s = 2
s = 40.24
s = 6.34
Therefore, the standard deviation of the Scores in the Second

Periodical Test of I Faith in Mathematics I is 6.34.
Were you able to learn the formulas in solving the range, variance, and
standard deviation of grouped data? In the next activity, try to apply the important
notes in getting the value of the range, variance, and standard deviation of grouped
data.
A ctivity 3
LETS APPLY IT
Directions: Calculate the range, variance, and standard deviation of the Weekly Allowance
of Students in Binago School of Fisheries. Write your complete solutions and
answers on a sheet of paper.
Weekly Allowance of Students

in Binago School of Fisheries
Weekly Allowance
Frequency
(in Pesos)
500-549 2
450-499 3
400-449 1
Range = ____________________________
Variance (2) = ________________________
350-399 3
Standard Deviation (s) = _________________
300-349 4
250-299 14
200-249 12
150-199 21
100-149 10
547

ES TIO
1. How did you find the range, variance, and standard deviation?
?
QU
NS
2. What you can say about the value of range and variance?
3. What you can say about the standard deviation?
4. What have you learned and realized while doing the activity?
Were you able to solve the range, variance, and standard deviation easily
with your seatmate? Were you able to apply the notes on how to calculate the
range, variance, and standard deviation? Do the next activity by yourself.
A ctivity 4
CHALLENGE PART
Directions: Calculate the range, variance, and standard deviation of the given grouped
data.
Pledges for the Victims of Typhoon Pablo

Pledges in Pesos Frequency
9,000 9,999 4
8,000 8,999 12
7,000 7,999 13
6,000 6,999 15
5,000 5,999 19
4,000 4,999 30
3,000 3,999 21
2,000 2,999 41
1,000 1,999 31
0 999 14
ES TIO 1. What is the fX?
?
2. What is the value of the mean in the given distribution table?
QU
NS
3. What is the upper class boundary of the top interval? What about the
lower class boundary of the bottom interval?
5. What is the variance of the given distribution table?
6. How would you find the variance?
8. How would you solve for the standard deviation?
9. What have you learned from the given activity?
548
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
549
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Reflect on how you were able to develop a concept out of the activities
you have studied. The knowledge gained here will further help you understand
and answer the next activities. After doing the following activities, you should be
able to answer the following question: How are the measures of variability of
grouped data used in solving real-life problems and in making decisions?
A ctivity 5
LETS CHECK YOUR UNDERSTANDING
1. Below are the scores of 65 students in a Mathematics test
Score f X fX (X x) (X x)2 f (X x)2
55 58 2
51 54 4
47 50 5
43 46 6
39 42 10
35 38 13
31 34 8
27 30 6
23 26 6
19 22 2
15 18 2
11 14 1
a. Complete the table by filling in the values of X (the class marks or midpoints),
(X x), (X x)2, and f(X x)2. Explain how you arrived at your answer.
b. Find the range, variance and standard deviation of the set of data.
c. What you can say about the standard deviation?
d. Which measure is considered appropriate? Why?
2. Which among the range, variance, and standard deviation is the most appropriate
measure of variability? Why?
3. Is it always necessary to group a set of data when finding its range, variance, and
standard deviation? Why?
550
What new insights do you have about solving measures of variability of
grouped data? What do you realize after learning and doing different activities?

Now, you can extend your understanding by doing the tasks in the next
section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Demonstrate your understanding on measures of central tendency and measures

of variability through products that reflect meaningful and relevant problems/situations.
Create a scenario of the task in paragraph form incorporating GRASPS: Goal, Role,
Audience, Situation, Product/Performance, Standards.
G: Make a set of criteria for a scholarship grant based on monthly family

income and scholastic performance.
R: Barangay Social Worker
A: Local NGO
S: An NGO in the locality will grant scholarship to qualified and deserving
scholars
P: Criteria
S: Justification, Accuracy of data, Clarity of Presentation
551
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
552
This lesson was about measures of variability of grouped data. The lesson provided you
with opportunities to describe how to solve the range, variance and standard deviation of the
given grouped data. Moreover, you were given the chance to apply the given important notes
on how to solve the range, variance, and standard deviation of the given grouped data and to
demonstrate your understanding of the lesson by doing a practical task.
POST ASSESSMENT:
Take the test you took at the beginning of this module. Answer the questions in the Pre-
assessment.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Average Deviation or Mean Deviation - The dispersion of a set of data about the mean of
these data
Classes - categories for grouping data
Class Mark - the midpoint of a class
Class Width - the difference between the lower class boundary of the given class and the
lower boundary of the next higher class.
Data - a collection of facts or information from which conclusions may be drawn.
Frequency - the number of data values in a class
Frequency Distribution - a listing of classes and their frequency
Lower Class Boundary - the smallest value that can go in a class
Measure of Central Tendency - the score or value where all the other values in a distribution
tend to cluster
Measure of Variability - is a measure that describes how spread out or scattered a set of
data. It is also known as measure of dispersion or measure of spread.
Mean - sum of measures x divided by the number N of measures in a variable. It is symbol-

ized as x (read as x bar).
Median - the middle entry or term in a set of data arranged in numerical order (either increas-
ing or decreasing). If the number of term is even, the median is the mean of the two middle
scores.
553
Mode - the measure or value which occurs most frequently in a set of data. It is the value with
the greatest frequency
Range - the simplest measure of variability. It is the difference between the largest value and
the smallest value.
Relative Frequency - the ratio of the frequency of a class to the total number of pieces of data
Relative Frequency Distribution - a listing of classes and their relative frequencies
Standard Deviation - is the average amount by which individual data items in a set of data
differ from the arithmetric mean of all the data in the set. The standard deviation is the square-
root of the variance.
Upper Class Boundary - the largest value that can go in a class
Variance - is the square of the standard deviation.
REFERENCES AND WEBSITE LINKS USED IN THIS MODULE
Canonigo, A. (2012) Statistics, K 12 Facilitators Guide

Math IV, Project EASE
Amsco_Integrated Algebra, Statistics
Javier, S. CASIO FX 991ES PLUS Handbook
Pogoso, C., Montana, R, Introductory Statistics
http://www.picturesof.net/search_term_pages/meat.html
http://www.stockfresh.com/image/289009/cartoon-kids
http://www.fotosearch.com/photos-images/garment-factory.html
http://www.equinoxlab.com/
http://www.themall.ph/thumbs/images/2012/10/25/get1017125146/1_1351156470102514
5x217.JPG
http://media3.picsearch.com/is?tqgS6MH-ZoNLoIkQZGJu2Qhkc_04U6Jd88KruCCxpz4
http://cdn7.fotosearch.com/bthumb/CSP/CSP428/k4285733.jpg
554
INTRODUCTION
TO PROBABILITY

Do you think it is possible for you to determine the chance of occurrence of an
event?
Have you at a certain time asked yourself the following questions?
What are the possible What are my chances of getting the

routes that I can take correct answer in a True/False-type
in going to school? question? Multiple choice-type of
question?
Should I bring my umbrella

tomorrow?
How likely is it that I

will be called to recite
in our math class
today? Will I probably win in
this game?
How do you deal with these questions? Were you able to answer them with certainty?
In this module, you will learn more about the rich applications of the fundamental
counting principles and probability. Remember to search for the answer to the following
questions: How is the number of occurrences of an event determined? How does
knowledge of finding the likelihood of an event help you in your daily life?

In this module, you will examine the aforementioned questions when you study
the following lessons:
Lesson 1 Basic Concepts of Probability
Lesson 2 Probability of an Event: Experimental Probability and Theoretical Probability
Lesson 3 Organizing Outcomes of an Event and the Fundamental Counting Principles
Lesson 4 Problems Involving Probabilities of Events
555
Lesson 1 Define experiment, outcomes, sample space, and event.
Lesson 2 Explain and interpret the probability of an event; and
Differentiate between an experimental probability and a theoretical

probability.
Lesson 3 Count the number of occurrences of an outcome in an experiment and
organize them using a table, tree diagram, systematic listing, and the
fundamental counting principles.
Lesson 4 Solve simple problems involving probabilities of events.
Module Map
Module Map
Probability
Basic Concepts
Experimental Theoretical
Probability Probability
Counting
Techniques
Problems Involving
Probability of Simple
Events
556
III. PRE-ASSESSMENT
Find out how much you already know about this module. Write the letter that you
think best answers the question. Please answer all items. After taking this short test, you
will see your score. Take note of the items that you were not able to answer correctly
and find for the right answers as you go through this module.
1. Which of the following DOES NOT belong to the group?
a. Chance
b. Interpretation
c. Possibilities
d. Uncertainty
2. All the possible outcomes that can occur when a coin is tossed twice are listed in
the box. What is the probability of having a head?
1
a.
4
HH
TH b. 1
2 10
PISO
APOLINARIO
TT HT 3
MABINI
ANDRES
c.
BONIFACIO
4 2013
d. 1
3. The local weather forecaster said that there is a 20% chance of rain tomorrow.
What is the probability that it will not rain tomorrow?
a. 0.2 b. 0.8 c. 20 d. 80
4. A relative-frequency distribution for scores in a 5-item test is provided in the table

below.

Score 0 1 2 3 4 5
Relative
0.105 0.316 0.352 0.180 0.043 0.004
Frequency
Suppose that the passing score is 4, what is the probability that a randomly
selected student failed the quiz?
a. 0.047 b. 0.575 c. 0.773 d. 0.953
557
5. A spinner with three equal divisions was spinned 1 000 times. The following
information was recorded. What is the probability of the spinner
landing on RED?

Outcome Blue Red Yellow
Spins 448 267 285
a. 27% b. 29% c. 45% d. 73%
6. Suppose you toss two fair coins once, how many possible outcomes are there?
a. 1 b. 2 c. 4 d. 8
7. A balanced die is rolled. What is the probability of rolling a number that is not 3?
a. 0 or 0 b. 1 c. 5 d. 6 or 1
6 6 6 6
8. In a 500-ticket draw for an educational prize, Anas name was written on 41 tickets.
What is the probability that she would win?
a. 0.082 b. 0.122 c. 0.41 d. 0.82
9. Which of the following is TRUE?
a. Answering a true/false-type question has one possible outcome.

b. Flipping a coin thrice has 3 possible outcomes.
c. The probability of getting a head when a coin is tossed can be expressed
as 1 , 0.5 or 50%.
2
d. The probability of rolling 7 in a die is 1 .
7
10. The weather forecaster has announced that Region 1 has rainy (R), partly cloudy
(PR), and cloudy (C) weather. If the chance of having R is twice as the probability
of PR which is 2 , what is the correct table for probability?
7
a.
Outcome R PR C c. Outcome R PR C
Probability 1 4 2 Probability 4 2 1
7 7 7 7 7 7
Outcome R PR C Outcome R PR C
b. d.
Probability 1 2 4 Probability 4 1 2
7 7 7 7 7 7
11. A glass jar contains 40 red, green, blue, and yellow marbles. The probability of
drawing a single green marble at random is 1 . What does this mean?
5
558
a. There are 5 green marbles in the glass jar.
b. There are 8 green marbles in the glass jar.
c. There are more green marbles than the others.
d. There is only one green marble in the glass jar.
12. In a restaurant, you have a dinner choice of one main dish, one vegetable, and
one drink. The choices for main dish are pork and chicken meat. The vegetable
choices are broccoli and cabbage. The drink choices are juice and water. How
many choices are possible?
a. 8 b. 10 c. 12 d. 14
13. Arlene Joy got coins from her pocket which accidentally rolled on the floor. If there
were 8 possible outcomes, how many coins fell on the floor?
a. 3 b. 4 c. 8 d. 16
14. In a family of 3 children, what is the probability that the middle child is a boy?
a. 1 b. 1 c. 1 d. 1
8 4 3 2
15. Jun rolls two dice. The first die shows a 5. The second die rolls under his desk and
he cannot see it. Now, what is the probability that both dice show 5?
a. 1 b. 1 c. 9 d. 1
36 6 36 3
16. Mrs. Castro asked her students to do an activity. Afterwards, her students noticed that
the experimental probability of getting tails is 48%, while the mathematical/theoretical
probability is 50%. Being an attentive student, how would you explain this to your
classmates?
a. The experimental probability is wrong.

b. We should always rely on mathematical/theoretical probability.
c. It is normal for experimental probabilities to vary from the theoretical
probabilities but for a large number of trials, the two will be very close.
d. It is abnormal for the experimental probabilities to differ from the mathematical/
theoretical probabilities because the results must be the same.
17. You decided to order a pizza but you have to choose the type of crust and the
toppings. If there are only 6 possible combinations of ordering a pizza, from which
of the following should you choose from?
a. Crust: thin or deep dish

Topping: cheese or pepperoni
b. Crust: thin or deep dish
Topping: cheese, bacon or pepperoni
559
c. Crust: thin or deep dish
Topping: cheese, bacon, sausage or pepperoni
d. Crust: thin or deep dish
Topping: cheese, bacon, sausage, pepperoni or hotdog
18. There are four teams in a basketball tournament. Team A has 25% chance of winning.
Team B has the same chance as Team D which has 5% more than team A. Team C
has half the chance of winning as team B. Which of the following has the correct table
of probabilities for winning the tournament?
a.
Team A B C D
Probability 25% 30% 15% 30%
of winning
b. Team A B C D
of winning
Team
c. A B C D
of winning
d. Team A B C D
of winning
19. You tossed a five-peso coin five times and you got heads each time. You tossed again
and still a head turned up. Do you think the coin is BIASED? Why?
a. I think the coin is biased because it favored the heads.

b. I think the coin is biased because it is expected to turn up tail for the next
experiments.
c. I think the coin is not biased because both faces of the coin have equal chances
of turning up.
d. I think the coin is not biased because the probability of turning heads up is 3
4
while that of tails is only 1 .
4
20. Your best friend asked you to accompany him to a carnival to play games of chances.
According to him, his horoscope states that he is so lucky that day and he wants to try
his luck at the carnival. How will you convince him not to go to the carnival?
a. I will ask him to review very well his notes on probability so that he can apply
them to a real-life situation like this.
b. I will tell him that what is written in the horoscope is sometimes true and sometimes
false so he would rather not go to the carnival.
560
c. I will give him instances wherein he could see the real picture of having a very
little chance of winning so that he will not be wasting his money and time.
d. I will convince him not to go to the carnival this time because we have to finish
first our project in Probability. Anyway, there will be other times to go and enjoy
all the games there.
LEARNING GOALS AND TARGETS:

The learner demonstrates understanding of the basic concepts of probability.
The learner is able to use precisely counting techniques and probability in solving
simple problems related to different fields of endeavour.
561
Lesson 1 Basic Concepts
of Probability
What to
What to Know
Know
Begin this module by assessing what you have learned on the basic mathematical
concepts and your skills in performing the different mathematical operations which may
help you understand the lessons on Probability. As you go through this module, think
of the following essential questions: How is the number of occurrences of an event
determined? How does knowledge of finding the likelihood of an event help you in
your daily life? To find the answer, perform each activity to the best of what you can.
A ctivity 1
ANSWER ALL YOU CAN!
Relate each illustration below with your day-to-day activities. Fill in the blanks with the
correct words that would make the following sentences meaningful.
EMILIO
AGUINALDO
2013 EMILIO
AGUINALDO
2013
Impossible Unlikely Even Chance Likely Certain
4 in 5 Chance
1 in 6 Chance
1. Now is your ____________ to change for the better.

2. Im ___________ that you can do better than what is expected of you.
3. Given the chance to win in the Math contest, I prefer the ____________.
4. You and I have ___________ chance to succeed in life.
562
ES TIO 1. Are those
a. Howwords
did you familiar
come to upyou?
with your answer?
? 2. What How
particular topic comes
thatto your mind when you see for
thethe
words in
QU
NS
b. did you know the words are appropriate given
the illustration?
phrases?
3. What qualitative
c. When do we terms
usecan
the be used
word to express
less? probable
How about occurrences
more?
of events in life?
d. When does less really become more?
4. How else
e. Howcando youthe differentiate
possible occurrence
the meaningor likelihood of an
of less and event
less be
than?
expressed?
5. Based on the illustration, how do you describe probability?
You just tried describing probability which is the possibility of occurrences of events
in a mans life, which can be expressed as a fraction, a decimal, or a percent. As you move
on to the next activity, your prior knowledge on the basic concepts of probability and the
fundamental counting principles will be elicited.
A ctivity 2
BUDGET, MATTERS!
Use the illustration below to answer the following questions correctly.
1. How many shirts are there? _____

2. How many pairs of short pants are there?_____
3. How many pairs of long pants are there?_____
4. How many different outfits can you choose? _____
563
ES TIO 1. How else can you find the number of possible outcomes?
?
QU
NS
2. Did you find difficulty in choosing which to wear? Why?
3. Aside from comfort, what do you consider when you choose an
outfit?
Do the next activity to explore further on the basic concepts of probability and the
fundamental counting principles.
A ctivity 3 LETS ROLL IT!
Analyze the problem carefully. Fill in the table correctly and answer the questions
that follow.
You are holding a die. Your seatmate is holding another die. If both of you roll the
dice at the same time, how many outcomes are possible?
Sides of a 1 2 3 4 5 6
Die
1
2 3, 2 6, 2
3
4
5
6 5, 6
ES TIO 1. If you roll a die once, how many outcomes are possible? _______
?
QU
NS
2. What are those outcomes? _______

3. How do we call those outcomes? _______
4. Rolling two dice simultaneously, how many outcomes are
possible?_______
5. How did you find the answer? _______
564
Life has a lot of uncertainties. Oftentimes, our decisions in life are done under
conditions of uncertainty. These are the probabilities of life.
What you will learn in the next section will also enable you to do the final project
which will involve you as a game analyst invited by the barangay officials to inform or
educate the community folks to be mindful of their chances of losing and winning in the
local carnivals so that they will not end up wasting too much of their time and money.
You will start by doing the next activities.
What to
What to Process
Process
Your goal in this section is to learn and understand the key concepts of probability
and the fundamental counting principle by conducting several experiments which would
lead you to differentiate experimental probability from theoretical probability.
As you move on, please be guided by the following questions: How is the number of
occurrences of an event determined? How does knowledge of finding the
likelihood of an event help you in your daily life?
The branch of mathematics that deals with uncertainly is the theory of probability.
Probability is a measure or estimation of how likely it is that an event will occur.
Activities such as tossing or flipping a coin or picking a card from a standard deck of
cards without looking which could be repeated over and over again and which have well-
defined results are called experiments. The results are called outcomes.
Illustration:
When you roll a balanced die once, there are 6 possible outcomes which are 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 or 6. Getting an even number includes 3 outcomes; these are a 2, a 4, and a 6. Getting
an even number is called an event.
The set of all possible outcomes of an experiment is the sample space or probability
space; and each individual outcome is a sample point.
Experiment Sample Space Sample Point

Flipping two coins HH, HT, TH, TT HH
Rolling a die 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 5
Rolling a coin and a die H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6
T3
simultaneously T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6
565
13 Diamonds, 13 Hearts, 13
Drawing a card from a deck Spades, 13 Clubs (Ace, 2,
Queen of Hearts
of 52 cards 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, Jack,
Queen, King)
Queen is not a sample point because there are four Queens which are four different
sample points in a deck of cards.
Examples:
a. Getting a TTT when flipping a coin thrice
b. Choosing a Queen from a deck of cards (any of the 4 Queens)
c. Getting an odd number (1, 3, or 5) when rolling a die
A ctivity 4
WORDS COME EASY!
(Group Activity)

Join Jayar and his friends perform the same experiment. Record EMILIO
AGUINALDO
each outcome of your experiment. Then, fill in the blanks using the basic
concepts of probability to complete the paragraph.
EMILIO
AGUINALDO
EMILIO
AGUINALDO
2013
2013
Jayar and his friends decided to find the number of times three heads
HHH would come up when flipping three five-peso coins simultaneously. Every time Jayar
and his friends flip the fair coins is an ____________. The ____________ that they are look-
ing for is to come up with three heads: {HHH}. The ____________ is the set of all possible
outcomes: {HHH}, {HTH} {TTT}.
These are the results of their experiment. Complete the table.
Trial 1 Trial 2 Trial 3 Trial 4 Trial 5 Trial 6 Trial 7 Trial 8 Trial 9

Coin 1 H H T T H H T T T
Coin 2 T T T H T H T H T
Coin 3 T H T H T H H T T
Outcome HTT HTH
Is it
{HHH}? NO NO
YES or NO

In order to find all the ____________, they have to continue flipping the coins at least
30 times.
566
ES TIO 1. Were you able to complete the paragraph with the correct words?
2. Do the words come easy to you? Why?
?
QU
NS 3. After 9 trials, Jayar and his friends had 1 HHH event. Is the result of
the experiment close to what you have expected? What would have
they done to make it closer to what is expected?
4. In your group experiment, how many HHH events did you have? Is
the result of your experiment close to what is expected? Why?
5. What Jayar, his friends, and your group had performed uses
Experimental Probability. In your own understanding, how do you
define Experimental Probability?
A ctivity 5
WHAT IS THE PROBABILITY?
Probabilities can be solved theoretically in which each event is assumed to be equally
likely. Look carefully at the given set, then match column A with column B. Your answers will
help you understand the concept on the probability of an event.
Given: Set R = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12}
Column A Column B
The probability of having: a. 1 d. 6 or 1

_____ 1. a 10 12 12 2
_____ 2. a 13 b. 2 or 1 e. 6 or 1
_____ 3. odd numbers 12 6 12 12
_____ 4. even numbers c. 3 or 1 f. 0 or 0

_____ 5. an odd number divisible by 3 12 4 12
_____ 6. an even number divisible by 3
ES TIO 1. How many possible outcomes are there?
? 2. To have even numbers, how many favorable outcomes are there?

QU
NS
3. Considering your answers, how do you compute for the probability of

an event?
4. What formula can be used?
5. This activity uses Theoretical Probability. How do you define
Theoretical Probability?
To enrich your knowledge about the difference between Experimental Probability

and Theoretical Probability, you may visit these sites:
www.algebra-class.com/theoretical-probability.html
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/theoretical-probability.html
567
Probability of Events

The probability of an event, P (event), is a number from 0 to 1 which tells how likely the
event is to happen.
Take a closer look at the probability line below.

1 1 3
0 1
4 2 4
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
0% 25% 50% 75% 100%
Probability Rules
1.
The probability of any event is a number (either a fraction, a decimal, or a percent)
from 0 to 1.
Examples: The weather forecast shows a 70% rain.
P (rain) = 70%
2. If an event will never happen, then its probability is 0.

Example: When a single die is rolled, find the probability of getting an 8.
Since the sample space consists of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, it is impossible to get an 8.
Hence, P(8) = 0 = 0.
6
3. If an event is sure to happen, then the probability is 1.
Example: When a single die is rolled, what is the probability of getting a number
less than 7?
Since all the outcomes {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} are less than 7,
P (number less than 7) = 6 = 1
6
4. The sum of the probabilities of all the outcomes in the sample space is 1.
Example:
In rolling a fair die, each outcome in the sample space has a probability of 1 .

Hence, the sum of the probabilities of the outcomes is 1. 6

If a fair coin is flipped, P(T) = 1 and P(H) = 1
2 2
If you flipped the coin ten times and got the following outcomes: H, H, H, T, H, T, T, H,
H, what is the probability that the last outcome will also be a Head (H)? How did you arrive at
your answer?
568
Number of favorable outcomes
P (event) = Number of all possible outcomes
Examples:
1. What is the probability of getting a HEART from a deck of cards?
P (heart) = 13 = 1
52 4
2. There are 20 marbles in a container: 4 are red, 5 are blue and 11 are yellow. What
is the probability that a blue marble will be picked?
P (blue marble) = 5 = 1
20 4
Sometimes, getting an event affects the outcome of another event. Take a look at these
examples:
1. Five red candies are left in a bag of 40 different colored candies.
red
red
red
red
red
a. What is the probability that you will get a red candy?

How did you get your answer?
b. What are your chances of getting a red one when you pick again? Why?
How many candies are now in the bag?
How many red candies are there?
Getting the next candy without replacement is affected by the result of

the first attempt. Every time you get a piece of candy from a bag, the chance
of getting a red one will change. These are called dependent events.
2. Flipping a Coin
a. When you flip a coin, what is the probability of a

head landing up?
1
PISO
b. If you flip it again, what is the probability of getting a
tail?
JOSE RIZAL
2013 The two events do not affect each other. They are
independent events.
569
A ctivity 6
LETS TAKE AN ACTIVITY TOGETHER
(Group Activity)
Gather data on the number of typhoons that hit the country in the previous year. Using
the basic concepts of probability, come up with a report showing the estimated chances of a
typhoon hitting the country for each month.
The report should contain the following:
1. Representation of collected data.
2. Process of coming up with the estimated probabilities.
3. Explanation on what type of probabilities is generated in the task.
Rubric for the Written Group Report
4 3 2 1
Representation Is complete, Is complete and Is complete but Is incomplete
of Data and organized, organized disorganized and
Explanation and clear disorganized
Has correct and Has correct Has illustration Has no
Process/ appropriate illustration or or illustration
Computation illustration or solution with solution but has or solution
solution minor error errors
A ctivity 7
SEE MY PROB-ABILITY!
(Quiz)
Solve the following carefully, then write the correct answer on the space provided before
each number.
_____ 1. Earl Darenz is asked to choose a day from a week. What is the probability
of choosing a day which starts with S?
_____ 2. Choosing a month from a year, what is the probability of selecting a month
with 31 days?
570
_____ 3 . If a letter is chosen at random from the word PERSEVERANCE, what is the
probability that the letter chosen is E?
_____4. If one letter is chosen at random from the word TRUSTWORTHY, what is
the probability that the letter chosen is a consonant?
_____ 5. The sides of a cube are numbered 11 to 16. If Jan Renz rolled the cube
once, what is the probability of rolling a composite number?
_____ 6. A box contains 7 red balls, 5 orange balls, 4 yellow balls, 6 green balls, and
3 blue balls. What is the probability of drawing out an orange ball?
_____7. Of the 45 students in a class, 25 are boys. If a student is selected at random

for a field trip, what is the probability of selecting a girl?
_____ 8. Two fair coins are tossed simultaneously. What is the probability of showing
a tail (T) followed by a head (H)?
_____ 9. A spinner is divided equally and numbered as follows: 1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1, 1, 2,

4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2. What is the probability that the pointer will stop at an even
prime?
_____ 10. What is the probability of getting an 8 from a deck of 52 cards?
In the next activity, you will discover how useful the Fundamental Counting
Principle is. This principle is all about choices you can make given many possibilities.
571
A ctivity 8
COUNT AND ANSWER
Read the following situations carefully then answer all the questions that may lead you
to understand the fundamental counting principle.
1. On a Saturday morning, you washed most of your clothes and they are still wet.
Your friend invites you to attend his birthday party and you are left with only 2 pants
and 3 shirts. In how many different ways can you dress? Make a tree diagram to
show all the choices you can make.
ES TIO a. How many choices do you have for pants? _____________
?
QU
NS
b. How many choices for shirts are there? _____________

c. Draw a tree diagram to show the number of choices.
d. How many branches are there in the tree diagram? _____________
e. How are the branches of the tree diagram related to the number of
choices that you can make? Therefore, in how many different ways
can you dress? _____________
f. You have 2 choices for pants and 3 choices for shirts. What should
you do with the two tasks to get the answer easily and quickly?
______________
2. You go to a restaurant to buy some breakfast. The menu says, for food: pancakes,
waffles, or home fries; and for drinks: coffee, juice, hot chocolate, and tea. How
many different choices of food and drink do you have? Illustrate the choices by
using the table below.
Coffee Juice Hot chocolate Tea

Food/Drinks
(C) (J) (H) (T)
Pancake (P) PC PT
Waffles (W) WJ
Fries (F) FH
572
ES TIO a. How many choices for food are there?
?
QU
NS b. How many choices for drinks are there?

c. By counting, how many different choices of food and drink do you
have?
d. If the number of choices for food is f and d for drinks, what expression
helps you find the answer quickly and correctly?
Should you want to have more examples on using the Fundamental Counting
Principle to determine the sample space, watch the video in this site:
http://www.algebra-class.com/fundamental-counting-principle.html
To have more practice on finding the total possible outcomes, please visit this site:
http://www.aaaknow.com/sta-basic-cntg.htm
You can get the total number of possible outcomes by using a tree diagram or a table;
however, it is time consuming. You can use the Fundamental Counting Principle to easily
find the total outcomes by multiplying the outcomes for each individual event. Thus, if you
have f ways to do the first event and s ways to do the second event, then you can find the total
number of outcomes by multiplying f and s, that is (f)(s).
A ctivity 9
AN INDIVIDUAL REPORT
Choose any of the given tasks.
a. In a local hospital or clinic, do a research to determine the number of child births

for each month last year.
b. In your school, determine the number of absentees in a class per month during the
previous school year.
Use the basic concepts of probability to come up with a report showing the number of
occurrences.
The report should contain the following:
a. Representation of collected data
b. Process of coming up with the estimated probabilities
c. Explanation on what type of probabilities is used in the task
573
Rubric for the Written Individual Report
4 3 2 1
Representation It is complete, It is complete It is complete It is incomplete

of Data and organized and but and
Explanation and clear organized disorganized disorganized
Has correct and Has correct Has illustration

Process/ Has no
appropriate illustration or or
Computation illustration
illustration or solution with solution with
or solution
solution minor errors major errors
Great job! Im certain you are ready to move on
In this section, the discussion was about the basic concepts of probability, experimental
probability and theoretical probability, and the fundamental counting principles.
Go back to the previous section and compare your initial ideas with the discussion. How
much of your initial ideas are found in the discussion? Which ideas are different and need
revision?
Now that you know the important ideas about this topic, to the next section.
574
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ ____
_ _ _ _ _ _
s o f ar...__ ___________ _______
e arne d
_ _ ___ _ _ ____
t I h a v e l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ ____
______ __________ __________ _______
Wh a
_ _ _ _ _
_____
_ _ _ _ _ ______ __________ __________ _____
_ __ __ _
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________ ____
__ __ __ __
______ __________ __________ ___________
__ __ __
______ __________ __________ _________.
__ __ _
______ __________ ___________
__ __
______ __________
__
______
575
What to
What to Understand
Understand
Im certain that you are now ready to answer the different exercises to have a deeper
understanding of what you have learned. As you continue answering the next activities,
please search for the answer to the following questions:
How is the number of occurrences of an event determined? How

does knowledge of finding the likelihood of an event help you in making
decisions?
A ctivity 10
TOSS ME UP!
Read the problem carefully then answer the questions that follow.
Jann has a 5-peso coin in his pocket.
1. He tosses the coin twice.

EMILIO
a. How many possible outcomes are there? _____

AGUINALDO
2013
b. What are those possible outcomes? _____
c. What is the probability of both tails turning up? _____
2. He tosses the coin thrice.
a. How many possible outcomes are there? _____
b. What are those possible outcomes? _____
c. What is the probability of getting at least two heads? _____
576
A ctivity 11
LETS TOSS AND ENJOY
Play Snake and Ladder with a friend, then answer the questions below.
1. Roll the die once.

a. How many possible outcomes are there? _______
b. What are those outcomes? _______
c. If you want to move ahead 4 spaces on the board, then what is the probability
of rolling a 4? _______
d. If your friend wants to move ahead 8 spaces on the board, then what is the
probability of rolling an 8?_____ Why? _____
2. Roll the die twice.

a. How many possible outcomes are there? _______
b. What is the probability of having doubles? _______
c. What is the probability of getting a set of outcomes whose sum is greater
than 10? ______
A ctivity 12
MY FATHER SOLVED WITH ME
Parents love working with their children. At home, invite your father or
mother to toss an icosahedron which has congruent faces numbered 1 to
20 then read and answer together all the questions that follow.
Your father rolled the icosahedron once.

1. How many possible outcomes are there? _______
2. What are those possible outcomes? ______________________
3. What is the probability that the face which lands up is 25? _______
How will you interpret your answer? _______________________________
4. What is the probability that the face which lands up is an odd number? _______
5. What is the probability that the face which lands up is an even number divisible by
4? ______
6. What is the probability that the face which lands up is a positive number?
How did you arrive at your answer? Explain. ___________________________
577
A ctivity 13
IM DREAMING OF A NEW CELL PHONE
Analyze carefully the problem, then answer what is asked for.
One of your dreams is to have a new cell phone. You went to a cell phone dealer and
he gave you the following options. How many available cell phones could you choose from?
Brands:
L O V E

Colors: white (W), red (R), yellow (Y), gray (G), blue (B)
Models: X, K, P
ES TIO 1. How many brands are there? ____________

2. How many colors are available? ____________
?
QU
NS
3. How many models are given? ____________

4. Show the tree diagram which can be used to find the total number
of choices.
5. Based on the illustration, how many available cell phones could you
choose from? _________
6. By doing simple calculation, how will you get the total number of
choices?
Write the correct expression, then solve for the total choices.
Expression Solution
578
A ctivity 14
MATCH ME WITH THE PROBABILITY SCALE
Match the following with each letter on the probability line. Number 1 is done for you.
a b c d e
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
e 1. There are 7 days in a week.

____ 2. Out of 20 items, Jann got 15.
____ 3. In the Philippines, it will snow in March.
____ 4. If you flip a coin, it will come down heads.
____ 5. All months of the year have 28 days.
____ 6. It will be daylight in Manila at midnight.
____ 7. The day before Monday is Sunday.
____ 8. Of the 40 seedlings, only 10 survived.
____ 9. Next year, the month after November has 30 days.
____ 10. The third person to knock on the door will be a female.
____ 11. The chance that the last outcome in rolling a number cube is an even number.
In this section, the discussion was about problems involving probabilities of events
and fundamental counting principles.
made for yourself?
Now that you have a deeper understanding of the topic, you are ready to do the tasks
in the next section.
What to
What to Transfer
Transfer
Your goal in this section is to apply your learning to real life situations. You will be
given practical tasks which will demonstrate your understanding. After answering a lot of
exercises, Im sure youre now ready to give your insights on the following questions:

How is the number of occurrences of an event determined? How does
knowledge of finding the likelihood of an event help you in making decisions?
579
A ctivity 15 LETS HELP THEM ENJOY THEIR
VACATION IN BORA!
Read the following carefully then perform the task diligently.
The family plans for a three-day summer vacation in Boracay. The challenge is to present
variety of transportation packages within the allotted budget of the family. Create a variety of
transportation options for the family to choose from. Explain how you arrived at these options.
Rubric on the Group Work for Transportation Packages
4 3 2 1
Neat, readable,
correctly labeled
Neat, readable,
diagram, and
correctly labeled Readable
has a very
Visual Appeal diagram, and and correctly Messy
creative
has a creative labeled
design that
design
enhances the
diagram
Detailed but with
Computation of Correct and Detailed but with
major Not detailed
Charge detailed minor errors
errors
Based on sound
Based on Based on mathematical
Based on
Proposal correct equation mathematical reasoning
guessing
and computation computation without
computation
580
A ctivity 16
LETS CONVINCE THE COMMUNITY!
Situation:
The barangay officials want the community folks especially the students and youth to
be informed/educated about engaging in games of chance (those found in the local
carnivals). They invited a game analyst to convince the people in the community that they
should be mindful of their chances of losing and winning in these types of games so that
they will not end up wasting their time and money. The game analyst needs to present
and disseminate this during the barangay monthly meeting. The presentation should
meet the following standards: use of mathematical concepts, accuracy, organization,
and delivery. Please refer to the Performance Task rubrics.
Activity:
Consider yourself as the game analyst invited by the barangay officials to make an
educational presentation on how to convince the community folks of their chances in
losing and winning in those games in the local carnival. The presentation should meet
the set standards.
Goal:
The problem or challenge is to inform/educate the people, especially the students and
youth in a community about engaging in games of chance (those found in the local
carnivals and the like).

Role:
You are a game analyst invited by the barangay officials.
Audience:
The target audience are the barangay officials and the people in the community.
Situation:
You need to convince the people in the community that they should be mindful of their
chances of losing and winning in these types of games so that they would not end up
wasting too much of their time and money.
Product/Performance:
You need to create a presentation for the monthly barangay/community forum/meeting
in order to disseminate the information.
Standards:
The presentation should meet the following standards: use of mathematical concepts,
accuracy, organization, and delivery.
581
PERFORMANCE TASK RUBRICS
OUTSTANDING SATISFACTORY DEVELOPING BEGINNING
CRITERIA
4 3 2 1
USE OF It shows in-depth It shows It shows some It shows no
MATHEMATICAL understanding understanding understanding understanding
CONCEPTS of the required of required of the required of the problem,
mathematical mathematical mathematical perhaps only
knowledge in knowledge. The knowledge. re-copying the
probability. The solution addresses The solution given data.
solution completely most of the addresses The solution
addresses all mathematical some of the addresses
mathematical components mathematical none of the
components presented in the task. components mathematical
presented in the presented in the components
task. task. required to
solve the task.
ACCURACY 100% of the steps Almost all (85 - 89%) Most (75-84%) More than 75%
and solutions have of the steps and of the steps and of the steps
no mathematical solutions have no solutions have and solutions
errors. mathematical errors. no mathematical have
errors. mathematical
errors.
ORGANIZATION It uses an It uses a complete It uses an It has no
appropriate and strategy for solving inappropriate particular
complete strategy for the problem. It uses strategy or strategy for
solving the problem. creative diagrams application solving the
It uses clear and and/or tables. of strategy is problem. It
effective diagrams unclear. There does not show
and/or tables. is limited use use of diagrams
or misuse of nor tables.
diagrams and/or
tables.
DELIVERY There is a clear and There is a clear There is an There is no
effective explanation explanation incomplete explanation of
of the solution. All and appropriate explanation; it the solution.
steps are included use of accurate is not clearly The explanation
so the audience mathematical represented. cannot be
does not have to representation. There is understood, or
infer how the task There is effective some use of is unrelated to
was completed. use of mathematical appropriate the task. There
Mathematical terminology. mathematical is no use or
representation representation inappropriate
is actively used and terminology use of
as a means of for the task. mathematical
communicating representation
ideas, and precise and terminology
and appropriate for the task.
mathematical
terminology.
582
A ctivity 17
REFLECTION JOURNAL
In this module, you learned concepts which helped you accomplished the different
tasks successfully. This time, kindly answer this activity which would show how important this
module is in your day-to-day activities.
In this module, I learned about
I can use these concepts
These are very important because
I understand that
I can use the basic concepts of probability and the fundamental counting principles
in my day-to-day activities by
In this section, your task was to apply what you have learned in this module in real-
life situation.
How did you find the performance task? How did the task help you see the real world
use of the topic?
You have completed this lesson in probability. Before you go for a summer vacation,
you have to answer the following postassessment.
583
REFLECTION
_ _ _ _ _ ____
t h at _____ _ _ ____
o d _ _ _
v e u n dersto __________ _______
s on , I ha _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ______
l e s _ _ _ _ _ _
In this ___________ __________ ___________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
______ ___________ __________ __________ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
_ __ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___________ _ _ _ _
__ __ __ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ __ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
__ __
______ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_
______ ___.
__
______
584
This module was about the basic concepts of probability and the fundamental counting
principles. In this module, you were encouraged to discover by yourself the operational definition
of concepts, the difference between experimental probability and theoretical probability and
the importance of the fundamental counting principle. The knowledge and computational skills
gained in this module help you solve real-life problems involving probabilities of events which
would lead you to make better decisions in life and to perform practical tasks at your best.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED IN THIS MODULE:
Certain refers to an event which has to happen.
Chance refers to the likelihood that something will happen.
Dependent events are events in which one event affects the outcome of another.
Die is a small cube whose faces are marked with dots of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 in each of the 6
faces.
Equally likely events are events that have the same probability of occurring.
Experiment activities such as tossing or flipping a coin, rolling a die, or picking a card from
a standard deck of cards without looking which could be repeated over and over again and
which have well-defined results.
Experimental probability is the probability of an outcome of an event based on an experiment.

The more trials done in an experiment, the closer the experimental probability gets to the
theoretical probability.
Fundamental Counting Principle states that we can find the total number of ways different
events can occur by multiplying the number of ways each event can happen. If we have x
ways of doing event 1, y ways of doing event 2, and z ways of doing event 3, then we can
find the total number of ways of doing events1, 2, and 3 by getting the product of x, y, and z.
Icosahedron is a three-dimensional geometric figure made up of 20 sides or faces.
Impossible refers to an event which will never happen.
Independent events are two events which do not affect the outome of each other.
Outcomes are the results of experiments.
585
Probability is branch of mathematics that deals with uncertainty. It is a measure or estimation
of how likely it is that an event will occur.
Probability Rules:
1. The probability of any event is a number (either a fraction, a decimal, or a percent)

between and including 0 and 1.
2. If an event will never happen, then its probability is 0.
3. If an event is sure to happen, then the probability is 1.
4. The sum of the probabilities of all the outcomes in the sample space is 1.
Sample point is an individual outcome in the sample space.
Sample space or probability space in the set of all possible outcomes of an experiment.
Theoretical probability is the probability that a certain outcome will occur as determined
through reasoning or calculation.
Tree diagram is a device consisting of line segments emanating from a starting point and from
the outcome point. It is used to determine all possible outcomes of a probability experiment.
Uncertain refers to something which is likely to change, and therefore not reliable or stable.
Unlikely refers to something which is not likely to occur, not likely to be true or be believed.
REFERENCES AND WEBSITE LINKS USED IN THIS LESSON:
REFERENCES
Acelajado, Maxima J. ( 2008 ). Intermediate Algebra. pp.319 -326. Makati City, Philippines.
Diwa Learning Systems Inc.
Basilio, Faith B., Chua, Edna A., Jumawan, Maria T., Mangabat, Lawrence Oliver A., Mendo-
za, Mario B., Pacho, Elsie M., Tamoria, Ferdinand V., Villena, Eufrosina S.,Vizcarra, Florante
O., Yambao, Teresa M. (2003). Fundamental Statistics. Philippines. pp. 129 -133. Trinitas
Publishing Inc.
Garcia, George A. (2003). Fundamental Concepts and Methods in Statistics (Part 1). pp. 4 9.
Manila, Philippines. University of Sto. Tomas Publishing House.
586
Garcia, George A. (2004). Fundamental Concepts and Methods in Statistics (Part 2). pp. 8 43.
Manila, Philippines. University of Sto. Tomas Publishing House.
Glencoe/McGRAW-HILL. (1986). Mathematics Skills for Daily Living. pp. 397 - 411. United
States of America. Laidlaw Brothers, Publishers.
Price, Jack/ Rath, James N./ Leschensky, William.(1989). Pre- Algebra, A Problem Solving
Approach. pp. 420 430. Columbus, Ohio. Merrill Publishing Co.
WEBSITE LINKS
Copyright 2011MathsIsFun.com
www.mathsisfun.com/definitions/probability.html
These sites provide the picture of the probability line and definitions of the basic concepts.
http://intmath.com/counting-probability/2-basic-principles-counting.php
This site provides the picture for Activity 2, notes/tips on the basic counting principles.
http://whatis.techtarget.com/definition/probability
This site provides the definition of probability and other concepts.
www.algebra-clss.com/probability-problems.html
This site provides notes, pictures, and examples of independent/dependent events.
www.algebra-class.com/theoretical-probability.html
This site provides notes, pictures, and examples of Experimental Probability and Theoretical
Probability.
http://www.onlinemathlearning.com/theoretical-probability.html
This site provides a video lesson on experimental and theoretical probability.
www. Learningwave.com/chapters/probability/dependent_independent.html
This site provides examples of dependent and independent events,
http://www.mathworksheets4kids.com
This site provides exercises/ worksheets for the students to answer.
http://www.algebra-class.com/fundamental-counting-principle.html
This site provides the formula and examples of Fundamental Counting Principle.
www.virtualnerd.com/algebra-2/probability-statistics/fundamental-counting-principle-defini-
tion.php
This site provides a video lesson on Fundamental Counting Principle.
587
http://www.aaaknow.com/sta-basic-cntg.htm
This site provides notes on basic counting principles and practice exercises on finding the
total possible outcomes.
http:// mathgoodies.com/lessons/vol16/intro-probability.html
This site provides examples and items for the Pre/Post Assessment.
http:// www.mathwire.com/games/datagames.html
This site provides enrichment games on Probability.
This site provides the formula and examples of Fundamental Counting Principle.
www.virtualnerd.com/algebra-2/probability-statistics/fundamental-counting-principle-defini-
tion.php
This site provides a video lesson on Fundamental Counting Principle.
588

8 Math - LM U4M11 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8 Math - LM U4M11 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8 Math - LM U4M11 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8

This instructional material was collaboratively developed and

We value your feedback and recommendations.

Published by the Department of Education

Development Team of the Learners Module

Consultant: Maxima J. Acelajado, Ph.D.

Department of Education-Instructional Materials Council Secretariat (DepEd-

Module 1: Special Products and Factors .....................................................1

Lesson 1: Special Products ................................................................................ 8

Lesson 2: Factoring ........................................................................................... 27

Module 2: Rational Algebraic Expressions and

Lesson 1: Rational Algebraic Expressions ...................................................... 66

Lesson 2: Operations on Rational Algebraic Expressions ............................. 86

Module 3: Relations and Functions..........................................................113

Lesson 1: Rectangular Coordinate System ................................................... 119

Lesson 2: Representations of Relations and Functions ............................... 138

Lesson 3: Linear Function and Its Applications ............................................ 168

Module 4: Linear Inequalities in Two Variables.......................................209

Module 5: Systems of Linear Equations and

Lesson 1: Rational Algebraic Expressions .................................................... 253

Lesson 2: Solving Systems of Linear Equations in Two Variables .............. 268

Lesson 3: Graphical Solutions of Systems of Linear Inequalities

Module 6: Reasoning .................................................................................315

Lesson 1: If then Statements ....................................................................... 321

Lesson 2: Inductive and Deductive Reasoning ............................................. 329

Lesson 3: Writing Proofs ................................................................................ 333

Module 7: How Stable Am I? Triangle Congruence ................................343

Lesson 1: Definition of Congruent Triangles ................................................. 349

Module 8: Inequalities in Triangles ..........................................................373

Lesson 1: Inequalities in Triangles................................................................. 381

Module 9: Parallelism and Perpendicularity ............................................441

Module 10: Measures of Central Tendency and

Lesson 1: Measures of Central Tendency of Ungrouped Data ..................... 491

Lesson 2: Measures of Variability .................................................................. 507

Lesson 3: Measures of Central Tendency of Grouped Data ......................... 522

Module 11: Introduction to Probability ....................................................555

Lesson 1: Basic Concepts of Probability ....................................................... 562

I. INTRODUCTION AND FOCUS QUESTIONS

II. LESSONS AND COVERAGE

Lesson 1 Special Products

Special Products Factoring

Square of a Binomial Common Monomial Factor

Difference of Two Squares

Sum and Difference of Two Perfect Square Trinomial

a. (2x y) (3x y) = 6x2 5xy + y2

2. Which of the following DOES NOT belong to the group?

3. Which of the following gives a product of x2 + 5x + 4?

5. Find the missing terms: (x + ___)(3x + ___) = 3x2 + 27x + 24

a. W(2L 5) (3H + 4) = 520

7. One of the factors of 2a2 + 5a 12 is a + 4. What is the other factor?

a. (3x + 2) units c. (4x + 9) units

9. The side of a square is x cm long. The length of a rectangle is 5 cm longer than

a. Yes, because squaring a binomial always produces a binomial product.

a. Show a replica of a closet.

a. accuracy of measurements and wise utilization of materials

a. Feasibility and budget

a. Hire number of workers to spread fertilizers in the farmland.

a. Appropriateness and the resources used

IV. LEARNING GOALS AND TARGETS

5. Find the missing terms: (x + _)(3x + _) = 3x2 + 27x + 24